Supplement to tin- "^rtnters 1 Register," September vt, mdccclxxi. 
 
 "■*>. > % V V .. X > X V X V * X X V s X X X V S X S X V X X S X X V X .X X X \x X X .X X X N .N .X X S 
 
 t. 
 
 / 
 / 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 / 
 
 A 
 
 littimrarg 4 f uprjrajjlur 
 
 ITS ACCESSORY ARTS 
 
 BY 
 
 JOHN SOUTHWARD. 
 
 ^rescntcb to the Subscribers of the "^printers' T^cgistcr. 
 
 y 
 i 
 / 
 / 
 / 
 
 AND / 
 
 I 
 '/ 
 
 /• - 
 I 
 / 
 / 
 
 i 
 
 7 ': 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 /; 
 
 r 
 
 / 
 
 /. 
 
 / 
 / 
 
 / 
 i 
 
 1870-1871. 
 
 n 
 
 
 V 
 
 / 
 
 gonfcon : 
 
 JOSEPH M. POWELL, 
 "PRINTERS' REGISTER" OFFICE, 3, BOUVERIE STREET, E.( . 
 
 / 
 
 PRINTED 9Y DANIEL & CO., ST. LEONARDS-ON-SEA j
 
 2? 
 
 113 
 
 %\%\ of JutjiOUtlCS. 
 
 Among the various works on the Art of Printing, consulted in the compilation ol this Dictionary, 
 
 may be named the following : — 
 
 Abridgments of Specifications relating to Printing. 
 
 Andrews's History of British Journalism. 
 
 Annales de la Typographic Francaise et etrangere. 
 
 Annales de ITmprimerie. 
 
 Annals of Our Time. 
 
 Annuaire de la Librairie et de ITmprimerie. 
 
 Cabbage's Economy of Machinery and Manufactures. 
 
 Bullhorn's Grammatography. 
 
 Beadnell's Guide to Typography. 
 
 Biographical Memoirs of William (Jed. 
 
 Buckingham's Personal Memoirs and Recollections of Editorial Life. 
 
 Buckingham's Specimens of Newspaper Literature. 
 
 Burton's Book Hunter. 
 
 Camus's Histoire et procede*s du Polytypage et du Stereotypage- 
 
 Chambers's Encyclopaedia. Printing — vol. vii, p. 764. Type — vol. ix, 
 
 p. 606. Stereotyping — vol. ix, p. 117. Newspapers — vol. vi, p. 748. 
 Chevallier's l'Origine de 1' Imprimerie de Paris. 
 Cowie's Printer's Pocket Book and Manual. 
 Crapelet's De la profession d'lmprimeur. 
 Crapelet's Des Progres de ITmprimerie en France. 
 Crapelet's Etudes Pratiques et Litteraires sur la Typographic. 
 Crisp's Printer's Business Guide. 
 De Vinne's Printers' Price List. 
 Dibdin's Bibliomania. 
 
 Dictionnaire Encyclopedique. Typographic p. 1407. 
 Dictionnaire Universel. Impression —p. 844. Imprimerie - p. S45. 
 
 Imprimeur — 846. Prcsse — p. 134S. Lettre — p. 926. Typographic — 
 
 p. 1684. Presse — p. 1348. Journaux — p. 8S7. Munileur— p. 1068. 
 Dudin's I'Art du Relieur doreur de Livres. 
 Encyclopaedia Britannica. Printing — vol. xviii. p. 537. 
 Encyclopaedia Metropolitana. Art. Typography. 
 Encyclopedic Methodique. L" Imprimerie— v. iii, p. 537. Fundcrie— v. i, 
 
 P- 377- Papier — v. v, p. 463. 
 English Cyclopaedia. Printing— vol. v, p. 744. 
 Fournier's Caracteres de ITmprimerie. 
 Fournier's Manuel Typographique. 
 
 Great Exhibition of 1851 at London. Reports of Junes. 
 Handbook of Graphotype. 
 Hansard's Biographical Memoir. 
 Hansard's Typographia. 
 Haydn's Dictionary of Dates. 
 History of Ink. 
 
 Houghton's Printers' Practical Everyday Book. 
 Humphrey's History of the Art of Printing. 
 Hunt's Fourth Estate. 
 
 International Exhibition of 1S62. Reports 1 if Juries, London, 1863. 
 Jai l.son & Chatto's Treatise on Wood Engraving. 
 Johnson's Introduction to Logography. 
 
 Johnson's Typographia. 
 
 Knight's Caxton. 
 
 Knight's Knowledge is Powei 
 
 knight's Old Printer and the Modern Pres> 
 
 London Encyclopedia. Printing— vol. xviii. p , 
 
 Mi' {Cellar's American Printer. 
 
 Marahren's Handbuch der Typographic 
 
 Maverick's Henry J. Raymund and the New York IV---. 
 
 McCreery's Press, a Poem. 
 
 Morgan's Dictionary of Terms u.sed in Printing. 
 
 Moxon's Mechanick Exercis 
 
 Munsell's History and Chronology of Paper and Paper Making 
 
 National Cyclopedia. Printing— vol. ix, p. 847. Printing Press— vol. iv. 
 
 p. 849. Printing Machine— vol. ix, p. 851. 
 New American Cyclopaedia. Printing — vol. xiii, p. 585. Type Founding 
 
 \u|. xv, p. 6SS. Newspapers — vol. xii, 306. 
 Newspaper Press Directory. 
 Nicholson's Manual of the Art of Bookbinding. 
 Noveau Manuel complet de I'lmprimeur Lithographe. 
 Paper Mills Directory. 
 
 Penny Cyclopaedia. Printing — vol. xix, p. 14. 
 Kenouard's Annales de I'lmprimerie des Aides. 
 Revista BibHographica, Madrid. 
 Ruse t't Str.iker's Priming and its 
 Savage's Account of the London Daily Newspaper*. 
 Savage's Dictionary of the Art of Printing. 
 Specimen des L'aractere- Typographiqui mens ■>( < >ld Printing 
 
 Types in the possession of John Enschede* i ■.11..,. . to, 1789. 
 
 Specimen of the various sorts of Printing Types 1 diversity 
 
 1 I Ixford, at the Clarendon Printing House, 1786. 
 Speirs's Electrotyper's Manual. 
 Stower's Printer's Grammar. 
 Stower*s Printer's Price Book. 
 The Stationer's Handbook. 
 
 Timperley's Encyclopaedia of Literary and Typographical Anecdote 
 Timperlcy's Printer's Manual. 
 Tobitt's Combination Type. 
 Triibner's Guide to American Literature. 
 Typographia Espaiiola. 
 Versuch den Ursprung der Spielkartcn, die F.infuhrung des I.einenpapieres, 
 
 und den Anfang des Holzsahneidekunst in Europa cucrfo'i 
 Vita del Cavalier Giambattista Bodoni, Tipografo, 
 Vocabulaire des Termcs usue's dans ITmprimerie. 
 Walter's Address to the Public, showing the great Improvement he has 
 
 made in the An < <f Printing I Vrrangements. 
 
 Walter's Miscellanies in Pi \ -■.-, intended as a Specimen of the 
 
 Types at the Logographic Printing Office. 
 Wilson's Treatise on English Punctuation. 
 
 The Compiler desires to acknowledge the great assistance rendered to hint by Mr. Sweet 3 of "The Tinas" Office : Mr, J. />. Citrsom . 
 
 Mr. P. M. Shanks ; and Mr. Joseph M. Powell. 
 
 1104634
 
 The Printers' Begiater. 
 
 Supplement, Jan. 6, 1870. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY 
 
 AND ITS ACCESSORY ARTS. 
 
 A List of the Authorities consulted in the compilation of thin Dictionary will be given in full when the work is completed. 
 
 THE first letter of the English Alphabet. Signature a 
 is the first sheet of every work, and is called the Title- 
 sheet ; but the letter itself is never inserted at foot, as 
 52*9 the title-page sufficiently indicates how the sheet is 
 to be collated and folded ; b being the first signature com- 
 mencing the body of a work. In Parliamentary Bills, Chancery 
 Bills, and similar work, however, it is usual and necessary to 
 insert the letter. (See Signatures.) 
 
 Abbreviations. — In the primitive times of Printing most 
 Latin words were abbreviated, in order to save paper, com- 
 position, and presswork. As reading, however, became more 
 general, they were by degrees abolished, except in legal works. 
 The present practice in regard to abbreviations, — as in side- 
 notes, &c, — is not to abridge a word at the end of a syllable, 
 but always to annex one or more letters of the next syllable ; 
 and always to carry the reading part so far that it cannot be 
 mistaken for any other word. A vast number of abbreviations 
 are in use at present, such as Ps. for Psalms ; Jan. for January ; 
 A.li. for Artxwm Baccalaureus (Bachelor of Arts); L.S. for locus 
 sif/il/i; Jitr. for Jurenalis. &c A complete list of these will lie 
 found in "The Guide to Typography," by Henry Beadnell, 1859, 
 Vol. I., p. 199, et seq. 
 
 Accents. — " Certain marks over vowels to direct the modula- 
 tion of the voice. In the English language they are chiefly used 
 in Spelling-books or Dictionaries, to mark the syllable's, and 
 where to lay particular stress in pronunciation." — Murray. 
 Those letters which are called by printers Accented, are the 
 five vowels, marked as follows: — 
 
 Acute . . 
 Grave . . 
 Circumflex 
 
 Long . 
 Short . 
 Diaeresis 
 
 a 
 
 e 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 a 
 
 e 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 ii 
 
 a 
 
 e 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 There is no pure English word that requires an accent. Some 
 reckon the French c and the Spanish n, and other letters used in 
 foreign languages, as accented letters. The grave accent is, in 
 English, sometimes used in poetry to prevent the omission of 
 sounding a syllable, and the metre thereby being impaired. 
 Similarly, the diaeresis is sometimes employed in words like 
 Cooperate, instead of the hyphen ; but this plan is not adopted 
 by printers of the present day. 
 
 Account-line. — This is a term used in a Compositor's bill 
 for the week : it is supposed to represent the value of certain 
 portions of the work really executed, but which from being in 
 an unfinished state cannot be entered with a specific charge : it 
 is therefore the custom to charge " on account " somewhere about 
 the estimated value of the work done, and which is deducted, 
 week after week, until the general bill is made out, when the 
 account is balanced. When travelling on this "line,'' horseflesh 
 is very often eaten. — Strtiker. 
 
 Acts of Parliament relating to Printers.— To give 
 anything like an abstract of the immense number of Acts of 
 Parliament which relate to printers would be quite impossible 
 in our limited space. The most important at present in force 
 are, the Libel Acts, the Factory Acts, the Copyright Acts, and the 
 recent Newspaper, Pamphlets, &c Act, which will be found in 
 alphabetical order. There are various restrictions on the sale and 
 use of Printing Presses, which have been imposed in consequence 
 of the extended and secret influence often exercised by them : 
 and the law of treason and libel is intimately associated with 
 
 the Press. The most important of these will lie found under the 
 head of "Newspapers." Printers must keep a copy of every 
 paper they print for hire or rewind, and must endorse thereon 
 the name of the person so employing them, tin ialty 
 
 of ,£50. Every printer who shall print a book or paper without 
 having the printer's name and address on the first or last leaf 
 thereof, shall, by the Act 2 & 3 Vic, s. 2, fi irfeit £5 E ir e^ ery a ipy 
 printed, but the penalty may be mitigated to £5. It follows 
 from the enactments, that a printer cannot recover bis expenses 
 for labour and materials in printing a work unless he has com- 
 plied with the statutory requirements. With regard to the print- 
 ing trade, many customs prevail which do not differ in point of 
 law from the customs affecting other trades, it being the rule 
 that customs of a peculiar trade are binding unless S] ecially 
 excluded. The latest Act is that of 32 and 33 Victoria, cap. 14. 
 by which persons are liable to a penalty of i'i Is. if they use 
 the Royal Arms, or any other armorial bearings, crests, or en- 
 signs — by whatever name the same shall be called, — on their 
 paper bags, wrappers, or bills. [Printers are therefore ad\ised to 
 caution their customers against using any of the above devices.] 
 
 Admiration (Note of). — This is otherwise called the Sign 
 of Exclamation, and is formed thus ( ! ). It is inserted wherever 
 surprise, astonishment, rapture, and similar sudden emotion- of 
 the mind are expressed. It is also placed after the ) articles. Oh ■' 
 ah.' alas.' — though the last is not always of that force to require 
 it, and may be softened by a comma. 
 
 Advertisements. — The Parliamentary newspaper, the Mer- 
 itiriiix Politicus, for January, 1652, contains an advertisement, 
 probably the first published in England. The Advertisement 
 Duty was repealed in 1853, by 16 & 17 Vic, c 63. An advertise- 
 ment is defined as "the public notification of a tact." A: ? early 
 as 1710 Addison devoted a number (224) of the Tatier to a review 
 of the current advertisements of his time, their objects, their 
 tendency, the ad captandum style in which they were drawn up 
 and printed, "with little cuts and figures." with which a pro- 
 vincial editor would scarcely disfigure his journal at present. 
 " As we read," says a recent periodical writer, "in the old musty 
 files of papers, those naive announcements, the very hum of 
 bygone generations seems to rise to the ear. The chapman ex- 
 hibits his quaint wares, the mountebank capers again npon the 
 stage, we have the living portrait of the highwayman flying 
 from justice, we see the old china auction thronged with ladies 
 of quality with their attendant negro hoys, or those 'by inch 
 of candle-light' forming many a Schalken-like picture *<t' light 
 and shade: or, later still we have Hogarthian sketches of the 
 young bloods who swelled of old along Pall .Mall. We trace the 
 moving panorama of men and manners up to otu' own demon- 
 strative but more earnest times, and these cabinet pictures are 
 the very daguerreotypes cast by the age which they exhibit. 
 not done tor effect, but faithful reflections of those insignificant 
 items of life and things, too small, it would seem, for the g 
 ralizing eye of the historian, however necessary to clothe and 
 fill the dry bones of his history." A very interesting article on 
 Advertising, Advertisers, and Advertising Mediums, \\ ill be found 
 in -The New American Cyclopaedia" (New York: Appleton and 
 Co.), 1858, Vol. 1.. p. 142. 
 
 Albion. — The name of a Btyle of Type in vogue several years 
 ago. The following is a specimen : — 
 
 METROPOLITAN ASSURANCE 
 It was superseded by the Clarendon and Antique laces; but it 
 has been again lately introduced with great effect.
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 Albion Press. -An Iron Press invented bj tfi R. C. ( 
 
 I easy in working. It is 
 much esteemed for it- extreme lightness; it runs very easily, the 
 pull is -hurt, the power great, and the means whereby it is ob- 
 • there is litl the Press g 
 
 ler. ii i- very easily taken down for cleaning, a 
 :. The i»'v. g an inclined piece oi 
 
 iiar: in bo doing the platen is forced d 
 and the impression ta it the moment the piet 
 
 lught tut" a verti i i return of the bar, the 
 
 platen is raised by a spiral Bpring flxi 
 
 Aldino. The name of a Btyle oi tj pe, of which the following 
 i- a specimen 
 
 DIl TIONARY OE TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 Aldus. This celebrated printer, otherwise known as Aldus 
 Man i i native ol Rome. He i ifflceal 
 
 \ ice in 1496, and introduced a neater cut oi Roman types, and 
 it is to him, or rather to the engraver, Prance 
 thai we o i • called bj ( 
 
 to ii- as Italics, which Udus used fori 
 
 ales de I Imprimerie d ! " par A. Renouard. I 
 1834.) Amongsl other imp in printiu inent 
 
 man corrected and en m, by giving a better 
 
 i imma, addiu o the 
 
 re proper pi 
 
 Algebraic Marks. A knowledge of the proper meaning of 
 icquired by the study oi mathemal ii 
 ■\ ing statement of the names of them will be u leful to read- 
 - and others who are required to pronounce them :— 
 
 ■ by ' multiplication) 
 : to i in proportion) 
 
 ' mini 
 
 ■+- plin :,-,, '. '. to is 
 
 4 division — minus arallel 
 
 . ■ . ii = equal \ root 
 
 Anastatic Printing (from An niscitation, raising 
 
 up again). This process forproi copies oi manuscript, or 
 
 printed documents, or engravings, thai can with difficulty be 
 
 rom the originals, was invented by M. Baldermus, a1 
 
 i irtaboul 1841. It was soon after made public, and Fan 
 
 explained - a1 the Royal Lnstituti Vpril 25, L845. 
 
 It has since transpired that a similar process bad bi en employed 
 in E me time before M. Baldermus'a invention was 
 
 made known. The invention - red and extended by 
 
 Strickland and Delamotte in 1848. The proa lusto 
 
 lithography, but a zinc plate is employed instead of a stone. A 
 prints l page, an engraving, or a l.ank note may be exactly c 
 by U printed paper with dilute pnos- 
 
 u downwards on l clean ueet of zinc, ana pul 
 it into a pi i hort time. The acid of the imprinted parts 
 
 etches tbi . while the printed pari also sets off 
 
 on the zinc and thus produces i copy of the printing, 
 
 the plah acid solution of gum, and it will be 
 
 ready for use. I may now be treated as the stone iu 
 
 lithographic printing aped and then rolled. The affinity 
 
 of the ink to thi e Iready "set off" on the plate, and the 
 
 repulsion of the other parts of the plate, cause the lines of the 
 
 <lcvio.> to take the ink. but tl thi main clean; the 
 
 printing then follows. See "A Briei Description of the An of 
 ing, with illustrative specimens and full direc- 
 tions." By S. II. Cowell. Ipswich: I - 
 
 Annals of Printing. The following an 
 princijjal • connection with the History oi Printing: — 
 
 1 151.— Printing introduced at Harlem by John Gutenberg. 
 
 1 155.— The Mazarin Bible i.- ; ' lutenberg. 
 
 l -t".7 Fa isl and Schceffer print the Psalter. 
 
 1462. — Count Adolphus i i N Mentz, and compels the 
 
 printers to remove to other town-, whereby the art is 
 
 diffu 
 1465.— Printing introduced , in Italy. The firsl 
 
 printed here contained the tireek characfa 
 
 quotations. 
 1 166. — Sweynheym and Pannartz establish the first press at Rome. 
 1407. — They introduce Roman types. 
 
 1468. ID il i ii! i i have been printed at. Oxford in this year, 
 but the Librai tr il the British Museum has satisfac- 
 torily proved it to be erroneous. 
 
 1469.— II tti i i i i tabli tied al Paris, being the second 
 in Prance, the first being introduced into Tours two 
 • r- earlier. 
 
 1470. — "Signatures"are first employed by Antonio Zarot,at Milan- 
 
 1471. — Caxton, who sets up the first press in England, at West- 
 minster, prints the "Game of Chesse," which was finished 
 in 1474. 
 
 1475. — Printing is introduced into Spain, at Barcelona. 
 
 in i ! printed Almanack was composed by Regiomon- 
 
 tanus, who received a munificent donation from the King 
 
 oi Hungary for his trouble. 
 147".— The first work wholly in Greek type is printed at Milan. 
 
 1488. — The firsl bible in Hebrew characters is printed at Sorocino 
 
 in Italy. 
 1 195.— The art of printing Music is introduced into England. 
 1500. — Aldus Manutius invents Italic type about this year. 
 
 The in i paten! of King's Printer was granted to Richard 
 
 Pin- hi by Henry VII. He was afterwards succeeded 
 
 bj Thomas Berthelet. 
 1501.— Printing i introduced into Scotland. 
 1515. — Ottavio de Petrucci invents Music Printing from .Metal 
 
 Types. 
 1526. — The New Testament, being the first English Bible, is 
 
 printed at Antwerp. 
 
 1539. — The Great, or Cromwell's Bible, the first printed by au- 
 thority in England. 
 
 1540. — The "Byrth of Mankynd," the earliest English work in 
 i lopper-plate Printing is employed, is printed. 
 
 1543.— The "Imprimerie Royale " is established at Paris by 
 Francis I. 
 
 1551. — Humphrey Powell introduces printing into Ireland. 
 
 1560.— A Russian merchant introduced the art into that country, 
 but it was some time before any progress was made. 
 
 1G37. — By order of the Star-Chamber the businesses of Printer 
 and Type Founder are ordered to be kept distinct, 
 and only four Type Founders are peimitted in the 
 Kingdom. 
 
 1639. — Printing first performed in the United States of America 
 by the Rev. Jesse Glover. It had previously been intro- 
 duce! bj .Stephen Have, from London, in Massachusetts, 
 but do work had been performed. 
 
 1720. — Type-founding is first practised with success in England 
 by William Caslon. 
 
 1725. — Stereotype-printing is invented by Ged, of Edinburgh. 
 
 1726. — Printini; is introduced into Turkey. 
 
 1776. — The printing of Maps with Moveable Types is invented by 
 Conrad Sweynheym. 
 
 1778. — Henry Johnson invents Logographic Printing. 
 
 1780. — Tilloch invents an improved system of Stereotype. 
 
 1784. — Valentine Haiiy invents Embossed Typography and ap- 
 plies it to Printing Books for the Blind. 
 
 17S5. — The Daily Universal Register (afterwards The Times) is 
 brought out, January 13, as a specimen of Logographic 
 Printing. 
 
 1790. — W. Nicholson Patents a Self-acting Printing Machine. 
 
 1 -' 1 1. — Lord Staniiope invents the Stanhope Press. 
 
 l-n|, K nie- directs his attention towards the improvement of 
 the Printing Press. 
 
 1811. — The sheet n of the "Annual Register" for 1810, printed in 
 April, is the first work printed by a machine. 
 
 1814. — The Times is the first Steam-printed Newspaper. Konig's 
 machine being the first apparatus employed, Nov. 28th. 
 
 1815. — Composition Palls for Inking Type are invented by Ben- 
 jamin Franklin. 
 Cowper commences his inventions connected with the 
 Press, and introduces the Inking Roller. 
 
 1817. — R. Ackerman introduces Lithographic Printing into Eng- 
 land.
 
 The Printers* Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 1818. — George (Tinner, of Philadelphia, patents the Columbian 
 Press in London. 
 Applegath takes out a Patent for Improvements in Cylin- 
 drical Printing Machines. 
 
 1827. — Gall, of Edinburgh, invents a system of Printing for the 
 Blind. 
 
 1840. — Anastatic Printing introduced. 
 
 1852. — Andrew Worsing, of Vienna, invents Nature Printing. 
 
 1858. — Hoe's American Printing Machine is introduced into Eng- 
 
 land. 
 
 1862.- 
 
 -G Tuner's Folding, Stitching, and Glazing Machine intro- 
 duced into England. 
 1863. — Bonelli's Printing Telegraph invented. 
 
 The Printers' Reyister (proprietor, Mr. Jos. M. Powell) is 
 established. 
 1869. — Marinoni's French Printing Machines are introduced into 
 England. 
 Bullock's American Printing Machine is introduced into 
 England, and used for the first time in printing the 
 London Daily Telegraph in December. 
 
 Antique. — The name of a fancy type, of which the following 
 is a specimen : — 
 
 ANTIQUITIES IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM. 
 
 A.P. — A technical abbreviation for Author's Proof. 
 
 Apostrophe. — The apostrophe ( ' ) generally denotes the pos- 
 sessive case of the noun-substantive; or, the omission of one or 
 more letters in a word; and is doubled at the end of quotations 
 which are commenced by inverted commas. 
 
 Apprentice. — An apprentice is, a person described in law 
 books as a species of servant, and so called from the French verb 
 apprendre, to learn, because he is bound by indenture to serve a 
 master for a certain term, receiving in return for his services in- 
 struction in his master's trade, profession, or art ; the master, on 
 the other hand, contracting to instruct the apprentice and, ac- 
 cording to the nature of the agreement, to provide him with 
 food and clothing, and to pay him small wages. Sometimes 
 a premium is paid by the apprentice, or on his behalf, to his 
 master. By a provision of the 5th Eliz., c. 4, which remained in 
 force until a recent period, it was in general required that every 
 person exercising a trade in England should have previously 
 served as apprentice to it for seven years, but by 54 George III. 
 c. 96 that provision was abolished. The term of apprenticeship 
 is now determined by the mutual convenience of the contracting 
 parties and the custom of the trade. A mere agreement does not 
 constitute an apprenticeship ; there must be regular indentures 
 formally entered into. — See " Chambers's Encyclopaedia," Vol. I., 
 p. 331. 
 
 Arabesque. — The name given to a fancy fount, of which the 
 following is a specimen : — 
 
 Speciliiei] of qq oh'cji'wl £|ty&eg<ji|e efatycfeh 
 
 Art of Printing. — The art of producing impressions from 
 characters or figures on paper or any other substance. The art 
 of Block Printing was known in China as early as B.C. 202, and 
 is said to have been introduced from that country into Europe by 
 Marco Polo in the latter part of the loth century. It was first 
 employed in the manufacture of playing-cards and little books 
 of devotion, consisting in most cases of only one page, illus- 
 trated by rude pictures, and containing short scripture texts. 
 The earliest date on these books is 1423. The invention of print- 
 ing with moveable types is claimed for several persons, the chief 
 of whom are Lawrence Coster (1370-1440), of Haarlem ; John 
 Gutenberg, born at Mentz (Mayence) about 1400, settled at Straa- 
 burg in 1424, returned to Mentz in 1441, dying there February 24, 
 1468; John M.-ntelin (1410-78), of Strasb'urg; John Faust, who 
 died about 1400; and Peter Schoeffer or Schoft'er, of Mentz, who 
 died about 1502. Coster is said to have printed by means of 
 separate wooden types, tied together with thread, as early as 
 1430, but the evidence is doubtful. John Gutenberg, or Geins- 
 fleisch, established himself at Mentz in 1441, and printed two 
 small books in 1442. In 1443 he took John Fust or Faust into 
 
 partnership, and in 1450 he first employed cut-metal types in the 
 production of the Mazarin Bible, which appeared Ave years later. 
 About the same time Peter Schojffer, the servant oi Gutenberg 
 
 and Faust, invented cast metal types, which were first used in 
 1 459. The Gothic types, or " Black " letter, gave place to Roman 
 letters towards the end of the 16th century. To secure good 
 printing the following points are essential : — 1. The types care- 
 fully set, fixed with precision in formes, rendered level all over, 
 so that all parts may be pressed alike, and the whole properly 
 cleaned by a wash of potash ley. 2. A uniform inking of the 
 surface, to give uniformity of colour. '.'>. The paper damped 
 equally, neither too much nor too little, so as to take an impres- 
 sion easily and evenly. 4. An equable, firm, and smart pressure, 
 and with that degree of steadiness in the mechanism that the 
 sheet shall touch and leave the types without shaking and 
 blurring. 5. Care in adjusting the pointing or gauge, so that 
 perfect register may be secured in printing the second side. 7. 
 The laying of small patches on the tympan, where, from any 
 inequality, it seems necessary to bring the pressing surface to a 
 thorough equality. — Chambers. 
 
 Ascending Letters are, the Roman and Italic capitals; in 
 the lower-case, 4, il.f, />, i, k, /. /. 
 
 Asterisk. — The Asterisk ( * ) is the chief of the reference- 
 marks, which presents itself to the eye more readily than the 
 others, on account of its having its figure on the top, and leaving 
 a blank below, which rnakrs it a superior. It sometimes de- 
 notes an hiatus, in which case the number of asterisks is multi- 
 plied according to the largeness of the chasm. Arranged in this 
 form (***) they are used in circulars and handbills to draw 
 attention to some particular announcement. Technically, they 
 are called Stars. 
 
 Astronomical Signs will be found under the heading of 
 Signs. They will also be found in any good w-ork on Astro- 
 nomy, or their forms and significations may be learned from 
 " Dietrichsen and Hannay's Almanack." 
 
 Authors' Marks are the alterations made by the author or 
 publisher after the work has been duly composed according to 
 copy. 
 
 Author's Proof. — The proof with the Author's corrections 
 marked in it. 
 
 Back Boxes. — The whole of the boxes in the upper-case 
 not appropriated to either capitals, small capitals, or figures, are 
 generally so termed, whether they happen to be in the front or 
 hack part of the case ; as are also the small boxes on the outer 
 portion of the lower-case. 
 
 Backs. — In the imposition of a form, the first division to the 
 left hand ; that is, between the first and last pages. The next 
 division is the gutter ; the next, the back, and so on. 
 
 Backing. — In Electrotyping, is the process of filling-in the 
 back of the electrotype with metal. 
 
 Bake. — This is a term used in those instances where, when 
 letter is rinsed or laid-up for distribution, it adheres so closely 
 together that it is separated with difficulty; the compositors 
 fingers are made sore by pressing the tyi us again.-t the edge of 
 the cases in order to distribute them into the proper boxes. All 
 new letter is difficult to separate and distribute if it remains 
 long in chase after it is worked off, from the lye penetrating the 
 interstices of the letters. New type should always be saturated 
 with a solution of soft soap and water before being laid into case. 
 This not only prevents baking, but takes off the extreme bright- 
 ness which is so unpleasant to the eye. and renders the type 
 better to feel with the fingers. Old type will become baked if 
 the ink is not properly washed off, and well rinsed before the 
 types are put away. 
 
 Balls. — Balls made either of skins or of composition similar 
 to roller composition, were in use previous to the invention of 
 rollers. When composition rollers were introduced into London 
 in 1815, they were violently opposed by some masters and by 
 many pressmen. They were made of molasses, glue, and a por-
 
 DICTION A It Y OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 tion of tar, boiled together into o lency. Joh) 
 
 writing in hie " Typograpl Witli respect to 
 
 our ideas -till remain the sum.', having pronou 
 (long before hai tliera in action] would not 
 
 ..]1; equal to Balls; this opinion time has rally 
 ready to admit their excellence for hi 
 and the general run of work, but not for fine wort 
 
 Brings, for neither of which are they so well adapted as the 
 balls; as to the last they are totally unfit to produce any impres- 
 sions worthy o The Ball-l used 
 t ■ scrape balls; Ball-TuiUt, the tack- used in knocking-up balls. 
 
 Bank and Horso. f 
 
 32 inch.'- wide, and •" reel hi 
 ip their paper upon U>ou( five im 
 
 placed w ithin two inch.'-- of thi ind breadth 
 
 • bank, and fastened to the legs, which ' con- 
 
 ient shelf for the pressmen to lay their worked-offh 
 Phe pap H u pond ide of 
 
 d 20 i I es wide, P 
 of t."i degrees, 6 ini d of it r 
 
 ives the wet paper, and is 
 placed on the bank m i mpan. 
 
 Bar. - That portion of the press which, in connection ■■ 
 i - as a lever for bringing down thi 
 the is required. 
 
 Baskerville Machine.— The name of a gripper cylinder 
 : ago. 
 
 B\stard Founts.- I' lunt - of type which are cast with a 
 small face on a large b idy, such as a Pica face on English, l'.iv\ ier 
 
 onBourgei , T ting them thus was 1 iviatethe 
 
 use of leads. 
 
 Batter.— 'I'n ii ice ot the type in any way. 
 
 Boarer. A piece of reglet, cork, India rubber, or a piece pi 
 
 > >'t her furnitur . to bi ar the impression off a blank page, 
 
 in keep the margin oi i 1 " paper from bei | blacked by the 
 
 , or to surround very small form and thus pn irenl them 
 
 ■i .: the platen of a pn 
 
 Beard of a Letter. The boulder 
 
 ml;, which reachi - almost to the face of the letter id 
 
 commonly scraped off by the founders, serving to leave a white 
 
 i the lower pari of the face ol the type and the 
 
 top part of any ascending letter which may happen to come in 
 
 the line following. 
 
 Beating. Before the use of rollers, when halls were em- 
 ed, the process of inking the type was called beating. It. 
 
 formed a very important part of a pressman's business, the great 
 
 .■( being to secure uniformity of colour. The plan adopted 
 
 balls i m the lefl hand near corner of the form 
 
 while the tympan was being lifted, they were then carried 
 
 ie near right hand corner, tn beating over the form the 
 ■ - bad to be kept rather inward and the ball ocl I He 
 
 inclining outward, in order that thi 
 
 upright. The beater then went up tl of the 
 
 . and returned, leai Lng off at the le >' > taking 
 
 care to make the form feel the force of the ball I i hard 
 
 and close. The halls were kept con tantlj tumi g round in 
 
 the hands. 
 
 Bed of the Frame. Tl I the bottom. 
 
 Begin Even. -See Make Even. 
 
 Bible Text. — This | rwise Gri it was so 
 
 called because it was largely used in printing the Bil 
 
 Bienvenue. I term, by 
 
 merry, the fee paid on admittance into a "chapel." 
 
 Bill of Type. -A statement of the prop 
 of letters in a fount of type of a givi i Type- 
 
 ding. 
 
 Binds. — When the furnitun i so that 
 
 ii overlaps, and i not on the 
 
 >n the furniture. 
 
 Bite. When the entire impression of the page is prevented 
 ao bei ■ sufficiently cut out. 
 
 Black Letter.— Otherwise Gothic, or Old English, q.v. 
 
 Blaow. William Jansen Blaew, the inventor of the jiress 
 
 which bears his name, was a native of Amst .ii la m. Kvprricucing 
 
 the inconveniences attending all the presses in use in his time 
 
 he caused nine new presses to be made, each of which he called 
 
 i,x the nam it the muses. As tin- excellence uf these 
 
 improvements soon became known toother printing in. uses, they 
 
 were oon imitated, and in the course of a ti'\v years were almost 
 
 general throughout the Low Countries, and from thence they 
 
 Luced into England. He died at Amsterdam in 1638, 
 
 i peculiarity of the Blaew Press, at the time of its 
 
 hi was: The carriage holding the form was wound below 
 
 the point oJ pre ure, which was given, by moving a handle 
 
 attach 'i to a crevi banging in a beam having a spring, which 
 
 caused the craw to il\ bach as s i as the impression 
 
 i i rVn engraving of this press will be found in " John- 
 son's T\ pographia, Vol. 1 1, p. 501. 
 
 Blankets. — Used to break the force of the platen upon the 
 type, and by their elasticity to cause the paper inure readily to 
 adapt itself to the surface of the type. Welch flannel was 
 formerly used, but the fine printers substituted broad cloth; 
 within the last generation, however, a superior article has been 
 manufactured spi cially for the purpose, and of ditlereiit qualities 
 suitable for every di scription of work. 
 
 Blank Lines.— See White Lines. 
 
 Blank Pages. — Pages on which no matter appears. 
 
 Blank Tables. — Tables in which only the headings are 
 prinl. 'ii. leal inn the columns to he tilled up with the pen. 
 
 Blocked Up. Letter is said to be blocked up when the 
 whole of it is composed and none can be sent to press so as to 
 
 pine I with the work, owing to the author not returning the 
 
 pro ifs regularly, the proofs not being read up, other work em- 
 ploying the same type, non-attendance of compositors, scarcity 
 of sorts, pressmen or lnachmemen not being able to work, &c, — 
 Straker. 
 
 Block Printing. — There is a very unique and curious work 
 on this subject in the British .Museum, entitled "Biographical 
 
 Memoirs Of William Ged, including a particular account of his 
 - iii the art ol Block-printing." 
 
 Board Rack. — An arrangement of strong hoards, with ledges 
 nailed on the inside of the two .-ides, to slide letter-hoards in. 
 'lie > are used for keeping standing pages and jobs more out of 
 the way. 
 
 Bodkin. — A pointed steel instrument used to pick wrong 
 letters out of a page in correcting. 
 
 Body of the Letter. — The shank of the letter. 
 
 Body of the Work. — The subject-matter of a work is thus 
 termed, to distinguish it from the' preface, introduction, notes, 
 
 index, &C. 
 
 Bolster. A pieceofwood placed between the ribs of a press 
 to pn ■ ent ii table running out too far, and to ease the sudden 
 
 strain which would otherwise be caused on the girthing. 
 
 Bolts.— The furniture which forms the margin at the heads of 
 the page: in il It-cut in a form oi twelvi . 
 
 Botched.— Carelessly or badly done work. 
 
 Book-work.— That portion of the printing business which is 
 connected with the printing of hooks, as distinguished from 
 jobbing ami lews- work. Prei ious to the commencement of the 
 
 c position of any work, a Direction Paper should be given to 
 
 the click c for bis instructions and to secure uniformity in the 
 Btyle of the composition. It should state distinctly the exact 
 name of the work; tor whom printed; when ordered: estimated 
 sheets of pp. each) ; the even head-lines ; ami the odd 
 head-lines. It should also be distinctly understood whether the 
 
 author' pn ati ind capitals are to be followed ; and when 
 
 the work is required to he completed. It is also usual to give
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY 
 
 the following instructions: — The dimensions of the page; the 
 size and style of the type in which are to be set the texts, 
 extracts, notes, side notes, incut notes, chapter headings, and 
 head-lines; with the thickness of the lead for the text, extracts, 
 and notes respectively. These matters once definitely arranged, 
 much trouble, annoyance, and expense are saved. Book-work, 
 says Houghton, in his " Printer's Practical Every-day Book," is 
 that branch of case in which all the matter composed is divided 
 into pages and each progressively numbered and placed so as to 
 fall, fold, and read in successive order when printed, It extends 
 to a large description of work, and embraces every sized page 
 into which a sheet of printing paper can be folded without 
 waste. The sizes are both regular and irregular, according to 
 the manner in which the sheet is folded. The tinnier includes 
 those which double their number the first and every subsecpient 
 fold of the sheet, such as folio, quarto, octavo, sixieens. thirty- 
 two's, &c. ; the latter those which fold into odd numbers before 
 they double into the required size, such as twelves, eighteens, 
 twenties, twenty-fours, thirty-sixes, &c. It is the branch of the 
 business which requires the greatest care and the largest amount 
 of knowledge, as well as the best taste. It is divided thus: 
 Casting-ofF copy ; composing; making-up; imposing each of 
 which subjects will lie referred to in its proper place. The great 
 excellences which should characterise book-work more especially 
 than any other class of work are, correct punctuation, uniform 
 oapitalling, proper divisions of words, and even spacing. The 
 order in which the different parts of a book follow each other is, 
 the half or bastard title, the title, advertisement, preface, con- 
 tents, then the text, and finally the index. 
 
 Bottle-arsed. — A type that is wider at the bottom than 
 at the top. 
 
 Bottle-necked.— A type that is thicker at the top than at 
 the bottom. Types are now cast and finished with such precision 
 that this and the preceding terms have become almost obsolete. 
 
 Bottom Line. — The last line of the page, or that imme- 
 diately preceding the signature or white Hue. 
 
 Bourgeois. — The name of this letter indicates that it was 
 originated in France ; although type of this body is now called 
 Gaillarde by French printers. Two lines of this letter are equal 
 to one line of Great Primer, or four lines of Diamond. 
 
 Bow the Letter. — This term was formerly applied to the 
 bending of the bad letters taken from a forme in correcting, lest 
 they be used again. The best plan, however, is to break all 
 that are defective, so that they may be placed in the "shoe" at 
 once, and that time may not be afterwards wasted in weeding 
 them out of the forme. 
 
 Boxes. -The compartments in a case, in which the several 
 varieties of letters are kept. Thus that in which the A is kept 
 is called the A box, and so on with all the rest. 
 
 Box it up. — To enclose any figure or other work within a 
 border of brass rule. 
 
 Box-wood. — A firm, fine-grained wood, used in engraving. 
 As it is difficult to procure very large piieces of this wood, 
 owing to the small circumference of the box-tree, an ingenious 
 method of bolting several blocks together in order to produce 
 engravings of an extraordinary size. This is done by means 
 of screws inserted at the back of the block and fastened by 
 nuts. Great care must be used with bolted blocks not to let 
 them get wet, as in drying they are liable to warp and expose 
 the joints. After being used tor printing they should be well 
 washed witli turpentine and placed carefully in a dry cupboard 
 free from heat. Large blocks should be stood on end' to prevent 
 warping. — (See Engbavdjg.) 
 
 Braces. — These are chiefly used in tables of account and in 
 / similar matter that consists of a variety of articles which 
 
 f 
 
 . ' would require much circumlocution to distinguish were 
 I f , it not for the adoption of the tabular method. Braces 
 I [ ' stand before and keep together such articles as are of 
 , the same import, and are the subdivisions of the pro- 
 ceeding articles. They sometimes stand alter, and keep 
 together, such articles as make above one line, and have either 
 
 pecuniary, mercantile, or other denominations after them, which 
 are justified to answer to the middle of the brace. The bracing 
 side of a brace is always turned to that part of an article which 
 makes the most lines. Braces are generally cast to two, three, 
 and four ems, but are made larger if so ordered. Middles and 
 corners and metal rules are used when the brace is required to 
 extend over any considerable .-pace. 
 
 Branching out.— The insertion of lead-, ceglets, or white- 
 lines, in titles or jobs, so as to open or extend the matter. 
 
 Brass Rules.— Thin strips of metal, of the height of type. 
 used for tunning lines, and generally manufactured in lei 
 of HI in- 24 inches, and of various thicknesses, correspondui 
 the thickness of leads, and of various shades of breadth or dark- 
 ness. They are made either single, double, triple, &c, are also 
 either plain, curved, waved, dotted, or made to various fanciful 
 designs. The practice of eutting-up rule to any necessary size, 
 or according to the momentary caprice of the compositor, gi 
 ri-e to great waste, both of time and material. Several year- ago 
 it was suggested by Mr. T. S. Houghton, of Preston, that rule 
 should lie cut up to certain specified lengths, and the manufac- 
 turers now send it out in accordance with this suggestion. Mr. 
 Houghton's " Printer's Everyday Book " contains some useful 
 information on this subject. 
 
 Brass Rule Cases. — Cases made specially for holding the 
 various lengths of rules. 
 
 Brass Rule Cutter. - - An apparatus for cutting-up brass 
 rule with greater readiness and accuracy than with the shears. 
 
 Brass Space Lines. — These answer the same purpose as 
 leads ; they are now in use on all the London morning news- 
 papers, and effect a great saving over the leads, as they cannot 
 he broken and do not contract in stereotyping. One firm is said 
 to save I'll HI a year by using them. 
 
 Brayer. — A wooden or glass rubber, flat at the bottom, used 
 to bray or spread out ink on the inking-table. 
 
 Break Line. — A short line ; the end of a paragraph. 
 
 Brevier. — A type which took its name from the Breviaries, 
 which were usually printed in this character. Brevier is a size 
 larger than Minion, and smaller than Bourgeois. There are 1 [-\ 
 lines to the foot. 
 
 Brilliant. — The smallest type that has yet been cast. It is 
 about half the depth of Minion. 
 
 Bring Up. — To bring up a forme is to place overlays on those 
 parts in which the impression is defective, and to cut away those 
 portions in which it is too heavy, so as to equalise the pressure 
 and colour over the whole forme. 
 
 Broad. — A piece of furniture equal in width to a broad quo- 
 tation, or four ems pica. 
 
 Broadside. — A forme of one page, printed on one side of a 
 whole sheet of paper. — See Posters. 
 
 Broken Matter. — Pages of type disrupted, and somewhat 
 intermingled. 
 
 Bulk. — A. platform or table affixed to the end of a frame, to 
 hold a board containing wet matter tor distribution. 
 
 Bullet. -The dismis-al of a person, whether from misconduct 
 or from any other cause. 
 
 Bullock Press.— A new rotary self-feeding and perfecting 
 r*j=— ~ v. press, widely difter- 
 
 ing in its principles 
 of construction from 
 all other machines, 
 as the annexed illus- 
 tration shows. It is 
 fed from an endless 
 roll of paper, prints 
 both side- at the same 
 time, and cuts up the 
 sheets to the proper 
 size, placing them on 
 the delivery-board m a pile. It was invented by Mr. William 
 Bullock, an American, and was first introduced into Europe in 
 December, 1869.
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 Bundle of two per 
 
 Burr. ' imperfectly 
 
 i, ami on brass rule cut with blunt ah 
 
 C. 
 Cancol. Prom concilia, a lattic the drawing 
 
 . several n 
 
 led which, 
 
 : ill all 
 
 ii and left out oi 
 . ■ ira or Imperfections. 
 Cancollod Figures. See Si ! beb. 
 
 Candlestick. Ln former times, when co worked 
 
 at night by thi i indies, they used a candlestick 1 
 
 ! ase i" keep it Bteady. ii was invariably pla< 
 
 \ E . offli day. 
 
 Canon.— A type one size larger than Trafalgar; thel 
 equal Pica, i ad there ari i foot. 
 
 Capitals. Letters distinguished in MSS. by having three lines 
 drawn under them. For tl. - •■ ion. 
 
 Cap Paper. A thin description of paper used for wrapping 
 light ' I ' and other paper bags are made of it. 
 
 i . n abbreviation of Foolscap pa 
 
 Card, or Cardboard. Several she ted to- 
 
 gether until they attain a required thickness. When 
 
 v are cut to the various sizes mentioned in the follow- 
 ing table, and made up into parks .it' fifty-two. 
 
 . . . :; in. • t'. in. Small . . . -'.in. X 3Jin. 
 
 I 1 . in. x 6 in. I' mble Small . 3| in. - 
 
 , jjge . H Reduci d Small -1 in. ■ 
 
 Third Large . l$in. X 3 in. Half Small . . l|in. ■ 
 
 l Large . 2" in. x 3 in. Town Size . . 2 in. > 
 
 I a ds are now mao i a much better description 
 
 than formerly. The 
 
 or polished cards ei mpetent pressman to product 
 
 -• beautiful a many cases Beat ruble B im 
 
 per-plate. 
 Card Backs. The backs of playing cards. Tl 
 th( i ntly verybeautiful, an are expi nded 
 
 fine designs. The printing, sometimes in seven <■■ 
 i- .... ited with great care, and by experienced workmen who 
 usually confine themselves to this branch of business. The 
 ! at machine, but the backs are done at a band 
 pxea i tro-plates, some of the pulls requiring the united 
 
 two men. Sometimes, however, an u bourer 
 
 i- employed to do this, and experienced worl i al a 
 
 sala: than Vis. per wei , are i d to make ■ 
 
 roll. &c. Enough cards are printed on a shi el to make one pack, 
 with the • 
 
 Card Cutting Machine. A machine, t<> which a large 
 knife is attached, and by means oi a leveris made to cu1 the 
 cards indicated bj the g i must be se1 beforehand. 
 
 Card Printing. -A card to be well printed, requiri - nearh 
 tii, aent, and a prat big. it 
 
 mil w ith the finest ink. The 
 
 manner of making ready is thus: G i ipn i a the 
 
 . place the . to bring the matter a 
 
 as possible in d, one pin at the lower end 
 
 and two at the Bide of i re that the 
 
 come in i. .mart with the tvpe. The impression should be ex- 
 light until properly regulated, and should not be more 
 -ary to bring up the face of the type. 
 
 Card Printing Machine. When large quantities of cards 
 are ordered, they are bow usually worked on a card ma 
 
 many varieties of which are manufac< tn d. > s of these will 
 
 ibed in this Dictionaryin their alphabetical • rder. 
 
 Caret.— A mark ( f\ ) used to denote that words or points are 
 to be inserted. 
 
 Carriage. 'I'l':' pari of the press which runs in under the 
 platen and carries the forme. 
 
 Cartridge Paper. -A thick, hard paper, having the ap- 
 
 pearanc parchment. In first-class offices it is used for the 
 
 oilers, and sometimes for bringing-up cuts. 
 
 Case. - A frame or set of boxes in which letter is kept to 
 compose with. Ca es an always spoken of as "pairs," viz., 
 the! pper Casi and Lower Case. Cases should always be lined 
 with p ej are likely to damage the face of types at the 
 
 bottom hi the boxes. The word ('ase is frequently used as 
 synonj is with composition, as, To work at Case. 
 
 Case Rack. A strong frame with ledges, in which to slide 
 
 that a Q01 in use, to keep them safely and without 
 ■;uy room. 
 
 Cassie Paper. — Damaged paper— the outside quires of a 
 ream. 
 
 Cast-oflf.— To examine MS. copy and determine how many 
 rill make in any given size and type. This is done by 
 comp or six lines selected from some part which seems 
 
 to be of the average style of writing, and thus ascertaining how 
 many lines of MS. will make even lines of print. Suppose there 
 are 600 pages of .Ms. averaging thirty lines in a page, and that 
 it is required to know bow many pages of foolscap folio it 
 will occupy in print. There are altogether 18,000 lines of MS.; 
 nine lines i.t US. make live of print, therefore there will be 
 10,000 lines i.t' print, which at fifty-three lines to a page will 
 n l: ike 189 pages. Sometimes it is neees.-an to ca<t-"ll' reprint 
 
 to determine what quantity will be got in, or driven out, 
 by setting in larger or smaller type. 
 Cast-up. To calculate the number of types in a sheet, and 
 
 then value tor work done at so much per Hkiii letters. The fol- 
 ig is the method of proceeding: — Measure the length of 
 the pa ;i . including folio and bottom white-line, with em quadrats, 
 and the breadth with en quadrats of the fount in which the 
 matter is set ; multiply them together, and the product will he 
 the uumbi r ut letter,, in a page. This, multiplied by the number 
 Hi pages i" a sheet will give the total number of letters con- 
 tained in it, and the thousands multiplied by the price per loot) 
 will give the total value of the sheet or half-sheel to the com- 
 po nir. who is paid for work done, ln casting-up it is usual 
 if the number oi types over a thousand am. unit to less than oikj 
 to strike them off; and if they amount to oUU or more to reckon 
 them as a thousand. 
 
 Catch Line. — The small, insignificant lines in titles, cards, 
 chapter-headings, &C, are technically termed Catch Lines; such 
 
 . \\ !>. I 111.. BY, 1'iilt, ALSO, &C. 
 
 Catch Word.— The first word of the following page placed 
 at the right-hand corner at the foot of the page. Catch-u 
 are seldom used at the present day. except in law work or Mss. 
 ignature, when required, is placed in the same line. 
 
 Cater-cornered (obs.J—A term applied to uneven paper, or 
 paper whose sides are not at right angles with each other. 
 
 Caxton Machine. — A Single-Cylinder dripper Machine in- 
 dented by Mr. Myers, a practical printer and engineer oi' South- 
 ampton, in which the rollers are loose, and are inked from a 
 table affixed to the carriage of the press. The ink table travels 
 with the carriage, so that forme and table pass under the rollers 
 alternately. 
 
 Cedilla. — A mark (q) used in French to denote that the 
 filer is in he pronounced soft. Some printers who do not 
 9 tins,, sorts, and do not care to purchase a few, use an 
 inverted figure of 5, thus g. 
 
 Chaff.— A word belonging to the slang dictionary, hut too 
 
 frequently heard in the printing office, when one compositor 
 
 teases another as regards his work, habits, disposition, &c. It is 
 
 frequently a source of unpleasantness and had feeling among 
 
 agreeable companions; luit it is essentially a had 
 
 ce, tu which no gentleman is ever addicted. 
 
 Chapels.— Meet in-- in the office for the consideration of 
 
 matt r-. the settling of disputes respecting the prices of
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 work and any other business embraced by trade rules. Readers 
 and overseers are necessarily excluded, except on " goose " 
 occasions, when the "whole force of the establishment," appren- 
 tices, of course, excepted, receive " cards of invitation." Chapels 
 have for their head a personage who from the day of his inaugu- 
 ration is known by the cognomen of "Father, " and it is he who 
 not only presides over the deliberations of chapels, but whose 
 advice is taken on all difficult cpuestions, even before a chapel 
 is convened. — Straker. A very amusing account of the chapels 
 of ancient times will be found in Hansard's Typographia, p. 302, 
 
 " Our art was hailed from kingdoms far abroad, 
 And cherished in the hallowed house of (rod ; 
 From which we learn the homage it received, 
 And how our sires its heavenly birth believed; 
 Eacli Printer hence, howe'er unblest his walls, 
 E'en to this day his house a Chapel calls." 
 
 " The Press," by John M'Cbeebt. 
 
 Chase. — A rectangular frame in which images are securely 
 fastened, so as to convey the whole safely to and from the press 
 or machine, and to keep the type fixed during the process of 
 printing. A chase should hear equally on the imposing surface 
 or stone and the press table ; the cross-bars should be perfectly 
 true so as to give good register, and the inside in all its parte 
 must be quite straight and square. The cross-bars ought never 
 to be used for any other purpose than that for which they were 
 originally intended. 
 
 Cheques. — Ornamental designs used to separate the counter- 
 foil from the cheque, and to cover the place of separation. Very 
 complicated designs are sometimes adopted with the view of 
 preventing imitation. 
 
 Chessmen. — These were formerly cut in wood, but now each 
 character is cast as a separate type, for the use of newspapers 
 and periodicals, to illustrate games of chess. The following is a 
 complete assortment, consisting of sixty-four' pieces : — 
 
 i i i k\k\k\k&k 
 
 ^^W' 
 
 
 ....... 
 
 Choked. — Type filled up with dirt, or the sediment of ink, 
 so that it does not work clear, is said to be choked. This term 
 
 is also used when too much ink lias been spread on the forme. 
 
 Chrorno-Lithography.— See Lithography. 
 
 Chromo-Typography.— The art of printing in various 
 colours from electrotype plates, &c. It has commercially de- 
 veloped itself during the last fifteen years, until it has become 
 a distinct adjunct to what is familiary known as letter-press 
 printing. The higher branches of chromo-typography used to 
 be practised by only one or two houses; but now the demand 
 for coloured posters and show-cards is so great that numerous 
 printers have been induced to add this branch to their trade 
 with great success and pecuniary gain. The best class of chroino 
 
 work is accomplished by the studied blending of delicate I 
 to produce a whole, which an artist alone can give; he it is who 
 must conceive and furnish the engraver with sketches of 
 tints for each block, leaving it to the pressman to furnish the 
 colours of the transparency, opacity, or tone required. The 
 most perfect register must be obtained; for if only one requisite 
 be unfulfilled, ten or twelve printings are rendered valueless. 
 The Christmas supplements to the Illustrated London News come 
 under this category, but are deficient, not in artistic merit, but 
 in the slopping manner in which the colours are manipula 
 indeed, the design is often marred by the presswork. 
 
 Cicero. — The French and German name for Pica. It derived 
 this name from the circumstance of the Epistles of this writer 
 having been first printed in letter of that size. It is doubtful 
 whether the name was first given by the French or the German- . 
 
 Circumflex. — The accent marked thus, a. — See ACCENTS. 
 
 Circular Quadrats and Curvelinear Furniture.— 
 
 These are cast in various sizes, to enable the compositor to make 
 curved lines of various kinds. The inner furniture has a convex 
 surface, and the outer a concave surface. The type is placed 
 between, and the angles outside may be filled up with type. 
 
 Complete circles can be made by the quadrats, but our limited 
 space will only permit of us giving the accompanying designs. 
 They are cast to the height of leads; our illustration, however, 
 is made type high to show the form of the furniture. 
 
 Clarendon. — A useful jobbing letter, which was brought out, 
 in conjunction with the Antique, to supersede the old Egyptian 
 and Albion faces. The following is a specimen : — 
 
 THE AMERICAN PRINTER. 
 
 Clean Proof. — A proof with but few faults in it ; or, a proof 
 pulled carefully after correction to send to the author. 
 
 Clearing Away. — Taking out leads, white lines, and smaller 
 type from the body of a work after printing, so that the type 
 may be papered and put away. The type should be washed, the 
 chase and furniture put away, the pages lifted on galleys, and 
 after the heads, whites, and all irregular matter are extracted 
 and distributed, and leads, brass rule, &c, placed in their proper 
 receptacles, the solid matter is tied up in convenient portions, 
 put on a letter-board until nearly dry, when it is papered up 
 and marked with its proper name and description. 
 
 Clearing Pie. — Separating various sizes or kinds of type 
 from a confused mass, and placing each letter in its proper box 
 and case. Not only does every distinct size require to be sepa- 
 rated, but different founts of the same size. 
 
 Clearing the Stone. — It is a rule in all offices that, after 
 imposing or correcting, the mallet, shooting stick, furniture, 
 quoins, saw, saw-block, and shears are to be returned to their 
 respective places; type distributed, and bad letter put into the 
 shoe, so that no impediment shall be offered to the next person 
 using the stone. Any of the articles, or two letters left on the 
 stone, will render the party offending liable to a fine in many 
 well-regulated offices. 
 
 Clerical Errors. — Errors made in the copy by the editor or 
 transcriber. 
 
 Clicker. — The compositor who in a companionship rec 
 the copy and gives it out to compose, and attends to the correct 
 making-up and imposition. 
 
 Clicking. — This is a term applied to the mode pursued in 
 Loudon of getting out work by the formation of a companion-
 
 8 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY 
 
 Tho Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 ship, i of men, who are appointed to go on 
 
 with ii certain work or works. 
 Closo Mattor. Pages with bul few breaks or whites, or 
 
 Close Spacing. Putting very little Bpace between words. 
 Close up. -When an article is divided into short "tal 
 and • i" is emptied on the gall. ■ first 
 
 ashed, the compositor setting the flrsl "take"has to "i 
 n,, • ing,"by pusliing tlie subsequent matter up to 
 
 iwn : and so on, whi If, how- 
 
 1 before the set plied, 
 
 positoi i 
 
 Clumps. Metal clumps are used in 
 
 the bottom ol newspaper columns, to protect thi letters fr 
 
 ig ,:i locking-up, when thi fool I ick is short. Thi 
 1 only of a thicker body, such as 
 pareil, Pica,sc For Steheotypi Clumps, see Stereotyping. 
 Cogger's Press. A powerful press, well adapted to fine 
 work, bu1 little used now from its liability 
 
 Collate. To examine tin u a in each gathering of 
 
 ; i book, to see thai tl ttive. 
 
 Colon (:). Phe colon i loyed in a sentence to separate 
 
 parts reqt nl would be given to 
 
 See Punctuation. 
 
 Columbian Press. A press invented bj Mr. Geo. Clymer, 
 of Philadelphia. The first press of this kmd constructed in 
 London was put up in 18 tto Russia. It is 
 
 an iron press, without a Bcrew. The head i- a powerful lever, 
 er levers, to which the bar is attached, and pro- 
 pressure, i i ila i i i attached to the head by a 
 ig iron bar, and the descent is made teadj and n gular bj 
 two iron girders which projei cheeks. The power of 
 
 this press is very great, and its construction is extremely simple. 
 
 Columns, in newspapers, &c, are the subdivisions of a 
 
 mm] rules. 
 Column Galley. A long narrow <j:illi-y, with bra.-s or zim- 
 bottom, used principally fi ork. 
 
 Column Rule. The rule which divides two columns of 
 matter. Column rules are made to various thicknesses and 
 each side, to ob\ iate the use of leads. 
 
 Combination Borders. Borders composed of several dis- 
 tinct pieces of type, most of which term separate borders of 
 
 themselves; but when any or all of them are combi I, some 
 
 very tasteful and ingenious designs are effected thereby . 
 
 Combination Leads, Clumps, and Metal Furniture. 
 
 ■ mbinations thai can be formed 
 
 by leads or clumps of six lengths only, not more than three pieces 
 
 being required a ii Ind I, only too pieces are used 
 
 in eighteen of the thirty-eight exampli - gr 
 
 I.I.N,, in in EMfl OF UN' PIEI BB I MI'I.oYED: — 
 
 4 7 9 13 15 20. 
 
 9, 
 13, 
 
 9, 
 15, 
 
 ■1 
 
 4 
 
 4,4 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 4 
 
 9 
 
 4 
 
 7. f 
 
 5, 7 
 
 15, 
 15, 
 20, 
 
 ■ 
 
 = 8 
 = 11 
 = 12 
 = 14 
 = 16 
 = 17 
 = 18 
 = 19 
 = 21 
 = 22 
 
 1,4 = 23 
 
 4 =24 
 
 9,7 =25 
 
 13, 13 
 
 20, 7 
 15, 13 
 20, 9 
 
 1 5, 1 5 
 20, 7. I 
 
 15, 15,4 =34 
 
 = 26 
 = 27 
 = 28 
 = 29 
 = 30 
 = 31 
 . = 32 
 . =33 
 
 20, 15 
 20, 9, 
 15, 15, 
 20, 9, 
 
 .. = 35 
 
 .. = 36 
 
 37 
 
 ...=38 
 
 15, 15, 9. 
 20, 20 
 15, 13, 13 . 
 20, 15, 7 . 
 15, 15, 13 . 
 
 a i, a i, 4 . 
 
 15, 15, 15 
 
 = 39 
 = 40 
 = 41 
 = 42 
 = 43 
 = 44 
 = 45 
 20, 13, 13 =46 
 
 20,20, 7. 
 20, 15, 13 . 
 20,20,9 . 
 
 = 47 
 = 48 
 = 49 
 
 20, 15, 15 =50 
 
 The printer has al ommand the sis 
 
 viz.: 4. ,, '.i, 13, 15, and ^i 'ins. By using four, five, or si 
 together, theaboi maybe extended consecutively 
 
 to one humhvil ems. 
 
 Comma ( , ). The point which marks the smallest gram- 
 matical division, and in reading represents the shortest pause. 
 Two inverted commas are used to denote extracts or quotations 
 
 fro ther works, dialogue matter, &c. They are placed at the 
 
 commencement of the passage quoted, a thin space dividing 
 them from the first letter; the end of the extract is denoted by 
 two apostrophes. \ single inverted comma is used as an abbre- 
 viation of the word Mar. as in M'Arthur. Inverted co as 
 
 en first used by Guille i, a Frenchman, to supersede the 
 
 i Italic letter. As an acknowledgment, his countrymen 
 call them after his name. 
 
 Comp. An abbreviation of Companion, also oi Compositor. 
 
 Members of companionships are in the habit of addressing each 
 
 other as Comps. 
 
 Commercial Signs. — The follow inn; are those mostly used 
 :u the present day : — 
 
 \t or to. £ Librtt, lihrrr, pound or pounds 
 
 l" Per, each. sterling. 
 
 Hi Pound in weight. / Solidus, solidi, shilling or 
 
 g Dollar or dollars. shillings. 
 
 Companionships. — For many years past, a system has been 
 ted in the Composing Departments of large Hook Printing 
 offices particularly in London of giving out the work to Com- 
 panionships. The great advantage attending this plan is. that 
 
 while all the pages are made up in an uniform Style by the 
 t which was seldom the case when each man made up 
 
 his own matter works of considerable extent are printed with 
 r despatch, and at the same time it is found to produce a 
 
 avtng in the cost of production. This benefit is equally shared 
 i.\ journeymen and employers : for while the former are enabled 
 to earn more wages, the latter, by the great facility in the ex- 
 ecution of the work, can undertake larger orders, and thus obtain 
 greater profits. The clicker, on receiving copy from the overseer, 
 calls the members of his companionship together for a few 
 moments, and informs them what cases to put up and what 
 letter to distribute; at the same time, he gives them any general 
 directions which he may deem expedient for their guidance in 
 composing. While his companions are "putting in their letter," 
 the clicker proceeds to get together what leads and other matter 
 he may require for the making up. Be then draws out a table 
 in a simple form. In the first column he sets down the name of 
 each compositor as he takes copy; and in the second, the folio 
 ol the copy, so that lie may be able to ascertain instantly 
 
 in whose I ds it lies. In the third column, he notes down 
 
 the number of lines each man has composed, opposite to his 
 name, as last as the galleys are brought to him. In the fifth, he 
 sets down such remarks respecting the copy as may be neces- 
 sary; also any circumstance that occurs in the companionship. 
 When the Companionship are ready for their first taking of 
 copy, the clicker invariably doles it out in small quantities, 
 giving the first two or three compositors rather less than those 
 that follow. This plan is adopted to prevent any delay in the 
 " niakiug-up." Dining the time the first taking of copy is in 
 hand the clicker sets the first-page heading, the foj ios and white- 
 lines, signatures, notes, poetry, and any other extrant s matter. 
 
 As soon as he discovers thai the first two or three takings are 
 c tnpleted (which he is soon informed of by a second application 
 for cepj i, lie proceeds to the makiug-up of the first sheet. As 
 ! e takes each man's galley he counts the lines and enters the 
 number against the compositors' name in the before-mentioned 
 table, which series as a cheek against the man's bill when he 
 presents it at the end of the week. Having thus made up the 
 first sheet, he lays down the pages on the stone, ami immediately 
 informs the '"Quoin-drawer Overseer" (q.v.) ot it, who provides 
 and furniture. The clicker then takes the cords oft' the 
 pages, and locks up the forme ready for the proof-puller. The 
 companions are thus kept busily engaged at their cases, while 
 the clicker goes regularly about the little odd jobs which so 
 frequently take the compositors' attention oft' their work under 
 ild item oi each making-up and imposing his own pages. 
 The start being made, it only requires a plentiful supply of letter, 
 ad , &c, and the work will proceed rapidly. If the clicker 
 funis that from any cause, — such as abundance of notes, poetry-,
 
 The Printers* Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 or other peculiarities in the work, — that he cannot make up and 
 impose the matter as fast as it is composed, he generally calls to 
 his aid one uf the companions who, in his opinion, is best capable 
 of assisting him. Should he not hare finished his taking, either 
 the person next to him takes it and sets up to himself; or, if ! 
 there is a great deal to set, the man who took copy last finishes 
 it for him. When this is the case, the clicker sets down the 
 number of lines he has composed, and takes notice of the num- 
 ber of hours he is engaged " on time," which he enters in the 
 form referred to. As soon as the proofs are read, they are for- 
 warded to the clicker, who immediately requests the person 
 whose name appears at the beginning to lay up the sheet and 
 correct his matter. The proof is then passed on regularly from 
 one to the other until all have corrected, the last one locking-up 
 the forme and carrying it to the proof-press. This is the only 
 instance in which the companions are called from their frames, 
 and proves at once that a great saving of time to the compositor 
 is effected thereby. When the last taking of copy is given out, 
 it is the duty of the clicker to apply to the overseer for other 
 work, so that the companions shall not be kept standing. Fre- 
 quently, however, one companionship will have three or four 
 works going on at the same time ; so that, if there is a scanty 
 supply of copy or letter of one work, the clicker uses his judg- 
 ment by employing his companions on the others. But should 
 it so happen that all the work is nearly finished, and there is no 
 more copy to give out, then, as soon as one of the companionship 
 is out of copy, the lines of the whole are counted off, and set 
 down in the table, and every one does what he can for the 
 general benefit, till all is completed. At the end of the week, 
 the clicker makes out the bill in the following manner: — He first 
 ascertains what amount of work has been done during the week; 
 he then counts how many lines each companion has set, and 
 divides them into hours. Ha\ing done this, he refers to his table 
 to see how many hours of time-work has been charged, including 
 his own time, which is generally about sixty or sixty-three hours 
 per week, without overtime. He then adds the number of hours 
 of composition, time-work, and his own together, which gives 
 him the total number of hours to be paid for out of the lull. By 
 reducing the sum total of the bill into pence and dividing it by 
 the number of hours, he gets at the price per hour at which the 
 bill pays ; so that it is to his interest to work well, in order 
 to make the bill pay as much as possible. The " fat,'' such as 
 the title, blanks, short pages, folios, whites, and head-lines, are 
 all made up by the clicker, and thrown into the general bill, so 
 that each man gets his fair proportion of it when the bill is 
 made out ; whereas, by the old system, a considerable space 
 of time was literally wasted by the compositors, at the end of 
 every work, gathering round the stone, "throwing quads" (q.r.) 
 to decide who should have the title, who the blank, or any other 
 fat matter, such as a piece of table-work, &c, often ending in 
 disputes and angry feeling. Therefore he who picks up the 
 largest number of stamps, in (he cleanest manner, comes in for 
 the largest share of the "fat." This is how it should be. But 
 by the old system, one man may have a happier knack than 
 another of throwing the quads, and would get the largest share 
 of fat, when, perhaps, he has actually done the least portion of 
 the work. Most companionships work on the same principle, 
 although they have a different mode of paying the clicker. In 
 some he is only paid for the time he is actually engaged at the 
 work ; another companionship will equally, not proportionately. 
 divide all the fat; while others will allow the clicker to charge 
 the same number of hours as the man who has composed the 
 largest number of lines. The latter plan is bad on principle, as 
 it affords ground for dishonesty ; for it is very easy for a clicker 
 to give the best and fattest copy to the compositor who can pick 
 up the largest number of stamps. One of the largest London 
 firms divides their work between three different classes of com- 
 panionships, and pays their clickers establishment wages. The 
 first-class companionships have all the best kind of work, and 
 the companions are paid 7d. or 8d. per hour (or 1000 letters); the 
 second-class companionship take the medium work, and arc paid 
 fid. per hour ; while the third and lowest class have to be c intent 
 with the inferior work, for which they get od. per hour. Each 
 of these companionships receives the above prices irrespective of 
 
 cuts, blanks, tables, or other "fat," which is claimed by the em- 
 ployers, as remuneration for the clicker's labour. On being first 
 employed, the overseer generally places the compositor in the 
 third-class companionship. His manner of working is closely 
 watched, and if he proves to be a quick and clean compositor, 
 on the first opportunity he is drafted into the second-class; and 
 if his abilities are still approved of and his conduct is good, he 
 may ultimately be promoted to the first-class companionship. 
 Here he will have a double advantage over his previous situation 
 for not only will he be engaged on the best work, but he will be 
 kept constantly employed; for if a slackness occurs, the inferior 
 work is taken from the third-class ''ship'' and given to the 
 second ; while the best " ship " is kept going with work from the 
 others, rather than be suffered to stand still. Perhaps, however, 
 the fairest and most equitable method is to let the companions 
 choose then' own clicker, and pay him out of the general bill. 
 If he does not work to their satisfaction, they will Boon replace 
 him by a more competent man ; thus the employer will have the 
 satisfaction of knowing that his work is progressing with all the 
 dispatch possible, and that he is only paying the actual worth 
 of the labour performed. 
 
 Composing. — A term which includes several exercises as 
 well of the mind as of the body ; for when we are said to com- 
 pose we are at the same time engaged in reading and spelling 
 what we are composing, as well as in taking care to space and 
 justify the matter. When the copy of a work is put into the 
 hands of the compositor he should receive directions respecting 
 the style of the work. He then makes his measure to the exact 
 number of Pica ems directed, which is done by laying them flat- 
 ways in the composing-stick, and then screwing it up, not too 
 tight, as that would be apt to strain it, nor so slack as to allow 
 the measure to give. He then fits a setting-rule to the measure, 
 and his case being supplied with letter, he is prepared for com- 
 posing. Having taken notice of the state of the copy, he begins 
 his work. His chief endeavour should be to compose with ease, 
 accuracy, and expedition. An ill habit, once acquired, is with 
 difficulty shaken off. The variety of motions exhibited by some 
 compositors are truly ludicrous; such as nodding the head, agi- 
 tating the body, throwing out the arm, ticking the letter against 
 the case or the setting-rule, with many other false movements, 
 which not only waste time, but fatigue the mind and exhaust 
 the body. The swift action of the hand is not the criterion of a 
 quick compositor. Having placed himself opposite the centre of 
 the lower case, the compositor takes the stick in his left hand, 
 his thumb being over the slide, resting on the setting-rule ; with 
 the thumb and first finger of his right hand he takes up the let- 
 ters, spaces, quadrats, &c, one by one, and places each upon the 
 setting-ride, supporting and placing them together by the action 
 of the left thumb, the other hand being constantly disen-; | 
 for picking up the next letter. The whole of these movements 
 are performed with a degree of celerity not easily conceivable by 
 a stranger to the art. Upon arriving near the end of his measure 
 he observes whether the line will end with a complete word, or 
 an entire syllable, including the hyphen, and if his last word or 
 syllable happens exactly to fill the measure, or makes the line 
 completely tight, he has nothing more to do to that line : but if, 
 which is far more likely to be the case, he finds the measure not 
 entirely filled by perfect words or syllables, he increases the dis- 
 tances 'between the words in that line by equally adding more 
 space between each until the measure is moderately tightened. 
 This operation is called "justifying," and if done properlyis one 
 that displays much nicety and skill, every line requiring to be of 
 an equal degree of tightness, neither too tightly wedged into the 
 composing stick, nor yet at all loose and uneven : neither the 
 words placed too close together in one line, nor too wide apart in 
 others. This is one great criterion of a good workman. The 
 compositor may as often have to lessen the spaces first used in a 
 line as to add to them, particularly in narrow measures of large 
 type, containing of course fewer words in a line, and it frequently 
 happens that a long monosyllabic word or syllable will not, as 
 the line is first spaced, go in at the end. and to drive out which 
 the line would appear with great gaps : he must therefore change 
 his spaces tor thinner, some of which, from their being very thin 
 are called hair-spaees. The line having been completed, the rule
 
 Ill 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 is drawn out and placed over or upon that Li tl om- 
 
 ..:, and bo on with the succeeding 
 
 t i ii<-~. until his com perhaps ten 
 
 middling-eized type. He I the rule 
 
 in front o line, and fixing his foi ol each hand 
 
 in front of tl IP t • i'i--t the 
 
 behind the firsl li les, rai ii 
 the whole out of i at once. He thus c 
 
 the stickful to the galley, disengaging the thumbs as he places 
 
 [alley, or against the lines thai 
 
 have been previously emptied ana placed thereon. Hansard. 
 
 Composing Machiiii's. Machines fot letting types, with- 
 
 inua] labour. U ms inventions for this pupose 
 
 I in G I Britain, Fr i in the United 
 
 Almost all of them, however, ha 
 
 pickpockets, each carrj ing seven of what arc called the" legs-of- 
 man, and seven fingers. At the place where the machine may 
 be said to commence operations, there is a drum, about 2 in. in 
 
 diameter, with H perforations amiss its nj >j >«-r surliuv, 1 over 
 
 this drum the paper, prei iously perforated, is made to (ravel by 
 j positive motion of l-10th of an inch every movement. Over 
 the top of the drum and paper there are 14 levers with pegs, and 
 which are always seeking to enter the perforations in tin- drum, 
 but are only able to enterthose which have corresponding per- 
 forations in the paper. One half of the perforations regulate the 
 legs-of-man, ana the otherthe fingers. Two perforations are 
 ■■ - made in the paper for the former, and from our to seven 
 for the latter, so that a pickpocket is capable of taking type the 
 same instant out ofaU the seven divisions of any pocket. On 
 the type being extracted it remains upon the travelling ring till 
 
 mackte's composing machine. 
 
 practical men to b i i <ra ilicated and expensive for general 
 is Mr. Mackie's, of the (l rringt n Guardian^ 
 engraving below. Mr. Mackiehasl a en- 
 don this machine several years, but in 1869 he announced 
 1 I act iallv completed it. It is divided into two pa I 
 11 ■ of these is a tiny instrument consisting of fourteen 1 
 by means of which narrow strips of paper are perforated >>\ 
 
 either in the printing offli ' el ewhere. The Composing Ma- 
 
 e proper consists, I , of three horizontal rings about 
 
 r and 2 in. br iad, the under one and the top one 
 
 rai rest. etc i ring 20 pockets are inserted, each of 
 
 whii ■ partments for seven different kinds of type, 
 
 and sufficiently o] i bottom to allow the proper apparatus 
 
 rtract the bottom type from any one, or from all the seven 
 
 divisions, as wanted. The middle or travelling ring has twi ntj 
 
 it has reached the delivery channel, when a pusher places it on 
 a travelling belt, a tew inches long, from which it is pushed down 
 a syphon spout, i letter upon another, ready for being justi- 
 fied in lines. A ring earning '20 pickpockets, each of which has 
 seven fingers, may extract Liu times seven types in one revolution. 
 The composing power of this machine is guaranteed at 1 2,01)0 
 an lemr. The perforating can be done at the rate of 10,000 per 
 hour, and the paper used many times. A proofis printed as the 
 type is being set. The machine is in daily use at the Warrington 
 Guardian office, driven by steam, but it may be driven by hand, 
 
 as shown in the engraving. The only machine which has 
 
 been practically tested in England for any considerable length of 
 time is one invented by Mr. Robert Hattersley, of Manchester, an 
 illustration of which will be found on the following page. The 
 great merits of this machine are, that it sets up the type very
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 11 
 
 expeditiously, is easily manipulated, occupies little room, and is 
 moderate in price. It stands on a space of 2 feet by 3, and is 
 worked by touching a keyboard, like that of a piano. Any in- 
 telligent operator, after a few weeks' practice, ought to be able 
 
 to compose at the rate of 
 from 4000 to 6000 types in 
 an hour, which is equal to 
 more than the work done 
 by three ordinary compo- 
 sitors. The type used is 
 of the ordinary kind. To 
 the speed of the machine 
 there is no limit whatever. 
 All depends on the dexter- 
 ity of the operator. The 
 price ranges from i'75, at 
 which sum an efficient in- 
 strument can be supplied. 
 The Printers' Ret/wler, of 
 September, 1869, says: — 
 
 "The Composing Machine 
 is now an accomplished fact. 
 Its precise construction is at 
 present not definitely settled, 
 but as certainly as the next 
 dozen years will come and 
 pass away is it that a Com- 
 posing Machine will be used 
 in every large printing office. 
 We cannot foresee the effect 
 of this invention, but we may say that it cannot fail to exert a very 
 important influence upon the question of the employment of women 
 a? compositors. The machine is specially suitable for female use." 
 
 We have taken some pains to ascertain the real merits of this 
 machine, and we can conscientiously endorse the claims of the 
 inventor, who is a practical mechanic, and has utilised his en- 
 gineering attainments in the avoidance of many technical defects 
 which have marred-nearly all the Composing Machines that have 
 hitherto been introduced. Simplicity is its leading characteristic, 
 and it is a merit of the highest importance. The type is worked 
 into the composing stick direct, and by only one motion — the 
 advantages of which are obvious. No steam-power is required ; 
 the mere pressure of the finger on the keys corresponding to the 
 various letters is all the motive power necessary. The matter is 
 set face upwards, is at all times under the immediate supervision 
 of the operator, and the lines can be as readily manipulated as 
 in the ordinary stick. The composing power is limited only 
 by the degree of dexterity attained by the operator, and the keys 
 have been worked at the rate of 26,000 letters per hour. There 
 are many other distinguishing features about Mr. Hattersley's 
 machine which entitle it to general adoption. 
 Composing Rule. — See Setting Evle. 
 Composing Stick. — An instrument in which letters are set, 
 or arranged in lines. They are made of various designs, and the 
 
 illustrations annexed 
 C SSIZ^ S ^'-*" 5 Sx^:. represent two of the 
 
 V Hkv most modern. Com- 
 
 posing Sticks of the 
 old-fashioned makes 
 consist <it the following parts : The plate, which forms the bed of 
 tlie instrument; the flanch, turned up from the plate at right 
 angles, and f ths of an inch high above the plate, through which 
 
 are bored holes, about 
 one inch apart from 
 each other, to receive 
 the screw; the head, 
 which is of the same 
 height as the flanch, 
 but much stronger, se- 
 curely fastened to it j 
 and the plate by rivets, dovetail, or brazing ; the slide, having an 
 opening in the lower leg, or part which rests against the flanch, 
 to admit the tenon ofthe nut, which is shouldered to fit into this 
 groove, and which nut is to receive the screw on its being passed 
 
 through one of the holes, to fasten the slide to any mea-sure that 
 may be required. This is done by means of the groove in the 
 slide being moved backward or forward on the screw and nut, 
 and by the screw being used at the hole convenient to the dis- 
 tance required, so as to set the slide at the point wanted from 
 the head. The descriptions of Composing Sticks figured in our 
 woodcuts are made to obviate the necessity of perforating the 
 flanch ; the slide being fixed to the desired distance from the 
 head, in the one case by a screw, and in the Other by a lever, so 
 arranged as to grasp tightly the slide and the flanch. The chief 
 advantage of this arrangement is, that an alteration of measure 
 can be made with the utmost facility. Composing Sticks are 
 made of iron, brass, or gun-metal ; the latter, owing to their not 
 being liable to corrosion, are the most suited for warm climates. 
 They are made of various lengths, from about four inches up to 
 ten or twelve; above that size, for broadsides, they are chiefly 
 made of mahogany. Sometimes the slide is split, and when the 
 two parts are put asunder, they can be adjusted to a short mea- 
 sure, so that the compositor can have his work proceeding in two 
 different measures at one time, without altering his stick. The 
 depth of English sticks is about two incites, but in France they 
 are much shallower, frequently holding no more than six lines. 
 The most usual defects in Composing Sticks are, the slides and 
 heads not being perfectly square to each other, and each of them 
 to the plate ; also, the slides and heads are sometimes not square, 
 or at right angles to the flanch. 
 
 Composition.— See Rollers. 
 
 Compositor. — The workman who composes type. 
 
 Compositors' Prices. — See Scale of Peices. 
 
 Cope's Press. — See Presses. 
 
 Copperplate Press. — Many improvements have been intro- 
 duced into this machine during the last few years. We are in- 
 debted to Mr. F. Ullmer. a large manufacturer, for the annexed 
 illustration of one of the most modern forms. 
 
 The Copperplate Press is em] ployed in taking oft' prints or impres- 
 sions from copper or steel plates, engraven, etched, or scraped, 
 as in mezzo-tint. It is a description ol rolling press, and consists 
 of two rollers or cylinders supported on a strong frame. These 
 rollers are moveable on their axes, one being plao d just above 
 the other. The table on which tho plate to be printed is laid
 
 12 
 
 PKTIOXAUY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers* Register 
 Supplement. 
 
 Hair. 
 
 Thin. 
 
 Thick. 
 
 Em. 
 
 En. 
 
 Quads. 
 
 runs between the two. The upper cylinder is turned round by 
 don its axis; the lower one is turned bj the 
 m of the upper on it- surface. These rollers axe so arranged 
 as to admit of a greater or less amount ot pressure. 
 Copporplato Printing. S I hinting. 
 
 Copy. Matter to be printed, whether a 1 k, pamphlet, cb- 
 
 ■, card, or any small or large job. It is of two kinds — 
 manuscript and reprint. 
 
 Copyright.— Tlte copyright of a work, engraving, or] 
 music, is secured for forty-two yi the author 
 
 or proprietor to his children, by payment ol Five Shillings into 
 Stationers' Hall for registration, and an equal .sum for a Certifl- 
 , and thi presentation of a com to the Stationers' Company, 
 and of four others to the British Museum unci the Universities. 
 
 i: 1 1; v iion, &c. 
 
 Correct. — For Correcting i •< Coebectdio. — For 
 
 Correcting pn ofe, set Pboof-be i 
 
 Correcting. — As soon as the pi id and given 
 
 out, the compositor should lay up his forme (unless his matter 
 is on b gallej I, and unlock it all round, being careful not to 
 
 ■ , i l ■ .iii- too loose, or the matter tuny be squabbled, or types 
 it at the ends of the lines. He should 
 then set up the types required for the cor- 
 rections oi lii- stick, with a few spai 
 a piece of paper, or, what is more handy, 
 in a small tray with partitions in it. simi 
 
 to the plan annexed. Taking his bodkin in bis right hand, the 
 corrector should place the point of it against the end of the line 
 he wi i rrect, and with the middle finger of his left hand 
 
 it altogether, high enough 
 
 Lve him a clear view of the spacing. He can then changi 
 faulty letter, and make the necessary alterations in the spacing, 
 befor tlir line. By this method the type will not be 
 
 injured, as it so often is when the bodkin is forced into the sides 
 or heads, and regularity in the spacing may be secured, as well 
 as much time saved, in tables, or in any matter in which rules 
 
 Srevent the type being raised as directed, the letters must be 
 rami out by the bodkin, and great car.' will be necessary to 
 avoid injuring the types. The point should be stuck into the 
 . .it the letter, between Hie beard and the face, drawing it 
 ive 1 o er lei tens to allow of taking bold 
 the forefinger and thumb of the left hand. In this 
 operation as an po ible should be made with the 
 
 of the bodkin, in order that it may not touch any of the 
 surrounding types, as a trifling graze will injure the faces of the 
 letters near it. 
 
 Correctors of the Press.— See Readebs. 
 
 Coventry. — When a workman doesnot conform to the rules 
 of tic Chapel, he is sent to Coventry ; that is, no person i.- allowed 
 to Bpeak to him, on any consideration, apart from business*mat- 
 ters, until he pays adue regard to the rules. 
 
 Cramped. - Work is said to be cramped when whites are 
 i - pages avoided, and the matte: squ i 
 more closely than usual, to get a certain quantity of matter into 
 a given nuni'i.-r of pages. A compositor cramps Ilia matter when 
 In-.. twhil - in proportion to the open character of 
 
 hi.- work. 
 
 Cross. — The long and short i ofiron, 
 
 crossing each other at right angles, and dovetaili d into th 
 
 dividing it into four parts. The short cross is the broadest, and 
 has : i1 for the point- to fall in. 
 
 Crotchets.— Otherwise brackets [ ], are used to enclose a 
 : or sentence intended to supply some .or to rec- 
 
 tify some mistake. 
 
 Cut-in Notes.— Side notes, inserted in the text, the lines of 
 whicl tened to receive them. 
 
 Cuts. — s " Wood Engbavings. 
 
 Cut the Line.— -A term used among compositors, to signify 
 leaving-off work. Generally, when several compositors are en- 
 
 gaged up. m a work, and one of them is out of cony or letter, 
 l„,l,. of them are expected to "cut the line "—i.e., leave 
 off work when he has finished the line he is then composing, — 
 and all -land idle till a fresh -apply arrives. It is a silly prac- 
 tice, and we are glad to hear that compositors in many houses 
 doned the system. Because one compositor is out of 
 
 copy or letter, it is no re why he should demand that all 
 
 the others Bhould leave their work, especially as it often happens 
 it is near the end of a volume. 
 
 Cutting tho Prisket.— Cutting off those parts of the paper 
 which would prevent the tonne being completely printed. 
 
 Cylindrical Printing.— See I'uinting. 
 
 D. 
 
 Dagger.— When used as a reference mark, the Dagger ( t ) 
 
 stand.- next in order alter the star. <S'ee OBELISK. 
 
 Dances. — See Fobme Dances. 
 
 Dash.— A mark ( — ) signifying, in general, that a sentence is 
 broken oil' abruptly. For its use, see Punctuation. 
 
 Dead Horso. — When a compositor or pressman has drawn 
 more money on account than he has actually earned, he is said 
 to be "horsing it," and until he has done enough work in the 
 next week to "cover the amount overdrawn, he is understood to 
 be working a ''dead horse." 
 
 Dedication.— The Dedication, which generally follows the 
 title, is properly set in capitals and small capitals, displayed in 
 long and short line-. The name of the person to whom the work 
 is dedicated should always be in capitals, and the name of the 
 author also hi capitals, but of a smaller size. 
 
 Degener's Press. — In the primitive days of typography, 
 the time-honoured but unwieldy hand press was the only appli- 
 ance demanded by the jobbing printer. But the necessity has 
 sprung it] i within the last generation of a machine more compact 
 in form and convenient in operation, and one providing, at the 
 same time, for a very material increase of speed. The extension 
 of advertising by means of cards and circulars, called for presses 
 specially adapted for the rapid production of that class of work. 
 Stimulated by this demand, various engineers have invented dif- 
 ferent jobbing machines, one of which is here illustrated. It is 
 
 the invention of an American, Frederick Otto Degener, who in- 
 troduced it in 1860, under the name of "The Liberty." In this 
 press are combined the important necessities of simplicity and 
 Strength, with the ability to print, at the utmost speed, work of 
 the finest quality, with freedom from all danger to the operator. 
 The type is fastened, in a chase, on to the table, which is vertical, 
 and the paper to be printed is placed beneath a platen, similarly 
 inclined. On the two meeting, the impjression is produced. The 
 d i-. according to the ability of the operator, from 1000 to 
 2,500 impressions per hour.
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 13 
 
 Dele. — The second person, singular, imperative mood, of the 
 Latin verbrfe/eo, to blot out, to expunge. •'See Proof-Rkaium;. 
 
 Demy. — The name of a size of paper, 22^ in. x 17Jin. See 
 Dimensions of Paper. 
 
 Descending Letters. — The letters so called are — //, j p, 
 a, y, of the lower-case. In Italic founts, however, the letter f 
 is both ascending and descending. 
 
 DeviL— Otherwise, "Printers' Devil," is a term applied to 
 the boy who does the drudgery 'work of a printing-office. In 
 former years it was commonly used; of late it has become 
 almost obsolete in London, owing to the number of boys em- 
 ployed. On newspapers, the boy who waits on the editor for copy 
 is generally termed "the Devil." It is more frequently employed 
 by provincial printers. There is an old tradition concerning the 
 relations supposed to exist between one of the first printers and 
 his Satanic majesty. When the Bibles of Faust appeared before 
 the world, they were designed to imitate those which were com- 
 monly sold as MSS. Faust attempted the sale of his books at 
 Paris, and he considered it to be his interest to conceal the art 
 of printing with moveable types. He was enabled to sell his 
 books at sixty crowns each, while the scribes demanded five 
 hundred for theirs. This circumstance excited universal astonish- 
 ment, and still more when he produced copies as fast as they 
 were wanted, and even lowered his price. The uniformity of 
 the copies increased the popular wonder still further. Informa- 
 tions were given to the authorities against him, as a magician ; 
 and, on searching his lodgings, a great number of copies were 
 found. The red ink — and Faust's red ink is peculiarly brilliant 
 — which embellished his copies was said to be his blood; and 
 it was solemnly adjudged that he was in league with the devil. 
 Faust was at length obliged, to save himself from a bonfire, to 
 reveal his art to the authorities, who then discharged him from 
 all prosecution in consideration of this useful invention. Such 
 is the tradition, but authorities on the early history of typo- 
 graphy differ as to its authenticity. 
 
 Diamond. — The name of a type a size smaller than 'Pearl. 
 The number of ems to the foot are as follows, according to the 
 founders named : — 
 
 Caslon, 204; Figgins, 205 ; Reed k Fox, 210; Patent Type Founding 
 Company, 203$. 
 
 A size known as Pearl-Diamond is also cast, the proportions 
 of which to the foot are : — 
 
 Caslon, 191 ; Figgins, 192 : Reed & Fox, 197 ; Patent Type Founding 
 Company, 191. 
 
 Diamond Printing Machine.— See Duncan's Machine. 
 
 Diaeresis. — The diasresis (See Accents) placed over a vowel 
 denotes in general that that vowel forms a syllable, and does 
 not constitute part of one with another vowel preceding or fol- 
 lowing it. Tims, aerial is pronounced a-e-rial. So preeminent, 
 and similar words, where the two vowels are part of two dif- 
 ferent syllables, are sometimes distinguished by the diaeresis; 
 but the usual plan is to insert a hyphen between the two vow els, 
 as in co-vperate. 
 
 Dimensions of Paper. — The following table gives the 
 dimensions in inches of the various sizes of paper, and the dif- 
 ferent divisions into which the respective sheets may be cut : — 
 
 Dimensions of Paper, continued — 
 
 Double Super Eoyal. 
 
 Broadside 40 x27i 
 
 Long Folio 40 X13| 
 
 Long Thirds ... 40 X 9$ 
 
 Double Eoyal. 
 
 Broadside 40 x25 
 
 Long Folio 40 Xl2^ 
 
 Long Thirds ... 40 X &f 
 
 Double Demy. 
 
 Broadside 35^x22* 
 
 Long Folio 35^X1 if 
 
 Long Thirds ... 35^x 7 5 
 
 Double Large Post. 
 
 Broadside 33 x21 
 
 Long Folio 33 XlO* 
 
 Long Thirds ... 33 X 7" 
 
 Double Crown. 
 
 Broadside 30 X20 
 
 Long Folio 30 xlO 
 
 Long Thirds ... 30 X 6§ 
 
 Double Post. 
 
 Broadside 31 Xl9 
 
 Long Folio 31 X 9§ 
 
 Long Thirds ... 31 X of 
 
 Double Foolscap. 
 
 Broadside 27 xl7 
 
 Long Folio 27 X 8*. 
 
 Long Thirds ... 27 X f>f 
 
 Double Pott. 
 
 Demy, continued— 
 
 Broad Thirds ... 17|x 7JS 
 
 Broad Quarto ... 174x 5| 
 
 Quarto (Common)... 11 Jx 8jj 
 
 Octavo (Common)... 8Jx 5jj 
 
 Broadside 
 
 25 X154 
 
 Large Post 
 
 
 Long Folio ... 
 
 25 X 7! 
 25 X 5j 
 
 Broadside 
 
 21 X16J 
 
 Long Thirds 
 
 Long Folio ... 
 
 21 X 8J 
 
 
 
 Long Thirds 
 
 21 X f>*. 
 
 Imperial. 
 
 
 Broad Folio 
 
 16iXlO£ 
 
 Broadside 
 
 30 x22* 
 
 Broad Thirds 
 
 16*X 7 
 
 Long Folio ... 
 
 30 XllJ 
 
 Broad Quarto 
 
 16£x 5J 
 
 Long Thirds 
 
 30 X 7* 
 
 Quarto (Common)... 
 
 3| 
 
 Broad Folio 
 
 221 X 15 
 
 Octavo (Common I... 
 
 8*X 5J 
 
 Broad Thirds 
 
 22ixl0 
 
 
 
 Quarto 
 
 22| X 74 • 
 
 Crown. 
 
 
 Quarto ( Common ) . . . 
 
 15 Xlll 
 
 Broadside 
 
 20 y\~, 
 
 Octavo (Common)... 
 
 iii... 71 
 
 Long Folio ... 
 
 20 x 7* 
 
 
 
 Long Thirds 
 
 20 x 5 
 
 Super Eoyal. 
 
 Broad Folio 
 
 is xin 
 
 Broadside 
 
 27*x20 
 
 Broad Thirds 
 
 15 X 6J 
 
 Long Folio ... 
 
 27ixl0 
 
 Broad Quarto 
 
 15 X 5 
 
 Long Thirds 
 
 27Jx C3 
 
 Quarto (Common)... 
 
 10 X 71 
 
 Broad Folio 
 
 20 Xl3| 
 
 Octavo (Common)... 
 
 7A... •"> 
 
 Broad Thirds 
 
 20 X 9| 
 
 
 
 Broad Quarto 
 
 20 x 6| 
 
 Post. 
 
 
 Quarto ( Common ).. . 
 
 13|X10 
 
 Broadside 
 
 19 Xl-U 
 
 Octavo (Common)... 
 
 10 X 6f 
 
 Long Folio ... 
 
 19 X 7§ 
 19 X 5j 
 
 
 
 Long Thirds 
 
 Eoyal. 
 
 
 Broad Folio 
 
 15* X 9J 
 
 Broadside 
 
 25 X20 
 
 Broad Thirds 
 
 154 X 6$ 
 
 Long Folio 
 
 25 XlO 
 
 Broad Quarto 
 
 ISA X 43 
 
 Long Thirds 
 
 25 X 6^ 
 
 Quarto (Common)... 
 Octavo (Common)... 
 
 9*x 7| 
 
 Broad Folio 
 
 20 X12* 
 
 7jX 4| 
 
 Broad Thirds 
 
 20 X 8$ 
 
 
 
 Broad Quarto 
 
 20 X 6j 
 
 Foolscap. 
 
 
 Quarto (Common)... 
 Octavo (Common)... 
 
 12JX10 
 10 X 6J 
 
 Broadside ... 
 Long Folio ... 
 
 17 X13J 
 17 X 6J 
 
 
 
 Long Thirds 
 
 17 X 4{ 
 13ix 8J 
 
 Medium. 
 
 
 Broad Folio 
 
 Broadside 
 
 24 X19 
 
 Broad Thirds 
 
 ■ 
 13|x 4i 
 
 Long Folio 
 
 29 X 9i 
 
 Broad Quarto 
 
 Long Thirds 
 
 24 X fii 
 
 Quarto (Common)... 
 
 8*X (ij 
 
 Broad Folio 
 
 19 X12 
 
 Octavo ( Common ) . . . 
 
 6|x 4J 
 
 Broad Thirds 
 
 19 X 8 
 
 
 
 Broad Quarto 
 
 19 X 6 
 
 Pott. 
 
 
 Quarto (Common)... 
 
 12 X 9* 
 
 Broadside 
 
 1 ">AX 121 
 
 Octavo (Common)... 
 
 9JX 6 
 
 Long Folio ... 
 
 15JX fii 
 
 
 
 Long Thirds 
 
 15§x 41 
 
 Demy. 
 
 
 Broad Folio 
 
 12j X 7j 
 
 Broadside 
 
 22*xl7J 
 
 Broad Thirds 
 
 12|x 5| 
 
 Long Folio ... 
 
 22 J x 8£ 
 
 Broad Quarto 
 
 12* X 3| 
 
 Long Thirds 
 
 22* x 51 
 
 Quarto (Common)... 
 
 7jX 6J 
 6iX 31 
 
 Broad Folio 
 
 17jxll£ 
 
 Octavo (Common)... 
 
 Dipthongs. — A dipthong is a coalition of two vowels into 
 one syllable, as «>, oc. The English language is. happily, unen- 
 cumbered by these combinations of letters. Some printers, how- 
 ever, use them in such words as archteoloi/y, m< dia rul, matin n re, 
 &c, forgetting that <? and ce do not differ in sound from the 
 simple vowel e; they are, in such words, utterly worthless, and 
 no better than a mere pedantic encumbrance. They have already 
 been excised from such words as cemetery, celestial, economical, 
 ether, kc, but they may be retained in proper names, as Ctrtar, 
 Phoenicia, &c. 
 
 Direction Paper. — See Booewose. 
 
 Direction Word. A word formerly placed at the bottom 
 of a page, on the right hand, to show the connexion with the 
 page following. Directions are now only occasionally used in 
 Law Work. — Sec Catch Word. 
 
 Dis. — A familiar abbreviation of Distribution. 
 
 Distributing. — The process of replacing the types in their
 
 14 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 ctive boxes in tl u order to bi Fhi 
 
 w,.rk i- done very rapidh by the compositor, who, placing a 
 rule or lead at the bead oi the matter, takes up what is termed 
 a handful, and, keepi ice of the letter towards him, 
 
 with the nick on the upper side, rests one end oi th rule or 
 lead against the ball of the thumb of the left liana, pressing 
 
 ither end with the third finger, steadies the matter with 
 his forefinger. He thus has the right hand at liberty, with the 
 thumb and two fingers of whii i one or more words 
 
 from the uppermost line and drops the several 1. ■iters into their 
 respective boxes. It is usual to wo\ matter before distribution, 
 
 i: slightly cohesive, the o] erat bi ing performed 
 
 with more facility in that state than when dry, and with less 
 chant f the matter being broken, Only so much mould 
 
 iken up .it one Id can be conveniently held in the lefl 
 
 hand; too much tires the wrist, and is in danger of going 
 into pie. The compositor should be careful not to throw letters 
 into the case with I i wnwards, as it is apt to batter 
 
 them: neither should he distribute until his case ia too mil. as 
 the sorts are apt to overflow into the boxes beneath, thereby 
 
 ting pie and causing errors to appear in bis composition. 
 
 lie should not care bo much for distributing quickly as correctlj 
 
 expedition will eon,,, by practice much time being lost bj 
 
 com;- "i e dirtj case. Many lose time by not carefully 
 
 word in their fingers before distributing it ; by 
 
 n this may be avoided, and the workman become 
 
 an expeditious as well as clean distributor. The learner should 
 
 • re iietueen his tinkers than he ran conveniently 
 
 hold; if possible, always taking an entire word or words, ami 
 
 keeping the left hand slightly inclined, so that the face of the 
 letter may come immediately under his eye. By practice he 
 
 will lie, ie so well acquainted with the appearance oi the 
 
 heard of the type, that he will be able to know what word he 
 has in his fingers with the very cursory view he may havi 
 lifting it. In distributing, the utmost care should also be taken 
 to plaee the different spaces in their proper boxes; mixing them 
 improperly is a characteristic of b careless or inferior workman. 
 In winter time ositors have a habit of wet tine matter 
 
 with hot water, and, alter distribution, of placing their eases in 
 trout of a tire to dry the letter. Type thus heated should not be 
 handled until perfectly Cold, as the antimony used in its conipo- 
 position gives off a noxious vapour, which affects the respiration 
 and the smews of the person manipulating the type. 
 
 Distributing Machine. A machine for performing auto- 
 matically 'la- operation of type distributing. At the present 
 tine- . we believe, only two descriptions in use in this 
 
 country - Mackie'- and Hattersley's. An illustration of the latter 
 
 is annexed. It may bl de- 
 scribed briefly as being the 
 reverse of the com- 
 posing machine (q.v.) The 
 matter is placed in a galley, 
 whence it enter-, in long 
 Hues, upon a bridge. The 
 operator, n matter 
 
 as it approaches a certain 
 
 point, touches the keyboard, 
 
 and tin' letter which answers 
 
 to tiie key pressed instantly 
 is conveyed to a receptacle 
 
 appropriated to that parti- 
 cular letter. By mean- of 
 this instrument on,- operator 
 can supply set-up or " class- 
 ed type " sufficient (or two 
 • sing machines. By a 
 modification it may lie used 
 tor distributing into the or- 
 dinary cases. A column of 
 . having been slid into 
 tli" galley, it is placed in 
 the machine. Bj the aid of 
 a simple apparatus s,. v ,.ral 
 are formed into one, there being no handling of the type, 
 
 ■ 
 
 which is conveniently under the eyes of the operator, who, 
 reading the matter, presses the corresponding keys, and the 
 mechanism in connection therewith causes ditlerenl characters 
 
 to de ml from a given point to their respective receivers. The 
 
 • ini'iit is such that the different keys bum be pressed in 
 
 rapid succession, without waiting the arrival of each character 
 in its own receiver: as. although several types may he mi the 
 
 pas-age simultaneously, self-acting mechanism directs each into 
 
 its particular r iver. The machine works ordinary type, no 
 
 special nicking being required, from Long Primer to Ruby in- 
 clusive. In conjunction with Hattersley's C posing Machine, 
 
 the Distributor occupies a space about thai taken up by one 
 ordinary double frame. Its price is about £100, 
 Mr.Mackie, proprietor of the Warrington Guardian and other 
 
 nevvspapei , ha invented several Distributing Machines. Some 
 years ago, be publicly exhibited one in .Manchester, which was 
 
 examined and well spoken of by the trade, it consisted of a comb 
 
 fOrmed Of Steel lleedleS, which Clltered llotcllCS ill tllC type. All 
 
 the a's were notched the l-.'S2 of an inch from the tace of the 
 letter, and on its hack; the b's --'■'■-. the r'x o-".l'. and so on, 
 thirty letters being thus classed on the hack, and thirty (caps., 
 \i -. i mi the front. On a row of 240 letters being laid before the 
 comb, the points of the needles entered the notches in the a's; 
 a forward motion was then given to the comb which, of course, 
 carried with it all the a's. The motion forward was just enough 
 to draw out the "'<. but the motion backwards was l-:i'.' of an 
 inch more, so that the comb fixed upon the b's next time, and 
 so on while a letter lasted, each time retreating 1-M2 of an inch 
 further than before. The caps.,&c, notched on the front (print- 
 ers' nick side),. presenting no notch to the needles, were left, 
 and. when sufficiently numerous, were reversed and distributed 
 hv themselves. The difficulty Mr. Mackie met with from types 
 wanting to go, through the friction of tin- comb and of their 
 fellows, when their turn had not arrived, delayed and tried him 
 tot- a long time. At length, he found a remedy in a row of 
 horizontal retarding needles, placed opposite the type, and 
 working rather stilt' between brasses, mien a type was posi- 
 tively seized by a needle dropping into its notch, the forward 
 force of the comb was enough to push the retarding needle out 
 of the way. but not in the case of mere friction. In fact, " the 
 weakest went to the wall." The a's, 6's, c's, &C., as drawn out, 
 were drop! over a ledge into a box with the necessary divisions, 
 which travelled at a corresponding speed to the machine. The 
 -p.ed ol this Distributor is purely a question of size of comb. 
 Thirty-two backward and forward motions of the comb are easily 
 made in a minute, and those motions distribute all the lower- 
 case, however numerous; as it all the type be, say, a's all are 
 taken at once; if all =\\ none are taken until the thirty-second 
 turn. If distributing for hand-setting were necessary, this kind 
 ,,t machine could distribute 20,000 to 30,000 an hour. We may 
 add that the cost of notching the type is not over threepence 
 per pound. A second Distributor of .Mr. Mackie's, not yet shown 
 to the public, is intended to distribute type on the Jlat ready 
 tor his composing machine. It also requires the type to be 
 notched; but up to the present time (1869) constant accuracy 
 has not been secured, owing to inferior workmanship. A third 
 distributor, by .Mr. Mackie, dispenses with notched type, and 
 distributes tin- common letter by merely altering his Composing 
 .Machine {q.v.). The twenty " pockets'' in it are removed, save 
 In that the type to 'be distributed is placed, and every 
 "pickpocket" as it passes by, takes the bottom type and de- 
 posits it at that part of the ring which is opposite to the brass 
 shelf to which it belongs. Upon that -lull a "pusher" at once 
 pushes it out of the way of the next comers. We need only 
 add that these movements are directed by perforations in paper, 
 as in the case of his Composer. Mr.Mackie expects that this 
 will supersede his notched type one, notches, of course, being 
 an objection. 
 
 Another Distributing Machine has lately been patented by 
 Mr. Kastembein, in Paris, which has been pronounced there as 
 a decided success. It is connected with a Composing Machine 
 by the same inventor; but we will only here allude to the dis- 
 tributing part, as is given in the prospectus. The matter for 
 distribution is placed in a frame, secured by a ride and ratchet
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 15 
 
 slide. The last line is raised by a "T" slide, which poshes it into a 
 passage, where the line advances towards the left hand by press- 
 ing a lever actuated by the motion of the finger keys. A mirror 
 is placed in position over the lines to enable the operator to read 
 them quickly as they advance, whereupon he depresses the 
 corresponding finger-key to cause the following action to take 
 place: — The rod of the finger-key causes a bell crank to turn, 
 which, moving back the slide, uncovers the aperture of the 
 vertical or inclined passage, corresponding with the said finger- 
 key, at the same time, a small lug, fixed on a rod, causes the 
 lever to turn, which moves a small wedge-shaped door by means 
 of levers. This door opens the passage and allows the type to 
 fall, which falling is effected at the same time as the above 
 operation, by the following mechanism : — The tail of each finger- 
 key in being raised causes a transfer bar to be raised vertically, 
 which itself causes the levers to oscillate. These levers, in 
 turning, also turn a spindle and arm, which causes the slide to 
 move forward by means of the lever; the slide, in being thus 
 moved forward, places the extreme left-hand type over the 
 opening of the passage and causes it to fall into the same. The 
 slide, which has receded, allows the type to fall into the fixed 
 type box corresponding therewith. All the above movements 
 are effected instantaneously and simultaneously as soon as the 
 workman, after reading the letter of the last type, depresses the 
 corresponding finger-key. This having been done, the workman 
 releases the finger-key, winch allows of the backward motion of 
 the slide into its original position, whereby the sorted type is 
 caused to pass into its respective boxes. There are as many type 
 boxes as letters and characters, that is to say, ninety-six, corres- 
 ponding with the same number of moveable type boxes, which 
 are removed as soon as they are full. Each passage corresponds 
 with two fixed type boxes, one to the right and one to the left. 
 A Sap or door establishes a communication between the said 
 passage and either the right-hand or left-hand box, according as 
 it is turned over to the one side or the other — such motion of the 
 flap being effected by the workman by means of a pedal and 
 levers. For this purpose the types are divided into two classes 
 — one comprising the letters much in use, while the other in- 
 cludes those little used, and one of each class is marked upon 
 each of the finger-keys ; and these pairs of letters are so arranged 
 in connection with the passages and the type boxes that for 
 sorting a much-used letter into its type box the operator has only 
 to depress the finger-key; while for sorting the less-used letters 
 the operator has to depress both the finger-key and the pedal. 
 In the first case the type falls into the right-hand box, and in 
 the second case into the left-hand box. For increasing at will 
 the size of the upper orifice of the passage two finger-keys are 
 arranged to regulate the same by means of the spring levers. 
 
 Division of Words. — In the process of composition it is 
 frequently found that a complete line cannot be formed without 
 making use of a portion of a word. It then becomes the duty 
 of the workman to consider how he may divide the word with 
 judgment and propriety. The art of dividing words is called 
 Syllabication, and it has engaged the attention of most of the 
 lexicographers and grammarians. Although a large number of 
 formal rules have been drawn up to guide the compositor in this 
 respect, the following, by Lindley Murray, contain all that is 
 practically necessary to be borne in mind: — 
 
 1. A single consonant between two vowels must be joined to the 
 latter syllable; as it-light, bri-dal, re-source; except the letter x, as 
 ex- ist, ex- amine ; and except, likewise, words compounded, as up- on, 
 vn- even, dis- ease. 
 
 2. Two consonants proper to begin a word, must not be separated ; 
 as fa- Me, sli-Jle. But when they come between two vowels, and are 
 such as cannot begin a word, they must be divided; as, ut-most, 
 un- der, in- sect, er- ror, cof-fn. 
 
 If the preceding syllable is short, the consonants must be separated ; 
 as, cits- tard, pub- lie, gos- liny. 
 
 3. When three consonants meet in the middle of a word, if they 
 can begin a word, and the preceding vowel begin long, they are not 
 to be separated; as, de- throne, de- stray. But when the vowel of the 
 preceding syllable is pronounced short, one of the consonants always 
 belongs to that syllable, as, dis- tract, dis- prove, dis- train. 
 
 4. When three or four consonants, which are not proper to begin 
 a word, meet between two vowels, the fir.-t consonant is always 
 kept with the first syllable in the division; as, ab- stain, com-plete, 
 • in- broil, daw-dler, dap-ple, con-strain. 
 
 5. Two vowels, not being a dipt hong, must be divided into separate 
 syllables ; as, era- el, deni- ul soci- ety. 
 
 A dipthong immediately preceding a vowel is to be separated from 
 it; as, roy-al, pow- er, jew- el. 
 
 6. Compounded words must be traced into the simple word- ol 
 which they are composed; as, ice-house, glow-worm, over-power, 
 never- the- less. 
 
 7. Grammatical and other particular terminations are generally 
 separated; as, teach- est, teach- eth, teach- ing, teach- er, contend- est, 
 great- er, wretch- ed, good- ness, free- dom, false- hood. 
 
 Two consonants which form but one sound are never separated ; 
 as, e-cho, fa-ther, pro-phet, an-chor, hi- shop. They are to be con- 
 sidered as a single letter. 
 
 8. In derivative words, the additional syllables are separated ; as, 
 street- er, sweet- est, sweet- ly ; learn- etl, learn-eth, learn-tng; dis-like, 
 mis-lead, un-even; call-ed, roll-er, dress-ing; gold-en, bolt-ed, be- 
 liev-er, pleas- ing. 
 
 Exceptions. — When the derivative word doubles the single letter 
 of the primitive, one of these letters is joined to the termination; as, 
 beg, beg-gar ; fat,fat-ter; bed, bed-ding. 
 
 When the additional syllable is preceded by c or g soft, the torj 
 is added to that syllable; as, of-fen-ces, eotta-ges, pro-noun- eer, in- 
 dulging; ra-cing,pla-ced, ran-ger, chun- ging, chan-ged. 
 
 When the preceding or single vowel is long, the consonant, if single, 
 is joined to the termination; as, ba-ker, bit- king, ho- plug, bro-kin, 
 po-ker, bo- try, tori- ter, sla- vish, min- ced, sa- ved. 
 
 The termination y is not to be placed alone; as, san-iy, gras-sy, 
 du-ty, diis-tn, mos-sy, fros-ty,hea-dy, moo-dy; except, dough- y, snow -y, 
 string- //. and a few others. ' But even in these exceptions it would be 
 proper to avoid beginning a fine with the termination y. 
 
 There are methods, differing in some respects from the pre- 
 ceding, for dividing Latin, Greek, and French respectively, 
 which readers acquainted with the languages will understand. 
 
 Wilson's "Treatise on English Punctuation " contains several 
 additional rides for the division of English words, which are 
 of value : — 
 
 It is desirable that compound and derivative words should, at the 
 ends of lines, be divided in such a manner as to indicate their prin- 
 cipal parts. Thus, school-master is preferable to schoolmas-ter, dis- 
 approve to disap- prove, resent-ment to re-sentment, nrtho- doxy to or- 
 thodoxy; though, as regards the analyses of words into syllables, the 
 latter is unobjectionable. From the narrowness of the printed line, 
 however, in some books, the principle recommended cannot always 
 be adhered to. 
 
 The terminations Hon, sion, real, tial, and many others, formerly 
 pronounced as two syllables, but now only as one, must not be divided 
 eithi r in spelling or at the end of a line. 
 
 A syllable consisting of only one letter, as the a in creation, should 
 not commence a line. This word would be better divided crea- tion ; 
 and so all others of a similar kind. But such a syllable, coming 
 immediately after a primitive, is by some printers brought to the 
 beginning, as consider- able. 
 
 A line of print must not end with the first syllable of a word when 
 it consists of a single letter, as a- bide, e-normous, nor begin with the 
 last syllable when it is formed of onlv two letters, as nation- al. 
 teach- er, similar- ly. For regard should be had to the principles of 
 taste and beauty as well as to the laws of syllabication. 
 
 Three or more successive fines should not end with a hyphen. A 
 little cave on the part of the compositor will in general prevent an 
 appearance so offensive to a good eye. Divisions, indeed, except for 
 purposes of spelling and lexicography, should take place as seldom 
 as possible. 
 
 Doe.— A familiar abbreviation of " document :" i.e.. the memo- 
 randum a compositor keeps of the quantity of work he has 
 executed. 
 
 Dotted Quadrats.— These are cast, similarly to leaders, 
 in sizes from one to four ems, but with the dots much lighter
 
 II) 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The FrinterB* Register. 
 Supplemont. 
 
 and closer together, so as to imitate dotted brass rule, which 
 they are intended to supersede for certain classes of work. They 
 rery useful for setting collecting-cards, as a number of rows 
 cm quickly be set up, with similar rows of whites, allowing 
 so manj two ems or I squares and the remai 
 
 ich ii name can be written, rhe 
 required number of lines having been set, the compositor 1ms 
 then only I" drop in the column rules and the table is com- 
 plefc . ition of the beading. 
 
 Double. When a word, line, or sentence i- composed twice 
 over, it ^ called a"double." In pn I is aid to 
 
 be doubled when insti id clear impres ion being upon it, 
 
 aces "i two indistinct 
 
 Double-Cylinder. See Machines. 
 
 Double Dagger. \ reference mark, thus ( J ), which stands 
 third in order, and follows the dagger or obelisk. 
 
 Double Atlas. A size of drawing paper. The sheet is 
 < 31 J in. 
 
 Doublo Letters. Two letters cast on one Bhank, as ■•■••. 
 
 H. ri. &c si. i.i 
 
 Double Narrow. \ piece of furniture equal in breadth to 
 two nan.." quotations, or six picas. See IVusiTrni;. 
 
 Double Pica. — T J a type one size smaller than 
 
 two-line Pica, and equal in depth to two Small-Pics b 
 ide to tliis body. 
 
 Draw. When a forme ha- I n badly lucked up or the lines 
 
 insufficiently justified, the action of the roller frequently causes 
 
 them to be drawn up, either causing an " out," if 
 the letter is removed altogether, or a batter if it rails upon the 
 face of the forme. Care on 1 i pat of the compositor effectually 
 
 this accident. 
 
 Dressing a Chase.— Fitting a chase or tonne with the 
 proper furniture, sidesticks, and quoins. See M ntuix. 
 
 Drive out. Matter is driven out when it is set widely, or 
 branched out, Manj compositors indulge in a greedy habit of 
 
 spacing their matter widely near tl nd of paragraph, in order 
 
 to drive it out so as to secure a fat breakbne. 'fids system is 
 reprehensible, as it disfigures the page, and should be checked 
 by i marking it back again on the proof. When, by 
 
 ions in an author's proof, the sheet is ovi 
 the surplus lines at the end are termed "driven-out matter." 
 
 Dropping out. When any letters, spaces, or quadrats drop 
 ■ ul of a forme after it i> locked u|> and being lifted from the 
 imposing surfai The causes of this are, had 
 
 justification, some of the leads riding, furniture binding, wrong 
 founts. &c. 
 
 Duodecimo. The size of a book usually written " 12mo." 
 It is formed by folding a sheet oi pap.] into twelve portions 
 or leaves, making 24 pp. See Imposing. 
 
 Dry Colours. Of late years, the system has been adopted, 
 ■with great success, of producing superior qualities of coloured 
 printing inks by mixing fine dry colours with varnish, The 
 following particulars are extracted from the American Printer, 
 the only typographical manual, we believe, thai refers to this 
 interesting subject - 
 
 1. No more should be mixed at a time than will be required for the 
 
 job in hand. 
 
 2. Coloured inks -should be mixed upon a slate or marble slab, by 
 means of the muller, and never upon an iron or other metallic table. 
 Tie- • ting, bould be thoroughly clean, and perfectly 
 free from the slightest soil or trace of other ink-. 
 
 3. For working coloured ink- the roller should ndt be to i hard, and 
 
 should p a biting, elastic face. When change of colour is re 
 
 quired it should be Cleaned with turpentine, and a moisf sponge 
 passed over the face, allowing a few minutes for the roller to dry 
 before resuming if 
 
 4. Various shades may be produced by observing the following 
 direct] ais: — 
 
 Bright Tink I.s-k. — Use Carmine or Crimson Lake. 
 
 Ini SCARLET.— To Carmine add a little deep Vermillion. 
 
 BRIQKT Ran.— To pale Vermillion, add Carmine. 
 
 In i e LlLAC — To Cobalt Blue, add a little Carmine. 
 
 I'm i i.n lc. — To Carmine, add a little Cobalt Blue. 
 
 Bbiqet Pals Blue. — Cobalt. 
 
 Dbep Bronze Hi.uk. — Chinese. 
 
 Greek To pair Chrome', add Chinese Blue; any shade can be 
 
 obtained by increasing or diminishing either colour. 
 Embralb Greek.— Mix pale Chrome with a little Chinese Blue. 
 
 then add the Emerald until the tint is satisfactory. 
 AMBER. — To pale Chrome, add a Ut.tle Carmine. 
 Deep Brown. — Burnt Umber, with a Little Scarlet Lake. 
 I'm a: Brown. — Burnt Sienna; a rich shade i- made by adding a 
 
 little Lake as above. 
 
 Duncan's Machines. — A description of letter-press print- 
 ing machines invented by Mr. George Duncan, an engineer, 
 
 of Liverpool, who claims to be the inventor Of two-colour 
 
 printing machines, and believes that, by his machines, printing 
 in two colours without removing the sheet is as easy of accom- 
 plishment as printing in one colour only, and at a very material 
 saving of cost. The most exact register is secured, and the 
 distributing arrangements are very effective- three rollers pass- 
 ing completely over the forme, thereby securing perfect dis- 
 tribution and uniformity of colour. The other descriptions of 
 machines produced by the same manufacturer are called the 
 " Diamond " Single Cylinder Printing Machines, and " Little 
 Diamond" Jobbing Machine. An engraving of the latter is 
 here given : — 
 
 Each of these machines is characterised by most important 
 improvements. 
 
 Dusting Colours. — These are similar to those described 
 above under the heading Dry Colours, only they are grotmd 
 in a mill to a very fine powder. In using them, however, for 
 printing purposes, instead of being mixed with the varnish, 
 they are dusted over it; that is to say, the forme is rolled over 
 with varnish, as with ordinary ink, and after the impression is 
 pulled the colours are dusted over it with a broad camel's-hair 
 brush or a clean hare's foot; some pressmen use wool. When 
 the colours are well dried on the impression, the superfluous 
 powder can be cleared off the sheet,
 
 The Printers' It?;nster. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 IT 
 
 E. 
 
 Ear of the Frisket. — Otherwise, the thumb-piece. A small 
 piece of iron which projects from the edge of the friskel m 
 to the workman, By taking tiold of if he turns 
 frisket and the tympan. Alter the print id, he 
 
 raises the tympan, and then nimbly turns uji the friskel 
 by means of the ear. 
 
 Eighteenmo. — A sheet of paper folded into eighteen le 
 making thirty-six pages. It is usually termed eight 
 
 L8mo.; but is sometimes more correctly i 
 Octodecimo. 
 
 Electrotyping. — A process which has recently come into 
 
 use in place of stereotyping, to which it is su] i . irays, 
 
 cially for woodcuts or tu wspaper headings. The copy or 
 
 plate being of copper, and therefore much harder than type 
 
 imbers can be more profitably and clearl; 
 duced ; and the strokes being finer, and the sunk parts d 
 the impressiori from an electrotype mure nearly approaches one 
 from tin' type or engraving itself. The art of plating by elec- 
 tricity was invented almost simultaneously by Spencer, of Liver- 
 pool, and Professor Jacobi, oi St. Petersburg, in 1837; made 
 public by the latter, October 5. 1838, and by the formi t 
 tember 12th, 1839. Murray applied blacklead to non-metallic 
 bodies as a conducting siuface in January. 1840, and in the 
 following April the first specimen of printing from an el 
 type appeared in a London periodical. For an account of the 
 chemical processes involved, we must refer the reader to any 
 elementary book on the subject of electro-metallurgy, as well 
 as for a description of the utensils employed, such as 
 and the depositing trough; the metal-, solutions. &c, are the 
 sain,- as thi — used in various trades which have utilized elec- 
 tricity in this manner. "What we propose to do is to show thi ir 
 special adaptation to the process oi obtaining copper ca 
 type formes, and the Bystem of preparing these for the press. 
 Smee'a battery is the most preferable for tin's purpose. The 
 mechanical part of the process now familiarly known as elec- 
 trotyping, consists of Moulding, Backing-in the Plates, and 
 Finishing. Mouldings may be made from woodcuts. The most 
 effectual moulding substance is the best yellow wax, to which 
 two tn fifteen per cent, of turpentine may be added in cold 
 water to prevent it from cracking whilst cooking. New wax 
 should be boiled several hours before moulding. It should In- 
 kept in a large iron fish-kettle, to be ladled out as required. 
 Should it become burnt, it is useless. To prepare woodcuts for 
 moulding, lock up the woodcut in a chase with a type-high 
 bevelled metal clump border all round it. Brush the cut over 
 sparingly with turpentine to remove the printing ink which 
 remains on the block from the taking oft" of proofs. Should the 
 cut be an old one, and the fine lines much clogged up, which 
 the turpentine tails to remove, it is better to brush the cuts with 
 a hard tooth-brush, dipped in Uquor potasses. The type-high 
 eluujps prevent the wax from spreading, and the fee sin. 
 them forming an outside border to the shell, becomes a barrier 
 to the metal, retarding it from getting to the face of the shell 
 during the process of backing; it also forms a wall for the dogs 
 of the lathe to bite firmly to while the back of the plate is 
 being turned, A wooden straight-edge should now be placed 
 across the forme to see if the cut is of the same height as the 
 clumps; if not, the cut must be underlaid — tor it is desirable 
 that the cut should be a trifle higher than the clumps. Le 
 cut now stand until it is perfectly dry, then proceed to 
 
 rule by placing it in the blackleading tray, and well 
 it over with the blacklead, taking care that' the cut be 
 ■il over, ami that no particles of the lead be left in ai 
 the fine lines of the engraving. The d should bi 
 
 from all adulteration. To prepare a type forme for moid 
 surround it with the bevelled type-high clumps, placing the 
 against the type. When locked up and planed 
 down perfectly even, lay the tonne on a hoard, and take it to a 
 trough containing clean water: next mix plaster of Paris and 
 clean water to the consistency of cream, then pour the mixture 
 over the forme, well plastering it with the hand into the lines 
 and spaces. Let the forme rest till the plaster begins to set, 
 then, with a piece of reglet. scrape off the plaster level with 
 
 the face of the letter, and with a water-brush wash out the 
 
 plaster to the depth required, which should bi ut the 
 
 Shoulder of the type. This pi similar to the 
 
 in the plaster system o P m g- Well sluice the forme 
 
 at the back as well as the fai and standi 
 rack to drain for an hour or so. After observing that tin' 
 i- tightly lucked up. plain' it again, so as not to crack the 
 plaster, and see that the face of the forme is ei il to 
 
 ilacklead trough, and well bronze it all over, as descri 
 iodcuts, taking can' that the forme is dry and tree from 
 moisture. It is now ready fur being moulded. .The moulding 
 tray should be something in the shape of the forme tob.- moulded : 
 it may be made of stereotype metal. In appearance it resembles 
 a shallow printers' galley, but surrounded on all lour sides; 
 about a Pica or an English in depth. Two pieces of stout copper 
 wire are soldered on to the edge in such a manner that it may 
 be suspended in the depositing trough. Warm the moulding 
 tray a little, lay it on a Hat table, perfectly level, and with a 
 tin ladle pour out the wax into the tray in a continuous stream, 
 with a slow, steady, rotary motion, within an inch or so of the 
 Bides of the moulding tray. Let the wax set all over, and then 
 brush over the surface with phnty of blacklead, laying it on 
 with a soft hat-brush. The sooner the blacklead is applied to 
 the surface of the wax, without disturbing the wax or marking 
 tin- surface with the hairs of the brush, the better will be the 
 1, as more blacklead will be held on the surface. The 
 forme or woodcut must be moulded while the wax is yet warm: 
 but it must be perfectly set. 'fin temperature of the room in 
 which this important process is performed must be maintained 
 at summer-heat. The wax, in cooling, ought to present a smooth 
 and even surface. The moulding press may bo either i tor small 
 a copying press or a stereotype moulding press : the higher 
 the temperature at which the wax i- moulded tie- less the 
 pressure required. Now place the forme exactly under the 
 centre of the plaster, with the moulding tray containing the 
 ily- warm wax upon it. The amount of pressure requisite 
 to displace the wax must be learned by experience: too shallow 
 au impression causes a deal of work for the building knife, and 
 an unnecessary depth of dip may result in damage to the mould 
 in delivery. To deliver the mould li-om the forme a pair of 
 lifters is wanted, although a thin screwdriver may be used. 
 Insert the lifters between the furniture of the forme and tin- 
 edge of the moulding tray at the top and bottom of the page. 
 gently, with a steady hand, apply leverage gradually until 
 the mould is relieved from the mould or woodcut. Should the 
 d not be a good one, melt the wax and commence again. 
 Never lift a mould from the Bides of the forme, or damage will 
 : to the raised excrescences of the mould, which are to 
 form the counters in the plate. The building knife is madi 
 copper. It is half knife and halt spoon. Have close at hand 
 all cauldron of melted wax. and a e tsji ' bj which to warm 
 the building knife. Draw the knife ai projections that 
 
 are to be raised still higher, and the wax will follow. The ob- 
 :' thi- is, that where paragraphs or open work occur, the 
 parts can 1 6 lowered, to obviate tin- necessity o( chiselling the 
 . a- in stereotyping. The building knife can be heated 
 by dipping it in molten metal, and the building can be done by 
 te hot knife in one hand, and a stick of hard dry wax 
 in the other, feeding the building knife a- you go alone; the 
 - between the lines. The mould havu g to 1 and 
 
 y. blacklead it all over, filling all its in- 
 - ami brushing the blacklead well in. Now brush out 
 all the particles of the latti what i- bronzed on by tin- 
 
 as operation. A pair of bellows may be used, or a tlat 
 i's hair brush. If the mould be held in the light, at a 
 in angle, the operator may discern whi nest 
 
 lines are highly polished. If any line or letter appears dull. 
 ' icklead is not sufficiently blown or brushed out of such 
 To prepare the blacklead mould for immersion into the 
 siting trough, paint the bai . 
 of the moulding tray, lea* lure and there all round 
 
 for the coppi rt from. '1" Jitly 
 
 scraped bright, to facilitate the deposit of tin- copper, which 
 will shoot out from thi wards the Centre of the black- 
 
 radually covering it. A- SO :: a- it is placed
 
 H 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 I E ineut. 
 
 in thi 
 
 illgh with bras- S ho 
 ! must nil ! 
 
 tlic battery lia\ , and the i >pper plate 
 
 icity 
 ■ sulphate 
 i g iole of the 
 
 aioulding frame is under thi i main until 
 
 nfflcient to enal 
 
 i 'ill- Hot 
 
 b id the place Btopped 
 
 with I, -it wax. i usually occupied i i thick 
 
 :• ordinary purposes is twenty-four hours; hut this 
 n "it. 'I'm prevent air-bubbles forming 
 the na tab i it ou1 of the trough 
 
 in diluted methylated spirit (half spirit and half wa 
 
 Lng deposit i 'l to 
 
 the shell from the was by plac I with 
 
 i.l ; then pour b er the 
 
 . gradually lifting it ; The bi iling v. 
 
 - irface of tl d allows tin- shell to be released, not, 
 
 however, w ithout having a tin 
 
 of it, which should b iut with a mixtun tine. 
 
 benzole, and powdered emery. To prepare tin- -hell tor backing, 
 procure a small earth i thi place 
 
 cuttings. Take it int. > 1 1 1 • ■ ind pour on a quantity of 
 
 hydrochloric acid (muriatic acid or spirits ol i i istanl 
 
 in i a ith thu zinc heal is generated, 
 
 riven offj ami ultn. ■ ■ 
 
 deli must stand till it is < 1. The back of the shell 
 
 may be evenly wetted with this tlui.l with a brush. The next 
 
 tin and hack in the shell. I strip 
 
 and pour fri iner, 
 
 letting it tall into water, which will can i like 
 
 ie musl i»' sprinkled 
 the b it is wetted with the soldering fluid, 
 
 tmace is required, wi i ■ and 
 tackle apj c it. to which is attached a pan, the shell 
 
 1 erein. Pis the tackle, swing the crane to its 
 iwer the pa : con- 
 
 tained in the pot above the furnace. The heal must gradually 
 
 ad when the sold 
 ■.ued all over the back, and ready to 
 rece tetal. The iron melting pol shoul 
 
 ■ flange : i ! i tches deep. 
 
 r gradually, till it floats on the top of the metal. The 
 
 r being w i molten type metal (of the sum.' 
 
 tern] i ■ the shell, gradually 
 
 tary motion, until the shell seal! be covered and 
 
 thick enou ile the electrotype to undergo the pn 
 
 of finishing. After remaining some tune, draw up the pan, and 
 
 let it cool The metal for backing-in 
 
 must be poor, say a hundredweight of type-metal I i an 
 
 /it of lead, and Ave pounds of bar tin. The plate, when 
 c ">l. must be released from the backing pan, and the face v 
 with turpentine, benzole, and emery powder, it must then be 
 dried and polished by rubbing it with sawdust, and 
 for the hack being turned in the lat 
 
 the plane and block, roughly squared the plat . 
 
 dge over it. Make it perfectly 1 :k" it 
 
 into the lathe. I now requires to be turned, taking off 
 
 Primer or P 
 plage for the thickness ol I a Pica. The 
 
 remainder of the pri .-..•.). 
 
 Ellipsis, i -Mil of pari of a word is usually denoted 
 
 ort lines, called rules, of various lengl - to the 
 
 nnin' J ;,,, i; ' /. [f 
 
 or more words are o o be on itted, 
 
 it is more usual, and has a neater appearance, to use do 
 
 leaders. Thus: — 
 
 The comparative of superiority is expressed in Spanish by the 
 
 words, mas que; and" tliat of inferiority by mows "... 
 
 que. 
 
 Ifalineormot u ted, then the most con , .uirks 
 
 are astei 
 
 Let us go forth in sum r'- glorious prime, 
 
 - - - hile; 
 
 * * * : -,htS 
 
 i' neanpint icl I hold 
 
 mi-'. 
 
 Elzevir. ation 
 
 and print i 
 imily. 
 
 Em. Tl '• i i ni Pica is the 
 
 unit of measurei fch and breadth of pages. Fur- 
 
 1 el iini] is ; ins which 
 
 Of the I'll' 
 
 Embossed Typography. A sj printing for the 
 
 . the blind. Instead oi colour : d, the surfac 
 
 iossed, and the charai can 1 i 
 
 on the fingers bi 1 over them. Many systems are in 
 
 "i the R dphabel to - 
 
 grapl :; to its supporters, possessing n 
 
 i .-. i not been decided upon which is the best 
 
 system, he involving the ability 
 
 of the blind to read with ease and rapidity, has engaged the 
 
 attention of many philanthropists, i raphy was 
 
 duped in 1827. 
 
 Emerald. — The name of a type one size larger than Non- 
 
 I i-iii Minion. According to Figgins's 
 to ili.' fool ; to that of the Patent 
 T\ pe Pounding Company, 131 '. 
 
 Eminent English Printers. — See Appendix ut the end of 
 this Dictionary. 
 
 En.— Half the breadth of an em, in any body of type. In 
 
 the work d bj compositors, the en is considered 
 
 as the equivalent of a letter. Thus, if the measure of a page 
 
 ■•its ems Pica, tl Fort; en in it, and the breadth 
 
 of an en being taken as the average breadth of a type, the com- 
 
 ir is paid for setting up forty letters. But if a work is set 
 
 up in any other type thai maj cause it to be a thick space more 
 
 limber oi even ens in the width, an extra en is charged. 
 
 Likewise, in casting up the length of a page, an en count- Fi 
 
 an extra em. it' it is that much over the number of even ems. 
 
 It is a rough-and-ready system, but not at all an accurate one, 
 
 experimenting will show. A whole fount, upper 
 
 iwer, varies in breadth from a thick space to about an em; 
 
 all the e.,| itals, except the J, being more than an en, while a 
 
 large majority of sorts in the lower-case, ( xceptdng the m, v, 
 
 JIKjIL and a tew -oris equal to an en quadrat, are less than an en. 
 
 capital letter »?■ used in every word, the en might be 
 
 nearly the average, hut as nearly all the composition comes out 
 
 of the lower case, com i i tainly losers by the present 
 
 method of casting up matter. For example, take the type in 
 
 which tin - Dictionary is set (Brevier) ; the five vowels being the 
 
 most frequently used, it will be found that instead of making 
 
 ns, as they ought, they require a thin space to make them 
 SO. In thi.- case there are six pieces Composed anil only live 
 
 d ; a loss to the compositor of one sixth, which is brought 
 
 more plainly as follows: The space between the colons is 
 
 the space which ought to he occupied by the words, were the 
 
 age of the breadth. 
 
 : Sure my true love's natal day should inspire a thrilling lay. : 
 
 In this case, sixty-one ive been lifted, but as the space 
 
 they occupj i- only that of fifty-five ens, and the compositor is 
 
 paid only tor that number of letters, hi' loses one tenth by the 
 
 in bastard founts the difference i- -till greater; 
 
 lint whin the scale was altered, at the time of the Advance of 
 
 Wagi -'.a provision was made that an extra charge per 
 
 and should be made on founts whose lower-case alphabet 
 
 occupied less S] ace than twenty-six ens. A committee of com- 
 
 posito appointed in 1847, in London, to devise a better 
 
 of casting up type, but failed iu its object, the present 
 
 mode of a sing preferred to any other then suggested.
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 1!) 
 
 Enamelled Cards.— Cards with a glazed surface, the fine 
 glaze for which is obtained by employing sulphate of baryta. 
 
 More difficulty is experienced in working enamelled -cards than 
 h ory or ordinary cards, on account of the tendency of the enamel 
 to p'eel oft' on to the face of the type, especially with coloured 
 inks. Cards that have been in stock for twelve months are 
 lietter than new ones for printing purposes, as the enamel is 
 thoroughly dried, and adheres to the card. Pressmen manipu- 
 late the ink in various ways to prevent the ink coming off on to 
 the type : some use varnish ; others grind up a very small piece 
 of soap in the ink. The harder the substance in the tympan the 
 better — millboard in preference to sheets — so as to give only a 
 surface impression. 
 
 End a Break. — Ending with a broken or short line, as in 
 the case of an ordinary paragraph. It is the exact reverse of 
 " end even " or " make even " (q.r.J. 
 
 English. — The name of a type one size larger than Pica and 
 one smaller than Great Primer. In Germany it is called by the 
 name of " Mittel ;" by the French and Dutch, "St. Augustyn," 
 from the fact that the writings of that father were the first 
 works that were done in that size letter. Its proportions to the 
 foot are as follows, according to the different standards: — 
 Caslon, 64; Figgins, 64; Reed & Fox, 64$; The Patent Type 
 Founding Company, 65^. 
 
 Engraving. — Engraving was practised at a very early age 
 by the Egyptians, who used wooden stamps, marked with hiero- 
 glyphics, for the purpose of marking their bricks. It is first 
 mentioned B.C. 1491, by Moses (Exodus xxviii., 9), who was 
 commanded to take two onyx stones and grave on them the 
 names of the children of Israel. Its revival in Europe dates 
 from the 15th century. Mezzotint engraving was invented by 
 Col. von Siegen about 1043; engraving in colours by .1. C. Le 
 Blond about 172.1 ; in imitation of pencil by GUles des Marteaux 
 in 1756 j and aquatint engraving by Le Prince about 1762. En- 
 graving on copper, or chalcography, is said to have been practised 
 in Germany about 1450. Some early plates by Albert Durer 
 dated 1515, 151(5, are believed to be impressions from steel plates. 
 This metal, however, was very seldom employed by engravers, 
 only one specimen, executed by Mr. J. I. Smith, in 1805, being 
 known until 1818, when Mr. C. Warren exhibited an impression 
 from a soft steel plate to the Society of Arts. Engraving on 
 wood is said to have been practised by the Chinese as early as 
 B.C. 1120. The precise date of its introduction into Europe is 
 unknown. Some authorities state that a series of wood-cuts, 
 illustrative of the career of Alexander the Great, was engraved 
 by the two Cunio, in 1285. This story is, however, rather doubt- 
 ful ; and perhaps the origin of the art may be traced to the 
 wooden blocks used by notaries for stamping monograms in the 
 13th century, and to the engraved playing cards which appeared 
 in France about 1340. The earliest woodcut in existence re- 
 presents St. Cristopher with the infant Saviour, and is dated 1423. 
 Many block books exist of about the year 1430; but the art was 
 not brought to great perfection till the commencement of the 
 16th century. Albert Durer (1471 — 1528); Lucas, of Leyden 
 (1494 — 1533); Holbein, whose Dance of Death appeared at Lyons 
 in 1538; Gerard Audran (1640— 1703) ; Woollet (1735—1785); 
 Thomas Bewick (1753 — 1828} ; Nesbit, born in 1775; and Harvey, 
 born in 1796, rank foremost among the old school of engravers ; 
 but the modern school, stimulated and encouraged by the grow- 
 ing taste of the public for finely illustrated hooks and periodicals, 
 may be said to have completely surpassed all their predecessors. 
 We cannot devote space sufficient to describe these various 
 processes in full, but the following particulars may be useful. 
 The letter-press printer should learn to hold and to use the 
 graver and scorper, in order that he may be able to cut a simple 
 block ; take away lines that are superfluous ; or alter a jobbing 
 letter or two on an emergency. A few hours' practice will enable 
 him to do these with ease and expedition. Wood-engraving and 
 plate-engraving differ in the following particulars. In wood- 
 engraving all the lines and work are left standing in relief; this 
 is accomplished by cutting away the ground on both sides of 
 every bine, so that in outlining a wood-block two cuts with the 
 graver complete a line; in cavity engraving, such as copper-plate 
 
 work, the reverse is tl rder of thin i line 
 
 is cut away and the ground left untouched, the actual engraving, 
 
 with respect to lines, being done with one cut of i 1 ■_-., ;■; but 
 
 of course it has to be touched up where requitt ' 
 
 woodcut has occasionally to be treated. Blocks that have the 
 
 subject either drawn or transferred on thi 
 
 type high — but if there be any variation it is muc 
 
 should Be under than over, becau a the block can be mi 
 
 underlaid to bring it to the right height than it can be broi 
 
 up in the overlays. Place the block upon the pad fy..'.;, which 
 must rest upon a work bench sufficiently high, that when the 
 left hand is holding the block and the right hand is cutting it 
 both elbows should be nearly on a level with the shouli 
 Place the graver (q.v.) in the' right hand, with the handle fair 
 against the bottom joint of tho little finger, and the hand closed 
 so as to grasp the handle; the blade of the graver must rest 
 against, the extended thumb in such a manner that the blade can 
 slip easily to and fro, and yet act as a guide to the point of the 
 tool; before commencing to work it is as well to practise hi ill 
 and gliding the tool a few times; next proceed to cut a straight 
 line holding the tool very nearly parallel with the face of the 
 block, being careful not to* slip the tool through any of the black 
 lines or work ; take but one journey, howei er Large the block 
 may be, until you arrive at a bar, at which go boldly up to, but 
 not into, or the engraving may be seriously damaged. When 
 curved or irregular shaped lines have to he engraved, the right 
 hand and tool, when in position, should not be allowed ton 
 but the block on the pad must be moved to the point of the tool 
 by the left hand. If, for instance, a waved line were to be cut, 
 the tool would have to be held steady and the block pushed up 
 to it and waved to the desired pattern. The reason why a piece 
 is sliced off the underside of the handle of the graver, is to allow 
 the tool to work in the centre of a large block, to prevent the 
 point of the tool digging into the block instead of sliding and 
 cutting at the same time. The wood-block being cut in rounds 
 or slices, instead of planks, out of the tree, it is necessary, when 
 large blocks are required, to have them made in sections and 
 screwed or bolted together ; the latter mode, although more 
 expensive, is far superior, which any letter-press printer can 
 verify, as they are not so apt to warp or dissever. In cutting, 
 the wood leaves the tool in a crisp, pleasant way, owing to the 
 block being prepared the end-way of the grain. Beginners can 
 hardly work too slowly or too deliberately at first, as by care- 
 fulness in this particular many self-taught have become first- 
 engravers, while others, with the superior advantage of e 
 masters, have never reached above mediocrity. Hold the block 
 in the left hand in such a manner that the hand be kept bi 
 the surface of the block, as the tool is apt to slip over 
 and stick into any opposing surface which it meets; so 
 should the left hand be above the surface of the block some pain 
 and inconvenience may arise. Scorpers (q.v.) are made both 
 fiat and round ; the latter, however, are principally used in woi • 1 
 engraving, and are in sets of different widths, by which arrange- 
 ment the space of blank wood between the Lines, after outlining, 
 may be taken away, in many instances, at once, by adapting the 
 use of the scorper to the width of whites between the lines. The 
 scorper has to be held in the right hand in the same way as a 
 graver, but has to be elevated, so that the tool may be slightly 
 angular with the block, instead of nearly parallel, 
 mended with respect to the graver^ and instead of moving the 
 block it must be fairly held in position until a cha | sitiou 
 
 is necessary. If a straight gutter has tol e cut away, the process 
 will he as follows:— Place the Mock, if a small one,' in the centre 
 of the pad, and commence cutting away at the extreme left-hand 
 side of the block, working from where you commenced. Bring 
 the tool gradually back to the extreme right, cutting orchipping 
 only a small piece of wood away at a time. This is the 
 practicable method of working, 'for whereas the graver V 
 from right to left, the scorper works reversely ; tl "Its a 
 
 clear line right away through ; the scorper chip- a at a 
 
 time with a' backward movement. In clearing V 
 lluous wood round the edges adopt the same principle; i Ut from 
 the work, finishing at the edge of the block. Where large 'open 
 spaces have to be cut away the scorper should take a channel 
 the full length of such space, from cud to end, then begin again
 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Primers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 nnel, and produce another, and 
 ; then, with Hi 
 ... ightly 
 lower th.' surfai 
 edges "i -Kir-, for in I 
 the appean 
 lines, "i- not a 
 
 Iso used v. 
 
 i igrayerhas 
 
 ■ i i 
 newarped, 
 
 : i 
 
 1 
 ' . ; will bi 
 
 as the stee 
 
 iiu- 
 e cut as il 
 Muck should never be wet with 
 1 in a forme with t\ i 
 ed i ■ ■ ■ 
 dinner-hour or night, turn the tympan down 
 in, and pulling the bar-handle 
 thati ition during the 
 
 wood should never be bi 
 i to w ipe the ink off with a 
 ith spiri - i foul 
 
 an it with a brush and spirits "i' turpen 
 
 - irface dry and pull two or ns on 
 
 icker, 
 
 irility with 
 
 than 
 
 When 
 
 ly are wanted from a d im- 
 
 e 1 with little b 
 it six thiol <'i' it. 
 
 ■ : the tympan : large 
 
 il will be found adva 
 
 into th i of damp pa] 
 
 acerning vs and pri iting them will be 
 
 . onx (//.''.). Engraving on 
 i< much i 
 
 etural drawii i from 
 
 dial] n ; place it 
 
 j on cover it wi a rery thin solution of 
 
 mixed w ith it. to 
 progri i ' \ this 
 
 imbibing gi 
 quantity of the 
 1. or the point will not readily 
 To i 
 , int or i iamond 
 fixed in a handle and held like a pencil and 
 ct into the stone, which i- 
 ngraving or etching. hould 
 
 ■ isl scratched out 
 
 ay with the i ith, risk is in- 
 
 curri 
 
 '.nil and cl mc of 
 
 uniform depth maintain. When the 
 
 rub oil into the lines made by the etching 
 
 the superfluous oil and 
 
 work. No 
 
 during tl g the 
 
 . t the engraving for I 
 mmencing, .ition, 
 
 tentioned. To ma 
 
 make 
 ■ uted 
 
 with a damp rag, then put a few drops of turpentine on to the 
 
 inking sh ■■: the ink . 
 
 which, rub the st me wi 1! with the inky turps, acting in place 
 
 of a roller for inking the subject; then with a second clean, 
 
 damp cloth wipe the stone over, till clean; then lay on the 
 
 placi a thin, clean backin a Sne 
 
 printer's blanket; then a thin millboard; lastly, put down the 
 
 ,i pull through the lithographic press ; the operation 
 
 .i i made bj getting a block of 
 
 wo id, in. x 5 in., and about Sin. thick; this i.- covered 
 
 with a few alternate layers of coarse blanketing and fine flannel, 
 
 letting the la-t and out-el., layer, which is used next th'' .- 
 
 be the 1 
 
 Engraving on Copper and Steel. — Sir Pointing 
 Copper-pi \ i e. 
 
 Etching. See Lithography. 
 
 Extended Letters.— Letters thai have a broader lace than 
 i- proportionate in their bodies, as the following specimen of 
 lhv\ ii r E] tendi i iff: — 
 
 EASTER MONDAY REVIEW 
 
 Errata. Errors that have escaped both the author and the 
 printer's reader, generally printed in small type, 
 
 I placed at the end and sometimes al the beg 
 the book. As thej are a sign of carelessness somewhere, the 
 errata should never be prominent. Such error- are generally 
 of the author, who does not take the troubl 
 iblj : and when he litis a proof si at to 
 correction, passes ovi r what he ought to notice. 
 
 Even. See Make Even. 
 
 Even Headline.— The headline of an even page; th< com- 
 
 ng it. placing the folio at the near end of tin- 
 Even Page.— A page whose folio consists of some et n 
 number. It 5wi - at the left hand on opening it book. 
 
 Exclamation (Sign of).— See Admiration (Sign of). 
 
 Face of the Letter. — The surface of the letter-extremity 
 of the tj pe. 
 
 Pace of the Page.— The upper side of the page, from 
 which the impression is taken. 
 
 Palling out. — A term generally applied to a piage. a quarter, 
 or wl . which drops away from the chase, through the 
 
 -liriiJ i f the v len furniture anil quoins. This accident 
 
 can hardly occur without gross carelessness, if metal fumitu 
 and iroi cks are used. 
 
 Panning out. — A term used in the warehouse in conn 
 work. By taking hold of the right-hand lower corner of the 
 paper between the forefinger and thumb, and by a peculiar turn 
 of the wrist (spreading out the upper part of the paper - 
 what in tin- res mblance of a fan) the sheets can be counted with 
 the greatest facility. 
 
 Pat. — With compositors, is light, open matter, and short or 
 blank pages. With pressmen, light formes, woodcuts, and short 
 numbers tor which a token is charged. On Chancery Bills, for 
 insta . 'he number to be printed is frequently only a 
 
 dozen or twenty-five copies, the pressman charges the same 
 i had pulled 250 sheets of each forme. 
 
 Pat-face Letter.— Letter with a broad, black face, and 
 thick stem. 
 Feet of a Press.— That part of the press upon which the 
 
 i- fixed. 
 First Forme. — The forme with which the white paper is 
 printed ; usually the inner forme of a sheet. 
 First Page. — The commencement of a book, or the first 
 r signature. 
 
 First Proof. — A proof pulled immediately after matter is 
 . or the purpose of comparing it with the copy. It 
 may either be pulled in galleys or after it is made up into paj 
 and imposed.
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 21 
 
 Floor Pie. — Types that have been dropped Upon the floor 
 during the operations of composition or distribution. A careful 
 compositor will pick up each type as he drops it, and thus pre- 
 vent its being battered by being trodden upon. It is the duty 
 of the person sweeping the composing-room, before watering 
 it, to pick up the floor-pie in each frame separately, and place it, 
 wrapped in paper, in the thick-space box of the case in use by 
 the compositor occupying that frame, who should clear it away 
 every morning before commencing work. Types that are picked 
 up around the imposing-stone and other parts of the room are 
 called "House Pie," and should be cleared away at once either 
 by the quoin-drawer overseer or by the compositors generally 
 in turns. 
 
 Flowers. — Ornaments for making borders to jobs, cards, 
 pages, and wrappers, and for embellishing chapter headings, or 
 forming tail-pieces to books. It is a typefounder's phrase for 
 what printers usually term Borders. In the early days of the 
 typographic art borders were chiefly composed of floral designs; 
 whereas at the present time they assume a variety of shapes, 
 some of which are truly artistic. 
 
 Fly. — A man or boy 
 who takes oft' the sheet 
 from the tympan as the 
 pressman turns it up. 
 This is seldom the case 
 now, as when great ex- 
 pedition is required, the 
 forme is usually laid on 
 a machine. 
 
 Flyers. — An inven- 
 tion for taking off or de- 
 livering the sheets from a 
 printing machine. Acting 
 automatically, they su- 
 persede the necessity of 
 one or more "takers-off." 
 The annexed illustration 
 shows the form of one 
 description of flyer. The 
 paper, coming over the 
 tapes, running round the 
 small set of upper wheels 
 falls clown to the lower 
 set of wheels, but in front 
 of the flyers, which form 
 a kind of great comb. 
 The latter work on a rod 
 axis, and alternately as- 
 sume a perpendicular 
 and horizontal situation, 
 as shown in the upper 
 and lower drawing re- 
 spectively. The sheets 
 cling to the flyers while 
 they are in the process 
 of tailing, and when they 
 are horizontal, they are 
 laid regularly in a heap 
 ready to be taken away. 
 Nearly all the superior 
 class of machines are 
 now furnished with sets 
 of flyers, as they effect 
 such an important saving 
 - , ■ -■-' -■- \ ,.. ~ -C5 f labour. 
 
 Fly-leaf.— The second or back leaf of an 8vo. or 4to circular. 
 When single page circulars are given to the pressman to work, 
 is is usual for him to ask if it is to be " fly-leaf" or " single." 
 
 Fly-sheet. — A description of handbill or two or four-page 
 tract. In some small towns, where it will not pay to work a 
 late edition of a newspaper, a slip is printed with the latest in- 
 telligence, and issued as a fly-leaf. 
 
 Fly the Frisket. — To turn down the frisket and tympan by 
 the fame motion. This should always be done, as it saies time, 
 on ordinary work; but not when very superior hea\y or dry 
 paper is used. 
 
 Folder. — A narrow slip of bevelled ivory or bone, which 
 the bookfolder draws along each iold of a sheet, to cempress 
 
 it. It is also used as a paper-knife. 
 
 Folding. — Doubling the printed sheets so that the pages fall 
 consecutively, and exactly opposite lo each other, preparatory 
 to binding. 
 
 Folding Machine. — In order to perform the operation c>f 
 folding sheets, either of bookwork or news] apers, machinery 
 is now specially manufactured which completely supersedes 
 manual labour. The sheets are fed in as in a printing machine, 
 and are delivered, folded, at the bottom. In the use of a news- 
 paper-folding machine at least three-fourths of the expense of 
 hand-folding is saved, and the work is done at the same time 
 in a very superior manner. Several folding machines are now in 
 use, requiring the services of only a single operator to fold in 
 any desired form from 2,500 to 3,500 per hour. They are always 
 reliable, and ready to operate, entirely avoiding the annoyances 
 or inconveniences arising from sickness, scarcity of help, &c, 
 which are inseparably connected with the old system of lolding 
 by hand. The sheets are improved in appearance by passing 
 through the machine, the results being to some extent similar 
 to that produced by an hydraulic or screw press. 
 
 Folio.— The running number of the pages of a work. When 
 there is no running title or head-line, the folio is placed in the 
 centre of the page ; when there is a running title, at the outside 
 corner— the even folio on the left, the odd on the right. The 
 preface, contents, index, and all introductory matter, usually 
 have separate folios inserted in Koman lower-case numerals. 
 
 Folio Page. — A page which occupies the half of a full 
 sheet of paper, as Post-folio, Demy-folio, &c. Two pages of 
 folio are imposed together as one forme, four pages being a 
 perfect sheet. Post-iblio and Foolscap-folio, however, are more 
 frequently imposed as four-page formes, and printed on Double- 
 Post and Double-Foolscap paper. 
 
 Follow.— That is, see if it follows. This term is used by 
 readers, compositors, and pressmen. By a reader or compositor 
 when he ascertains that the first line of a page or sheet agrees 
 with the last line immediately preceding it, and that the tolios 
 numerically succeed each other. On news] apers— particularly 
 daily— it is generally used by compositors when taking up copy 
 of the Parliamentary reporters. They call out for the preceding 
 folio to what they 'have in hand; and, when answered, .-ay, " 1 
 follow you." The pressman merely ascertains that the first page 
 of the inner forme follows the first page of the outer, or whether 
 in working half-sheets he has turned his heap correctly. 
 
 Foolscap.— The name given to a size of paper, used prin- 
 cipally ibr Chancery Bills and account-books. — See Dimensions 
 of Paper. 
 
 Foolscap-folio.— A page or sheet of paper half the size of 
 Foolscap. 
 
 Foot of a Page.— The bottom of a page. 
 
 Foot of the Letter.— Tlie bottom of the type. 
 
 Footstick — A piece of furniture, sloped or bevelled from 
 one end to the other, placed against the foo( of the page. The 
 Slope allows the wedge-shaped quoins to be driven hard in be- 
 tween the footstick and the chase, and so secures, or locks-up. 
 the forme or page. 
 
 Fore-edge.— The outer edge of a sheet of paper when folded 
 to the proper size of a book. 
 
 Forme.— Matter duly imposed and locked up in a chase. 
 
 Forme dances.— When, a forme being locked-up on the 
 imposing surface, any of the lines are not properly justified, 
 or letters have slipped at the ends of lines, or when a letter, 
 space, or quadrat of a deeper body is by accident made use of, 
 the formo will not lift properly. To ascertain this, the com-
 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers* Register 
 Supplement. 
 
 positor r;ii> is the forme slightly and quickly two or three times, 
 when if any of the a hilarities have occurred, he will 
 
 hear a clicking Bound near the imperfect justification, caused i, v 
 the tdose typ i danc a ■ in I b i " il >n i." Pi 
 term when a new roller flu inj loose lin i i forme, 
 
 and causes the t > p is, as - ime say, to •■ chatter." 
 
 Forme lifts. When, on being raised from the stone or 
 ing drops out. 
 
 Forty-oightmo.— A sheet of p I into forty-eight 
 
 or ninety-six pa 
 
 Foul Proof. \ dirty proof, a proof with many errors or 
 c nrections marked in it. 
 
 Foul Stone. -An imposing stone or table which the com- 
 posil cleared after working at it. In well-regulated 
 
 oitioes, Bnes are inflicted tor this neglect. 
 
 Founders' Measurement.— Founders a^Ti->-, with one ex- 
 ception, thai the Pica shall be one-sixth of an inch ; that two 
 
 Nonpareils shall b [ual to one Pica, two Pearls to one Long 
 
 Primer, two Diam inds to a 1! turgeois; but beyond this there is 
 no relation between one body and another, and each founder 
 differs from bis fellows in the exact size even of the types 
 called by the names themselves. In France, this state of things 
 n i Ion ,'.r exists. |Jy common consent of the printers, a definite 
 I mi has been adopted, and the founders are obliged to con- 
 form ilea laid down, so that from whatever source it 
 m iv be obtained, the type of a given body is of uniform dimen- 
 [n 1730, Pournier adopted the plan which is the basis 
 ii which now universally prevails. He took two inches 
 as his standard measure, which he called his prototype, and 
 divided these into I welve parts, which he called lines, and each 
 
 iese again into twelve parts which he named points thus 
 forming one hundred and forty-four divisions. He assigned to 
 each body a definite number of points. Tims, the body Cicero, 
 corresponding to our Pica, was twelve points, and it was ren- 
 dered exactly of these dimensions by laying twelve Cicero types 
 on the two-inch standard, and dressing them till they exactly 
 fitted the required space. Leads were made to a given number 
 of points, and thus any body worked with any other without 
 justification. Fournier's standard is still used in the Imprimerie 
 Iniperiale, but it was modified by Didot, who adopted as his 
 prototype, or typometer, as it has since been called, a definite 
 portion of the metre, and thus brought typefounders under the 
 French decimal system. — Condensed from n valuable article, con- 
 tributed to Straker's " Printing and its Accessories," by Mr. Shanks, 
 of the Patent Type Founding Company. 
 
 Fount. A c -rtain weight of letter cast at one time, of the 
 same face and body, and when complete containing duj pro- 
 portion-; of capitals, small capitals, lower-case, figures, points, 
 
 four kinds of spac is, quadrats, and accents. 
 
 Fount Cases. —Very capacious cases, to hold the surplus 
 sorts of large founts. 
 
 Fractions. \ fraction is a part of a unit, written with two 
 figure-, with a line between them, thus — \. 4, %, &c. The upper 
 figure is called the numerator, the lower one the denominator. 
 Some fractions are cast in one piece, and the following are I 
 frequently used: — 
 
 i * I H t I # i 
 
 Fractions are also cast in two pieces, called split fractious, by 
 means of which the denominators may be extended to any 
 amount. The separatrix, or rule between the figures, was for- 
 merly joined to the foot of the first, but is now attached to the 
 bead of the d nominators. 
 
 Fragments. Any pages left after the last sheet of a work, 
 and imposed with the title, contents, or any other odd pages, 
 to save press and warehouse work. 
 
 Frame.— A stand generally made of some kind of light 
 wood, on which cases are placed in a sloping position to be 
 composed from. The upper case is placed al a greater 
 than the lower, to bring the top rows of boxes nearer to the 
 
 compositor. Half-frames are those which are constructed to 
 hold one pair of cases only; three-quarter frames hold one 
 pair of cases, and are fitted with racks tor reserve cases; whole 
 tiames hold two pairs of cases, and generally contain a rack 
 for live pairs of cases. The rein lining space may either be used 
 
 as a cupboard for the compositors' t I and clothes, or drawers 
 
 for copy, proofs, \c In newspaper offices a double rack to hold 
 twenty slip galleys usually occupies the space. Sliding trays 
 for jobbing type, initial or titling letters, could also be placed 
 there, or a mere shelf. A very useful frame is also made, about 
 one-third the size of a whole frame, with a rack for ten half- 
 cases similar to one side of an upper case, and grooves for two 
 more on the top, in which can be kept at least a dozen fancy 
 jobbing founts, or a series of titling letters. Being only about 
 twenty-two inches wide, they can be made available for filling 
 up a spare corner, awl thus economise space --.See IIalf-CASE. 
 
 French Furniture.— Pieces of metal cast to Pica ems in 
 
 length and width, and used, in imposing a forme, for furnishing 
 tin chase with the proper margins for books ; they are useful in 
 filling up blanks and short pages, and for all other purposes for 
 which wood furniture can be employed. Each piece is cast 
 with the number indicating its dimensions, as seen in the ac- 
 companying sketch : — 
 
 From the great care and nicety shown in casting the various 
 sizes, this kind of furniture is invaluable for making up blank 
 tabular forms. 
 
 French Rules. — Ornamental rules, swelling in the centre, 
 and tapering to a fine line at each end, thus : — 
 
 ♦ — • — * 
 
 They are generally used to separate chapters in books, and sub- 
 headings from the general headings in newspapers. They are 
 sometimes also allied "swell" and "diamond " rules. Various 
 sizes are made, some being cut in brass, and others cast in type 
 metal. 
 
 Friars. — Light patches caused by the roller not inking the 
 forme properly; they are caused generally by the inattention of 
 the workman who is rolling. 
 
 Frisket. — A thin iron frame, covered with stout paper, and 
 attached to the head of the tympan by a joint. Spaces corres- 
 ponding to the parts of a forme that are to be printed, are cut 
 out of the paper covering, and the frisket being turned down 
 upon the sheet on the tympan, keeps it flat, prevents the margin 
 being soiled, and raises it from the forme after it receives the 
 impression. 
 
 Frisket Pins. — Iron pins passing tlirough the frisket joints, 
 and connecting it with the tympan. 
 
 Frisket Stay.— A slight piece of wood fixed to support the 
 frisket when turned up. A "Gallows" was the term formerly 
 used when the old wood press was in use, but it held up the 
 tympan, not the frisket. 
 
 Fudge. — To execute work without the proper materials, or 
 finish it in a bungling or unworkmanlike manner. 
 
 FuU Case. — A case completely filled with letters and spaces 
 — wanting no sorts. 
 
 Full Forme. — A forme with few blanks or short pages. 
 
 Full Page. — A page containing its full complement of lines, 
 or with few or no breaks in it.
 
 The Printers* Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 23 
 
 Full Press. — When two pressmen are employed upon a 
 tonne, one rolling, the other pulling, they are said to be working 
 at lull press.— 6'ee Half Press. 
 
 Furniture. — Pieces of wood used in whiting-out blank and 
 
 short pages or jobs, and, in imposition, Cor the margins of I ks. 
 
 In imposing a single-page job, it is usual to dress two sides of 
 the chase with furniture, for the head and one side of the page 
 to rest against; the other parts being guarded by the side and 
 loot-sticks. Furniture is manufactured and sold in yard lengths 
 by tho dozen, having a groove run along the uppermost edge, 
 as seen in the annexed diagram: — 
 
 Six sizes are generally used, the names and breadth of which 
 are as follows : — 
 
 Double Narrow . 
 Broad and Narrow 
 Double Broad . . 
 
 6 Pica ems 
 
 See French 
 
 Narrow 3 Fica ems 
 
 Broad 4 „ 
 
 Gutter 5 „ 
 
 Metal furniture is cast as wide as ten Pica ems, 
 Furniture. Side and Footsticks, Reglet, and Quoins, are all 
 classed as Furniture, and are described under their respective 
 heads. All furniture should be made to full quadrat height, but 
 a great deal of common, cheap stuff is hawked about the trade 
 which is so low as to be scarcely capable of supporting the 
 matter burly on its feet, and by using such it is impossible to 
 obtain a good impression. 
 
 Furniture Gauge.— See Gauge. 
 
 G. 
 
 Galley. — A thin, moveable frame or tray of wood, brass, or 
 zinc, on which to empty matter from the composing-stick as it 
 is set up, and to afford a level surface for making up pages. 
 Galleys are made of different shapes, according to the class of 
 
 Pig. 1. 
 
 matter they are intended to contain. Fig. 1 is a newspaper 
 column galley, and has a metal bottom, about the thickness of 
 a Pearl. Matter emptied upon it only requires to be fastened 
 up with a sidestick and quoins', and it may be placed under the 
 
 Tig. 2. 
 
 galley press, and a proof pulled, without the necessity of tying 
 up and removing tho type. Quarto and folio jobbing galleys 
 are similarly made. Fig. 2 is a folio jobbing galley, made en- 
 
 tirely of wood ; and Fig. 3 is a mahogany slip galley, which 
 is generally used for bookwork, such matter being invariably 
 
 made up into pages, and imposed, previous to the first proof 
 being pulled. 
 
 Galley Press. A press for obtaining proofs from matter 
 locked-up in galleys. Presses of this description are found in 
 
 all newspaper offices, and 
 
 in most I kwurk houses. 
 
 as they enable proofs to 
 
 be pulled in the lno-t ex- 
 peditious manner in slips. 
 and prevent the -training 
 of a large press which is 
 caused by a long narrow 
 column of matter being 
 impressed under a broad 
 platen. In the ordinary 
 galley press in general use 
 the impression is given by 
 a long, narrow platen, to 
 i 3 which is affixed a blanket, 
 the platen being made to 
 rise and fall by means of 
 a long lever handle. At 
 the right-hand is fixed an 
 ink-table, and a hook to hang the roller on. Underneath is a 
 shelf for damp paper. The accompanying engraving shows a 
 new style of galley press, just brought out by Messrs. Francis 
 Donnison and Son, the advantages of which are, the small cost 
 in comparison to the others, and economy of time in pulling a 
 proof; when the type is inked and the sheet laid on, it is only 
 necessary to roll the iron cylinder (which runs easily on a kind 
 of tram) over it, and the impression is complete. 
 
 Galley Rack. — A rack made with runners, similarly to a 
 case rack, in which matter on metal galleys is placed after a 
 proof has been taken from it. 
 
 Galley Roller.- A roller about five or six inches long, used 
 at the galley press. 
 Gallows. — See Frisk et Stay. 
 
 Gathering. — A term used in the warehouse when collecting 
 the sheets of a work in orderly succession for delivery to the 
 bookbinder. 
 
 Gathering Table. — A long table on which printed sheets 
 are laid, in the order of their signatures, to be gathered into 
 perfect books* 
 
 Gauge. — A piece of reglet on which the length of a page is 
 marked, for the compositor to make up by. Clickers, in addition, 
 use gauges showing the length of one hundred lines , t any type 
 in use by his companionship, and its divisions in tens. It is a 
 ready mode of ascertaining the number of each taking of copy 
 as he makes it up, and saves a deal of time in counting them. 
 When the quoin-drawer overseer has made up the furniture for 
 the first sheet of a work, he takes a card and cuts it to the size 
 of the heads, backs, and gutters, marking it accordingly, so that 
 the margins of all succeeding sheets may be made the same. 
 This is termed a Furniture Gauge. Card furniture guages serve 
 very well for small volumes, but for long works and periodicals 
 it is better to use pieces of four-to-pica lead cut to the sizi -. 
 and kept together by boring holes through them with a bodkin, 
 so that a cord may be passed through them; card wears away 
 quickly by repeated use, and becomes untrue. 
 
 General Bill. — The bill of the whole of the companionship. 
 See Companionship. 
 
 Geometrical Signs. — See Signs: 
 
 Gets in. — A term used when more is got into a line, pagi , 
 or forme than is in the printed copy a compositor sets from; or 
 when MS. copy does not make so much as was calculated. 
 
 Girths.— Thongs of leather, or bands of stout webbing at- 
 tained to the rounce. and used to run the carriage of the pre-^ 
 in or out. 
 
 Giving out Paper. — Delivering paper for any job or si 
 of a work lo the j ressmau or " wetter'' (//.r.).
 
 -M 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 Tho Printers' Register. 
 Suppl. i 
 
 Giving out Paper and Cards. The following Table 
 shows the quantity ol Paper or Cards required for an; 
 which from 50 to 10,000 I red. The quire consists 
 
 of -1 sheets; the pack of 52 cards. [To allowance is made fur 
 waste or "overs." (This table can be obtained separately, printed 
 ..II ;i card, price 3d., at •"■. Bouverie-street, London, E.C.) 
 
 1 - 
 
 2 
 
 on shoot 
 
 4 
 
 on sheet 
 
 6 
 on sheet 
 
 8 
 
 12 
 on sheet 
 
 10 18 
 on sheet on sheet 
 
 24 
 on sheet 
 
 32 
 
 on sheet 
 
 36 
 on sheet 
 
 48 
 
 on sheet 
 
 Cards. 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 2 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 JS 
 GO 
 
 — 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 5 
 
 
 
 l 
 
 2 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 13 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 (0 
 
 9 
 17 
 10 
 18 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 l 
 
 I 
 
 T 
 
 1 
 8 
 
 i 
 
 = 
 
 or ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 5 
 9 
 
 17 
 
 L'l 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 $ 
 
 SZ 
 
 < 
 
 4 
 7 
 
 13 
 16 
 
 '3 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 JS 
 00 
 
 3 
 6 
 
 12 
 
 14 
 
 i 
 
 "3 
 
 c 
 1) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 HI 
 
 r. 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 9 
 
 11 
 
 i 
 
 M 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 c 
 — 
 
 2 
 4 
 7 
 8 
 
 i 
 
 '3 
 <y 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 i 
 
 u 
 
 '5 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 1 
 tn 
 
 2 
 3 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 u 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 •3 
 
 3 
 
 50 
 100 
 200 
 250 
 
 50 
 
 48 
 41 
 ■12 
 
 300 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 3 
 
 :: 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 19 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 !> 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 5 
 
 40 
 
 400 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 i 
 
 ■1 
 
 2 
 
 19 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 1.1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 23 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 II 
 
 9 
 
 7 
 
 36 
 
 500 
 600 
 
 10 
 
 \1 
 
 10 
 12 
 
 5 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 12 
 
 t 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 15 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 18 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 4 
 10 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 21 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 19 
 
 
 
 
 11 
 17 
 
 
 
 
 11 
 13 
 
 11 
 
 32 
 
 2rt 
 
 700 
 
 11 
 
 11 
 
 7 
 
 7 
 
 1 
 
 21 
 
 3 
 
 Hi 
 
 2 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 
 20 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 22 
 
 
 
 LM 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 Hi 
 
 24 
 
 750 
 
 I.", 
 
 15 
 
 7 
 
 20 
 
 5 
 
 •'. 
 
 3 
 
 ■ii 
 
 2 
 
 15 
 
 1 
 
 23 
 
 1 
 
 18 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 
 
 16 
 
 14 
 
 22 
 
 800 
 
 l.; 
 
 16 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 5 
 
 11 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 19 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 21 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 23 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 15 
 
 20 
 
 900 
 
 IS 
 
 18 
 
 
 
 ■■> 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 17 
 
 3 
 
 :*. 
 
 2 
 
 9 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 14 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 19 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 1000 
 
 20 
 
 20 
 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 6 
 
 23 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 12 
 
 2 
 
 15 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 18 
 
 1 
 
 B 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 19 
 
 12 
 
 1250 
 
 26 
 
 1 
 
 13 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 17 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 4 
 
 9 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 2 
 
 22 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 
 1 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 24 
 
 2 
 
 1500 
 
 31 
 
 6 
 
 15 
 
 15 
 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 7 
 
 20 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 :•• 
 
 22 
 
 3 
 
 12 
 
 2 
 
 15 
 
 1 
 
 23 
 
 1 
 
 18 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 28 
 
 44 
 
 1750 
 
 
 11 
 
 18 
 
 6 
 
 12 
 
 4 
 
 9 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 14 
 
 4 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 115 
 
 33 
 
 34 
 
 2000 
 
 41 
 
 16 
 
 20 
 
 20 
 
 13 
 
 22 
 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 6 
 
 23 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 16 
 
 3 
 
 12 
 
 2 
 
 15 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 18 
 
 38 
 
 21 
 
 2500 
 
 52 
 
 1 
 
 26 
 
 1 
 
 17 
 
 10 
 
 13 
 
 1 
 
 » 
 
 IT 
 
 6 
 
 13 
 
 5 
 
 20 
 
 4 
 
 9 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 2 
 
 22 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 48 
 
 4 
 
 3000 
 
 62 
 
 12 
 
 31 
 
 6 
 
 211 
 
 20 
 
 15 
 
 15 
 
 10 
 
 1" 
 
 7 
 
 20 
 
 6 
 
 23 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 22 
 
 3 
 
 12 
 
 2 
 
 15 
 
 57 
 
 no 
 
 4000 
 
 .-:; 
 
 8 
 
 11 
 
 16 
 
 27 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 20 
 
 13 
 
 22 
 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 9 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 23 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 16 
 
 3 
 
 12 
 
 76 
 
 ■18 
 
 5000 
 
 104 
 
 1 
 
 ' 
 
 2 
 
 34 1 18 
 
 20 
 
 1 
 
 17 
 
 9 
 
 13 
 
 1 
 
 11 
 
 M 
 
 8 
 
 17 
 
 6 
 
 13 
 
 5 
 
 19 
 
 4 
 
 9 
 
 96 
 
 8 
 
 10000 
 
 ' 
 
 8 
 
 i 
 
 ■1 
 
 69 li 
 
 52 
 
 2 
 
 ::i 
 
 1 18 
 
 26 
 
 1 
 
 23 
 
 4 
 
 17 
 
 9 
 
 13 
 
 1 
 
 11 | 14 
 
 8 
 
 17 
 
 192 
 
 Hi 
 
 Glazing Machine. A machine used for putting a polished 
 surface on printed papers or for burnishing gi lourwork. 
 
 It consists "i two ■ ive iron cylinders turned by a cog and 
 fly-wheel, with power gear to inci pressure. Theshi 
 
 t.i I..- glazed are placed between polished copper plates, and 
 pass* .I between the cj linders. 
 
 Gold Composition, a mixture of chrome and varnish, 
 with which a forme intended for bronze work is rolled previ- 
 ■ usly to I eing dusted over the impression. In fact, the pn 
 is similar to the directions given t..r Dusting Colours (g-v)- The 
 chrome is well ground with a muller into tile varnish, which 
 '.• a fuller tint especially gold bronze than it' 
 the forme were rolled with the plain \armsh only. This com- 
 position tally as well for copper, citron <>r emerald 
 Lr. .n.'. -. Si ii. e printers use ordinary black ink tor silver bronze, 
 as it gives it a deeper appearance. Gold aamegiven 
 >\ some t" this preparation. For bronze printing, the roller 
 should have a firm face, or the tenacity of tin pn paratii 
 
 •■■'} n: yel it must have sufficient elasticity to deposit the 
 i reparation freely and cl< anlj on the tj pe. 
 
 Good Colour. When a sheet is printed neither too light 
 nor too dark. 
 
 Good Matter. When a compositor, for temporary conve- 
 
 matter v (rich set up on a galley or 
 
 board containing distribution, he it, in chalk, the 
 
 words,"G 1 .Matter," to prevent it.- being cleared away by anj 
 
 i: I mi 
 
 Good Work. Light, easy copy, we'll paid; or work turned 
 out clean!;, i ctly by the printers. 
 
 Gothic. The name of a bold jobbing fount, now but very 
 seldom used. 
 
 Graphotype. A mechanical method of converting an artist's 
 drawing into au engraved block ready tor the printer, which is 
 
 a! ..nee simple, speedy, ami comparatively inexpensive. The 
 process was discovered by .Mr. lie Witt ('. Hitchcock, an artist 
 and wood engraver, in .New York. Requiring one day to correct 
 a drawing upon boxwood with white, and having none of that 
 pigment ready at hand, lie- bethought him to make use of tho 
 enamel of a common card. On removing this enamel, which he 
 did with a wet brush, lie found, to his surprise, that the ptinted 
 characters on the card remained in relief, the ink used in im- 
 pressing them resisting the action of the water, and so protecting 
 the enamel lying underneath, 'the possible practical application 
 oi this at once suggested itself to him, and accordingly he began 
 to make experiments. Ultimately he demonstrated that the 
 process of producing relief plates direct from the drawings of 
 the artist is as certain in its results as wood-engraving, with 
 these special advantages; that it occupies at the very most 
 one-tenth of the time, is less costly, and reproduces exactly, 
 line lor line, and touch for touch, the artist's own work. The 
 process iteebf may be thus briefly described : Upon a. sheet of 
 perfectlj Hat is distributed an even layer of very finely 
 pulvi ii/> .1 chalk, upon which is laid an ordinary steel plate, such 
 
 as is used by steel engravers: it is then placed iu a powerful 
 hydraulic puss, where it is submitted to such pressure that on 
 
 Mil the chalk is found to have assumed a solid, compact 
 mass, with a surface equal to an enamel card, and which is 
 
 ired still more solid by a strong coating of a peculiar size. 
 Wh.n dried the plate is ready to he drawn upon, and this is 
 done with a chemical ink compjosed principally of lamp black, 
 gluten, and it chemical which gives the fluid the advantage of 
 
 n.^ er drying unit! it comi .- in cntaet with the chalk plate, When 
 the drawing is finished, instead of sptending hours, as would 
 1 ave been the case had the drawing been made upon wind, in 
 carefully picking i ut every particle of white, brushes are used 
 of vara hi- iliLO'-e- oi stillness, which by hand, and in some casi t 
 by machine, are caused to revolve on the surface, and in a very 
 short time till the chalk untouched by the artist is removed, 
 leaving the ink lines standing up in clear, sharp relief. All that
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 25 
 
 now remains to be done, is to saturate what is left upon the 
 plate with a solution which renders all as hard as marble, ami it 
 is then ready for the stereotyper or the electrotyper, who, by the 
 ordinary methods, produces a metal block from it, of which im- 
 pressions may be taken to an unlimited extent. Graphotype has 
 already been "applied to book, newspaper, and magazine illustra- 
 tion ; to the reproduction of coloured drawings and paintings ; 
 to printing for transferring to pottery and japanned surfaces, &o. 
 A company has been formed in London for carrying out this 
 invention. They sell plates of certain sizes, on which the artist 
 can make his drawing ; he then returns his work, and the 
 company completes the process, and in a short time produce a 
 block ready for printing. Several publications are now issued 
 which are illustrated on the Graphotype principle, but they are 
 not at all first-class productions. Indeed, it may be said that 
 every substitute for the wood-engraving has • failed so far. The 
 man who could hit upon an invention for making a drawing on 
 wood which could be printed, with ordinary type, without the 
 tedious and expensive process of engraving, would make his for- 
 tune in a month. A full description of the Graphotype process 
 will be found in " The Handbook of Graphotype ; a Practical 
 Guide for Artists and Amateurs. - ' London: The Graphotyping 
 Company (Limited), 7, Garrick-street. 
 
 Grass-hands. — On newspapers, in addition to the regidar 
 staff of compositors, it is frequently — in fact, almost always- 
 necessary to employ some extra assistance in getting out the 
 paper. Persons so engaged are technically called "grass-hands," 
 and take their chance whether they earn little or much, or any- 
 thing at all, as they are only called upon to do such work as the 
 regular hands are unable to accomplish. During the parliamen- 
 tary season, for instance, grass-hands find more employment, as 
 the copy comes in late, and the printer has to divide it, in small 
 fragments, among a large number of compositors. Many com- 
 positors earn a good income by grassing, and it is a frequent 
 occurrence for a casual grass-hand to take more wages than a 
 regular book-hand ; but the period of labour of the former is 
 very precarious, and oftentimes extends into the small hours of 
 the' morning, thereby tending to injure his health and interfere 
 with his domestic comfort ; whilst the latter, in a general way, 
 knows exactly the hours he is required to work, and has the 
 additional advantage of being able to make arrangements, after 
 those hours, either for pleasure or private business. 
 
 Grave Accent. — See Accents. 
 
 Graver. — A tool used by wood-engravers. There are three 
 breadths usually employed. 
 
 Great Primer. — A type a size smaller than Paragon, and 
 larger than English. There are 51^ lines to the foot. 
 
 Grey. — In working at press, when the person rolling has 
 neglected to take colour or distribute his roller properly, and 
 the impression appears very light, the man at the liar tells him 
 to "Take more butter (ink), pardner ; it's getting very grey." 
 
 Gripper Machines. — Machines in which grippers, as con- 
 tradistinguished from tapes, are used. 
 
 Grippers. — The brass claws of a printing machine which 
 seize hold of^ the sheet of paper a» it lays on the feeding-board 
 and hold it while it receives the impression under the cylinder. 
 They finally release it in order that the delivery apparatus may 
 remove it from the machinery. 
 
 Groove. — An indentation on the upper surface of the short 
 cross of a chase, to receive the spurs of the points and to allow 
 them to make holes in the paper without being themselves 
 injured. 
 
 Grotesque. — The name of a peculiar fancy jobbing type, 
 of which the following is a specimen : — 
 
 BREVIER GROTESQUE. 
 
 Guillotine Cutting Machine.— This machine is of iron, 
 with an iron or mahogany table on which to place the paper to 
 be cut. A moveable gauge is attached to a slide, which runs in 
 
 a graduated scale by which the size to be cut can be regulated to 
 the sixteenth part of an inch. When the paper is in its place it 
 is held immoveable by a platen and screw: a cog-wheel which 
 moves in a ratchet attached to a largo knife is turned, and the 
 knife descends, cutting through the paper with great rapidity. 
 The wheel is then reversed in its motion, and the knife ascends 
 preparatory to a fresh cut. 
 
 Gull. — To tear the point holes in a sheet of paper while 
 printing. This is generally caused by the end of the spur being 
 turned, and may be remedied by filing it to a tapering point. At 
 times a gull is caused by the points not falling fairly in tin- 
 centre of the groove. The paper being too wet sometimes causes 
 the point-holes to tear ; and the frisket being raised sharply in 
 heavy jobs, or when the forme has a tendency to " lug," has tin- 
 same effect. 
 
 Gutters. — The furniture separating two adjoining pages in a 
 chase; as between folios 1 and 8 in a half-sheet of 8vo. 
 
 Hair Space. — The thinnest of the spaces. On an average 
 ten hair spaces equal one em, but occasionally they are i 
 thicker, and sometimes thinner than this, according to the body 
 of the fount. There are seldom less than seven or more than 
 ten hah - spaces to the em. 
 
 Half-Case. — A case whose width is about half that of an 
 ordinary upper case. The space between the uprights of a 
 whole frame is usually equal to the breadth of one and a half 
 cases. If a rack be fitted up within it there remains a certain 
 space unoccupied, and this is sometimes filled by a board or 
 galley rack, or left vacant, with only a shelf at the bottom. 
 Half-cases are made in order to utilise this space, and by fixing 
 up a small rack for them, about ten may be conveniently ac- 
 commodated. They are exceedingly useful for holding titling 
 letters or fancy foimts. They contain forty-nine boxes. 
 
 Half-Frame. — A frame adapted to hold not more than one 
 pair of cases without a rack. 
 
 Half-Machine. — This is a term which has come into use 
 since the small jobbing machines were invented. A person is 
 said to work •'half-machine" when he works the treadle, takes 
 off and feeds at the same time. 
 
 Half-Press. — When one man both rolls and pulls, he is said 
 to work " half-press." 
 
 Half-sheet. — When a forme is imposed in sue!', a manner as 
 to perfect itself, it is called a half-sheet. 
 
 Half-Title. — An epitome of the full title, which is plac d 
 in the centre of the preceding odd page to prevent the full title 
 being worked as a single leaf. It is also placed at the head ol 
 the opening page of the text of a book. It should be set in 
 the neatest and simplest manner possible, and should the matter 
 extend to three or more lines it should, if possible, be displa 
 in a similar style to the title-page, but in rather Bmallei 
 The space occupied by the half-title will vary according to the 
 width of margin in the succeeding pages, the size of the | 
 and the openness or closeness or the liii s of the text. The 
 degree of taste possessed by the compositor is invariably shown 
 by the appearance of the title and hall-title. The latter is some- 
 times called a " bastard title." 
 
 Handbills. — A branch of job work. They are small bills 
 intended for circulation by hand, as distinguished from placards, 
 which are intended for displayal on walls. Any variety oi type 
 is permissible in a handbill, except the most ornate and com- 
 plicated letters, which are not easily read, and are therefore 
 unsuitable for this class of work. There is this difference between 
 a handbill and a circular: in the latter the Bizes of the types in 
 the different lines should be duly proportioned to each other, 
 according to the importance of the words, and the whole should 
 possess a certain harmony of appearance, both in regard to the 
 character of the founts employed and the thickness of the strokes
 
 26 
 
 DKTioNAKV OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Suppi' 
 
 of the letters. Hut in a handbill a few lines maj be"thrown 
 ii]''" nin of all : the rest, and their comparative 
 
 1 nisly exaggerated. The ob- 
 
 ■ readei maj be at once 
 r k with thi i mtage ot 
 
 tin' thing .1. Handbills are now re- 
 
 quired in i 'mii notice, and a1 bo low 
 
 b to print them at a hand- 
 press. When very long numbers of Buch j"i>s are ordered, 
 
 forme is set-up, stere itj pi taken, and a I i ;e Bheetful work.-.] 
 ine. 
 
 Handle of a Press.— The extremity ol the bar. The handle 
 is usually a wooden cylinder clothing tin- liar, so thai the latter 
 i ntly pulled back. & Pbesses. 
 
 Hand-Mould. In typefounding, this nam.' is given to 
 ' rument or frame into which tho matrix i- fixed. The 
 
 r ■ ' ml surface is of 
 
 p teel. At tin' top is a shelving 
 
 orifice, into which the mi : ed. The space within is sel 
 
 ding t ■ > t >. -if the letter, ami is made ex- 
 
 ingly true. The Iti -1 metal, being i red into this space, 
 
 torn into the matrix, ami instantly cooling, tin 1 
 
 ed, ami the typi is casl ou1 bj the workman. 
 
 i i iisively by this process ; hut the 
 
 art has recently 1 rj gradually improved, ami machinery has 
 
 tn a certain extent superseded the hand-mould. See Type- 
 
 Hand-Press.— A press which is worked by hand, in contra- 
 me which work.- automatically by machinery. 
 
 It i< usual tu rail tin' fust a press, ami the latter a machine, 
 
 ■ rii m is both are machines ami both are presses. 
 
 1 ind-press the turning down the tympan, running in the 
 
 carriage, effecting tin' impression, bringing back the carriage, 
 
 ig tlm tympan ag tin, are performed by manual lal r; 
 
 a- m a "machine'' t 1 . 'V are perform, il by certain arrange- 
 
 Hanging Galley.— A small galley with hooks fasti 
 
 ch a way that when it is hung on the boxes of the 
 
 r case ii will rest in a sloping position. These galleys are 
 
 1 very handy fur heads, whites, or standing lines, ami Italic 
 
 out in distribution ; and is far preferable to 
 
 the slovenly habit many compositors have of dropping Italic 
 
 ■ in boxes oil tin' upper-case, and more often 
 
 than ■ ting to distribute them into their proper case, 
 
 until the Italie i .. orl to the back boxes tu 
 
 pick out thedefl i asting more time in hunting over 
 
 tie- :■ ■ i j i ! an would have suffii i 
 
 i d awaj the whole in a proper manner. 
 
 Hanging Indention.— When the first line is brought full 
 out to ■ . ' in'- . ami til.' second ami 
 
 folio ■ a certain indentation, tie' former " bangs 
 
 over," and the q1 is called by some e "hanging in- 
 
 i -ii : " but among composil term used is"runout 
 
 and ind 
 
 Hanging Pages. Pages of type which tire found, after 
 
 | : 1 ic bi out of tin' perpendicular, The remedy 
 
 for this is. to unlock the quarter ill which it is imposed, ami to 
 
 pat type with tie' fingers of one hand, at tho 
 
 i i ■ ing up the page with tho other, until it is got 
 
 Sometimes the hanging of a ] 
 
 is can d bj the page at its side being rather longer, or bj the 
 
 itick binding against the fumituri i i I ie "backs;" in this 
 
 ■ i an i /.' !■ ad or pi : nild be placed at the 
 
 f tie' page before re-locking-up, bo a- t" be clear of the 
 
 i d, care Bhould be 
 
 to I'm cpioi too si icl . a 1 1 peral ion ol loosenin 
 
 others may . abble the matter or cause it to hat 
 
 Hang up.- 'I'o place the prinb upon tin- d 
 
 tii" warehouse. '1'" do tin- the warehousi 
 in his right hand (son lefl hand I, 
 
 and lay the head of it tlat upon tin' heap to be hung up; he 
 
 i !•! then turn over on it from six to a dozen sheets, according 
 
 to the thickness of the paper and the nature of the work, taking 
 care to have the fold iii tho centre of the short cross, as if it 
 tails across any oi the newly-printed pages, they will most 
 
 liki'h i: :r ami sol-olV. Having folded those sheets down, 
 
 on one end of tin- peel-head, he must clutch them with his left 
 hand, ami Hit the sheets ami the peel together two or three 
 inches to the right, take another fold, then shift it, and soon 
 till he has as many folds a hi can conveniently lift wit li tho 
 peel. Then raising tho sheets above the poles or linos on which 
 heets are to ho hung, and sloping the handle of the peel, 
 the folds will open at the under side, and they may he lowered 
 
 ami hungup, 'l'ln- peel musl HOW !"■ withdrawn from tlm centre, 
 
 ami be in erted between the first ami Becond folds or lifts, leaving 
 tho first I..) hanging on the pole. The other portion must thou 
 
 ho shitted to the lefl, so that tho second fold shall just overlap 
 the fust : and so on till all are spread out. The process is now 
 repeated till tin- whoh heap is hung up. 
 
 Hard Impression.— When there is to,, much pull on the 
 press, ami lines which should he soft ami delicate come up 
 heavy and Btrong. Sometimes it is caused by having too soft 
 a blanket inside the tympan. 
 
 Headings. — A peculiar branch of jobbing work, i.e., the 
 setting of words to work in the heads of ruled columns of 
 ledgers, day-books, time-books, &c. The compositor in sotting 
 tin -in up does md generally use a stick, hut picks up tlm words 
 in his fingers, and lays them along the bottom ridge of a long 
 galley, I" which he affixes the sheet, and spaces out the words so 
 a to fall into their proper positions. The pressman, in working 
 headings, lays his sheets to needles, placed in the tympan, so as 
 to point, to a particular line; tor in ruling, some sheets may be 
 a trifle out in the margin, although the lines will he exact ; and 
 hy laying to the same line at each impression, the headings are 
 hound to kill right. 
 
 Headline.— The top line of a page containing the running 
 title and (olio. When there is no running title the folio is styled 
 the head-line. Chapiter lines are head-lines, as are also the titles 
 of articles in periodicals and newspapers. 
 
 Head of a Page. — The top or upper end of the page. 
 
 Head-pieces. — Ornamental designs used at the heads or 
 commencements of chapters. The early productions of the 
 press wen- embellished with beautifully-executed drawings in 
 various colours, done by hand, and displaying tlm highest skill 
 "i ilie illuminators. Gradually, as books were produced more 
 cheaply, w-ood engravings were used: then metal ornaments 
 w "i" produced, and subsequently flowers or borders. The latter 
 were superseded hy simple brass rules, and some years ago even 
 these were dispensed with, and head-pieces were seldom or 
 never seen. The recent revival of old-style printing has brought 
 with it. not only the old faces of typo hut the old ornamental 
 head-pieces, and many of the newest and most tasteful works 
 me now- ornamented with iac-similes of head-pieces that were 
 in fashion two centuries ago. 
 
 Heads. — The margin between the heads of the pages in 
 a forme. 
 
 Heap. — The pile of paper given out and wetted down for 
 any job. 
 
 Hell.— The place where the broken and battered type goes 
 to. .Modern refinement has almost expunged this expression 
 from the printers' vocabulary. 
 
 High. — A line or letter is said to he '-high " when it is above 
 ilm In ight of the other letters or lines surrounding it. Owing 
 to the different standards of the founders, and especially of the 
 wo,,,! letter cutters, founts me sometimes found to lie almost 
 - forworking in conjunction with founts supplied by other 
 manufacturers. 
 
 Hoe's Machines. — A greatly improved series of machines 
 for j" 1 '. book, am! m wspaper printing, invented hy Richard M.
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 27 
 
 Hoe. a native of Leicestershire, who emigrated in his youth to 
 the United States. In 1846, he brought out his " Lightning 
 Press," or Type-revolving Printing Machine, which is now in use 
 in some of the largest offices in every part of the world. The 
 forme of type is placed on the surface of a horizontal revoh ing 
 cylinder, of about four and a half feet in diameter. The forme 
 occupies a segment of only about one-fourth of the surface of 
 the cylinder, and the remainder is used as an ink distributing 
 surface. Around this main cylinder, and parallel with it, are 
 placed smaller impression cylinders, varying in number from 
 four to ten, according to the size of the machine. The large 
 cylinder being put in motion the form of types is carried suc- 
 cessively to all the impression cylinders, at each of which a 
 sheet is introduced and receives the impression of the types as 
 the forme passes. Thus as many sheets are printed at each 
 revolution of the main cylinder as there are impression cylinders 
 around it. One person 'is required at each impression cylinder 
 to supply the sheets of paper, 'which are taken at the proper 
 moment by fingers or grippers, and after being printed are 
 curried out by tapes and laid in heaps by mfeans of self-acting 
 flyers, thereby dispensing with the hands required in ordinary 
 machines to receive and pile the sheets. The grippers hold the 
 sheet securely, so that the thinnest newspaper may be printed 
 without waste. The ink is contained in a fountain placed beneath 
 the main cylinder, and is conveyed by means of distributing 
 rollers to the distributing surface on the main cylinder. This 
 surface being lower, or less in diameter, than the forme of types, 
 passes by the impression cylinder without touching it. For 
 each impression there are two inking rollers, which receive 
 their supply of ink from the distributing surface of the main 
 cylinder: they rise and ink the forme as it passes under them, 
 after which they again fall to the distributing surface. Each 
 page of the paper is locked-up on a detached segment of the 
 large cylinder (termed a "turtle''), which constitutes its bed 
 and chase. The column rules run parallel with the shaft of the 
 cylinder, and are consequently straight ; while the head, cross, 
 and dash rules are in the form of segments of a circle. The 
 column rules are in the form of a wedge, with the thin part 
 directed towards the axis of the cylinder, so as to bind the types 
 securely. These wedge-shaped column rules are held down to 
 the l>ed by tongues projecting at intervals along their length, 
 which slide in rebated grooves cut crosswise in the face of the 
 bed. The spaces in the grooves between the column rules are 
 accurately fitted with sliding blocks of metal, even with the 
 surface of the bed, the ends of which blocks are cut away un- 
 derneath to receive a projection on the sides of the tongues of 
 the column rules. The forme of type is locked-up in the bed 
 by means of screws at the foot and sides, by which the type is 
 held as securely as in the ordinary manner upon a Hat bed. if 
 not more so. The speed of these machines is limited only by 
 the ability of the feeders to supply the sheets. Messrs. Hoe 
 and Co. possess a very extensive manufactory in New York, and 
 they produce various classes of printing materiel. The most 
 stupendous of their works are the type-revolving lightning 
 presses; but perhaps the most extraordinary are the machines 
 whereby railway and theatre tickets are, at a single operation, 
 printed, numbered in a different colour, ami deposited in regular 
 order in a receptacle, at the rate of 10,000 to 12,000 an hour. In 
 1843, they produced an improved kind, which took the sheet 
 with u-on fingers. Kotary Perfecting Presses were made by Eoe 
 and to. as long ago as 1850, when one was furnished to print, in 
 both type and stereotype, "Thompson's Bank Reporter," and 
 another to print " Webster's Spelling Book " from the plates, at 
 which work it is still employed by Appleton & Co. These ma- 
 chines were the first ever constructed on this principle. In 1860, 
 lloe & Co. sent to Lloyd's Weekly Newspaper, in London, a per- 
 fecting machine, adapted to two or more "feeders." Large 
 machines built on this principle are now in use in several news- 
 paper offices, and strenuous exertions are making t> i improve them 
 to a point where they will do the work of the type-revolving 
 i'h equal speed and certainty, and with greater cheapness, 
 Much interest is felt at the present time in perfecting presses, so 
 called because they "perfect" or print both sides of a sheet at 
 once. They are of various patterns, but may all be divided into 
 
 two classes, one having flat beds moving horizontally backward 
 and forward, and the other having curved beds revolving upon 
 the surface of a cylinder. Those with flat beds were originally 
 made in England and Germany as early as the close of the last 
 century, and have been manufactured by lloe & Co. for about 
 forty years. 
 
 Hollow Quadrats. — These are cast of various sizes, gradu- 
 ated to Pica ems. They answer many of the purposes "t quota- 
 tions, but are principally useful as frames or miniature chases 
 for circular or oval jobs. 
 
 Horn Book. — Horn books, consisting of a single sheet ot 
 paper mounted on wood and protected by a transparent sheet 
 of horn were formerly extensively used in the education of 
 children. They were very common in the Elizabethan period, 
 but as they had no dates attached to them it is impossible to 
 give a precise account of their use. 
 
 Horse. — The stage on the bank (q.v.) on which pressmen set 
 the heap of paper. 
 
 Horsing it. — When a compositor or pressman writes more 
 in his weekly bill than he has earned, he is said to be "horsing 
 it. — See Dead Horse. 
 
 Horseflesh. — When composition is paid for, week after 
 week, " on account " — that is, instead of the exact value of the 
 work done being estimated, a rough approximate sum is charged 
 — there is always a tendency to ™ overdraw." At the finish of 
 the job and the settling up of accounts, what the printer has 
 to work out is caUed "horseflesh." 
 
 HydrauHc Press. — An improved invention on the principle 
 of the Standing Press (y.r.). It is used by printers for pressing 
 their printed work, the pressure being given by means of water 
 instead of the lever-bar, which works the screw. The punips 
 and tank are fixed at the side of the press, and as they are 
 worked, the piston is forced upwards. Some hydraulics have 
 only one pump : but most of them have two. One pump is used 
 at first, till the piston is raised high enough to cause a pressure, 
 and when this becomes tight the other is applied, which increases 
 the pressure still more. A long haudle is then placed in the 
 first pump, which gives greater power still ; and when placed 
 on the second pump, two or three persons give their united 
 strength till the required pressure is attained. The sheets are 
 generally allowed to remain in the press all night ; but some- 
 times it is necessary to fill the press twice a-day. To release the 
 sheets, it is only necessary to turn a tap, which lets the water 
 escape hack into the tank, and the piston is lowered in propor- 
 tion as the water rims out. Its descent can be impeded instantly 
 by fastening the tap again. 
 
 Hyphen. — This symbol ( - ) is employed to connect com- 
 pound wonls. as lap-dog, to-morrow. It is also used at the end 
 of a line when a word is not finished, but part of it is carried 
 into the next line. — See Division of Woeds. 
 
 I. 
 
 Illuminated Letters. — The first productions of the print- 
 ing press contained no capital letters at the commencement of 
 sentences or proper names of men and places, blanks wen 
 left for the titles, initial letters, and other ornaments, in order 
 to have them supplied by the illuminators, whose ingenious art. 
 though in vogue before and at that time, did not long survive 
 the masterly improvements made by the printers in this branch 
 of their art. Those ornaments were exquisitely line and curiously 
 variegated with the mosl beautiful colours, and even with gold 
 and silver: the margins, likewise, were frequently charged with 
 a variety of figures of saints, birds, beast:-, monsters, flowers. \c. 
 which had sometimes relation to the contents of the page, though 
 often none at all. These embellishments were very costly, but 
 for those who could not afford a great price, there were more 
 interior ornaments which could be done at a much easier rate. 
 The art of illumination has recently been revived, but leSS as 8 
 profession than as an elegant pastime for ainateura of art. Hlu-
 
 28 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 Tit? Printern' Rosiato? 
 Supplement. 
 
 minatol letters, of the most elegant and variegated designs, are 
 now E isb typefounders to supersede these costly 
 
 omami 
 
 IUustratod Books.— From Dunlap's "History of tho Arts 
 of De ign"we learn thai the earlie I pecimens of engravi 
 are of the fifteenth century, and thi I on record is 
 
 Martin Schoen, of Culmbach, who died in I486. The Italians 
 
 claim i ivention: but it is remarkable that the firsl l k 
 
 printed at Rome baa the firsl engravings executed there, and 
 
 03 two Germans, date 1478. Scriptural designs 
 
 of many B e cut with descriptive texts on each block 
 
 or plate, and thej were printed 01 a side of the paper only, 
 
 and two prints were frequently pasted together to form one 
 leaf, 'with a picture on each ude ; rutin' sets were subsequently 
 bound np and formed the block-books so well known to anti- 
 quaries. Typography was introduced into England byCaxton 
 in 1474, and published his "Game of Chesse?' "J&op," and 
 
 other works with w icuts, th" execution of which is quite 
 
 barbarous when compared with continental engravings of the 
 same period. All ems consisted of little more than outlines 
 until 1493, when Michael Wolgemuth effected e great improve- 
 ment in the art of wood engraving by his cuts for Ids •■ Nurem- 
 berg Chronicle," in which be introduced a greater degree of 
 shading, and tho first attempts at cross-hatching. This was 
 carried to a much higher perfection by his pupil, Albert Durer. 
 
 The sixteenth cent ury was rich in ahle wood engravers in si -\ 1.1 1 
 parts of continental Europe. In England, engraving was indebted 
 to foreigners, generally Flemish, Dutch, and German, for exist- 
 tence until the middle of the seventeenth century. Of early 
 English artists one of the most eminent is George Vertue, who 
 died in 1756. The founder of the school of English landscape 
 engraving is Francis Nivarrs. a Frenchman. However, Woollet, 
 
 a native of England, was a great engraver of this school, although 
 he did noi confine himself to landscapes, as his great work after 
 West's " Death of Wolfe," sufficiently proves. Hogarth, one of 
 the glories of English painting was equally celebrated as an 
 engraver. In the seventeenth century the art of wood-engraving 
 visiblj declined, owing to the superior cultivation of copper- 
 engraving; but in the eighteenth century it was revived in 
 England \\ ith great success by Bewick, who began the practice 
 of the art in 1768. In 1775, Bewick produced his well-known 
 cut of •■ The old Hound, "and in 1785 he commenced his natural 
 hifltorie ,and published "The Quadrupeds "in 1790, and "Birds" 
 in 17'. »T. These and his other works effected by their great 
 excellence the restoration of an almost lost art, and led to its 
 cultivation and development, and the introduction of a richer 
 and more varied style of workmanship, until the English, who 
 were behind their continental neighbours at tho outset, have 
 become pre-eminent in the an.* The Bewick of America was 
 Alexander Anderson, who studied the art of metal engraving 
 with John Roberts. In the year L764,as a professional engraver, 
 Mr. Anderson was engaged by William Durell, one of the early 
 American publishers, to engrave cuts for an edition of "The 
 Looking Glass," the original engravings forwhich were cut by 
 Bewick on wood. Be worked through half the book in type 
 
 metal and copper, and then commenced his essays on w 1, 
 
 without other instruction than that derived from studying Bew- 
 ick's cuts, which he wa copying, lie persev ered in the practice 
 and exhibited real ability, though for many years he received 
 hut little encouragement; but, like his great English contem- 
 porary, he was an enthusiast in the art, and kept steadily on his 
 course, and had the satisfaction of witnessing the progress of 
 wood-engraving in America to general adoption. In America, 
 as in England, the first illustrated books which aimed at ex- 
 cellence in the art of engraving, and to rank altogether in paper, 
 
 printing, and binding, as works of art. were in the form of 
 
 Annuals. In England we have to go hark as far as 1822 to find 
 the earliest of tho Annuals. In the year I s29, seventeen of these 
 works were published in England; in 1840 there were onlynine; 
 and in 18ot< tho last of the Annuals, " The Keepsake," ceased to 
 
 * Bewick's Woodcuts, with a descriptive cataln^uc by the Rev. Thomas lluijo, 
 have recently been published by Reeve & Co., London. 
 
 exist. UthOUgb the engravings, which were after the best 
 English painters, such as Turner, Landseer, Clarkson, Stanfield, 
 Roberts, Stone, and Callcott, were the main attraction, some ox 
 the most distinguished authors were engaged on the letter-press. 
 Sir Walter Scotl wrote in one, and received five hundred pounds 
 
 for four not very long con I I'll nit ions. Coleridge wrote in another ; 
 
 and am.uig lesser names were l>r. Croly, L. E. London, Mary 
 lliwitt, Mrs. Norton, and the Countess of Blessington. The 
 pioneer on Hie otbei side of the Atlantic were "The Token," 
 published in Boston, by S. G. Goodrich, for which Nathaniel 
 
 Haw th or ne wrote his first thing I, and "The Gift," published by 
 B. E. Carey, afterwards of the firm of Carey & Hart. Tho art 
 Of illustration by engravings passed into a new phase in England 
 about the year IMn, and a little hiter the same phase in the 
 United States. The art of illustration was cheapened and popu- 
 larised. The "Pickwick Papers," and other early works of 
 Mr. Charles Dickens, followed by those of Charles Lever, had 
 created a popular taste for picture hooks. In 1840, "Master 
 Hum]. lire,'. CI ick" was issued in threepenny weekly numbers 
 
 with woodcut illustrations bj G. Caller !,• and II. K. Browne; 
 
 aud at the same time A ins worth's "Tower of London," in sfiilling 
 monthly parts, with illustrations by George Cruikshank and 
 W. A. Delamotte. Punch was started in 1841, and in 1842 the 
 Illustrated London News, and both gave au immense impetus to 
 the taste for pictorial illustrations. The cheap illustrated books 
 and serial- of Messrs. Charles Knight and the Brothers W. & R. 
 Chambers, were the forerunners of tho mass of the miscellaneous 
 books and periodicals of the present day. In 18(it) was started 
 the Graphic, which transcends in the excelle f its illustra- 
 tions any previous achievement either in this or any other 
 country. A magnificent collection of illustrations, showing tho 
 rise and progress of the art, is on view at the South Kensington 
 Museum. In arranging it, the object of its originator has been 
 to illustrate the results attained by each of the processes em- 
 ployed, rather than to point attention to the works of any par- 
 ticular masters or schools of art. The series commences with 
 examples of priuts from wood or metal blocks, either simple 
 or compound, and of plain as well as coloured impressions ob- 
 tained by their means, but by a single operation of the printing 
 press. A set of impressions from the blocks cut by Bewick 
 illustrate the degree of perfection to which wood engraving was 
 advanced at the close of the last century, and examples of split 
 prints from the Illustrated News show the means which havo 
 been employed to aid collectors in completing their series from 
 the pages of periodicals and the literature of our own times. 
 Prints from engraved copper plates follow, and they illustrate 
 the results attained simply by cutting away portions of the 
 surface of the metal plate by the graver; the action of the acids, 
 as applied in the production of etchings; and the results of a 
 combination of etching and engravin arts were prac- 
 tised at the period when Hogarth began his career. Another 
 set illustrates engrai ing upon steel and lithography. Following 
 the lithographic examples is a large series of prints in carbon 
 obtained by a variety of photographic processes. It is curious 
 to remark that the past, the present, and the future of our 
 producing powers have each been based upon entirely distinct 
 principles. As greater facilities for producing prints have been 
 demanded, a weaker and apparently less durable source of pro- 
 duction has hern, and appears, in the future, to be likely to be 
 still more resorted to. Thus, in the past period, engravings 
 were executed, and prints obtained from copper and steel plates. 
 At present, wood blocks and lithographic stones are employed; 
 but the tut lire of our art-producing power appears likely to rest 
 on what are apparently still less durable, viz., gums, resins, and 
 gelatine. The series is brought to a close by juxtaposing works 
 of Doo, Cousins, Landseer, and others, engravers of our own 
 times, as published by Mr. Graves, with the series of carbon 
 prints obtained by means of gelatine, as in tho photo-galvano- 
 graphic process of Herr Paul Pretsch ; prints in gelatine by Mr. 
 Swan, of Newcastle, the Autotype Company, of London, and 
 Woodbury's process ; and prints from gelatine as seen in the 
 examples by M. Tessier du Motay, of Paris, and Herr Albert, 
 of Munich. The collection consists of about 300 examples, and 
 presents a sort of panoramic view of prints and reproductive
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF T\TOGRAPIIY. 
 
 20 
 
 art during the past century and a half, and it is interesting as 
 showing the direction in which we must look in the future. 
 Whatever success may have attended the efforts of various pub- 
 lishing firms to extend the art of wood-engraving, it must be 
 admitted that one firm stands out pre-eminent in the magnitude 
 of its operations in this direction. Messrs. C'assell, 1'etter, and 
 (ialpin may be said to have accomplished the work of bringing 
 high-class and valuable pictorial representations within reach of 
 the people. "Cassell's Illustrated History of England" may be 
 mentioned among the first illustrated works of importance 
 undertaken by the firm. It was richly embellished with wood- 
 engravings to' the number of two thousand, by the most eminent 
 English and foreign artists. A careful attention to archaeological 
 research gives inestimable interest to every engraving ; and, in 
 fact, pictures out the story of our country's annals so faithfully 
 as to leave an indelible impression on the mind. But a still 
 greater work remained to be done. When, in 1859, the firm 
 undertook the issue of an illustrated edition of the Holy Scrip- 
 tures, so gigantic an undertaking had never been attempted 
 before. Editions of the Bible with pictures, a very different 
 thing from illustrations, had been on several occasions attempted 
 with varying success; but the work projected by Messrs. C'assell, 
 Tetter, and Galpin was to comprise the drawings of the best 
 artists, founded on the most reliable sources, involving an 
 immense outlay of capital, and the price of each number was to 
 be One Penny." Artists of the highest eminence, English and fo- 
 reign, were engaged, and the first number of " Cassell's Illustrated 
 family Bible " was hailed with universal satisfaction. Its engra- 
 vings formed an era in the art of wood-engraviug. Never before 
 had such drawings been so faithfully rendered by the graver, and 
 never before had woodcuts been so carefully and beautifully 
 printed. Originally designed for the home of the cottager and 
 the parlour of the operative, yet this edition was welcomed by 
 the highest and noblest in the land ; and not in this land alone, 
 in America, Australia, and throughout the Colonies, it was alike 
 popular. Then followed the issue of "Cassell's Popular Illustrated 
 Natural History," with about one thousand illustrations. Space 
 will not allow' us to further particularise the illustrated works 
 which rapidly followed each other from the press of Messrs. 
 C'assell, Petter, and Galpiu ; we must confine ourselves to the mere 
 mention of a magnificent Memorial Edition of the works of 
 Shakespeare, in three volumes, containing upwards of five hun- 
 dred illustrations, produced at a cost of about i'-i .i.ih >i>, " Cassell's 
 Illustrated Edition of Foxe's Book of Martyrs," "Cassell's Illu- 
 strated Pemjy Readings," " Cassell's Illustrated World of Won- 
 ders." "Cassell's Illustrated Swiss Family Kobinson." To this 
 array of illustrated standard works we have yet to add the most 
 magnificent series of illustrated volumes ever given to the British 
 public, namely, the masterly Dore series of fine art volumes, the 
 Holy Bible, Milton's " Paradise Lost," Dante's " Inferno," Dante's 
 "Purgatory and Paradise," "Don Quixote," "Atala," La Fontaine's 
 '•Fables," "Croqueinetaiue," "Fairy Realm," "Munchausen," and 
 "Wandering Jew," which mark, perhaps, the greatest advance in 
 the progress of wood-engraviug and printing, as applied to 
 popular illustrated books, that this country has witnessed. 
 
 Imperial. — A size of paper. — See Dimensions of Papeb. 
 
 Imperfections. — When a fount of new type is received 
 from the foundry, it is usually found that some of the sorts are 
 deficient in quantity for the particular work for which the type 
 was required. The sorts wanted are called "imperfections." 
 
 Imposing. — The act of locking-up pages in a chase, after it 
 has been properly dressed with furniture. Much attention has 
 been paid to this important branch of the compositor's business 
 in the various technical handbooks, and some ingenuity has been 
 displayed in inventing new and improved modes. Imposing 
 from the centre, by means of which the blank or open pages 
 may be placed in the middle of the forme, leaving the solid 
 pages on the outside to act as bearers for the rollers, as well as 
 for the better regulation of the impression, is generally adopted 
 for sheets of oddments, such as the title, dedication, preface, &c. 
 Mr. Houghton, in his "Printer.-' Practical Every-day Book" 
 a several interesting examples of improvement on the old 
 ins of imposition. The "American Printer" says: "All 
 
 odd matter for any forme should be divided into fours, eights, 
 twelves, and sixteens, which is the ground-work of all the im- 
 positions except the eighteen-, which diners from all others; for 
 instance, sixteens, twenty-fours, and thirty-twos are only octavos 
 and twelves doubled, or twice doubled, and imposed in half- 
 sheets. The sixteens are two octavos imp 1 on one -ide of 
 
 the short cross; the twenty-tours are two twelves imposed on 
 each side of the long cross; and a thirty-two is four ocf 
 imposed in each quarter of the chase. Thus a sheet may l>e 
 repeatedly doubled. By this division any forme or sheet maybe 
 imposed, always bearing in mind that the first page of each class 
 must stand to the left hand, with the toot of the page towards 
 you. Having set down the first page, then trace the remainder 
 according to the scheme which applies to its number, in proof of 
 which the standard rule for all other impositions may be adopted, 
 — namely, the folios of two pages, if placed properly be.- ide each 
 other, will make, when added together, one more than the num- 
 ber of pages in the sheet: that is, in a sheet of sixteen pages, one 
 and sixteen coming together will add up seventi en, and BO nine 
 and eight will make seventeen: and so on. In halt-sheets, all 
 the pages belonging to the white paper and reiteration are 
 imposed in one chase. So that when a sheet of paper is pri] 
 on both sides with the same forme, that sheet is cut in two 
 in the short cross if quarto or octavo, and in the short and long 
 cross, if twelves, and folded as octavo or twelves." For the su!>- 
 sidiary operations of tying-up the pages, laying down pages, 
 making-up furniture, making the margin, locking-up form-. 
 &c, see those subjects in their alphabetical order. 
 
 Imposing Surface. -The stone or plate on which forme- 
 are imposed aud corrected. Formerly imposing surfaces con- 
 sisted almost exclusively of slabs of stone, chiselled and smoothed 
 on then- upper surface. Recently plates of iron bine been used 
 instead, their advantages, over even the hardest stones, being 
 their strength and the little danger of breaking them, while they 
 are considerably smoother, and consequently do not injure the 
 bottom of the type which is moved about upon them. The 
 superficial size of a "stone" varies according to the description 
 of formes to be laid on it. Its height should be slightly over 
 three feet. The frame on which the stone rests is usually fitted 
 up with drawers for quoins and furniture, &C. Sometimes it 
 contains a rack for locked-up forme-, but this system is a bad 
 one, as the frequent vibration from the locking-up and planing 
 down of tonnes on the stone tend to loosen the quoins of those 
 in the rack aud cause the matter to fall out. It is around the 
 stone that the workmen assemble wliile a chapel is being held. 
 — See Trade Customs. 
 
 Impression. — The art of taking impressions from letters 
 ami other characters cast in relief upon several pieces of metal. 
 i- called letter-press printing. The impressions are taken either 
 by superficial or surface pressure, as on the common printing 
 press, or by lineal or cylindrical pressure as in the printing 
 machine and roller press. The pigments or inks, of whatever 
 colour, are always upon the surface of the types, and the sub- 
 stances which may be impressed are various. Wood-cuts and 
 other engravings in relief are also printed in this manner. 
 Copperplate printing is the reverse of the preceding, the charac- 
 ter- being engraven in intaglio and the pigment or inks contained 
 within the lines of the engravings, and not upon the surface of 
 the plate. The impressions are always taken by lineal or cylin- 
 drical pressure, the substances to be impressed, however, are 
 more limited. All engravings in intaglio, on whatever material. 
 are printed by this method. lithographic printing is from the 
 surface of certain porous stones, upon which characters are drawn 
 with peculiar pencils or pens, &c. The surface of the stone 1* 
 wetted, the chemical colouring compound adheres to the drawing 
 and refuses the stone. The impression is taken by a scraper, 
 that rubs violently upon the backs of the substances impn 
 which are fewer still in number. Drawings upon zinc and other 
 materials are printed by this process. C itton and calico print- 
 ing i- from surfaces engraven either in relict or intaglio, but it is 
 a branch of printing which doe- not enter within the .-cope oi 
 this work.— Having explained the scii mine distinctions between 
 the various kinds of impression, the word may b 
 connection with its technical meaning. Amongst the best printer-
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOCRAIMIY. 
 
 The Printers' 1: 
 
 Supplement. 
 
 there exists a great < pinion needi d 
 
 impression. Bj - ime a hi ivy a 
 
 Ui.' paper is considered uei vhile othet < an im- 
 
 pres ion ich does uot indent the paper is preferable, 
 
 ition of the paper is qo tesl of the force ol the impn ssion. 
 A light impression against a wollen blanket will show a 
 
 ibly than a strong im] i oard 
 
 tympan. Typo is worn out ch by the di 
 
 ■ ■I' the platen or cylinder on the fla 
 
 grinding or rounding impn caused 
 
 by forcing ot the blank' i id 
 
 every letter, Every fount o pe, whethet 
 
 ; i i n plat im a reduction 
 
 in height than ir a roil type is 
 
 new and the tympan hard and an th, the impn i be 
 
 made so Bat that the type will ool round at thi d the 
 
 impression will not show on the paper. But this cai I be done 
 
 with old t\| i- with a soft tyinpan; the impn ion mil 
 
 regul On fine work a rounding im- 
 
 i not onlydestro; 
 thickens the hair lines and wears oil' the serifls. It is not 
 
 bal i he paper should barely meet til'' type ; I 
 must be sufficient force in the impression to fa le ink 
 
 from the type '" ''"' paper. If there is not sufficient impn ssion 
 it will be necessary to carrymucli ink on the rollers, and I it 
 produces two evils; the type is clog ik and the forme 
 
 ix c imes foul ; i nuch i ! per, which 
 
 irs and sets off for want of sufficient force to fasten it to the 
 r. Distinction must be made between a light and weak 
 impression, and a firm and even impression. The latter should 
 ed, even if the paper is indented, though that is not 
 alwa old I j pe, a po solid 
 
 forme, must have a firm ii or else a 71 . di us and 
 
 1 ill making ready. 
 
 Imprint. The statement at the end of a book or paper of 
 
 and address of its printer. The Newspapers, Printers, 
 
 &c, \<-t (32 & 33 Vic, c. 24), while it repealed m then 
 
 aal enactments against printers, left in force the Act 
 
 -i Vic, c. 12, sec. -. which imposed a penalty upon printers 
 
 for not printing their name and residence on every paper or hook, 
 
 and on persons publishing the same. The words are: 
 
 1 . person who shall print an\ paper or I k whal iver which 
 
 ■'.".!'i! to be published or di p, rsed, and w ho shall no! print 
 the front ol everysuch paper, if the same shall be printed on 
 ide '"P.. or upon the first or last leaf of every paper or book 
 
 - hall I insist of more thai leal, in lead! ilo ollar.e : : 
 
 her name and usual place of abode or business, and every person who 
 shall publish or disperse, or n isl in publishing or dispersing, any 
 
 ■ k. on which the name and place of abod the 
 
 the same shall nol be printed a- aforesaid, shall for 
 uch paper so printed to him or her forfeit a sum not 
 
 more than five pound-. 
 
 Another section provides, thai in the case of I ks or paper- 
 printed at the 1 Press of Oxford, or the Pitt Press of 
 1 dge, printer, instead of printing his name thereon, 
 shall print the following words: "Printed at the University Press, 
 ' 1 cford," or "The I'm Pre . 1 lambridge," as the case may be. — 
 See Laws relating to Printers. 
 
 Incut Notes. — Notes which cut too the matter. They are 
 placi d on the outside edges ot the ] age. 
 
 Indentions. — The first lit fa newparagraph is usually 
 
 ited "ii'' 1 in. a!: ir u ;h if the work he set very v. idelj . ai d 
 v. oh had- between tie- lines, or il tie- measure i- very wide, 
 two or three ens may he used. See Hanging Indentions. 
 
 Index. — An alphabetical table of the contents of a 1 k. 
 
 'fhe index is generally placed at the end of th.. volume, and 
 
 ■i in letter about two sizes less than that of the work. It 
 
 is alwa; 9 begun on a right-hand pace is unusually 
 
 '. dualile, or tin it of the work not c dered as oi 
 
 equence. In setting an index the subject line should not 
 
 be indented, but if the subject make more tha hie, all 
 
 lilt the first should be indented about an em. Win re several 
 « figures are used in succession, a comma is put after each 
 
 and commas, the succession of the 
 
 putting a dash between the first and last 
 
 3. Again, if an article ha been collected from 
 
 i . ,, pagi the folio of the second is supplied by sq., or sequente, 
 
 qq.,ov juientibus, when an article is touched upon in 
 
 , full point is not put after the last figures 
 
 b, cau tti tanding at the end of a line it a 
 
 Lent Stop. .Wo!, c on r a full point placed to the 
 
 last wad of an article in a wide measure and open matter with 
 1, aders : but it 1 - not impropi r to use a comma, at the end of 
 ■ svhere the figures are put close to the matter, 
 hem to tin end of the line. 
 
 Index (il'cf ') or Hand. A symbol used to point out some- 
 thing which the writer bin] oi great importance. Amongst 
 compi 1 rs,iti commonly known as a " fist." The index sign 
 nentl j 11 1 d in book work, but chiefly in handbills, 
 : dii eii m placards, as, "ilif'.Yofe the Address," 
 To the I ' 1 : i ■■ 1 1 1: ■' i' 1 01 lie 1 >/;•■ ,." 
 Inferior Letters. -Letters which are cast with their face 
 shank, so that an unusually white space is left 
 at the head when they are printed. 
 
 Ink. Printing ink, as evi 1 must bo aware, is a verj 
 
 different composition to that used forwriting. It is a soft, glossy 
 compound, having a certain amount of adhesiveness, and be- 
 coming, by exposure in thin layers, perfectly bard and firm. 
 .hieii always belong to it, it possesses 
 and various attributes, according to the numerous pur- 
 poses to which it is applied. Its preparation demands not only 
 a tolerable proportion of scientific knowledge, but also very 
 
 careful 1 ipulation, and manufacturers have found that to 
 
 produce it ot good quality both experience and deep study are 
 requisite. The very im] ortant use for which it is designed -the 
 in a permanent form the productions of the mind- 
 indicates some of the properties it ought to possess. The most 
 valuable of these is durability, or the capacity to resist success- 
 fully the obliterating influences of time, and it should also have 
 brightness and depth of tint. II must be a mutable preparation, 
 passing from the soft, adhesive state to that of a perfectly hard 
 and dry suh time ■, and this change of condition must have a 
 certain rate of progress, and be, to some exteut, under control. 
 When prepared, some time generally elapses before it is us,,;, 
 and during this period it should not alter in the slightest deor, o ; 
 in fact, when the air is excluded from it it should keep for almost 
 any length of time. During its application to the type, its 
 solidification should be as slow as possible, and unaccompanied 
 by the emission of any unpleasant or deleterious odour. It 
 ought not to effect the, nit elastic rollers which are employed to 
 convey it to the type, and which, unless the ink be a perfectly 
 harmless preparation, are liable to considerable injury. The 
 Change of state should not he accompanied by the do] OSition of 
 consolidated mailer in the ink, as this impedes the pressman and 
 proves a loss to the printer. Printing ink should, moreover, have 
 an oleaginous character; it ought to be very glossy, and perfectly 
 tree from :m\ granular appearance. If, on the extraction of a 
 small portion from a mass, it leaves but a short thread suspended, 
 it i- 1,, n iden d good, but the best test of its consistency is the 
 adhesion ii shows upon pressing the finger against a quantity of 
 if. The requirements of a good printing ink do not end here. 
 I!a\ i< plied, its action must be confined to a very slight 
 penetration into the paper — just sufficient to prevent its detach- 
 ment will I materially injuring the surface of the latter. It 
 
 ought to dry up in a very short space of time to a hard in- 
 e. . malleoli le solid. The ingredients of ordinary printing 
 ink are burnt linseed oil, resin, and occasionally soap, with 
 various colouring matters. The best quality of linseed oil is 
 used, and this is purified by digesting it in partially-diluted 
 sulphuric acid tor some hou] . ai a temperature of about two 
 hundred and twelve degrees, allowing the impurities to subside, 
 and then washing away the acid with repeated additions of hot 
 water. The oil, alter this treatment, is pale and turbid, and if 
 the freeing from the acidis complete, there is scarcely any odour. 
 By rest, the oil clarifies, and has then a pale lemon colour. It 
 now dries much more rapidly than before. The purified oil is
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONA RY ( )F TY 1 M >G 11 A P I [ Y. 
 
 31 
 
 now partially resinified by heat. For this purpose it is introduced 
 into large cast-iron pots," and boiled until inflamable vapours are 
 freely evolved. These are ignited and allowed to bum for a few 
 minutes, after which they are extinguished by placing a tight 
 cover over the boiler. Ebullition of the oil is continued until, 
 on cooling, a firm skin forms on its surface, known by placing a 
 a drop on slate or other smooth, cold surface. Other drying oils 
 besides linseed are occasionally used, but their cost, or other 
 considerations, prevents their general adoption. Resin oil. is, 
 indeed, pretty largely employed, but apart from other disadi au- 
 tages,.its disagreeable and permanent smell prevents its entering 
 into other ink than that intended for temporary or common 
 printing, as newspapers, posters, &c. Paraffin oil, which has 
 lately been used, is open to the same objections. Resin is an 
 article of considerable importance in the manufacture of printing 
 ink, since, when dissolved in the oil— alter the latter has under- 
 gone ebullition and inflammation — it communicates body to the 
 fluid. For many inks the quality of the common black resin is 
 sufficiently good, but some require the pale, clear, transparent 
 resin, obtained byre-melting and clarifying the residue of the 
 distillation of turpentine with water. The colouring matters of 
 printing ink demand great attention, as much of the beauty of 
 typography depends upon them. The universal ingredient for 
 black ink is lamp black. No expense is spared to get the most 
 superior qualities. Other black substances are occasionally used. 
 Charcoal trom various substances, when reduced to an impal] ial lie 
 powder, and mixed with other ingredients, furnishes a deep, 
 blue-black ink that dries rapidly. The brown tint possessed by 
 lamp-black is not unfrequently neutralised by the addition of 
 blue compounds, as indigo, Prussian blue, &c. The various 
 colouring matters employed in the preparation of other inks are 
 all selected for their superior and approximate qualities. Indeed, 
 the manufacture of printing ink is an especial business and 
 demands considerable capital. Every manufacturer has his own 
 secrets, both as to material and process, and by long experience 
 alone can printing ink manufacturers so select and apportion 
 the numerous ingredients as to adapt it to its numerous require- 
 ments. In the manufacture of printing ink, the resin is dissolved 
 in the burnt oil, in cast-iron pots or boilers, and the varnish, thus 
 prepared, is introduced into what is termed the "mixing vessel." 
 which is cylindrical, and in the centre of which bars, or rods of 
 iron, attached to a perpendicular shaft, revolves in a horizontal 
 position. The colouring matter is then added to the hot varnish, 
 and the whole, when thoroughly mixed, is drawn off through an 
 opening in the base of the vessel. The pulp is next very care- 
 fully ground, by being passed between hard stones of a very tine 
 texture, driven by heavy machinery, the motive power being 
 steam. Sometimes a second grinding is requisite, but this may 
 generally be avoided, by taking care that the varnish of resin 
 and oil is clear and free from gritty particles, and that the black 
 is hi an impalpable state. The proportions and conditions of the 
 various ingredients vary considerably, and great experience is 
 required before an ink can be prepared to suit any one purpose. 
 The oil has to be rendered more viscid, by burning, in some cases 
 than in others; sometimes the quantity or kind of resin requires 
 to be varied; or, perhaps, different proportions of colour are 
 requsite. Newspapers printed on machines require an ink of 
 less substance than that employed for book-work, which must 
 be tolerably stiff. For wood-cuts, the ink must not only be very 
 stitV, but very fine. The qualities of the material to which the 
 ink is applied furnish an additional guide in this matter — thin 
 paper must have a soft ink, which works clearly and is not too 
 adhesive. A fine, stout paper, on the other hand, will bear a 
 stiller and more glutinous ink, and as resin supplies these pro- 
 perties, so does it, in a great measure, communicate brilliancy, 
 and the most perfect and splendid effects are by these means 
 produced. Posters, with large wood type, require a semi-fluid 
 ink, but one not surcharged with oil. Ordinary news-work re- 
 quires a better quality, more " tacky " and finely ground. Good 
 book-work should have a stiller bodied ink, sott, smooth, and 
 easily distributed. Job ink, which is made expressly for press- 
 W( irk on dry paper, should be used only for such work. Hook and 
 job inks are not convertible ; an ink for wet paper will not work 
 well on dry paper, and vice versa. Very fine presswork, such as 
 woodcuts, or letterpress upon enamelled paper, requires an ink 
 
 impalpably fine, of brilliant colour, of strong bod;,, 
 enough to be taken up smoothly on the inking rollers. E> 
 general printing office should keep lour grades of ink — N- 
 .bibbing, Book, and Woodcut. Fine presswork is impossible 
 withoul good ink. To recapitulate: the cardinal virtui 
 good ink are, intenseness of colour; impalpability; covering the 
 
 surface perfectly ; quitting the surf) if the typ i wing 
 
 when the paper is withdrawn. h i the 
 
 paper; no after it is printed; and retaining i 
 
 afterwards its original colour without change. Inks which are 
 properly manufactured on sound chemical principles, should 
 possess the additional advantages of ki e it g the roller in g 
 working order, distributing freely, worki] and clean, 
 
 and drying rapidly on paper; the colour should be permanent, 
 without a tendency to turn brown by age. Theprice of printing 
 inks has undergone some remarkable in 
 
 In a price list contained in Stower/s " Printers' Grammar," pub- 
 lished in 180*, the very cheapest quality t- quoted at Kid. per ft. : 
 very good useful ink is now largely supplied at less than 6d. 
 See l>;;v Colours, and PRINTING in C'OLoras. 
 
 Inking a Forme. — See Rolling. 
 
 Inking Apparatus for the Hand-Press. -Messrs. B. 
 Hoe & Co. have invented an improved apparatus for the hand- 
 press. It is attached to an ordinary press, and the inking i 
 done by the ordinary operation of the press, thus dispensing with 
 one person's labour. It also gives a more perfect distribution. 
 The large distributing cylinder, which is turned by a crank, 
 vibrates. There are two rollers to ink the forme, moving in a 
 carriage with four wheels,those on one end being plain, those on 
 the other having a projecting flange. Two wrought-iron rails lie 
 on the bed of the press, outside' the chase: one of them grooved 
 to receive the projecting flanges on one pair of the wheels, Cue 
 other level on the surface. Projecting from the frame an 
 short rails, on which the wheel rests while the rollers are re- 
 ceiving ink from the cylinder. The machine is set up behind the 
 press so that the short rails on it agree exactly, both in height 
 and width, with the rails on the bed of the press when it is run 
 out. The journal boxes of the inking rollers have adjue 
 screws, so that they may bear more or less on the type, as cir- 
 cumstances require. 
 
 Ink Fountain. — That part of a machine in which the ink is 
 contained. The ink fountain should be charged with the ink 
 selected and kept well covered, to secure it from oust. Then the 
 screw should be turned down, and all the ink cut. off evenly. 
 When the forme is ready, the ink should be cautiously turned 
 on, and the machinist should wait tor ten or twelve impressions 
 before altering the screws. For small tonnes and short 1,111. 
 of any job of machine work in coloured ink or extra ink. a 
 fountain is not necessary, as the ink may be applied to the dis- 
 tributing sm-face with a' brayer or palette knife. 
 
 Ink Table. — The surface upon which the roller isdistribul 
 
 previously to being used for the forme. The back of the table is 
 slightly raisi d, having two receptacli s one for ink, the othei 
 the brayer. The ink is spread in small quantities along this raised 
 portion by means of the braver, so as to give an even supply to 
 the roller across its entire length. The roller having been lightly 
 dipped into the ink so spread, is distributed about the front of 
 the table until it is covered evenly all over, it is then . 
 inking the forme. Various improvements have been made in the 
 manufacture of ink tables; some being supplied with an ink 
 duct, similar to a machine, the fe ding cylinder being turned 
 by means of a handle, or worked by a treadle. 
 
 Inking-up the Roller. — Every evening, when leaving ofi 
 work, and occasionally at meal times, the pressmen sm 
 their rollers in a thick layer of common ink, to prea rve the 
 and keep them from getting hard: this is technically tern 
 
 "inking-up the roller." In winter time, a? the weather has a 
 tendency to harden the composition, some pressmen introduce a 
 quantity of oil into the ink used for this purpose, as it imparts 
 a suppleness to the face of the roller. 
 
 Inner Forme. — The forme which contains the inner pages 
 of a sheet, commencing with the second page. For instance, in
 
 32 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYIMKlltAIMI V 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 quarto the inner paces would be '-'. •". and 6, 7, which 
 could not be read until the fold al the head is cut. It p. 
 id is usually worked drat. 
 
 Inner Tympan. \ frame covered with parchment, which 
 lit.-, into the outer tympan (g.v.). 
 
 Inset.— A loose sheet inserted into any 1 1. or pamp 
 
 Interleaving.- -in fine work, particularly when the paper 
 is heavy, and the type large and Mark, set-off sheets are used to 
 interleave the whole impression while working. The san 
 • 1 me where large woodcuts occur. Diarii - are now usually inter- 
 d \\iih blotting-paper. Sia Set-ofj Sheets. 
 
 Inside Quires. Phi i rfeel quires of paper, con! 
 
 twenty-four good Bh b, Thej are thus desigi I I 
 
 iguish them from thi o i idi i c i irded qttires. 
 
 Inside Sheets.— The thin bee! a ed bj | 
 
 n tween the tympans oi the pi 
 
 Interrogation, Sign of ( ? ).— A Bign used in > 
 A note oi intern I at the end of an interrogative 
 
 tl al is, wheni ver a qn i ed. Sometimes, 
 
 i ire included in onesenl 
 when it may not be neo ssarj to use mi re than one interrogation 
 at the end. These examples contain but one cumulativi i 
 Hon, to which but one, it any, answer is required. Were 
 distinct questions put, and an answer required to each, then each 
 interrogation should be marked with its appropriate sign, for 
 
 therr would !"■ so many interrogative sente -. When senti 
 
 or expressions which are af) svhen spoken or writtei 
 
 quoted by a writer in the form of a question, the interrogative 
 mark should follow the quotation marks and qo1 precede them. 
 The i is cl ur; the words quoted are those of an ither, but 
 
 ton is the writer's own. An inter] bouldnothe 
 
 used in cases when it is onlj stated thai a qui ti a hat been 
 asked, and where the words are not used as a question. In 
 France and other countries on the Continent the interrogation 
 
 is used, inverted, al I be coi ■ ■ I quota! ions a 
 
 at the i 1. A thin space is usually placed before a sign of 
 interrogation. 
 
 Inverted Comma ( '). — This mark is used in placeofa c in 
 
 proper names having the prefix Mm contracted into .!/<■. or .1/' : 
 
 a.* AfacdougaU, McDoutjall, or M'JDougall, where it will be 
 
 rvi d that no space intervenes between the two parts of the 
 
 word. But the apostrophe, not the inverted comma, is used in 
 
 in Irish na ing with C, as O'Donnell. Inverted 
 
 conn i to mark the comm< no men! ot a ([notation. 
 
 rs cast them double. — Set Quotation Marks. 
 
 Irons.— -A term used iwspapers. Usually the furniture 
 
 for imposing the pages of a newspaper is of iron, as wi 11 as the 
 ; and as the printer makes-up the pagi s, he calls upon the 
 "stone-man " to "put in iron-." /..., impose it. 
 
 Italic.— This description of letter was di ign d by Aldus 
 n in-, a Soman, who, in the year L490 (says Stower, in bis 
 ■• Printers' Grammar "), erected a printing office in Venice, where 
 he introduci d the Roman types of s neater cut, and invented the 
 letter which we, and most ot the nations in Europe, know by the 
 name of Italic, italic was originally designed to distinguish such 
 
 ;i I b ;i ■ mighl i" lid, nol strictly, to belong to the 
 
 bodj a work, as ] refaci . introductions, annotations. &c, 
 
 :dl of which it ■ cust formerly to print in Italics. In 
 
 the present age it is used more sparingly, the necessity being 
 more elegant mode of i a extract - within 
 
 A poetrj 1 ann ita! > sized 
 
 type. It i- of or dis- 
 
 tinguish] of a chapter from the 
 
 chapter itself. Th< too frequent u t italic is useless and 
 
 ird, it also very materially retards the progress of the com- 
 itor, whoha i e trouhle of repeatedly moving from 
 to another in i . It is too often made use of to mark 
 
 emphatic - i t words, but without anyrule or system, 
 
 1 rtroys, ic a great measure, the beauty of printing, 
 often confuses the reader whet ly applied, who, 
 
 sing to consider why such words arc more 
 
 loses the context of the sentence and has to revert hack to regain 
 the sense of the subject. Not only dors Italic bo confuse the 
 reader, but the bold face of the Boman sutlers by 1 icing contrasted 
 with the fine Btrokes ofthe italic ; that Bymmetryand proportion 
 is destroyed which it i so neo ssary and desirable to preserve, 
 the former being s parallel, the latter an oblique position. 
 
 Its own Paper. When one or more proofs of a work or 
 print d on the paper that the whole is intruded to he 
 worked on, il is said to be "pulled on its own paper." This is 
 frequ hi \ done al the commencement of a work, when a proof 
 of the first -h'-'-t is sent to the author or publisher that they 
 ii . i : thi re the work is actually proceeded with. 
 
 J. 
 
 Jeffing. — Throwing with quads. The plan adopted is to take 
 
 in quads Long Prim i being mostly chosen ; these arc 
 
 . the in pi cfion oi the whole of 
 
 the pai ed in the matter at issue. One of them takes 
 
 up the quads, Shakes them Up between his two closed hands. 
 
 : .v, them On to the imposing surface, after the manner 
 
 ce, when the number of quads with the nicks appearing 
 
 upper) an counted, each person having three throws (raffle- 
 
 highest thrower being the winner, or taking his 
 
 choice of anj " fat." This performance is nol bo much in i ogue 
 
 now as it was yea ago, before the "clicking " system came up; 
 
 then ii used to be of daily occurrence in the composing-room, 
 
 the title, index, blank-, tables, &c, of a work were given 
 
 in hand, for the c imp isitors to throw who should have the best 
 
 eh nice of the "fat." The title-sheel was divided into lots, saj : 
 
 i . title i flank : 2, preface ; 3, dedication and blank; and so 
 
 voiding to the prefatory matter introduced Into the work. 
 
 Words of Greek, for which one shilling per sheet is charged, 
 
 ;il- • '• thrown for;" I uf the clicking system doe away with 
 
 all that, by throwing it into the general bill ; so that each of the 
 
 panionship comes in for a proportionate share of "fat" as 
 
 i in technicalities connected with 
 
 '• throwing." viz. : if when the quads alight on the " stone," one 
 
 should ride on the other, it is called a "cock," and the thrower 
 
 has to pilch them up again; if no nicks turn up, it is called a 
 
 I by some loving swains, a ".Mary" or a "Susan," — 
 
 counts for nothing. The average winning throw is seven, 
 
 and is nick-named "the witch." Xu e is considered an excellent 
 
 throw, and is very seldom exceeded. On very rare occasions. 
 
 however, three blanks have been thrown, or three nines have 
 
 their appearance consecutively by the same thrower; but 
 
 phonal. The same custom also exists amongst 
 
 the t\ pe-founders, who, as well ns the printers, throw to see vi ho 
 
 shall pay for the whole or the greater part of any refreshment 
 
 they may be going to have ; but they have a different name for 
 
 it to the printers, calling it " Bogleing;"and when two is thrown, 
 
 they i .ill that a "duck," from the shape of the figure 2 having 
 
 mhlance to a duck's neck. 
 
 Jerry. — A peculiar noise made by compositors and pressmen 
 i their companions renders himself ridiculous in any 
 way. It is sometimes made by rapping with the knuckles on 
 the bar of the lower-case ; or drawing a piece of reglet sharply 
 down the I ixes of the upper-case. When an apprentice comes 
 out ot his time, all kinds of instruments are used to "jerry" 
 him, such as tril i tg empty chases with iron side-sticks, rattling 
 the quoin drawi rs. &c. .Modern discipline has almost completely 
 abolished this custom. 
 
 Jobbing. — That branch of the printing business which is 
 devoted to the execution of job-work, as distinguished from 
 I k-work and news-work. The definition of a "job" is ex- 
 tremely difficult, for work which would be n garded as job-work 
 in one house is not so considered in another. Savage says: "A 
 
 job i- anything which, when printed, does not ex< d a sheet," 
 
 bin pamphlets of five or more sheets frequently come underthis 
 
 a, and even a periodical may be done as a "job" in 
 
 a large office. The more general practice, however, is to call 
 
 such things as placards, circulars, cards, iVc., jobs, pamphlets 
 
 I k-work, and periodicals news-work. The trade rules certainly 
 
 the nature of job-work more strictly than this, for the
 
 The Printers' Ragister. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 purpose of approximating to a scale of prices for labour done; 
 but the word is generally applied to a much larger variety of 
 ■work than would be included in this definition. Jobbing, in 
 short, may be roughly divided into classes, as follows : — 
 
 1. Circulars, including professional and trading circulars ; Notices 
 of openings of premises and of removal ; of partnerships and partner- 
 ships dissolved; Prospectuses of companies; Reports of meetings, 
 financial reports, commercial circulars, price lists. 
 
 2. Cards, including visiting cards, traders 1 cards, invitation, and "at 
 home" cards, tickets of admission, direction cards, time-table and 
 calendar cards, ball programmes, cartes du menu, cards of member- 
 ship, memorial cards. 
 
 3. Billheads, including invoices, statements of accounts, and bills of 
 particulars. 
 
 4. Handbills, including trade handbills, programmes, bills of the 
 play, police notices. 
 
 5. Posting Bills, including Auction bills, sermon, bazaar, lecture and 
 meeting bills, official regulations, proclamations, general trade bills, 
 contents bills, theatre bills, concert bills, lost and found bills. 
 
 6. Blank Forms, including memorandums, blank tables, pawn- 
 tickets, railway and other share scrip, cheques, allotment forms, and 
 headings. 
 
 7. Labels, including direction labels and ornamental labels. 
 
 Besides these there is a large class of what may be called general 
 work. Under this category will come Auctioneers' catalogues, 
 which vary in style according as they are commercial sale cata- 
 logues, realestate, property and laud sale catalogues ; Almanacks, 
 Diaries, Conditions of Sale, Chancery Bills, Acts of Parliament, &c. 
 Each one of the kinds of work we have enumerated has its own 
 fixed custom in regard to its style of composition and the size 
 and description of paper or other material upon which it is to be 
 printed. For instance: a catalogue of a sale of houses is set 
 out on a totally different principle to that relating to a sale of 
 household furniture or stock-in-trade, and while the one is in- 
 variably a full folio sheet, the other is usually a mere octavo. A 
 catalogue of a sale of cotton, fruit, or wood, would differ entirely 
 from either, and be a long narrow strip with rules between each 
 line. No two sheets could be more dissimilar than a sermon bill 
 and a play bill, either in shape or the style of letter employed. 
 Many printers, indeed, now confine themselves to one branch of 
 jobbing; thus there are large establishments where auctioneers' 
 work is chiefly produced, others where coloured placards and 
 tea papers are executed, others who print only for pawnbrokers, 
 or for law stationers, &e. These offices are furnished specially 
 with a view to the rapid and economical production of oue kind 
 of work. 
 
 Jobbing-hand. — A compositor who generally confines him- 
 self to jobbing-work. The principle of "division of labour" 
 prevails very much in the printing business. There are book- 
 houses, news-houses, and job-houses; and apprentices brought 
 up in them usually turn out either book, news, or job-hands. 
 They become specially expert in their own " line," and in large 
 towns and in extensive offices are found most useful to the em- 
 ployer. In smaller towns, and in small offices everywhere, a 
 greater variety of attainment is necessasy, and then the job- 
 hand has the best chance of employment, as on an emergency 
 he can undertake the other kinds of work, whereas a news- 
 hand, who has been brought up to nothing else, is useless for 
 general jobbing. In job-work some taste and wide experience 
 are absolutely essential; in news and book-work rapid and clean 
 setting are a man's chief recommendation. The former demands 
 a knowledge of the style and effects of every description of 
 type, the sizes and fractional parts of paper, together with an 
 acquaintance with the system of setting up each one of the 
 varieties of jobbing we have enumerated above. This valuable 
 knowledge can he acquired only by long observation and practice. 
 
 Jobbing Machines. — Small machines constructed specially 
 for the printing of job-work. They are intended to execute o\ . r\ 
 variety of job that was formerly done on the hand-press, but 
 with much greater economy, rapidity, and ease in working. 
 Some of them are made to work cards only,a1 a very high speed. 
 There are many now produced which print any kind of job at a 
 speed, by hand, of ten to twelve hundred per hour. The cha- 
 
 racteristics of a g 1 jobbing machine are, in addition t 
 
 being constructed on proper mechi al principles, by . 
 
 workmen and in sound m i .veil 
 
 fitted up, non-liability to get oul oi order, fecUity of working, 
 freedom from unnecessary and complicated wheels, 
 so that a workman may easily understand every part oi i 
 arrangement for stopping the cyli ler, to prevent the blanket 
 being uselessly inked or waste sheets run through, its portability, 
 and capability of being worked on an ordinary floor without 
 causing vibration, facility in making ready a forme, speed, tini" 
 allowed for feeding in, minimum ot concussion of the bed at the 
 end of the ribs, the precision of its register, freedom from n 
 in working, the fewness, simplicity, and accessibility of the 
 working parts, clearness and distinctness of impression, perfect 
 distribution of ink, See., &c. It would, perhaps, be unreasonable 
 to expect all these "points" in perfection in any one machine, 
 but as each of them is of great importance, and c mtribuh - to 
 the aggregate value of the article, purchasers should endeavour 
 lo select those only which most nearly approach in the ,,■ 
 tion which would characterise any machine which should po 
 to the full every recommendation we have enumerated. 
 
 Jobbing Office. — An office in which jobbing-work mainly is 
 executed. Jobbing offices form a large majority of the printing 
 establishments throughout the country. .Many of them include 
 both news-work and book-work. The great difference between 
 a news-office and a job-office lies in the variety of the founts in 
 the latter. In the one there are few different kinds of founts, 
 but each of them is exceedingly extensive; in the other the 
 founts are much smaller but vastly more numerous. The de- 
 partments of a job-office are : the composing department, 
 the printing department, and the warehouse. The composing 
 department includes founts of all the regular-sized plain letters, 
 from Nonpareil or less to Pica, as well as selections from the 
 fancy types — Titlings, Condensed, Expanded, Sanseriff, Skeleton, 
 Antique, Clarendon, Elongated, Grotesqu i, Classic, Tuscan, Latin, 
 Romanesque, Augustan, old English, .script. Secretary, Mercan- 
 tile; and in addition, a stock of wood and metal poster lei 
 rules, dashes, and ornaments ; furniture, re-let, leads, and qt 
 tions ; imposing surfaces and frames, galley and forme rai 
 composing frames, cases, galley press, sho t. rs, mallet, pla 
 and quoins, composing sticks, and sundries. The printing 
 department includes engine and boiler, mac! ses, rollers, 
 
 ink, banks, horses, wetting-trough, boards. &c. The warehouse 
 department includes standing presses, glazed boards, cutting 
 machines, rolling, card-cutting, numbering, and perforating 
 machines. Even after all these appliances have been acquired 
 there is a constant necessity for novelties and improvements, in 
 order to complete successfully with other houses in the business. 
 For descriptions of the various appliances see the names of each 
 in its alphabetical order. 
 
 Journeyman. — A person who has duly and faithfully served 
 bis time of apprenticeship, which in the printing business ex- 
 tends over seven years. — See Trade Kia.i NATIONS. 
 
 Ju.stifi.er. — In typefounding, the man who justifies mat 
 —See Tvi'ia'orMiixii. 
 
 Justify a Stick. — Screwing the slide of the comp 
 stick to the measure required. Sometimes called ■•making the 
 measure." 
 
 Justifying. — Spacing out a line so that it fits with a proper 
 degree of tightness in the measure of the composing -tick; 
 placing a woodcut or block in a page and filling up the vacani 
 with had-, quadrats, quotations or furniture, so that when the 
 forme is locked-up the whole shall be fast and firm. In regard 
 to ordinary justifying in the stick, ami to avoid the (a : 
 putting in many thin and hair spaces, or changing those already 
 in lor narrower ones — which is at all times an exceedingly 
 delicate operation, and frequently attended with great an- 
 noyance and trouble, owing to the danger of breaking tilt 
 various mechanical means have been employed in vain so tiir ; 
 but a plan by Mr. Hackle, of Ha name turns up 
 
 in other parts of this work), bid- fair to be practicable and 
 remunerative, lie intended it exclusively for his comp.
 
 DICTIONARY OK TVl»()(illAIMIY. 
 
 TUo Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 i' to thi trade. Mr. Mackie's plan is 
 
 1 to ii-' corrugated, or gi loved, spaa a made of lead. A stickful 
 1 of matter i- spaced with bis spaces in the ordinary way as 
 1 near the proper length a- convenient, but :ii least as long as 
 each In"' should be, the setting-stick being an ordinary one 
 i with the aides slotted and the right band side moveable by a 
 i screw, to the extent of one or two ems. The setting-rules 
 (each line has its own) are left is until the Mirk is full, so thai 
 
 the matter maj slid is line along another. The effect of the 
 
 compression is to elongate the quads to their length I ■ cor 
 
 i, and produce a uniformity in length ana spaces which 
 
 no hand setting can equal. Twenty lines iel to within 0! 
 
 even two ems, are "justified" instantly, and the spaces can be 
 
 rrugated by any boy as wanted. They seem no worse for 
 
 their squeezing, neither is the type injured. Tiiis plan seems to 
 
 leave nothing to be desired. For the C posing machine Mr. 
 
 tfackie uses a "stick," or rather "galley," which holds one 
 hundred line-, ami bya screwpressuxe a sidestick compn 
 the lines to one length in an instant. The following will give an 
 idea of the operation: — 
 
 More unsatisfactory treatment of a pressing difficulty it 
 
 would n. >t I y tn liin I than the fate which befel the 
 
 Judicial Committee Bill on Monday night. Introduced 
 at the fag-end of the Session to a thin and exhausted 
 
 House, ami vigorously opposed bj a mere handful of 
 
 Members, this measure was nevertheless so very plainly 
 
 More unsatisfactory treatment of a passing difficulty it 
 
 would not be easy to find than the fate which befel the 
 Judicial Committee Billon Monday night. Introduced 
 at the fag-end ni the Se ion to a thin and exhausted 
 House, and vigorously opposed bv a mere handful of 
 Members, this measure was nevertheless so very plainly 
 
 Accurate justification is absolutely necessary. If the line is 
 short the letters will nut stand properly on their feet, and it is 
 then impossible to gel a fair impression from the line. Besides, 
 
 the letters are liable tn drop OUl in lifting the forme, and a 
 column or a page may be easily broken through carelessness in 
 thi- respect. Even if badly-justified matter is got saiely to the 
 press, tlie suction of the roller is liable, if not almost sure, to 
 draw nut letters, by which means many letters or perhaps a 
 valuable wood-block may be battered, and ruined completely. 
 
 Indeed, carelessness in justifying is a fruitful cause of accident 
 and damage of all kinds. Many chases, for instance, are broken 
 by l.ein"; locked up too tight, to obviate the result of bad justi- 
 fying and loose lines. Apprentices should be strictly cautioned 
 against allowing themselves to fall into the bad habit, for when 
 once acquired it becomes actually irksome to take the proper 
 amount of care to justify a line properly. Some compositors 
 adopt the plan of justifying their lines Blackly, others tightly; 
 but the latter is far preferable; for what compositor can judge, 
 in slack spacing, whether be has just i tied each line precisely the 
 same at the prei ious one, whereas, if he ado] its the principle of 
 spacing each line as tight as the measure will admit reasonably, 
 he is sure to have every line alike, — especially is this necessary 
 in table-work. 
 
 Keep in. -A direction given to a compositor in order that 
 he may bring his composition within a certain limit. To carry it 
 out he sets closer than usual. 
 
 Keep out. — See Ditivi: OUT. 
 
 Kern Of a Letter. That part of the face of a letter which 
 hangs over one or both sides of its shank. In Roman, f and j 
 are tlie only kerned letter.-; but in the Italic d, g,j, L y are kerned 
 
 on one side, and /mi both sides of the laee. .Many Italic capitals 
 are kerned on one side of the face. 
 
 Knock up. — In warehouse wi irk, to knock up paper is to get 
 it into such a condition that every sheet exactly covers, but does 
 
 not over-hang at any edge, the sheet below. The sides of the 
 heap, alter the paper has been properly knocked up, should 
 
 present the appearance of a perfectly smooth surface. The 
 warehouseman takes up a small quantity of paper (according to 
 
 the stoutness or llinisiness ) and holding it loosely at the edges 
 with both I lends the ends slightly towards him BO that 
 
 the paper shall form a curve; he then lifts it up a little from the 
 table and lets it drop upon its edge through his hands the curve 
 giving the edge a certain firmness, many of the sheets dropdown 
 
 into their pli s; be repeats this two or three times, and will 
 
 then, in letting it drop U] on the table, bring tho lower part 
 ueari r to him, so that the outside of the Curve may strike first, 
 
 and throw the sheets gradually uphigher at the back. Thishe 
 will do also two or three limes, lie then lets the further side 
 rest ii ] h hi the table, and Shuffles the -beets gradually away from 
 him, lifting the whole lip, and letting the edges drop upon tlie 
 l.i lie three or lour time,-, lb-pouting these operations soon brings 
 all the sheets even, both at the ends and sides, lie then lays 
 this taking on one side and repeats the operation with other 
 takings, laying them on each other till he has completed the 
 whole. A soft flimsy paper takes more time in knocking up 
 than a hard paper, as the sheets have not strength enough 
 rately to be driven into their places by striking on their 
 edges. 
 
 LarcenyAdvertisements Act.— An Act (33 & 3-1 Vio.,cb.i) 
 has recently been passed to amend the law relating to advertise- 
 ments respecting stolen g Is. Under the Act 24 a 25 Vic, c. 96, 
 
 any person who prints or publishes advertisements tor the return 
 nl stolen goods without questions being asked, forfeits tlie sum 
 of fifty pounds to any person who will sue for the same by action 
 of debt (Sir, Wl). This provision having given occasion to many 
 vexatious proceedings at the instance of common informers 
 iiL'ainst printers and publishers of newspapers, it was thought 
 expedient to pass a new Act, which stayed proceedings inactions 
 brought before its passing; and provides that — 
 
 Every action against the printer or publisher of a newspaper to 
 rei overs forfi iture under sect ion one hundred and two of The Larceny 
 Act, 18(i8, shall be brought six months after the forfeiture is incurred, 
 and no such action against the printer and publisher of a newspaper 
 shall be brought unless the assent in writing of Her Majesty's Attorney- 
 loiienil ni- Selii itor-tieiieral for England, if the action is brought in 
 England, or for Ireland, if the action is brought in Ireland, has been 
 first obtained to the bringing of such action. — Sec. 3. 
 
 Laws relating to Printers. — A great number of laws 
 have been enacted at different times with the view either of 
 repressing the power of the Press or of exercising a censorship 
 over its utterances. In addition to these, various acts have been 
 pa ssed imposing duties for fiscal purposes, either on the material 
 upon which newspapers are printed, upon portions of their con- 
 tents, or upon their transmission at home and abroad. Most of 
 these are now happily entirely repealed, and a degree of freedom 
 is enjoyed by the conductors of journals in this country such as 
 is unknown in almost any other part of the world. — In the 
 reign of Queen Anne ( 1712) Advertisements were first subjected 
 to a duty (10 Anne, c. 19), and it was charged according to 
 length. Some change took place, and the duty, which had been 
 reduced from 3a. 6a. to Is. 6a. in great Britain, and from 2*. 6d. 
 to Is. in Ireland, by 3 & 4 Win. IV., cap. 23 (June 28, 1833), was 
 entirely repealed byl6& 17 Vic, c. 63, s. 5 (August 4, 1853.)— The 
 Stamp J hi/;/ was levied for the first time also in the reign of 
 Queen Anne (10 Anne, c. 19), August 1, 1712. After several 
 mod ili cat ions the duty was fixed by the Act 6 & 7 Win. IV., c. 76, 
 as follows: For every sheet or other piece of paper whereon any 
 newspaper shall be printed, One Penny; and where such sheet or 
 piece oi paper shall contain on one side thereof a superficies ex- 
 clusive of the margin of the letter-press exceeding 1530 inches 
 and not exceeding 2295 inches the additional duty of One Half- 
 penny; where the same shall consist of a superficies exceeding 
 L'-'.i. ' inches the additional duty of One Penny ; provided always 
 that if the sheet does not exceed 765 inches (exclusive of the 
 margin) and is published as a supplement to a newspaper 
 charged with the duty already named, it should be chargeable
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 35 
 
 only with the duty of One Halfpenny. The bill for the abolition 
 of this stamp duty (18 & 19 Vic, cap. 27) received the royal assent 
 June lf>, L855. — Besides these two ''taxes on knowledge," as they 
 were popularly called during the long and excited agitation 
 ■which prevailed from 1850 to 1860, there was also a Paper Duty 
 levied under the Act 2i3 Vic, c. 23, of three halfpence on 
 every pound weight of paper. This was abolished by 24 Vic, c 20 
 (June 12, 1801). — The three taxes thus repealed partook of the 
 character of fiscal imposts, although one or more of them was 
 originally enacted with the view of crippling the press and of 
 affording a ready and decisive means of discovering the printer 
 and publisher of every public journal in the kingdom. But for 
 centuries other and even more obnoxious restrictions had been 
 in force, directed against the press. The last of these has only 
 been repealed within the past two years. The 6 & 7 Wiu, IV., 
 cap. 76, entitled "An act to reduce the duties on newspapers, and 
 to amend the laws relating to duties on newspapers and adver- 
 tisements," enacted that no person should print or publish any 
 newspaper before there should be delivered to the Commissioners 
 of Stamps and Taxes, a declaration in writing containing — 
 
 The correct title of the newspaper. 
 
 A true description of the building in which it is to be printed, and of 
 the building in which it is to be published. 
 
 The true name, in addition, and place of abode of every person who 
 is intended to print, to publish, to be interested in the proprie- 
 tary of the paper, with the proportional shares of the proprietors, 
 in certain cases. 
 
 A declaration of a similar import was to be made on the occasion 
 of any change in the arrangements, particulars of which were 
 required, as well as when the persons named changed their 
 abodes, or the title of the paper, or the name of the printing- 
 office was altered; and in fact, " whenever in any case, or on any 
 occasion, or for any purpose " the Commissioners or any officer 
 of customs should require it. The penalty for non-observance of 
 these requirements was fifty pounds for every day on which the 
 newspaper was printed or sold before the declaration was made. 
 But there were also additional restrictions. The newspaper 
 could not be published until the printer or publisher, together 
 with the proprietor, together also with two sufficient sureties, 
 should have entered into security by bond in such sum as the 
 Commissioners should think reasonable and sufficient to cover 
 penalties and duties imposed bv that and previous acts. By the 
 32 & 33 Vic, c. 24 (12 July, 1869), entitled "An Act to repeal 
 certain enactments relating to newspapers, pamphlets, and other 
 publications, and to printers, type founders, and reading rooms V 
 the provisions of a number of acts were entirely or partially 
 repealed. The following is a list of them : — 
 
 36 Geo. 3, c. 8. — An act for the more effectually preventing seditious 
 meetings and assemblies. — Entirely repealed. 
 
 39 Geo. 3, c. 79. — An act for the more effectual suppression of so- 
 cieties established for seditious and treasonable purposes, and 
 for better preventing treasonable and seditious practices. 
 
 [This Act required that places for lectures or debates, or for reading 
 books, newspapers, &c, to which places persons are admitted on pay- 
 ment, should be licensed at the Sessions. Also, that persons having 
 or making printing presses or types should have them duly registered 
 by the Clerk of the Peace.] 
 Sections 15 to 23, both inclusive, repealed ; also so much of sections 
 
 34 to 39 as relates to those sections. 
 51 Geo. 3, c. 65.— An Act to explain and amend the last-named Act. 
 — Entirely repealed. 
 
 55 Geo. 3, c. 101. — An Act to regulate the collection of Stamp Duties 
 and matters in respect of which licenses may be granted by the 
 Commissioner of Stamps in Ireland. — Section 13 repealed. 
 
 60 Geo. 3, and 1 Geo. 4, c. 9. — An Act to subject certain publications 
 to the duties of stamps upon newspapers, and to make other 
 regulations for restraining the abuses arising from the publica- 
 tion of blasphemous and seditious libels. 
 
 [These Acts required the printer of a newspaper to enter into a 
 recognizance with sureties to pay any fine imposed on conviction for 
 a blasphemous or seditious libel, and to send copies of every paper to 
 the stamp office.] — Entirely repealed. 
 
 11 Geo. 4, 1 Wm. 4., c. 73. — An Act to repeal 60 I " •. :;, and to pro- 
 vide further remedy against the abuse of publishing libels. — 
 Entirely repealed. 
 6 & 7 Wm. IV., c. 76. — An Act to reduce the duties on newspapers, 
 and to amend the laws relating to the duties on newspapers and 
 advertisements. 
 [This Act regulated the printing of the date, title, kc, of news- 
 papers, and the name of the printer, and requiring a declaration (see 
 supra) before a newspaper could be printed.] — Repealed, except sec- 
 tions 1 to 4 inclusive, sections 34 and 35, and the schedule. 
 
 2 & 3 Vic, c. 12. — An Act to amend 39 Geo. 3, and to put an end to 
 certain proceedings now pending under the said Act. — Entirely 
 repealed. 
 
 5 & 6 Vic, c 82. — An Act to assimilate the Stamp Duties in Great 
 
 Britain, Ireland, &c. The part repealed is the -■■ntence " and 
 also license to any person to keep any printing presses and types 
 for printing in Ireland." 
 
 9 & 10 Vic, c 33. — An Act to amend the laws relating to corres- 
 ponding societies and the licensing of lecture rooms. — Repealed 
 so far as it relates to any proceedings under the enactments re- 
 pealed in this schedule. 
 
 16 & 17 Vic, c. 59. — Relating to Stamp Duties in Ireland. Repealed 
 in part, viz., that portion of section 20 which makes perpetual 
 5 & 6 Vic. c 82 repealed by this Act. 
 
 The foregoing statement shows how a number of old and op- 
 pressive enactments have been eliminated from the Statute 
 Book. It remains to be stated how iar legislative interference 
 with the press is still maintained by the Act before referred to 
 (32 & 33 Vic. c. 24.) That Act continues the force of the following 
 Acts: — 
 39 Geo. 3 c 79. — Every person who shall print any paper for hire, 
 reward, gain, or profit, shall carefully preserve and keep one 
 copy (at least) of every paper so printed by him or her, on which 
 he or she shall write, or cause to be written or printed, in fair 
 and legible characters, the name and place of abode of the per- 
 son or persons by whom he or she shall be employed to print the 
 same; and every person printing any paper for hire, reward, gain, 
 or profit, who shall omit or neglect to write, or cause to be written 
 or printed as aforesaid, the name and place of his i ir her employer 
 on one of such printed papers, or to keep or preserve the same 
 for the space of six calendar months next after the printing 
 thereof, or to produce and show the same to any justice of the 
 peace who within the said space of six calendar months shall 
 require to see the same, shall for every such omission, neglect, or 
 refusal forfeit and lose the sum of twenty pounds. — Sec. 29. 
 Nothing herein contained shall extend to the impression of any en- 
 graving, or to the printing by letter-press of the name, or the 
 name and address, or business or profession, of any person, and 
 the articles in which he deals, or to any papers for the sale of 
 estates or goods by auction or otherwise. — Sec. 31. 
 No person shall be prosecuted or sued for any penalty imposed by 
 this Act, unless such prosecution shall be commenced, or such 
 action shall be brought, within three calendar months next after 
 such penalty shall have been incurred. — Sec. 34. 
 And any pecuniary penalty imposed by this Act, and not exceeding 
 the sum of twenty pounds, shall and may be recovered before 
 any justice or justices of the peace for the county, stewartry, 
 riding, division, city, town, or place, in which the same shall be 
 incurred, or the person having incurred the same shall happen 
 to be, in a summary way. — Sec. 35. 
 All pecuniary penalties herein-before imposed by this Act shall, 
 when recovered in a summary waj before any justice, be applieu 
 and disposed of in a manner herein-after mentioned; that is to 
 say, one moiety thereof to the informer before any justice, and 
 the other moiety thereof to His Majesty, bis heirs and successors. 
 —Sec. 36. 
 51 Geo. 3, c 65.— Name and residence of printers not required to be 
 put to bank notes, bills, &c, or to any paper printed by authority 
 of any public board or public office. — Sec. 3. 
 
 6 & 7 Wm. 4, c 76.— If any person shall file any bill in any court for 
 
 the discovery of the name of any person concerned as printer, 
 publisher, or proprietor of any newspaper, or of any matters 
 relative to the printing or publishing of any new-paper, in order 
 the more effectually to bring or carry on any suit or action for 
 damages alleged to have been sustained by reason of any 
 slanderous or libellous matter contained in any such newspa] er
 
 6 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Ropiater. 
 Supplement. 
 
 i • i kwful for 1 
 
 provided alwa 
 , . i 
 in an ! in that pro- 
 
 i- which the d ' 
 
 ■ 12.— Every person who Bhall prin papei or book 
 
 uiiv- iever vi bich shall be meant to be published or dis] 
 and ■ > paper,if the 
 
 e only, or upon I he Firsl or lasl 
 ookv 
 I, '.if. in i ile characters, his or her name and usual place of 
 
 , bu , and everj person who shall publish •■•■■ dis- 
 
 , ; . printed paper or 
 
 i k on which the nami and place bode of I he ■ 
 
 printing the sam 
 
 . copy of sui h paper printed bj hii • her forfeit a sum of 
 
 not n : pounds; ] >ro> id ■ I al k aj 
 
 in c intained shall be construed to impose any penalty upon any 
 
 printing any paper excepted oul oi 1 I pera 
 
 the the thirty-ninth year of 1 i ■ the Third, 
 
 .]>i her in tin' said Acl or b ide for the 
 
 dmenl thereof.- S c, 2. 
 Sec. 3 i printed al the i uiversitj Pre* esof t 
 
 , i provides thai no action shall be commenced i cent in the 
 name of the Attornej or Solicitor-General in England, or tho 
 Queen's Advocate in Scotland. 
 
 10 Vi c. Proceeding- shall not be con need m 
 
 the name of the law officers oi the Crown, and even acta in, 
 bill, plaint, or information which shall be commenced, 
 cuted, entered, or filed in the nai r name ol any other per- 
 son than is in that behalf before mentioned, and 
 ; thereupon hail, .-hall be null ami void to all 
 I purp Sec. 1. 
 
 ing i nactmenl is still i» force: — 
 
 13 i reo. 2 cap. i! 1 md prevent n xcessive incn i 
 
 . ii\ which il i- enacted, "That everj person or 
 ill make, print, publish, advertise, or proclaim 
 
 any ad it or noti f any plate, prize, sum of money, 
 
 or other thing of les value than fifty pounds to be run for '-. 
 any h irse, mare, or gelding, shall forfeit and lose the sum ol one 
 hundred pounds." 
 Si l.'i:.i\\ Advertisements, Liuel, and Utf.uusy 
 I'lti'i'i i: i ■> . 
 
 Law Work.— As law work is evented in one uniform man- 
 ner, and th re are so manj peculiarities connected with it, a few 
 directi a • much time and trouble to the compositor. 
 
 The names oi partie to a ait are generally in Italic (except in 
 
 l, 1 the authorities, when' the ease is reported in 
 
 Roman, contracted. If the name of the ease is adduced in the 
 argument, the authority follows in parentheses; but if the case 
 i^ added parenthetically, of course the whole is enclosed within 
 the appropriate symbols. Examples of both will clearly explain 
 
 ; ..- adopted in eai i case by the compositor. 
 
 I: 'i ! i i. & D. 61) and Jones v. Peterson (Adol. 
 
 & EL 7":; . | he m itter is ml!;, and i . reported. 
 
 be broughl within the time specified 
 , 13 Co. Litt. 76 1, othern ise it will fail. 
 
 Here, the reader will i the liorl and (&) is always era- 
 
 a after the full stop, bet w ■ ■ n the 
 authority and i horl and is also uniformly em- 
 
 ployed in reciting tl if the reign of any monan 
 
 b an Act of Parliament was passed thus: 15 S 16 Geo. 3, 
 c. 21, with Arabic numerals alter the nam.', and not A 
 
 capital letters, which would be I imbi raome, and not half so 
 
 clear. In all instances o should never be 
 
 ig i 'i :'i the end of a line I ii b they belong ; 
 
 should the constituent parts of what forms but one por- 
 
 ■ . i i i i ce. Thus, in the instance given above, L5 
 
 ddn t end a line, and thi ' ■ gin n ith &; neil her I Id 
 
 ated from the accompanying 3; nor c. from 21. 
 Nor, in like mannei rs denoting any office, such as 
 
 Cockburn, C.J., where the C. I J. should always be in the 
 
 same line. And so in all other cases. To do otherwise would be 
 
 unsightly. When a number of authorities are given, 
 with the repoi •• • found, each ca e is separated from the 
 
 bj .i emicol in i he follovi ing manner, if they 
 
 dej i or read on with what has been previously said. Thus: 
 
 "1 he autl i" on « hich l rely 1 12 and 13 Car. 2, c. 1 1, s. 6; 
 
 Bell v. Bradfoot, 6 T. B. 721; Cook v.J<mas,2 B. and A. 433) 
 are conclusive on this point." But if they do nut so depend, or 
 do not form an interposed parenthetical sentence, a full-stop 
 ployed. There are some peculiarities about the 
 ini'iii I cerj Billsthatsl Id be noted. The punctua- 
 
 : i i Locuments may be the 8ame as is used in ordina \ 
 
 bookwork a plan qo'b sensibly encouraged by many eminent 
 lawyers; or, a full-point only maj be placed at the end of the 
 
 sentences, and her point whatever at ed. < >r, they may be 
 
 altogether unpointed. Whichever plan is adopted due written 
 notice hould bi given to the compositor or clicker when the 
 
 i placed in Ins hands. Capital initial letters are used only 
 in proper name,-., and in the following and similar instances: — 
 The names of public officers, as Her Majesty's Utorney-General, 
 Solicitor-General, Master (in Chancery), his Honor, &c; tho 
 names oi public funds or stocks, as Consols, Consolidated Bank 
 Annuities, the said £3 per Centum Hank Annuities, Exchequer 
 Hills. Also, the Bank (when speaking of the Bank of England), 
 
 Hi., Court int law, &c), II irable Court, the High Court of 
 
 Chancery, the Government (when nil inline to the Government of 
 the country i. Home Government, Colonial Government, Urts of 
 Parliament, Bill of Complaint, Will, Plaintiff and Defendant, and 
 the words Company and Society, whenever referring to a com- 
 pany or society being either Plaintiffs or Defendants. Contrac- 
 tions of words are only to be observed in original documents. 
 Elsewhere, Co., Hit.. Plf., No., and similar words must be in full. 
 Dates and sums of money, terms of years, and quantities of land, 
 to be in figures. Copies of, or extracts Ifom agreements, in- 
 dentures, letters, &c, to follovi copj as to spelling, contractions, 
 punctuation, and in every other respect as nearas practicable. 
 Not a point to be inserted in any pari of the Bill without special 
 instructions, except in note at the end, or where names of Plain- 
 tiffs and Defendants are run on, in which ease divide names by 
 commas. Proper names must never be divided. 
 
 Laying down Pages. — The arrangement of the pages of 
 a sheet on the imposing surface in their proper order. In taking 
 up his pages for imposition, the compositor tightly grasps the 
 paper on both sides of the page in order that it may be kepi 
 firm to the bottom of the page; for if it be left slack, the letti rs 
 will lie liable to slip out unless it be particularly well tied up. 
 Having conveyed it to the stone, he next places the last two 
 fingers of his right hand against the head of the page, but not 
 underthe page-paper at the head of it, still grasping the sides 
 with his forefingers and thumbs. He then slips his left hand so 
 that the palm of it may turn towards the bottom, and, lifting the 
 
 page upright on his right hand, with his left he removes the 
 paper. He next grasps again the fool end of the page with his 
 left hand in the same manner as the right holds the head of it, 
 and turning the face towards him, lays it squarely and quickly 
 
 down, so that the whole page may come in contact with tho 
 
 imposing surface ai the same time. As this method, in inex- 
 perienced and careless hands, won Id frequently endanger a page 
 Containing intricate matter, it would he safer to place the pages 
 at first on good strong, hut not rough or coarse paj iers, and when 
 brought to the stone, instead of lilting them up as just noticed, 
 
 slidi them off the papers in the - manner as though they 
 
 ware on a slice galley (.See TviMi-fl' PAGES), being careful that 
 oi din remain under the page. 
 Laying down Sheets. — In the warehouse, this term is 
 i i denote the placing the printed sheets of a work upon the 
 gathering table in their proper order for the purpose of gathering 
 them together into complete books. The first sheet in the gather- 
 ing is laid dowm al the extreme end of the table at the left hand, 
 and the Succeeding sheets follow to the right in regular order, 
 
 with the signature to the front of the table. The person who 
 
 lays them down should run the signature page over in I ach heap 
 to ., ,. thai thej all laj the same way, and lane not been turned 
 in knocking up Or piling away, which when it happens and 
 ered causi a great deal of trouble in collating.
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTION A 11 Y OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 37 
 
 Laying Type. — Putting new type into the cases. The page 
 received from the founder should be carefully unwrapped, and 
 after having been laid on a galley, soaked thoroughly with 
 
 thin soap-water, to prevent the types from adhering t 
 
 another after they have been used a short time ; then, with a 
 stout rule or reglet, as many lines should be lifted as will make 
 : 1 1 1 1 > 1 1 1 an inch in thickness, and placing the rule close up on one 
 side of the bottom of the proper box, slide off the lines gently, 
 taking care not to rub the face against the side of the box. 
 Proceed thus with successive lines till the box is tilled. Careless 
 compositors are prone to huddle new types together, and, grasp- 
 ing them by handtuls, plunge them pell mell into the box. 
 rudely jostling them about to crowd more in. This is an 
 intolerable practice. The type left over should be kept standing 
 on galleys in regular order, till the cases need replenishment. A 
 fount of five hundred pounds of Pica may have, say tour pairs 
 of cases allotted to it ; the same amount of Nonpariel, from 
 eight to ten pairs. — See Lay of the Case. 
 
 Laying-on Boy. — The boy who feeds the sheets into the 
 machine. — See Lay on. 
 
 Lay on. — A phrase used in the press or machine room. Tims : 
 there are 1000 laid on; or, what forme shall we lay on? When 
 there are woodcuts in one forme, and none in the other, then the 
 tonne without cuts should be worked first, as working the cuts 
 last prevents the indentation of the types appearing on the en- 
 graving. The term is also used in printing at machines, where a 
 boy lays the sheet on the feeding board, in order that they may 
 be caught by the grippers or tapes. 
 
 Lay up. — Before the letter of a worked-off forme is dis- 
 tributed, or before it is cleared away, if the work be finished, it 
 is unlocked upon a board, laid in the trough, and well rinsed 
 with water, while the compositor keeps working the lines 
 backward and forward with his hands, and continues pouring 
 water on them till the ley and ink are washed away, and the 
 water runs off clear. This is termed " laying up." The board 
 slmuld always be washed clean on its upper side before the forme 
 is laid upon it. When a first proof has been read, it is the duty 
 of the compositor who set the commencement of the sheet tolay 
 up the formes on the stone and unlock them ready for the cor- 
 rections to be made. 
 
 Leaded Matter. — Matter with leads dividing the lines. 
 
 Leaders (... or ). — These consist of two or three dots, 
 
 similar to full points, cast on one type, to the em body; there 
 are also two, three, and four-em leaders, the number of dots 
 being multiplied according to the number of ems they are cast 
 in length. 
 
 Leading Article (or Leader).— Editorial comments on 
 the topics of the day. The modem leading article may be said 
 to have been invented by the late John Waller, of The Times. 
 Before he took that paper in hand, tin' daily -journals did not 
 seek to guide public opinion or to exercise political influence. It 
 was a n ws paper, little more: any political articles introduced 
 being in the form of "Letters to the Editor." To the dismay 
 of his father (says Mr. S. Smiles, in an article in MacmSlans 
 Magazine), young Walter struck out an entirely new course. He 
 boldly stated his views on public affairs, bringing his strong and 
 independent judgment to bear on political and other questions. 
 
 Lead out. — A direction given in order that leads may be 
 run through lines of matter. 
 
 Leads. — Thin pieces of metal of different thicknesses and 
 different lengths, quadrat high, to put between the lines of 
 matter to make it more open; they are also used to branch out 
 titles, small jobs, and parts of a work where necessary. The 
 bodies are regulated by Pica standard, and they are usually cast 
 four, six, or eight to Pica, but they are sometimes very much 
 thinner. Brasses are now very generally used on newspapers 
 instead of leads: they are found to bo exceedingly useful and 
 economical, as they do not break or bend. 
 
 Leads Tray. — In order to keep leads in small quantities in 
 their proper places and accessible without loss of time, Mr. ('has. 
 Maillard has devised a Leads Tray, to which he has prefixed his 
 
 surname. The chief recommendation of the design, next to 
 utility, is its simplicity. 'I'la- principle of an ordinary type-case 
 has been adopted, the object being to i o trayortra 
 dinary ease-rack. \. will contain all tie- even 
 
 1 1 res oi leads from lour em- to twenty-eight, excepting only 
 twenty-sis ei ■ the aggregate number oi leads will amount 
 in the instance of six-to-Pica, to more than five tl 
 of each measure. For greater convenience, however, and to 
 iall jobbing printers, tin' leads tray is divided 
 tor the reception of both four-to-Pica and six-to-Pica, or . 
 kinds; and the proportion of four's and six's "ill l»- a- 176 to 171 
 
 of each measure, or more than four thousand in the a__ 
 exceeding two thousand of each kind. The number won 
 ample tor ordinary use, either singly or by piecing; and surplus 
 leads might be stacked and stored in BUCh a way as, to be readily 
 placed in the tray as it required to lie replenished. 
 
 Lay of the Case. — The system upon which the various 
 letters, points, spaces, quadrats, &c., are distributed among the 
 different boxes in a case. No subject connected with printing 
 has occupied more attention than this, and innumerable new 
 schemes tor proposed improved "lays" have at various I 
 been brought forward. The result is, that nearly every office 
 (lifters in the allocation of the various characters, and compositors 
 have constantly to learn and to unlearn the arbitrary arrange- 
 ments now in vogue. An American trade journal has propi 
 an alteration in the lay of one or two boxes in the lower-case, 
 which we believe to be worth the attention of printers who are 
 on the point of opening new offices. In a town where new- 
 hands are frequently taken on to work, there is a little difficulty 
 in making any change, for the reason that such new hands may 
 pie the boxes in consequence of it. Put when this is not the 
 ca . an alteration that commends itself to common sense as a 
 real improvement is worth adopting, even at a slight temporary 
 inconvenience. The Typographic Messenger says: " If you want 
 to gain five hundred to a thousand a day, you can do so without 
 material alteration of the present case. All you have to do is to 
 bring the en quads, thick, middle, and thin spaces together, so 
 that time may be gained in justifying your lines, and you have 
 the gain referred to. The only alteration incident to this modifi- 
 cation is— the v goes to the present en-quad box. and the z and 
 x to the thin and middle space boxes. The t and u boxes are 
 thus driven over the space of one box, which gives no trouble, 
 as they lie in the same direction : but it will take a few days to 
 'get the hang' of the v box in its chanced position. The z and 
 \. being so little in demand, it is of no consequence in what 
 position they are." A similar change has been made for several 
 years in many of our English offices- the transpi sition of the 
 lower-case y with the middle and thin spaces. The usual ['lace 
 for this letter is next the o box on the right. Now, in setting or 
 distributing, the hand has to travel the whole width of the 1 
 or nine inches from the thick spaces to the thins and middles: 
 and in justifying single bines oi fancy and jobbing, for which 
 the lower-case has occasionally to be used in the rack without 
 mounting, it has to be drawn out so tar as to hazard its tilting 
 over. By putting the thin and middle apaci . however, into the 
 y box, they are brought within live inches of the thicks: and 
 being oftener required than the y, there is an actual saving of 
 time by the change. And when the lower-case is merely wanted 
 for justifying, the new position of the spaces only requires iis 
 being drawn out about one-fourth, or one-third, of its width. The 
 advantages of this arrangement are : — 
 
 1st. In setting poetry and all matter where there is a frequent use 
 of the em quad, or the matter is indented an en, t ! CD to 
 
 the right tor these sorts is saved. 
 
 -iid. In the composition or correction of tabular matter, or figures, 
 the galley can cover the right side of the lower-case, and the ni 1 
 quads will be just under the hand of the compositor. 
 
 3rd. In distributing figures, the sweep performed by the hand will 
 be only about half that now required. Again, in correct! DS the 
 galley now has frequently to he heaved up, or pushed to or 
 at the en quad box — all of which would be avoided. 
 
 1 ruin-' the mixing of the spaces, Mr. " . Spurrell, of Car- 
 marthen, says : •• It may he observed that mixing the middle and 
 thick spaces is better than mixing the middle aud thin. Indeed.
 
 38 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY 
 
 The Printers' Eegiater 
 Supplement. 
 
 . mixing the middle and thick seems 
 ! eeping thi i In a line 
 
 containing six places for spaces there will '■ on an average, 
 t:iki- • bill i '" "i Pica as a basis, four thicks and 
 
 aces, when thi se spaces are mixed in the box. 
 \ 7, such a line may he spaced in thirteen different ways, from 
 ;1 mid in .-arii place t<> a middle and thin in each place, 
 
 ■i miber of chang • to justify thirteen Buch 
 
 would i'" twenty-four when the spaces are mixed, and 
 when thirl; spaces alone are in the box. allowing 3ix 
 changes for the i no! being in the besl places, 
 
 the advantage of mixing the thick and mi would !»■ 
 
 y a saving of twelve changes in for , in com- 
 
 posing solid matter. Taking into consideration, howi m 
 
 much time is lost in pickii it the required space, when two 
 
 sorts are kept together, thi advantagi i and disadvantages of the 
 i \ c irrectlj summed up thus:— 
 
 1 changes and 24 sortings, when thick and middli 
 mixed. 
 
 2. 42 1 i, when middle and thin are mixed. 
 
 3. 42 mil mi sorting, when thick, middle, and thin arc kept 
 separs 
 
 Further, the longer the line, the greater the proportion of thick 
 ■ !. and the greater tic advantage "t keeping them 
 unmi 
 
 Lean Face.— A lett< r of slender proportions, compared with 
 
 its hei 
 
 Lean Work.— Tin- opposite of "fat" work (q.v.),— that is, 
 1 r, unprofitable work. 
 
 Letter rcquirod for a Job.— Printers are frequently in 
 doubt as to the quantity of type which will be required tor a 
 book or newspaper. The following is a useful plan for ascer- 
 taining the quantity of type required for newspapers, and thus 
 enables any publisher to make his own calculations, aided, as he 
 will he, by the knowledge of what proportion of the paper is to 
 I in each size oi type he intends to use. This method is 
 simple, and will lie found to he practicably accurate. If hut one 
 [e is to he set in a certain type, an allowance of 50 per cent, 
 dil he made for what will remain in the cases and for matter 
 ] lett over. The greater th.' number of pages in the 
 same -i /i- of type 'lie less the proportion of the extra weight of 
 type tie ided. Thus: — 
 
 For 1 page weighing 100 lbs 1501bs. will be needed. 
 
 .. 2 pages ., „ each. ..250 „ „ „ 
 
 .. 6 „ „ „ „ ...ooU „ „ „ 
 
 ,, 4 „ » i, ,» ...40't „ „ „ 
 
 Therefore, if a new-paper of the size given is to he, say half 
 Brevier and halt Nonpareil, 250 pounds of each will be needed. 
 If. however,it is very prosperous, and columns are .sometimes 
 crowded out, of course extra type must he purchased. We 
 have made no allowance for space occupied by column rules, 
 Leads, dashes, &c. Experience has shown that estimates based 
 as aho\,. give the minimum quantity of type necessary for a 
 weekly newspaper; Standing matter and letter remaining in case 
 fully equalling tie' space occupied by leads, rules, &c, as well as 
 the extra quantity of type allowed. No special rule can he hud 
 down for dailj papers, which vary bo widely in the number of 
 cases employed, 1 average quantity of matter crowded out or 
 saved tor a weekly, and tie' style of composition. It may be 
 said, in a j era a.1 twice the weight of the pages is the 
 
 least quantity oi type that will answer tor a daily alone, when 
 worked most closely. What has heeii said, however, will afford 
 
 iir basis tor calculations, tnl k offices, when the number 
 
 and size .,.( down at oi, e time are known, the 
 
 quantity of type needed can he ascertained a- above; an allow- 
 ance of from f ■ to fifty per cent, being made, according 
 to the number oi casi - to be laid. A pair of case- holds about 
 fifty pound- of type. The average weight "fa square inch of 
 matter is I itch of matter is equivalent to 
 thirty-six square Pica ems, and from tin- maybe deduced the 
 fact that l2c square Pica ems of matter weigh on the a\ i 
 
 llti. (in this datum is founded the following simple rule for 
 estimating thi wi tght of anj given quantity oi matter. 
 
 i: i i in, ide tin' area of the matter, expressed in square Pica 
 em: . bj 128. 
 
 Kxw . i Required the weight of 56 columns of new-, each 15 
 ems wide lo 182 ems lone (2§in.by 22 in.). 
 
 15 X 132 x 56 = 110,880 square Pica ems. 
 -^ 128 = 866 lbs. 
 Example II. — Required the weight of type in a sheet of 32 pages, 
 each 3in. by 5 in., or 18 ems by 30. 
 
 IS X 30 X 32 = 17,280 square Pica em 
 -r- 128 135 Mo. weigh! required. 
 
 Letter Board. — A board used for laying-up letter, generally 
 made tor Demy or Royal formes, the former being usually 20 in. 
 liy'Ji'in.i the latter, 30 in. by 26 in. See Lav. ri\ 
 
 Letter Brush. — See Ley liitrsn and Pick Brush. 
 
 Letter Pounders.— »SVe Type Pounders. 
 
 Letter Hangs.— If the matter transferred from the com- 
 posing stick to the galley does not stand perfectly square and 
 upright, it is said to "hang." it is the usual result of careless- 
 
 i emptying the composing stick. 
 
 Letter Paper.— See Writing Paper. 
 
 Letter-press Printing.— See Impressions. 
 
 Letter Rack. — A rack for containing wood and metal letters 
 
 Of such a size that it would he inconvenient to keep litem in 
 See Racks. 
 
 Letters.- All letters tire either plain or fancy, ai rding to 
 
 their face. Theplain include 1. Roman : -. Italic: ii. Old English 
 (or Black;: all other \arietio- belong to the fancy sorts. The 
 parts of a letter are, the feet, the nick, the shanfi (or body) the 
 shoulder, the face, the beard. The/ace may he lean or fat; the 
 body may he condensed or expanded. The face includes the 
 stem, the seriphs, and the kern. Letters may lie accented, 
 ascending, de.-eending, double (or ligatures), long, short, inferior, 
 or superior. The height of a letter is usually eleven-twelfths of 
 an inch; of a quad or space, three-quarters of an inch. Scotch, 
 and some foreign types, are, however, much higher, and some 
 English offices have a standard of their own. The quality of a 
 type is determined according to — 1. The cut; 2. The shank, 
 whether it he true or otherwise; 3. Its accurate range with other 
 types of the same fount; 4. Its equal and uniform height ; 
 5*. The quality of the metal; 6. The depth of the face; 7. The 
 depth oi the nick. The imperfections in type are, as to its height 
 — high or low; as to its breadth, bottled-necked, or bottle-arsed; 
 and. generally, the burr. All of these technical terms are ex- 
 plained in this Dictionary in their alphabetical order. 
 
 Ley. — A solution of alkalis, potash, pearlash, &c, used to 
 wash oft' the ink from a forme. The usual ingredient is pearlash 
 — a gallon of water being mixed with one pound weight. It 
 should he stirred up with a stick till the ash dissolves. The 
 harder the water, the greater the quantity of pearlash required, 
 A line engraving on wood should never be brushed over with ley. 
 
 Ley Brush. — A brush nine or ten inches long, by three 
 inches broad, used for the purpose of applying the ley to the 
 forme and chase and cleaning it from ink. The hair should be 
 close, tine, and long, in order not to injure the type, and yet to 
 allow sufficient force to he used to search every interstice in the 
 letter where the ink can have penetrated. 
 
 Ley Trough. — A shallow trough lined with lead or zinc, in 
 w huh the formes are placed in order to be cleansed from ink. A 
 loose board should lay in it, for the protection of the bottom. 
 
 Libel. — A libel may be regarded either as a private injury or 
 a public offence. As a private injury, it consists in the publica- 
 tion, either by writing, printing, engraving, or otherwise rendering 
 (whereby it is distinguished from slander, which is 
 verbal defamation only) any malicious and defamatory matter 
 which tends to injure, degrade, or make odious or ridiculous the 
 person respecting whom it is published. For this injury the 
 person injured may proceed against his libeller, either by prose-
 
 The Printers* ILsgister, 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTION ATIY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 39 
 
 cution and indictment, on the ground thai Buch publications 
 
 tend to breaches of the peace, or by action to recover damages. 
 Formerly the legal injury was regarded as the same whether the 
 publication «as true or false — indeed, it had become an adage 
 that "the greater the truth the greater the libel." But by the 
 statute 6 & 7 Vic, c. 96, it is provided, that on information or 
 indictment the defendant may allege the truth of the matter 
 charged, and that it was for the public benefit that it should be 
 published : subject, however, to this condition, that it he should 
 bt- convicted, such allegation might be regarded as an aggrava- 
 tion of the offence. He may also show that the publication was 
 without his knowledge, and did not arise from want of care on 
 his part. Moreover, in all such indictments or informations for 
 libel, if judgment be given for the defendant he will lie entitled 
 to the costs lie has been put to in defending himsi If; but if the 
 verdict be for the prosecutor upon the special plea, the prosecutor 
 will be entitled to the cost occasioned by such plea. Lastly, it 
 i< provided that every person convicted of publishing a de- 
 famatory libel, knowing it to be false, shall be liable to two 
 rears' imprisonment, and such fine as the Court may award ; or, 
 if it he not found that he knew it to be false, to imprisonment 
 for any period not exceeding one year. As regards actxaat for 
 libel, it was always competent for a defendant to set up as a 
 defence that the libel was true ; and the above-mentioned statute 
 affords further protection to the editors and proprietors of 
 periodical publications by enacting that, in an action for libel, 
 although the defendant is unable to allege the truth of the libel, 
 it shall be competent for him to plead that it was inserted with- 
 out actual malice and without gross negligence, and that before 
 the commencement of the action, or at the earliest opportunity 
 afterwards, he had inserted a full apology for it in the same 
 publication or any other selected by the plaintiff; and thereupon 
 he shall be at liberty to pay into Court a sum of money by way 
 of amends for the injury sustained. It is also competent for the 
 defendant, after giving plaintiff notice of his intention to do so, 
 to give evidence m mitigation of damages that he made or offered 
 an apology to the plaintiff before the commencement of the 
 action, or as soon afterwards as he had the opportunity of doing 
 it. Irrespective of any protection afforded by statute, there are 
 many publications which are protected from action or indictment 
 on account of the circumstances under which they are published, 
 These are termed privileged communications, and the defendant 
 may obtain the benefit of their being of this character without 
 pleading it specially, under the general plea of not guilty. Of 
 this kind an- all communications or publications made honafide. 
 upon any subject in which the party communicating or pub- 
 lishing it has an interest or a duty towards the person he com- 
 municates with. Thus, in private matters communications re- 
 specting the character of a servant, or the solvency of a trader, 
 are privileged : and so in public matters, the publication of a fair 
 report of the proceedings of a Court of Justice is protected : but 
 if it contains other libellous matters, such as comments reflecting 
 upon the parties whose names appear in it, it loses the privilege 
 which it would otherwise possess. There is an important dis- 
 tinction between the publication of the proceedings in a Court 
 of Justice and those in a public meeting ; for while the former is 
 privileged the latter is not. Libels which may subject the authors 
 and publishers to criminal punishment are of several kinds, such 
 as blasphemous, immoral, seditious, and personal libels. All 
 blasphemies against God or the Christian religion, or the Holy 
 Scriptures, are indictable at common law, that is, by the custom 
 of the realm. So is any publication which is contrary to public 
 moral-, decency, and order; and by 20 i 21 Vic, c. 83. a summary 
 power is given to the police, under the direction of tin magis- 
 trates, to Bearch for obscene books, pictures, and other articles, 
 and punishing the persons in whose possession they are found. 
 As to seditious libels, it is the undoubted right of every member 
 of the community to publish his own opinions on all subjects of 
 common interest, and so long as he executes this inestimable 
 privilege candidly, honestly, and sincerely, with a view to benefit 
 society, he is not amenable as a criminal. Where the boundary 
 is overstep] ied. and the limit abused for wanton gratification or 
 private malice — where public mischief is the object of the act, 
 the publication is noxious and injurious to society, and is there- 
 
 fore criminal. Personal libels Consist of malicious defamation, 
 tending either to blacken the memory of one who i-, dead or the 
 reputation of one that is alive, and expose him to public I.:!' 
 
 contempt, or ridicule. By the statute 6 & 7 Vic, C 96, 
 
 person convicted of maliciously publishing any di 
 
 knowing the same to be false, may be imprisoned in the comi 
 
 jail for any term not exceeding two years, and - the 
 
 Court .-hall think tit; and if the guilty knowledge be no1 pi 
 shall be liable to fine or imprisonment, or both ; such imprison- 
 ment not to exceed the term of one year. By the same sta 
 if any persons shall publish, or threaten to publish, or shall offer 
 to abstain from printing or publishing, or to prevent the printing 
 or publishing of any libel, matter, or thing . 
 person with intent to extort money or any valui i or to 
 
 obtain any appointment or benefit, such person shall ho Uab 
 be imprisoned, with or without hard labour, for any term 
 exceeding three years. Upon any prosecution lor libel, the de- 
 tendant may show that the publication was merely accidental 
 without his knowledge. So he may show the libel was publi 
 under circumstances which the law ive [justifica- 
 
 tion or excuse. By the 6th & 7th Vic, c 96, as we have -aid. he may 
 phad that the alleged libel is true; and. further, that it wae 
 the public benefit that it should be published; but if. notwith- 
 standing that plea, the defendant should be Convicted, it is 
 competent for the Court, in pronouncing sentence, to consider 
 whether the guiltof the defendant is aggravated or mitigated by 
 such plea, and by the evidence given to prove it. This y? n \ ,.; 
 however, does not apply to sedition- libel-. The defendanl 
 also prove that the publication complained, of was made witlne.it 
 his authority, consent, or knowledge, and did not arise from want 
 of due caution on his part. Upon conviction on any indictment 
 or information by a private prosecution tor libel, it judgment be 
 given for the defendant, he will be entitled to receive the • 
 he has been put to by the prosecutor. The question of libel or 
 no libel is one for the jury; but the Court or Judge i- required to 
 give his or their opinion upon it to the jury, according to their 
 discretion, which the jury can accept or reject, as they shall feel 
 themselves bound in conscience to do. 
 
 Lift. — To lift a forme is to remove it temporarily from the 
 press or machine and thus to suspend the process of printing, in 
 order that another forme may be put on. In the warehouse each 
 separate portion of printed paper, whatever the number of sheets 
 it consists of, that is placed upon the poles to dry. is termed a 
 lift. A forme is said to "lift'' when it has been so perfectly 
 justified and locked up that no parts of it drop out on being 
 raised from the imposing surface. In most printing offices ■ ; 
 moderate size a piece of machinery, styled a " int." i- used to 
 convey the formes from the press-room or machine-room, which 
 is usually on the basement, to the composing-room at the b p 
 of the house. It consists of a sort of shallow box. standing on 
 end, the front or lid of which is moveable, and lined with a 
 blanket, so as not to injure the face of the type; into this 
 the forme is placed, over which the lid is fastened by a bolt. 
 In this position, by means of a pulley, it can be raised or Lev- 
 ered from one floor to another as occasion requires. The -a\ ing 
 of time and labour is great, to say nothing of the destruc 
 of the staircase caused by the sliding of tonne.- down it. 
 
 Ligatures. — Letters cast together on one -hank. The only 
 ligatures now in use are — 
 
 te oe ff fin ffl ft fl. 
 
 Light Work. — See Easy Wokk. 
 
 Literal Errors.— Errors in letters, ns distinguished from 
 verbal errors, which are errors in words. 
 
 Literary Property.— The Act which defines aud establishes 
 property in literary productions is the Act 5 & 6 Vic, e. 15. 
 three leading sections ot the Act are : — 
 
 And be it enacted, that the copyright in every book which shall after 
 the passing of this Act he published in the lin timi - author -hall 
 
 endure tor the natural life of such author, ami for the further term of 
 seven years, commencing at the time -l his death, and shall be the 
 property of such author and his assigns: provided always, tl 
 the .-aid term of seven years shall w
 
 10 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' ' 
 
 Supplement. 
 
 ipyrighl shall in 
 ■ for such : years : and that the 
 
 all be publisl i the death of 
 
 ars from the firsl 
 publi ill be the prop 
 
 author's manuscripl from which such b 
 and his 
 
 And whi [ this Act to i 
 
 thi i •• • ■ right 
 
 nacted, thai the hi which at the tu i 
 
 hall subsist in an 
 
 ded and endure fi 
 full ti I 03 this Ait in . 1 bli bed, 
 
 .1 of 1 1"' person « ho al the time of passing 
 ill be the pro] ri ided always, 
 
 that in all cases in •which such copyright shaM belong in whole or in 
 r other person who shall have acquiri d it tor 
 d than tl at of natural love and affection, such 
 >. this act, bu i >r the 
 
 rein at the time of passing of this \ei, 
 and • tuthor of such book, if he sha U 
 
 or the ] uch author, if h dead, 
 
 and the pr ' . I all. . '■■ fore the expiral 
 
 such term, nefits of this Act 
 
 ■ is minute of such consent ii 
 form in that behalf given in the shedule to this Act am 
 entered in the ! natter directed to be kept, in 
 
 which case such copyright shall endure for the full term by this Act 
 provi - of books to be published after the passing of this 
 
 uch person '->r persons as in such 
 minute shall be expressed. — Sec. 4. 
 
 And whereas it is expedient to provide against the suppression of 
 bock? of importance to the public: Be it enacted, that it shall be 
 
 lawful for the Judicial Committi f Her "Majesty's Privy Council, on 
 
 in that the proprii 
 ol its author has refused to republish or to allow 
 the republi md thai ■ ■ reason of such refusal such 
 
 book ma\ I I from the public, to grants licence to such corn- 
 
 publish such book, in such manner and subjecl to such 
 ley may think fit, and that it shall be lawful for -uch 
 lainant to publish such bo k ace n'ding to such licence. — Sec. 5. 
 
 It is v.tv important that printers should carefully observe the 
 
 1] 11 delivery to the British .Museum, under the 
 
 Jit Act. The following are the official directions: — 
 
 Ace :■ (visions of the Copyright Act (5 <v 6 Victoria, 
 
 cap. 4."< .it is enacted "that a printed copy of the whole of every book 
 
 which shall be after the passing of this Act" [1st July, 
 
 1842 with all Maps, Prints, or other Engravings belonging 
 
 ished and coloured in the same manner as the best copies 
 
 II be published, and also of any second or subsequent 
 
 edition which shall be 30 published with any additions or alterations 
 
 whether the al tl -press, or in the maps, prints, or other 
 
 ■avings belonging thereto, and whether the first edition of such 
 
 -hall have been published bef< re or after the passing of th 
 
 and 8 lition of every 1 k of which 
 
 the first or some preceding edition shall not have been delivi red for 
 
 a Musi I I sewed, or stitched 1 gel her, 
 
 and upon the best paper on which the same shall be printed, shall, 
 
 1 dar month after the day on h t k 
 
 shall first be sold, published, or offered for sale within the bills of 
 mortality, or within : ! 1 :-.i be 
 
 sold, published, or offered for sale in any other part oi 
 Kingdom, or within twelve calendar months after ill first 
 
 ' any other part of the I 
 linions, in- deliveri .reel at the 
 
 British Mui 
 Also "That in thi c 
 
 t or divisi 
 volume, pamphlet, -I. it of music, map, chart, 
 
 or plan separately publi; 
 
 ', which urn I 
 I ' 
 
 four in 
 day 
 Friday, and Christmas Day, I 
 
 I 
 
 1 is required 
 ipt in writing for 
 
 By another clause in anot 1 cceeding 65, 
 
 which ought tu have 1 n delivered, is 
 
 lefault in delivering books pursuant to the let. 
 Publications due to the British Museum under the Copyright let 
 iveredat the Copyright Office only. No other delivery 
 Legal. 
 See also Sta nomens' Hall. 
 
 Lithography. The art of printing by a chemical proci 
 from designs made with a greasy material upon stone. "The 
 discovery of this art is due to Aloysius Senefelder, v.i>. 1 -on. and 
 rests upon the following properties of the substance forming the 
 printing surface. 1. 1 ring made upon it with fal ink 
 
 es so strongly as to require mechanical force to remove it. 
 
 '_'. Thai the parts of it free from the drawing receive, retain, and 
 
 absorb water. :;. That a roller or other instrument being covered 
 
 with tat ink, being applied to the printing surface when inked 
 
 and wetted, the ink wdl attach itself only to the drawn parts, 
 
 ami will be repi Lied from the wetted parts. Plates of zinc hi . . 
 
 1 ,1 by this pi icess in the same way as stone, and the 
 
 proa ' ailed • zincography.' liy this process it will be 
 
 thai a drawing being made or an impression taken upon 
 
 paper with prepared ink. and transferred by pressure to the 
 
 . the latter will form a printing surface, from which 
 
 fac similes of the drawing or impression may I btained by this 
 
 process."* The following are the chief circumstances connected 
 with the early history of the art oi lithography. "Aloysius Sene- 
 felder produced a piece of music, his first impression from -tone, 
 in 1796, lie secured a patenl forit in 1800 in several German 
 . extending over fit It was introduced into 
 
 and in 1801, and he published a work on the subject in L817. 
 A partnership was entered into and establishments were tunned 
 in London and Paris in 1799, but they did not succeed. Another 
 at Munich, in 1806, was more prosperous, and the inventor was 
 ultimately appointed to the Inspectorship ..1 the Koyal Litho- 
 graphic Establishment in October, 1809. The Society lor the 
 Encouragement of Arts in London voted Senefelder their gold 
 medal in lsl'.V'i The stone best calculated for lithographic 
 purposes is a sort of calcareous slate, found on the hanks of the 
 i be, in Bavaria, the finest being found near .Munich. A good 
 
 1 porous, yet brittle, of a pale yellowish drab, and . 
 linns 1, 1 a grey neutral tint. The stones are formed into slabs 
 from one-and-a-half to three inches in thickness. To prepare 
 them for use, two stnnes are placed face to face, with some tine 
 sifted sand between them, and then are rubbed together with a 
 circular motion to produce the requisite granulation, which is 
 made tine or coarse to suit the purpose of the artist. The 
 principal agents used for making designs on stone are called 
 Lithographic chalk and lithographic ink. They are composed of 
 tallow, virgin wax. hard tallow soap, shellac, sometimes a little 
 mastic or copal, and enough lampblack to impart a colour to the 
 wax. These ingredients are put into an iron saucepan, and ex- 
 posed to a strong Sre until the mass is in a state of ignition. 
 the quantity is reduced one-half, the pan is carefully 
 1 1 d, or put into w-ater to extinguish the flame and cool the 
 mixture. After being well worked up, it is formed into small 
 cal es or sticks. The ingredients are the same in the chalk and 
 the ink. but the proportions are varied, and a little Venice tur- 
 pentine is often added to the latter. The chalk is used in a dry 
 state, but the ink is dissolved by rubbing in water, and is used 
 in a pen or with a camel's hair pencil. The presence of soap 
 rs it Si iluble in water. The artist completes a drawing with 
 the chalk upon a grained stone as he would make a drawing in 
 i or chalk 11 If while in this state a wet sponge 
 
 w.re passed over the face of the stone the drawing would wash 
 off. To prevent this, and to make it capable of yielding im- 
 pressions, a weak solution of nitric acid is poured over it. which 
 unites with and neutralises the alkali or soap contained in the 
 chalk and render.- it insoluble in water. Alter this the usual 
 at a solution of gum over the whole face of the 
 !. when this is taken off, the drawing is no longer 
 : i by the application of a wet sponge, because the 
 
 * "Abridgement ations relating to Printing.'* 1859, p.28. 
 
 - 1 " Manual of Dates," art. Lithography.
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 41 
 
 chalk is now insoluble. The stone is now ready for the printer, 
 who obtains impressions by the following process. Having 
 damped the surface of the stone equally with a sponge tilled 
 with water which has been slightly tinctured by acid, the 
 printer finds that the water has been imbibed by only those 
 parts of the stone which are not occupied by the drawing, which, 
 being greasy, repels the water and remains dry. A roller, covered 
 with ink, is now passed over the stone, which will not even be 
 soiled where it is wet, from the antipathy of oil and water. But 
 the parts occupied by the drawing, being dry and greasy, have 
 an affinity for the printing ink, which therefore leaves the roller 
 and attaches itself to the drawing. In this state it is said to be 
 charged, or rolled in. A sheet of damped paper is then put over 
 it, and the whole being passed through a press the printing ink 
 is transferred from the stone to the paper, and the impression is 
 obtained. Great nicety is requisite in the preparation of all the 
 agents employed in this art, and in the process of printing, as 
 well as in making the drawing on the stone.* 
 
 Litho-Typography. — The peculiarities of cylindrical print- 
 ing have recently been applied to the purposes of lithography, 
 and made to take impressions of figures from the flat surface 
 of a stone with almost the same ease and certainty, and with 
 nearly the same rapidity as it is able to produce copies from the 
 raised surfaces of ordinary type. The ordinary rate of letter-press 
 printing, by two pressmen, is a token, or 250 copies, per hour : but, 
 slow as this may seem, it is express speed in comparison with the 
 dawdling manual process of producing lithographic impressions ; 
 since a letter-press printer, at half-press, accomplishes at least his 
 1200 copies in a day, whereas a lithographic pressman can work 
 off but thirty to forty prints an hour, and this is at the rate of 
 only 300 to 400 per diem. The reason of this vast difference 
 between the speed of the two kindred operations is, that not 
 only are the distinct processes which have to be carried out, in 
 order to produce a single copy by lithography greater in number 
 than those which have to be gone through in typography, but 
 they are each of a more delicate character, and consequently 
 require greater care and time in the prosecution of them. The 
 several operations which have to be gone through each time a 
 lithographic print is produced are as follows : — 
 
 1. Inking the roller. 
 
 2. Damping the stone. 
 
 3. Inking the stone. 
 
 4. Laying the sheet on the stone. 
 
 5. Lowering the tympan. 
 
 6. Running in the stone. 
 
 7. Depressing the scraper of the press, by means of the side-lever. 
 
 8. Passing the stone under the scraper. 
 
 9. Lifting the scraper. 
 
 10. Running out the stone. 
 
 11. Lifting the tympan. 
 
 12. Removing the printed sheet. 
 
 But as the invention of the typographic machine more than 
 quadrupled, in the first instance, the ordinary rate of production 
 by hand, and did so merely by reducing the nine distinct opera- 
 tions involved in the letter-press printing to three, so the intro- 
 duction of the lithographic machine has increased the speed with 
 which impressions can be obtained nearly twenty-fold — the ma- 
 chine producing as many as 700 copies an hour, instead of only 
 300 to 400 a day, as by hand. The acceleration, too, has been 
 gained partly in the same manner as the quickening of the 
 process was effected by the first printing machine, namely, by 
 reducing the twelve distinct operations requisite to be performed 
 in printing lithography manually to only three, and this either 
 by the omission of some of them, or the combination of others, 
 so that two or more are executed simultaneously by the apparatus 
 of the machine, rather than successively, as in the hand process. 
 Every lithographic machine is made up of five distinct forms of 
 apparatus : — 
 
 1. The damping apparatus. 
 
 2. The inking apparatus. 
 
 3. The "feeding" apparatus. 
 
 4. The impression apparatus. 
 
 5. The delivery apparatus. 
 
 "The American Printer," p. 22. 
 
 Thus it will be seen that machines for lithographic purposes are 
 composed of the same mechanical adaptations as the typo- 
 graphical ones, with the addition of the appliances requisite for 
 damping the stone. But though a perfect lithographic machine 
 requires as many as five different self-acting contrivances (some 
 have only four, the stone being damped by hand), nevertheless, 
 in the production of the impressions there are only three distinct 
 operations automatically performed — the stone being damped, 
 the roller inked, and the ink applied to the surface, as well as 
 the impression given, with each alternate traverse of the table, 
 as is the case with the exception of the damping, during the 
 reciprocating movement of the ordinary typographic machines. 
 Hence, the lowering and lifting of the tympan are both done 
 away with, as well as the depression anil after elevation of the 
 scraper, so that four out of the twelve successive operations are 
 dispensed with ; whilst the inking the roller, damping the stone, 
 and inking the stone, as well as running it in and taking the 
 impression, and then running it out again, are, as we have said, 
 made to constitute but one act performed by the simple traverse 
 of the impression table. Hence, as the laying-on of the sheet 
 and removing the print have each to be performed in both the 
 mechanical and manual processes, the entire dozen operations 
 are abridged to three, and the gain thus rendered four-fold ; so 
 that, allowiug the machine to work five times as quick as a man, 
 we can readily perceive that the rate of production mechanically 
 must be tweuty times more than it is manually. By means of the 
 platen of the old printing-press the pressure applied to the type 
 was perfectly flat and simultaneous— all the parts of the forme 
 being impinged upon together, rather than successively, as in 
 cylindrical printing ; but raised surfaces alone can be printed 
 platen- wise. It would be impossible to force the sheet to take up 
 the ink out of the fine crevices made in a copper or steel plate 
 engraving, or, indeed, from any device in intaglio, by means of a 
 flat pressure given to every part of the surface at once. Hence, 
 for copper-plate printing, a cylinder has to be used, in order to 
 obtain the impression ; for the pressure of this, when coated with 
 a semi-elastic substance like blanketing, is of so searching a 
 character, that it forces itself down into the several hollows of 
 the surface, both as it comes to and leaves each part over -which 
 it has successively to pass — the very successiveness of the pres- 
 sure serving to produce the impression. Nor could the delinea- 
 tion upon the flat surface of a lithographic stone be successively 
 taken off by such flat and simultaneous pressure. In lithographic 
 printing, the force has to be successively applied, as in the case of 
 copper-plate work ; but it was generally believed that, unlike 
 that mode of obtaining impressions from the incisions or sunk 
 parts of surfaces, it was necessary, owing to lithography being 
 executed on a flat surface, that a certain amount of friction 
 should be applied, evenly and gradually, to every part of the 
 stone, one after the other, in order to obtain the impression with 
 all the beauty and fineness of the original. Hence the scraper 
 was always made a constituent, and for a long time was con- 
 sidered to be an essential portion of the process, the action of 
 such an instrument being not only to produce successive vertical 
 pressure, but a certain amount of friction in a horizontal direc- 
 tion. And it was this common fallacy as to the necessity of some 
 such instrument being used in order to obtain perfect litho- 
 graphic impressions, which formed the great impediment to the 
 advance of steam lithographic machinery. That such a prejudice 
 is utterly erroneous, the cylindrical machines lately constructed 
 have demonstrated in the most practical manner, the impressions 
 produced by them being admitted by the best printers to be 
 fully as fine and sharp in every part as any that have been pro- 
 duced by means of the scraper. Indeed, it must be self-evident 
 to all in the least acquainted with mathematics, that as a cylindi r 
 can only impinge upon a plain surface in a line, even as a circle 
 can but touch such a line in a point, that the lithographic stone, 
 as it passes under the impression cylinder of the machine, must 
 have the same linear impression successively given to every part 
 of the device delineated upon it, and that this must consequently 
 become impressed upon the paper between it and the cylinder in 
 the same manner as if the common lithographic hand-press had 
 been used for the purpose ; but. with the all-important exception, 
 that little or no friction has been applied in order to obtain it. 
 It is true, that as the impression cylinder of the litho-machine is
 
 42 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 continually revolving, the stone, while passing under.it, receives 
 a v. > incous impression upon each part 
 
 of ii successively, rather than a continually-sliding horizontal 
 
 one, stall a- is pr.nluc.-il by the action of tin- scraper. Neverthe- 
 less, the lines, however finely drawn upon the stone, are, by the 
 cylindrical method of printing, just as finch impressed upun the 
 siieet; bat, at the same time, the friction, which was long thought 
 nee \ for the purpose, is to a great extent ihme away with; 
 
 and the & ; ■ ice is thai the device on the stone remains for 
 a much longer period uninjured. Indeed, the litho machine, 
 owing to the cylinder exerting a less amount of friction than the 
 :-.r on the surface, is capable of producing a far greater 
 number of impressions from the same delineation than can he 
 
 obtained by the hand-press. Ind I. the old friotional or forcible 
 
 sliding method of producing impressions from lithography by 
 means of the scraper, form \ay an essential part of the 
 
 pr 38; and that, instead of adding to the beauty of the im- 
 pression, i' was, owing to this very friction which was thought 
 o ssary to produce it, continually destroying the oneness of the 
 lines to which it was applied, and thus rendering the more 
 delicate delineations on the stone of a less durable character. In 
 tact, in the course of the experiments which were made in tilting 
 up the lithographic machine, it was found that wherever the 
 friction occurred — as, for instance, at those parts where the 
 cylinder met the stone or left it — the lines were more or less 
 injured, and that unless the cylinder were made to "hear up " at 
 these points, fewer impressions could be taken without their 
 betraying -i _ r n- of rotteness at the upper or lower parts of the 
 delineation —and this, whilst the finest lines in the middle portions 
 of tile subject remained absolutely unbroken. Thus it has been 
 .\p.-rimentally demonstrated that, in the old method of obtaining 
 impressions from lithography, by means of the scraper, the 
 horizontal friction, so far from being of service in the process, 
 was really a serious drawback to it; and that the successive 
 nt pressure exerted by this part of the lithographic press 
 was all that was needed — the continual scraping of the surface 
 of the stone tending, on the other hand, gradually to destroy the 
 sharpness of the Impression, and proportionately to reduce the 
 number of copies which could be yielded by it. But by the 
 cylindrical method of printing, on the contrary, the successive 
 vertical pressure being r.-tained, and the horizontal friction re- 
 moved, a far greater number of prints could be produced from 
 the on.- delineation; and this merely because, owing to there 
 being little or no friction upon the lines drawn upon the stone, 
 such a mode of printing serves to keep them in their original 
 integrity, ami thus enables them to yield at least double or treble 
 the numbers of copies which could he obtained by the old 
 frictional method. The first successful lithographic machine 
 was introduced about eighteen years since. This, as was the 
 with the typographic machine, was the invention of a 
 German— one named Siegel, and it is now in use.* 
 
 Locking-up.— Fastening a forme in the chase by means of 
 quoins (</.>'.). The quoins should first be pushed as far as possible 
 with the fingers. Then by the aid of the mallet and shooting 
 
 . they should be gently driven along, those against the foot- 
 Mick first, and then those against the sidestick. The several 
 quarters of the forme should be partially tightened before either 
 quarter is finally locked-up, otherwise the cross-bar may be 
 sprung. The entire forme should be gently planed all over 
 
 face bi in bi ing locked-up. If this be carefully done, a 
 md planing is hardly uecessary, providing the justifies 
 is perfect and the pages are all of the same length. But as this 
 c 186, the second planing can hardly be dispensed 
 with. Itjoften happens that the quoins, when locked-up wet, so 
 stick to the furniture as to renderit troublesome to unlock them. 
 In such ca-.s drive the quoin up a little more, and it will unlock 
 with ease. Before lifting a forme, after it is locked-up, raise it 
 gently a short distance and look under it, to ascertain whether 
 any types are disposed to drop out. If all is right, carry it to 
 
 iroof press. 
 
 Logotypes.— Types consisting of two or more letters, and 
 forming either complete words or merely syllables, &c. They 
 
 '"Trades aiiJ Manufactories of Great Britain." 
 
 are intended to save the trouble of the compositor, for instead of 
 lifting the word and in three letters, if cast as a logotype, he 
 
 picks it up as .me. Earl Stanhope, among other innovations, 
 
 proposed to introduce eight new logotypes, believing that their 
 regular and frequent occurrence would expedite the process of 
 composition in a very considerable degree, for in twenty pages 
 of " Enfield's speaker" the logotypes would save to the com- 
 positor no less than y,07-'t lifts, viz.: — 
 
 th in an re se to of on 
 771 441 413 385 291 279 204 229 
 
 Johnson's Typographia states that this system was actually tried 
 at the Times oilice, hut it was soon abandoned, as it was found 
 that the hands could get through more work by the old process 
 than by the proposed improvement. The scheme was soon almost 
 forgotten, but in 1-s.V.i the subject of logotypes again received 
 attention. In that year Messrs. J. V. Collignon & Louis George 
 tool out Letters Patent for " improvements in Typography." in 
 their specification, after observing that if all the letters were 
 connected two and two, the operation of composing "would be 
 shortened one-half, and by one-third and even three-fourths with 
 elements composed of three or four letters ;'' and that the for- 
 mation of logotypes had hitherto been attended with great cost 
 for punches and matrices, besides the risk of loss from one letter 
 being battered, the patentees say, "Consequently we have sought 
 an application for our improved system by other means than 
 thai of casting, ami have succeeded in discovering a ready and 
 efficient method of uniting several letters together. Hence, all 
 the difficulties in the way being overcome, our I ireviotypy may be 
 applied to all kinds of printing, which is to composition what 
 mechanical power is to printing. According to our invention, 
 we cold-solder letters together placed in j uxtapositiou, and which 
 consists in coating a letter throughout its surface with any 
 metallic solder to cause it to adhere to another letter, and so to 
 form a whole. By this means a defective letter may be unsoldered 
 and replaced by a good one, or those used that remain. This 
 soldering preferably consists of— 
 
 Mercury 75 
 
 Bismuth 10 
 
 Fine pewter ... 10 
 
 Regulus of Antimony 5 } 
 
 Mr. George obtained, two years later, provisional protection only 
 for " Improvements in the method of soldering together two or 
 more printing-type letters, to facilitate the work of the com- 
 positor, and the arrangement of type-cases for the same.'' The 
 letters are soldered with the following composition, used cold : — 
 
 Mercury S 
 
 Fine Tin; \ 
 
 The two must be mixed well together. " The solder is put on a 
 plate of lead, and the broad side of the type is rubbed thereon, 
 and the composition is afterwards done as usual, the solder 
 becoming quite rigid at or about the expiration of half-an-hour." 
 The combined letters stated to have been found of most value 
 are — 
 
 be com con ent ion in 
 
 for ge ing Id me the 
 
 and th ve al re os 
 
 In the same year (1861), Mr. A. B. Bailey obtained provisional 
 protection for " An improved system of combination of types, 
 and an improved case for containing the same." The boxes in 
 the case shown in the drawings are so arranged that all the 
 combinations commencing with the same letters are in the same 
 column. The columns may be either vertical, horizontal, or 
 diagonal. The latest logographic system with which we are ac- 
 quainted is that of Mr. W. II. Wilkinson, of Massachusetts, 
 which was patented in 1868. It was tried in one of the largest 
 printing-offices in London for the composition of a weekly 
 periodical, and is, to some extent, in operation at the present 
 time. The invention relates to the combined use of types con- 
 sisting of words or parts of words, together with the ordinary 
 letter or single character types, Words, roots, and parts of words, 
 such as constitute a very large proportion of ordinary matter, 
 are made up into types cast whole, or formed of letter-types 
 united; these word-types arc tabulated and arranged iu cases 
 
 100."
 
 The Printers' Register 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 43 
 
 in the order of their relative importance or frequency of recur- 
 rence. " A set or series of cases or boxes is arranged partially 
 around a central point occupied by the compositor, and divided 
 into compartments for containing the types, which are arrayed 
 in tables so that their relative positions may be easily discerned 
 by the eye ; the said tables are placed strictly in the order of 
 their relative values as calculated from the average number of 
 words usually contributed by each table in the matter of com- 
 position, and each table is arranged in relation to the central 
 point where the compositor stands, in such a position as to be 
 accessible to his right hand in proportion to its comparative 
 value." The ordinary letter-types, numerals, and other similar 
 types, occupy the compartments of the cases at the left hand of 
 the compositor, the rest of the space being occupied by the 
 logotypes. The tables themselves are arranged with reference 
 to their being learned step by step and used as auxiliary to the 
 letter-types, until the compositor acquires the use of enough 
 words to constitute the larger proportion of his work ; these 
 word-types then become the main feature in the system, the 
 letter-types being only used as auxiliary. — See "An Address to the 
 Public," by John Walter, showing the great improvement he has 
 made in the art of printing by Logographic Arrangements ; stating 
 also the various difficulties and opposition he has encountered 
 during its progress to the present state of perfection. London : 
 1789, 8vo., pp. xiii. 88. Also, " Tobitt Combiuation Type, their 
 History, Advantages, and Application," by John II. Tobitt. New 
 York : 1852, 8vo. " Miscellanies in Prose and Verse, intended as 
 a Specimen of the Types at the Logographic Printing-office." 
 London: J. Walter, 1785, 8vo., pp. xxiii. 225. " Logography." 
 London : 1783, 8vo— See also ". The Times." 
 
 Long Accent. — A short horizontal line placed over certain 
 vowels, as — 
 
 a e i o H 
 
 Long Cross. — The long bar in a chase divided for octavo, 
 &c. It is also the narrowest. 
 
 Long Letters. — Letters which fill the whole depth of the 
 body, and are both ascending and descending, such in the Roman 
 as Q and j, and in the Italic /. 
 
 Long Pages. — Pages of more than the proper length. Before 
 fastening in the quoins the compositor should carefully ascertain 
 whether the pages of each quarter are of the same length ; for 
 even the difference of a lead will cause them to hang. To test 
 their exactness, place the ball of each thumb against the centre 
 of the footstick, raising it a little with the pressure, and if the 
 ends of both pages rise equally with the stick it is a proof they 
 will not bind. A similar plan should be adopted in lockiug-up 
 newspaper pages, as regards the columns. 
 
 Long Primer. — A size of type between Small Pica and 
 Bourgeois, the body of which is equal to two Pearls. The follow- 
 ing are the equivalents to the foot, according to the different 
 standards : — 
 
 Caslon, 89; Figgins, 90; Reed & Fox, 92; Patent Type Founding 
 Company, 90. 
 The Germans call this letter Corpus ; the French petit romain. 
 
 Loose Justifying. — The practice of insufficiently spacing 
 the lines in the stick, thereby making them loose. — See Justifi- 
 cation. 
 
 Low Case. — A case which is short of its proper complement 
 of type ; in which the quantities in the different boxes are low. 
 
 Lower Case. — The case which stands beneath the Roman 
 case, in a pair of cases. It holds the small letters, double letters, 
 points, spaces, quadrats, and other sorts, according to the " lay " 
 adopted. These sorts are accordingly called loiver-ease sorts. 
 
 Low in Line. — When the face of a type does not range 
 nicely with its fellows, but is lower, it is called " low in line." in 
 contradistinction to a letter being higher than others in a line, 
 when it is termed " high in line." 
 
 Low to Paper. — When the impression of a type does not 
 appear distinctly, from not being of the same height as the body 
 
 of a page or line, it is termed " low to paper." This is caused 
 sometimes by the typefounder's dresser planing too much oft 
 the foot of a stick of type ; it is also observable wh.-n n«-\v -.>rt ^ 
 are mixed with an old fount, the new sorts being, in that case, 
 "high to paper." 
 
 Lug.— When the roller adheres closely to the inking table 
 and the type, through being green aud soft, it is said to lu/j. 
 
 M. 
 
 Machine.— In England, a press in which the operation of 
 laying-on the sheet, inking the forme, and effecting the impression, 
 among others, are automatically performed, is called a machine; 
 although, to speak correctly, every press is a machine, and every 
 printing machine is a press, as is said in America. We shall, for 
 convenience sake, adopt the distinction conventionally observed, 
 and speak of presses separately from machines. The invention of 
 macliiues has given an impetus to the progress of the art of 
 printing, and has thereby accelerated the diffusion of knowledge 
 to an extent which cannot be contemplated without a feeling .4 
 amazement. By the use of machines, sheets of paper can be 
 printed of a size which could not possibly be obtained on a press 
 worked by hand, and at a speed which, compared with that of 
 the hand-press, is as that of the express train to the tortoise. 
 Several persons lay claim to the honour of having invented the 
 first machine, or of adapting the cylinder principle to the im- 
 pression of paper by raised characters. We shall not endeavour 
 to set at rest a question so vexed, and our descriptions of the 
 different machines will be taken direct from the records of the 
 Patent Office, and be given strictly in chronological order. We 
 ought to mention, at the commencement, that Savage, in his ex- 
 cellent " Dictionary of Printing," treats machine printing as 
 synonymous with cylindrical printing, which it is not, for platen 
 machines are certainly not presses. The only distinction which 
 can be logically drawn is that we have alluded to above — the 
 fact of certain operations being effected automatically. The 
 inventions patented in Great Britain of this class come under 
 certain heads, as follows, according to the shape of the cylinders 
 and the surface pressed by them : — 
 
 I. Flat-forme pressing-cylinder. 
 II. Flat-forme conical pressing-roller. 
 
 III. Prismatic-forme pressing-cylinder. 
 
 IV. Cylindrical-forme (convex) pressing-cylinder. 
 V. Cylindrical-forme (convex) flat pressing-surface. 
 
 VI. Cylindrical-forme (concave) pressing-cylinder. 
 VII. Flat-forme pressing flat surface. 
 
 It is undoubtedly the fact that the first suggestion on the records of 
 the Patent Office, for the employment of the cylindrical principle 
 in typographic impression, is due to William Nicholson, who, in 
 1790, obtained Letters Patent for " a machine or instrument on a 
 new construction, for the purpose of printing on paper, linen, 
 cotton, woollen, and other articles, in a more neat, cheap, and 
 accurate manner than is effected by the machines now in use." 
 The first clauses refer to the fabrication of types. These types, 
 imposed in chases of wood or metal adapted to the surface of 
 a cylinder, are fastened "to the said surface by screws or wedges, 
 or in grooves, or by other means well known to workmen." 
 " Blocks, formes, types, plates, and originals," are likewise 
 fastened on the surface of cylinders "for other kinds of work." 
 The ink is furnished to the printing surface by a "colouring 
 cylinder," covered with "leather, or the dressed skins which 
 printers call pelts or * * * with woollen, or linen, or cotton 
 cloth," "and stuffed with horsehair, wool, or woollen cloth, de- 
 fended by leather or oilskin." Distribution is effected by two or 
 three small rollers applied "longitudinally against the colon, a 
 cylinder, so that they may be turned by the motion of the Ian. -." 
 If the colour be thin, a doctor of wood or metal, "or a straight 
 brush, or both of these last," are applied to the colouring cylinder. 
 Colour is applied "to an engraved plate or cylinder or * * * 
 tli rough the interstices of a perforated pattern (or cylinder)" by "a 
 cylinder entirely covered with hair or bristles in the manner 
 brush." The material to be printed (damped, if necessary) is 
 passed "between two cylinders or segments of cylinders in equal
 
 41 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 motion," ono having the printed surface imposed, imd the other 
 with cloth or leather * * * so as to take off an im- 
 pression of the colour previously applied." * * Or, the printing 
 surface, previously coloured, is passed in contact with the mar 
 i wrapped round a clothed cylinder, or the clothed <-\ Under 
 with the material round it rolled over tlio printing-surface 
 "previously coloured." Or, the printing-surface, coloured by a 
 colouring-) ial" pread out upon an 
 
 plane. This process is ap] and every other 
 
 flexible material. The drawings represent:— 1. A press iu which 
 
 type-table passes between an upper and lower cylinder, the 
 former (clothed) acting upon the table " by means of cog-wheels 
 or straps, so as to draw ii backwards or forwards by the motion 
 of its handle." A box containing the niking-roller, with ii 
 distributors above it, is supported by an arm from the head of 
 the machine. On the < id of the typo-table is an "ink block," 
 and upon it a vibrating roller which, by tho action of a bent 
 
 ■ . ■■ dabbs against one of the distributing-rollers and gives it 
 a small quantity of ink." The tympan, winch opens sideways, 
 with paper on it, is laid upon the forme when it arrives between 
 the inking roller and machine-head. Alter the impression, tho 
 workman on the other sido of the cylinders " takes off the sheet 
 and leaves the tympan up." II. A printing cylinder has (gearing 
 with iti a pressing cylinder below and a colouring cylinder 
 above, the latter being provided with distributors as in I., and 
 furnished by a vibrator from a trough. A sheet of paper is 
 applied to tho surface of tho pressing cylinder where it is retained 
 by points "in the usual manner," or by the apparatus in IV. The 
 machine is uniformly driven in one direction by hand power 
 applied to tho printing cylinder. Another drawing represented 
 a pressing cylinder and inking roller, with distributors, rigidly 
 united and geared into a rack on a long table divided into four 
 parts. Tho sheet is laid down on the former (two modes by 
 which " the paper is taken up and laid down " are. specified) at 
 1 : the impression is received at 2; the sheet discharged at 3; 
 and then the cylinder returns (clearing tho forme by a peculiar 
 contrivance) to 1. The specification ends thus: — "I must take 
 notice that in these and every other of my machines, as well as 
 in every machine whatever, the power may be wind, wi 
 
 I in, animal strength, or any other natural change capable of 
 producing motion."* Such was undoubtedly the first suggestion 
 for the application of the cylindrical principle. Savage (" Dic- 
 tionary," n. 461) gives some particulars concerning Nicholson 
 himself. It appears that he published a number of works on 
 scientific and practical subjects, and conducted Nicholson's Jour- 
 nal of Sciena , ,w. lie kept a large school in Soho-square ; and, 
 in addition to his other multifarious pursuits, was an ageut for a 
 nobleman, whose sudden death left him in difficulties from which 
 be could never extricate himself. It does not, however, appear 
 that his plans and experiments ended in any actually practical 
 results. The accomplishment of this revolution in our art is due 
 to a young Saxon, M. lire-nig. a printer by occupation, who 
 conceived it possible to print by steam, though at first he ex- 
 pected no more than to be able to give accelerated speed to the 
 
 mon press, to which end his first efforts were bent. The 
 Literary Gazette, Oct. 26, 1822, gives some interesting partici 
 of this man: and still more recently, MaemiUan's Magazine, L869, 
 p. 135, has call, d attention to him, in a most interesting article 
 written by Mr. Samuel Smiles. Kcenig arrived in England in 
 1800. He was compelled to work at bis trade for a time, but he 
 lost no opportunity of bringing his great idea under the notice 
 it master printers likely to take it up. After meeting with 
 numerous rebuffs and disappointments, he at last found what he 
 was in search of— a man of capital willing to risk his money in 
 developing the invention, and Bringing it into practical operation. 
 This was Thomas Bensley, a leading London printer, with whom 
 Kcenig entered into a contract in .March 1807, to accomplish his 
 proposed printing machine ; Bensley, on his part, undertaking 
 to find the requisite money for the purpose. Kcenig then pro- 
 ceeded to mature his plans, and construct a model machine, 
 which occupied him the greater part of three years, and a patent 
 
 • Specification, 1748. Abrid!<rment, I. 97. The specification and drawings are re- 
 printed In fun in "Savage's Dictionary of PriuUng," p. 449. Soc also "Bepertory of 
 Arts," Vol. V., p. 145. 
 
 was taken out for the invention on the 29th of March, 1810. 
 Steps were next taken to erect a working model, to put it to the 
 test of actual practice. In the meantime Kcenig had been joined 
 by another ingenious German mechanic, Andrew F. Uauer, who 
 proved of much sendee to him in working out its details. At 
 length, in April 181 1, the first printing machine driven by steam- 
 power wa.- constructed and ready tor use; ami the first work it 
 turned out was sheet H of tho "Annual Register" for 1810, which 
 it printed at the rate of eight hundred impressions an hour, — 
 the first sheet of a hook over printed by a machine and by 
 steam-power. In this first machine of Koenig>3, the arrangement 
 was somewhat similar to that known as the " platen machine ; " 
 the printing being produced by two flat plates, as in the common 
 hand-press. It also embodied an ingenious arrangement for 
 inking tho type. Instead of the old-fashioned inking balls, 
 which were beaten over the type by hand, several cylinders 
 covered with felt and leather were employed, these forming part 
 of the machine itself. Two of the cylinders revolved in opposite 
 directions, so as to spread tho ink, which was then transferred to 
 two other inking cylinders alternately applied to the forme by 
 tho action of spiral springs. This platen machine of Kcenig's, 
 though it has since been taken up anew and perfected, was not 
 considered by him to be sufficiently simple in its arrangement to 
 be adapted for common use ; and he had scarcely completed it 
 when ho was already revolving in his mind a plan of a second 
 machine on a new principle, with the object of ensuring greater 
 
 d, economy, and simplicity. By this time two other well- 
 known London printers, Mr. Taylor and Mr. Woodfall, joined 
 Bensley and Krenig in their partnership for the manufacture and 
 sale of printing machines. Kcenig, thus encouraged, proceeded 
 with his new scheme, the patent for which was taken out on 
 October 30th, 1811. The principal feature of this invention was 
 the printing cylinder in the centre of the machine, by which the 
 impression was taken from the types, instead of by fiat plates as 
 in the first arrangement. The forme was fixed on a cast-iron 
 plate which ran to and fro on a table, being received at each end 
 by strong spiral springs. The other details of the specification 
 included improvements in the inking apparatus, and an arrange- 
 ment for discharging the sheet on the return of the forme. A 
 double machine on the same principle was included in this 
 ] latent. Two other patents were taken out in 1813 and 1814, — 
 the first of which included an important improvement in the 
 inking arrangement, and a contrivance for holding and carrying 
 on the sheet and keeping it close to the printing cylinder by 
 means of endless tapes ; while in the second were introduced 
 the following new expedients : a feeder consisting of an endless 
 web, an improved arrangement of the endless tapes by employing 
 inner as well as outer friskets, an improvement of the register 
 by which greater accuracy of impression was secured, and finally 
 an arrangement by which the sheet was thrown out of the 
 machine, printed on both sides. Before, however, these last- 
 mentioned improvements had been introduced, Kcenig had pro- 
 ceeded with the erection of a single-cylinder machine after the 
 patent of 1811. It was finished and ready for use by December, 
 l 12; and it was then employed to print the sheets G and H of 
 Clarkson's " Life of Penn, Vol I., which it did in a satisfactory 
 manner, at the rate of eight hundred impressions an hour. When 
 this machine had been got fairly to work, the proprietors of 
 si \ oral of the leading London newspapers were invited to witness 
 its performances — amongst others, Mr. Perry, of the Morning 
 
 nicle, and Mr. Walter, of the Times. Mr. Perry would have 
 nothing to do with it, and would not even go to see it, regarding 
 it as a gimcrack; but Mr. Walter, who had long been desirous of 
 
 ping machinery to newspaper printing, at once went to see 
 Kcenig's machine on the premises in Whitecross-street, where it 
 had been manufactured and was at work. He had before had 
 several interviews with the inventor on the subject of a steam- 
 press for the Ti7>ies ; but determined to wait the issue of the 
 experimental machine which he knew to be in course of con- 
 struction. A glance at the machine at work at once satisfied 
 Mr. Walter as to the great value of the invention. Kcenig having 
 briefly explained to him the working of a double machine on the 
 same principle, Mr. Walter, after only a few minutes' considera- 
 tion, and before leaving the premises, ordered two double ma- 
 chines tor the printing of the Times newspaper. In Nov., 1814,
 
 The Printers* Register 
 Supplement. 
 
 1 ) K TIONA RY OF TYPOG It A PHY. 
 
 45 
 
 the Times announced that the greatest improvement connected 
 with printing since the discovery of the art itself had been 
 accomplished, inasmuch as a "system of machinery, almost 
 Organic, had been devised and arranged, which, while il relieved 
 the human frame of its most laborious efforts in printing, far 
 exceeded all human power in rapidity and despatch. It stated 
 that "no less than 1,100 sheets are impressed in one hour." This 
 number was sufficient at that time to meet the demand for the 
 Times ; but tn meet the contingency of an increasing circulation 
 Koenig shortly after introduced a further modification, in the 
 continual motion of the printing cylinder (the subject of his 
 fourth patent), by which it was enabled to throw off from 1 ..".( 10 
 to 2,000 copies in the hour. In the event of a still larger im- 
 pression being required, Koenig was prepared to supply a four- 
 cylinder or eight-cylinder machine on the same principle, by 
 which; of course, the number of impressions would have been 
 proportionately multiplied, but the necessities of the paper did 
 not at that time call for so large a production, and the machines 
 originally erected by Koenig continued for many years sufficient 
 to meet all the requirements of the proprietor. The preceding 
 description of the first steam printing machine possesses con- 
 siderable historical interest, but the machine itself has since 
 been completely eclipsed in its performances by at least a score 
 of variously-constructed presses, some the production of English 
 engineers, and some the invention of American, French, and 
 German engineers. Among the principal machines now in use for 
 printing newspapers, &c, are : The " Hoe " Machine, a descrip- 
 tion of which will he found on pp. 26, 27 of this "Dictionary of 
 Typography," and the "Bullock Machine," described at p.5. The 
 Times has recently perfected a new machine, which is known 
 as "The Walter Press." It is stated to be an almost original 
 invention. Its principal merits are its simplicity, its compact- 
 ness, its speed, and its economy. While each of the ten-feeder 
 "Hoe" machines occupies a large and lofty room, and requires 
 eighteen men to feed and work it, the new " Walter " machine 
 occupies a space of only about 14 feet by 5 feet, or less than 
 any newspaper machine yet introduced, and requires only three 
 lads to take away, with half the attention of an overseer, who 
 easily superintends two of the machines while at work. The 
 "Hoe" machine turns out 7,000 impressions printed on both 
 sides in the hour; but the "Walter" machine turns out 11,000 
 impressions complete in the same time. The new invention 
 does not in the least resemble any existing printing machine, 
 unless it be the calendering machine, which has possibly fur- 
 nished the type of it. At the printing end, it looks like a col- 
 lection of small cylinders or rollers. The paper, mounted on a 
 huge reel as it comes from the paper-mill, goes in at one end 
 in an endless web, 0,300 yards in length, seems to fly through 
 amongst the cylinders, and issues forth at the other in two 
 descending torrents of sheets, accurately cut into lengths, and 
 printed on both sides. The rapidity with which it works may 
 be inferred from the fact that the printing cylinders (round 
 which the stereotyped plates are fixed), while making their 
 impressions on the paper, travel at the surprising speed of 200 
 revolutions a minute. As the sheet passes inwards, it is first 
 damped on one side by being carried rapidly over a cylinder 
 which revolves in a trough of cold water; it then passes on to 
 the first pair of printing and impression cylinders, where it is 
 printed on one side ; it is next reversed and sent through the 
 second pair, where it is printed on the other side; then it 
 passes on to the cutting cylinders, which divide the web of now 
 printed paper into the proper lengths. The sheets are rapidly 
 conducted by tapes into a swing frame, which, as it vibrates, 
 delivers them alternately on either side, in two apparently con- 
 tinuous streams of sheets, which are rapidly thrown forward 
 from the frame by a rocker, and deposited on tables at which 
 the lads sit to receive them. The machine is almost entirely 
 self-acting, from the pumping up of the ink into the ink-bos 
 out of the cistern below stairs, to the registering of the number.-. 
 as they are printed, in the manager's room above. ■ Newspapers 
 of moderate circulation, and jobbing work generally, are now- 
 worked on machines the design of which was originally that of 
 
 * A minute description, accompanied with plana and sections of this machine, 
 appeared in the Primers' Register, FeD, 7, 181 1. 
 
 Kcenig, as improved by Applegath and Cowper about the year 
 
 isis. innumerable improvements have been made subsequently, 
 and the manufacture of printing machines has become a la 
 and important business. Our , idequate even to enu- 
 
 merate the varieties of these nun Bern on Jobbing 
 
 Machines will be found on p.33 of the " Dictionary of T; 
 grapby." 
 
 Machine Boy. — A buy engaged in the machine-room, for 
 laying-on and takmg-off the sheets during the process of printing 
 by machine. Whilst the machine minder i- making-ready a forme, 
 the boys are sometimes placed at other machini -. or their time 
 is occupied in taking home or fetching formes from other printers. 
 
 The ware] soman also frequently finds their services handy in 
 
 an emergency, for lilling-in or taking sheets out of the glazed 
 
 board i. 
 
 Machine Casting.— See Typefoixdixc;. 
 
 Machine Manager. — Tho superintendent of the machine- 
 room, from whom the machine minders take their order-. Be 
 also has to undertake the bringing-up of cuts, &c, for the work 
 on the machines. 
 
 Machine Minder. — The man who makes ready the formes, 
 tapes and blankets the machine, and, when started, looks after 
 it, watches the progress of the work, and directs the laying-on 
 and taking-off boys in their duties. 
 
 Machining.— Printing the formes by means of a machine. 
 Where an office does not possess a machine, the tonnes are sent 
 out to he printed— which is called machining them. Some oi 
 the London offices confine themselves almost entirely to ma- 
 chining for different printers. 
 
 Machinist. — Usually a practical engineer who attends to 
 the setting up or taking down of machines, and to repairing 
 them when broken. Machine minders, however, are frequently 
 styled machinists, in error. 
 
 Machine Room. — The apartment in a printing-office v< 
 the machines are erected, and where the formes are machined. 
 It is usually situated on the basement floor, on account of the 
 great weight and vibration caused in working; as also for being 
 more expedient, when erecting or taking down a machine, in 
 conveying the various portions in and out of the office. 
 
 Maekie's Manifold Type-Setting Machine.— Th is novel 
 and simple machine is only useful for setting duplicates of, say. 
 ten, twenty, or fifty. In either case the workman sets at halt 
 the speed he would set one column, so that in setting fifty 
 duplicates he actually sets at the rate of twenty-five columns, 
 Times size, per day. The modus operandi is the following: 
 Upon thin brass rules with one edge and one end turned up, 
 you place, say. twenty letters all alike, and on the flat. This 
 you repeat with every letter and figure in the fount, duplicating 
 them scores or hundreds of times. When ready for setting, you 
 empty one brass after another into a common setting-stick, with 
 i lie following results. Suppose you wish to se1 the heading of this 
 article, yon empty one brass of cap Si's into your stick the 
 narrow way; then one of a's, one of c's, one of k"s, one of i's, 
 one of e's. one of s's, and so on, thus: — 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 ■; 
 
 - 
 
 ". 
 
 - 
 
 CD 
 
 to 
 
 ffi 
 
 CD 
 
 EG 
 
 <n 
 
 <D 
 
 <D 
 
 -: 
 
 -■ 
 
 -. 
 
 --. 
 
 ~ 
 
 a 
 
 =. 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 d 
 
 a 
 
 - 
 
 P 
 
 D 
 
 _. 
 
 ~ 
 
 ~ 
 
 C 
 
 d 
 
 ~ 
 
 - 
 
 d 
 
 q 
 
 ~ 
 
 - 
 
 " 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 r 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 r, 
 
 r 
 
 - 
 
 si 
 
 .r 
 
 _z 
 
 •a 
 
 — 
 
 
 JZ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ait 
 
 -. 
 
 =4 
 
 ■- 
 
 " 
 
 
 ert 
 
 n 
 
 
 rl 
 
 
 
 -i 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 f. f, r*. r~. •--. •-. 
 
 •-, 
 
 f. 
 
 <-. 
 
 pe=i 
 
 a 
 
 eZ, rZ, 
 
 '-. 
 
 «S 
 
 r*. 
 
 r~, r-. r-, -", .-■. 
 
 
 
 ro 
 
 ■ 
 
 '. 
 
 • 
 
 ■'.■ 
 
 
 <V) 
 
 en 
 
 
 <]) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hi^h 
 
 
 E-HE-E- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 d 
 
 c 
 
 oj 
 
 ad 
 
 j 
 
 <-, 
 
 '?.~.~. 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tu 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 ^AJA 
 
 a 
 
 CJ 
 
 O 
 
 
 ■ . 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ r-. f. pa? , 
 
 i>s «*> U-, >, >, >-, >. >. >. >-, >. >■, :— , >\>* \**r* 
 
 u, Ui u. gx t_ y l- u. u ~~ -— '— r- r- — ^- H 
 
 ^I2l5l23!5l3ll2!2151^-^1H1H1H121332 
 - ~ - - : 3 ~ ■£ S. 2 S. -S. -S. S. £ --£ ■— 
 3 'fl "c p o "a "2 'S 'g "H *E = =. B S H 
 
 „ d rt - ri rt -. t trtcid^^drtjt 
 ^^^rtSSE?-^^ g SEE £ £ £ 
 01 01 to oi oi oi oi « yi jr. v* ^n ?i jn vt m ji 
 
 "t» 4) "e » *«0 C © 4 C C3 O S * C - '- ~~ 
 
 13131515151512151515151*1513151515 
 
 O O O Cj O O - L ^ apoQQpvo 
 
 s s g s s s S S S S S S S S --• S "■
 
 46 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 By ' ick is full you will nave twenty li 
 
 fifty letters each, or i ind in all, all sel by fifty m 
 
 1 
 the twenty duplicates are pul on to twenty different gall 
 form the firs! lines of twenty columns. It will be seen thai 
 ngis very easy, any wrong le lyvi ible, 
 
 ibutinc i- '1 by reversing the lasl opi ration, i 
 
 :ing" nun-!. ■ own] 
 
 of M for further use. M r. Macki 
 
 this bj stem in or ler to supply dupl arious 
 
 newspapers, and for setting handbill horl telegr 
 
 &c. It may be of much use, as Mr. Mackie supplies all the 
 
 ; Lfor £20. The exact i 
 and distributing twenty columns i i r column. 
 
 Mackie.— When pari e imj double, it' 
 
 the;. 
 
 a lur i nai kli fhi is i asily remedied by remoi ing 
 . clear the platen. The joints or 
 ympan should be kepi well screwed tip, or lurring will be 
 the consequence. When the thumb-piec 
 
 Iways produces a slur: this can be prevented bj filing 
 off a pari i - « ill a1 all tine 
 
 and greal care musl therefore be taken i them per- 
 
 ly tight. Tl ping al tl dges will al o slur; this 
 
 may be remedied by wetting the edges frequentlj with 
 
 Slurring and mackling will imeti i happen from other can 
 
 it will be well in such cases to paste corks on the frisket, or to 
 
 many cords as ] ibl ' i | bhe sheet close to 
 
 mpan. 
 
 Make. --It: casting-off copy ormatteril is said that il "maki 
 
 moh — a galley, a stickful, &C — that is, it occupies su much 
 
 Make Even.— When a long paragraph is divided into more 
 than one taking of copy, tl i tor etting the firsl portion 
 
 le thai follows hira to "end i ven." If. however, 
 he c.i ■ ttly do so, he its to "make even" bj 
 
 running a few lines of the second 
 
 Making Margin.— Arranging the pages so thai each may 
 
 occupy li o! i. .i a al iiavi tin propi t pr iport ion of 
 
 white paper left at tl: ■ sides as well as a1 the head and foot. 
 
 The page, when printed, should be a little higher than the 
 
 middli i more margin on the outside 
 
 in the back. The methods now resorted to are as follows : — 
 
 For a half-she it of 8vo., dress thi rith suitable furniture. 
 
 of "itsown" into the 8vo. size. Place the back 
 
 Lth the ends of the lines of the 8th page, 
 
 and lei it extend a Pica em beyond th iter edge of page I ; if 
 
 rider than I this will give a proper margin to the 
 
 back, and allow em for cutting; now open the | aper to a 
 
 and let it extend , and no1 beyond, tl iter edge of page 1, 
 
 taking care that the furniture is equally divided on each side of 
 bar. Hat ing in this n gin to the 
 
 pro ortion it to the length by 1 rying 
 whetl ed in 8vo., will extend from 
 
 the folio of page 8 to the bottom of page 5, including the white 
 line, having the furniture equally proportioned a1 beads each 
 
 sidt ' y now bi considered as right, 
 
 and tl d exactly 1 ne. The furniture 
 
 for th i d in the same manner. In mi 
 
 margin always take care thai the gutter-sticks I fa proper 
 
 lth, which may be tried by holdi i nd of the | 
 
 i Ito. to 1 i e in the short 
 
 cross, ■ whether the fold for8vo. falls in the midd 
 
 n gu Id, it will prove the gutter to be co 
 
 The margin of I2's and ade in the 
 
 manner; for, carel illy folded a sheel o1 paper intended 
 
 for the work, on i may he first dressed, and the margin 
 
 adjus . her; for if the folding falls i 
 
 ' '■ - 
 gin is right throughout. Having madi permargins, 
 
 i . mains hut 'le and foot Sticks and qtn ii 
 
 and lock-up the formes, observing well thai every page stands 
 
 i true register. In imposing jobs, where two 
 
 or more ; . requiring equal margins are to be 
 
 « orki d • ier, fold the paper to the size appropriate for each, 
 
 and s ; | the distance from the lefl side of 
 
 one par;'' to the li El id i "i the adjoining one shall be exactly 
 equal to the width of the folded paper, as before described. 
 
 Making-ready a Forme. Preparing ii for printing — one 
 
 -.I the pressman's duties. We shall first 
 
 describe the best method for making-ready on the machine, and 
 
 ; ~. Our information on the first head is founded 
 
 applied by Messrs. I!. Hoe & Co. We 
 
 believe that no English Manual has hitherto treated of this 
 
 i d, i- apparentlj regarded as one of the 
 
 ..; the art. 
 
 Make cli an the bed of the machine and the impression segment of 
 
 the cylinder. Adjust the bearers a trifle above ordinary type height. 
 
 fiat the imp". . ,v- have an even bearing on the journals, 
 
 and thai the cylinder fairlj meets the bearers, select a suitable 
 
 surface. Th i be india rubber 
 
 cloth, a I hick wo. ilea lapping cloth or blanket, -eieral beets of llliek, 
 
 calendered printi or oi r more smooth and hard press 
 
 Each has merits not to be found in any 
 
 other. Upon the proper selection ol the ty mpan the machine -work 
 
 inagi i nd-. and eare should be taken in making the 
 
 I YMl'ANS. 
 
 Wha id,il musl be stretched very tightly 
 
 tl ylinder. All labour in overlaying is but thrown away if 
 
 thisbenol carefully attended to. a rubber or woollen blanket can 
 mred at one end of the blanket by small I I. projecting in- 
 ward, and laced tightly witb sadlers' thread at the other end; or, by 
 h ii end of the blanket a piece of canvass, it may be wound 
 tighthj around the reel and kept secure bj the pawl and ratchet. 
 
 Paper and press boards require a different process, fake a pi . . i 
 
 areil cherry reglet ol the full length of the cylinder. Trim down 
 
 I he paper or pre-- hoard to the width of the bed between the bearers, 
 
 but leave it a little longer than the impression segment of the cylinder. 
 
 Then crease the press-board at a uniform distance of half an inch 
 
 from the narrower end, and lay this creased part on the flat edge of 
 
 the impression segement of thecylinders under the grippers. Put the 
 
 over this and bring down the clamps firmly on the reglet so as 
 
 lv. When this is done, a thin well of muslin may 
 
 be stretched over the whole in the same way in which a blanket is 
 
 laid on, and rolled up tightly, wliich will prevent any slipping of the 
 
 or of the overlay- that may be pasted on it. 
 
 The regulation of the margin is the next process. Although type 
 
 can be printed from any quarter of thebed.it will be found most 
 
 convenienl to lay all formes close to the back part of the bed, and 
 
 midway between the bearers. This will secure a good impression, 
 
 give a fair average margin to every forme, and allow the full use of 
 
 the b d tme, without resetting the cylinder. The bed 
 
 and o\ tinder travel togel tier, and the grippers, « hich firing down the 
 
 to the ferine, should barely lap over the back part of the bed. 
 
 i lie toothed cylinder-wheel, and the short toothed rack on 
 
 ill" side of the fed remain undisturbed, the grippers will always pass 
 
 over the bed in exactly the same place. When the grippers are in this 
 
 ion, slightly lapping over t he side of the bed, measure the distance 
 
 between the back edge of the bed and the point of one of the nearest 
 
 iers, and with a piei E reglet cut a gauge exactly corresponding 
 
 to this measurement. Let no forme be laid upon the machine until 
 
 e and tl ige of the chase tallies with the 
 
 gauge. This will prevent the grippers from closing on the forme and 
 crushingit. If the chase will not admit of so wide a margin, or if an 
 extra I on the sheet, put a piece of furniture of the 
 
 a chase. The margin can thus be increased or 
 diminished &1 pleasure. 
 
 A book forme m. i . be locked up in a chase SO large and with the 
 . far from the frame that the grippers will bring down the 
 ich a position that it will be printed with the margin all on 
 To remedy this, the cylinder must be re-set Proceed thus: 
 the screw . id washer al the end of the cylinder-shaft, and 
 the intermediate w hei I oul of gear; loosen screws in the gauge 
 rack; then turn the cylinder to the point required, connect the inter- 
 mediate wheel, adjust the guage rack, and screw up tight. 
 
 I !i machine having been adjusted, next examine the forme to be 
 
 I Not onlj see thai il has been gauged correctly, but also that 
 
 i, i- not locked up too tightly, that chase, quoins, letter, and furniture 
 
 are all level and lie flat upon the bed. If the forme springs, the
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 47 
 
 quoins must be slackened; if this loosens the type too much the 
 justification should be amended. Make clean the type by cubbing ii 
 
 : with a dry brush. The rollers are often made foul and the colour 
 ■ I the ink changed by dust and particles of dirt clinging to the type. 
 Fasten the forme so securely on the bed that it will not be moved 
 by the action of the cylinder or the rollers. Take a proof on its own 
 paper, using very little ink. Adjust the drop guides so as to bring the 
 sheet exactly in the right position. Push out the iron tongues at the 
 edge of the feed-board at equal distances from each other, so that 
 they will sustain the paper evenly. Slide the drop guides along the 
 rod, until they fall squarely over the tongues. Set the side guide so 
 that it will give a true margin in length to the sheet to be printed. 
 Adjust the grippers so that they will seize the sheet at proper inter- 
 vals, making the margin exactly even by lengthening or short 
 the chop guides. Then take a clean , on its own paper, exactly 
 
 in the right position, before making-ready, and show it to the reader. 
 It often happens that an error in the margin, or an imperfect] in in 
 t he register i- thus noticed, and its timelj discovery and correction 
 before overlaying will save much time and trouble. A readable proof 
 may be taken before overlaying by running through ;i sheet or 
 two of thick proof paper. Make register, if it is a book forme, before 
 overlaying. 
 
 When everything has been found correct, then proceed to regulate 
 the impression. If the type is fair the proof should show a decently 
 uniform impression. But if the tonne is large, or if it contains old 
 and new, or large and small type, then the proof "ill .-how an uneven 
 impression. To rectify this inequality, tliree expedients are in use: — 
 
 1. Lowering the bearers and putting on more impression. Tin 
 very poor way, for it wears down new type in order to show the face 
 of the old, and invariably produces thick and coarse press-work. 
 
 2. Raising the low type to proper height by placing thicknesses of 
 paper under them, which is called Underlaying. 
 
 3. Giving additional thickness to the tympan over such parts of the 
 forme as show a weak impression, which is called Overlaying. 
 
 It is seldom that any one of these methods will prove sufficient; all 
 
 should be used together. When Hie Larger part of the pr 
 
 shows a weak impression, approaching illegibility, then more im- 
 pression should be added. When one side of the proof-sheet shows a 
 weak impression, while that on the other side is full and clear, the 
 more impression should be given to the pale side. The impression 
 should be made decently uniform before any attempt i> made at over- 
 laying or underlaying. But. the bearer- should follow the impression 
 screws, both being raised and lowered together, in order to secure the 
 type from the unimpeded force of the impression cylinder. The 
 bearers should be of even height, and the cylinder shaft should always 
 revolve on a true level. If the impression screws are carelessly used, 
 and the bearers are rashly raised and lowered, this even bearing will 
 soon be lost; the difficulty of obtaining a good impression will be 
 much increased, and the machine will receive a serious injury. For 
 the same reason the bearers should never be packed with cards, as is 
 usual on a press, for it strains the cylinder and all its bearings with an 
 irregular resistance. The bearers should be tampered with even less 
 than the impression screws. When the latter are so set. that the 
 cylinder gives a fair, uniform impression, they have done all that can 
 be expected, and nothing more should be attemped with them. 
 Sometimes the proof may show that one cut, or a hue of type, or a 
 set of brass rules is higher than any other material in the forme. The 
 impression should be set regardless of this; it will be found quicker 
 and neater to reduce the impression on one or two such high lines by 
 cutting out the tympan sheet over them than it would be to underlay 
 and bring-up all other types to such irregular height. Adjust the 
 impression so that it will face the larger portion of the type, and 
 make the less conform to the greater. Those parts which are high 
 must lie cut out of the tympan. those which are low should !«■ i used 
 by underlays; the inequalities should be smoothed by overlays. 
 
 When any part of the forme is low, it will not answer to ar 
 facing it with overlays: it must lie brought up to meet the inking 
 rollers, as well as the impression cylinder. In such case, cut i 
 impression of the forme where it is illegible, and then paste it to the 
 bottom of the type. If some types are high and some are low, make 
 a, and carefully avoid increasing the height of any 
 type or rule which seems to have a full impression. Pursue the 
 course when a marked depression appears in the centre or a failing 
 impression at the edges. Cutout that section which is light and pa-re 
 it under the defective part. If the impression grows faint in any part, 
 the underlays must be cut of irregular thickness to suit the lading 
 away of the impression. Cut out an underlay from the edge where 
 the impression begins to be light; then cut another of -mailer size 
 where it is quite illegible; pa-te one over the other, laying them 
 
 carefully in their pro] 'Sitions, and then pate them all on the 
 
 bottom of the forme where il is needed, taking care tolayth 
 underlay nearest the bed. This will j type to a proper level, 
 
 and the next for a uniform impression. The same 
 
 plan will answer for a low corner, i se as little paste as issible, thin 
 and free from lumps. Be careful that the underlays are put on 
 smoothly, without, fold or wrinkle. I bem all from a proof, which 
 
 affixing to the forme. 
 Underlaying should nol be practised to any great extent upon a 
 cylinder ma a valuable means of bringing up an old line 
 
 oi type, ah low corner. The underlays of any type forme 
 
 should not i one-fourth of the surface; 
 
 than th mpted, they rarely fail to work up the quadrats and 
 
 furniture. The action of the quick-moving cylinder upon a 
 
 underlaid with yielding paper, will create a springing and rocking 
 of all the material- in the ehs . 
 
 Of all materials, need underlays most, as they 
 
 quite irregular in height. Thin card or] i ill be 
 
 found preferable to paper for the underlaying of pla 
 wood bodies. When the plates are on patent blocks, always underlay 
 
 ■ and the block. Always cut the underlay I 
 less in size than the faint impress! in woul o quire; this will 
 
 allow for the spring of the plate.* If it is cut of full size, the • 
 impression will disappoint the pressman by being much harder al 
 edges than lie intended. Nevi ' to build up a type-forme to 
 
 a proper impress! in entirely or chiefly by underlaying. 
 
 Underlays should be put under all large and bold-fai 
 when usedwith much smaller typi them abovi 
 
 level of the others. This is needed to give the forme closer rolling, 
 
 extra supply of ink, and that extra fori I in 
 
 the ink to paper which all large type require.-. When the type has 
 been so levelled by underlays that all pa ■• proper bearing 
 
 from the inking -rollers, and when the cylinder ha- a correspondingly 
 even impression, then overlaying i; menced. For ordinary 
 
 news-work, posters, or job-work, overlaying may be entirely mini 
 sary. But hue press-work cannot be done without overlay-. I'nder- 
 lays are chiefly valuable for securing an even impression, while 
 overlays are indispensable for the giving of delicacy and finish. 
 
 To overlay a forme properly, the tympan should be covered with a 
 sheet of thin, smooth and hard paper, stretched tightly. Then I 
 a pale impression on the tympan sheet, and also run through the 
 machine two or three proofs on thin and hard paper. Examine the 
 proofs carefully on face and back. If any bra-- ru 
 pear too high, cut them out of the • one or two thick- 
 
 nesses, as their varying height may require. Go over the whole proof, 
 examining every line carefully, and by cutting oul reduce the im- 
 pression onall projecting letter- to an uniform standard. For this, 
 for all other work on overlays, use a -harp knife with a thin point, and 
 cut on a smooth surface, so that there will be no ragged nor torn edge 
 to the cut. 
 
 The next step should be to raise the impression of those part: 
 the forme where the type appears dull or weak. Cut oul carefully 
 and paste the overlays smoothly upon the tympan. •' 
 worse than useless if they are not laid on firmly and neatly, as 
 .-lightest bagginess will cause them to slur or mackle. If. by accident, 
 the tympan sheet should bag or wrinkle, tear them off and commence 
 anew-. 
 
 Cut out and overlay the more prominent parts first Then try 
 another impression, and from that cut can new overlays for minor 
 defects. Thus proceed until a -mootli and even imprc 
 
 is obtained. 
 
 With comm m work it will be sufficient to out overlays in ma 
 
 e- or pari v line ami ' 
 
 needs examination, ami ol single letters are- i 
 
 .1 by careful workmen. When the pressman is expert at 
 making-ready, it is aot neci ike a new impression with 
 
 every successive sel of overlay.-. Many pressmen take a d 
 
 of a forme on differen 
 and overlay on .an- of the proofs, and finally paste this proof on the 
 tympan. But this boldness and precision can he acquired onlj 
 long practice. Ii Ls better for the young pr, 1 his way 
 
 step by step. 
 
 At Press, tin- t, nil Making-ready a Forme includes: laying; the 
 forme on the pi ;! in it- place, placing the tyn 
 
 sheet on the tympaji, adjusting the points to make < . when 
 
 * Th - the use "f tt 
 
 - invented by Mr. Tickle, a description of which win l»e feaud in 
 order.
 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 if the] to be printed, making register, pn - 
 
 oducing an equal impn ion ram all 
 1 " 
 
 I Hon "]? i ' I/, ry-day 
 
 ter carefully com- 
 
 larly even - other printed work on the subject. Their 
 
 in givi | them in extenao:— 
 
 in ili" 
 
 i thai the piston, to » bii b i lie 
 
 I, will fall pel when 
 
 the b indie i easy; it only being i ■ 
 
 tympan as it is 
 from hi ; to the nick on the 
 
 « bich it is to be adjusted. Tin id ne, fa ten I he 
 ible. II ' 8, and no rai .. chase for making 
 
 o, or octavo 
 ne on each ride and I u 
 If it be 8 large one, qu iins only 
 will be tsten trains! the side irons. 
 
 The forme ened, the tympan sheet is laid oh it, and 
 
 centre i p ible, vi hen the tympan is damped 
 1 and then pulled. The corners of the 
 
 ;ynn in up fr >m the forme, are then pa ted fast 
 
 ich blankets put into the inner tympan as will 
 . ■. For instance, it' it be an ordinary ji >b, 
 bl mkets are us d, bul il a hall heel or a heel of i m 
 
 finer i ixture ire u ed, or, perhaps what is as good, a 
 of paper- 
 Thus far, if th.' mere folding of a sheel b laid on a I k- 
 
 b T.in making ready all formes are alike, but howthej 
 
 should be proceeded with mi de] id upon circumstances. If the 
 
 i be worked be onlj an ordinary one, bj putting on and cutting 
 
 he friskel (which should be previously pasted), a little overlaying, 
 
 •egulating the pull, it will be readj to go on with. But if the 
 
 forn or sheet of l k work, a little more ear.- is 
 
 .i dn r oi r two things to be done before it is ready 
 
 : uch as putting on the points, getting register, in-laying, &c. 
 
 i i ' '. the forme be a hall -! i of twelves, the 
 
 heet of which, a ter b ing folded into sixes, and laid by the 
 
 ■ the long and sh rl crosses and pulled, is pasted on the 
 
 tympan asab ive. The proper blankets intended for use also beii 
 
 their pi ic >, a pair of twelves poinl , which differ from those used for 
 
 octavo, quart i, &c., are screwed exactly on the upper crease of the 
 
 an sheet, so that the spurs of the points will be at equal distances 
 
 tii ■ outer edge of each side of the impression, and fall in the 
 
 ■ of the thick cross bar of the chase. \- the e points are re- 
 
 exactly of a length, it is best to measure both from the 
 
 to tl uter edge of the impression on the tympan-sheet, and 
 
 accordingly. If this be properly done, 
 the furniture in the forme be exact", the register will also be exact 
 i trouble. The poinl beingadju ted, pull, before the frisket 
 . i Ii heel or set-ofl shi et, without r >lling, and bark it, by 
 he 1 ■■ made bj the i poinl on the off spur, and 1 1 i 
 i". the off pointon thenearspur. If the register be not good, 
 . by altering or m iving the forme a little 
 
 ■ •-■■: or by slacking one square, and I 
 
 tl po one I :hter, which may, perhaps, do better than eit 
 
 Having now got register, take ion on the frisket, which has 
 
 id, and cut it out with car,'. The adva 
 ■ of a hall sheet bei ire the frisket is cut out, i-, 
 obi iates the probability of bavins, again t i cul the friskel for 
 
 ■ v ' ' : ■• [uence if the forme be ved 
 
 ■ t. Iii now nece ary to examine 
 eel i- laid exactly to 
 m-sheet and pulled, and the imp] iccordingly. 
 
 ■■ : . hibil places « here the im] 
 
 Cutting out of this sheet every place where itisso 
 "i paper on up the light parts, it is pi 
 
 lie tympan, and - , ntil the impn 
 
 even and tree from black and gray appea 
 hi el used for this pui 
 "' ''" I he pressman only 
 
 I ' i quiring much thinner shei 
 
 thers, it i- in [ui ctly, and in 
 
 of aj for this purpose, thai the arl of getting 
 
 For, it' anj i art of the impression only 
 
 am weighing twelve pounds I ikeil pi 
 
 i ;hi ighti 
 
 I make the i 
 
 sequentlyall the other parts light. Practice and observation, however, 
 are the only. thin; thi arl can be practically attained. Ii 
 
 :hi\ other trifling im qualil ie appear fr >m the impression of this sheet, 
 i | pa ted "'i i he I j mpan heel "ill perfect it. 
 
 i he i iill maj b i then adjusted according m the nature of the ferine, 
 light or heavy, and be considered now read} forworking. If the- 
 points have not springs, the lb Litute is a piece of page-cord 
 
 wrapped round the poml crew ndpa sd aero the tympan so as 
 to fall «it I .in in' in c [in of the thick cross-bar. This acts as a spring, 
 and throws the -heet, when pulled,off the points, and thus insures 
 good point holes. Theonrj difference between making-ready a sheet 
 
 . hatevi be the numberof page i heet, is, that 
 
 ■ofthe lie. t i ii ol made till the inner forme is off, and the 
 , ' [on, v. hen a I he register ol a hall In ■ 
 is made in making ready, before it is gone on with. 
 
 Bul if the hall ihei I oi twelves, which i up] to be hum made- 
 
 ,con i i of tereotype plate the proce ol getting it ready 
 will be somewhat different, For instance, after the plate.- are put on 
 the blocks i equal distances, they should be marked, that 
 
 the. ma; be b tter detected it they move. This done, the proper 
 blankets are pul in the inner tympan, and, without rolling an im 
 n, pulli d, bel ire the tympan-sheet is laid. By the impression 
 ol Pn sheet, such plates as are found low are raised by underlays of 
 paper, of various thicl ■ •; put uniler these parts of the 
 
 plates on the blocks which come off light. This done, a second sheet 
 
 lied for the - purp e, and eon adjusted in the same way, 
 
 until a tolerable impression is exhibited. The tonne is now ready for 
 the tympan-sheet, but before this is laid, ascertain whether anj of the 
 
 are moved from then 1 places on the blocks before marked. 
 Satisfied that the forme is correct, the tympan sheel may be laid, and 
 led with as before advised, namely, screw on the points, get 
 register, pull a heet or two and cut out the impression, where neces 
 -iin.tn paste in the inner tympan, cul out the frisket, overlay, &c. 
 Tin. heap is then lifted on the paper-horse, the bank cleared of alL 
 waste paper, and the forme gone on with. 
 
 We would also commend to the attention of the young press- 
 man the remarks contained in Stower's "Printers' Grammar," 
 pp.345 354; in Savage's " Dictionary," pp. 468, 469; in "The 
 American Printer," pp. 228 — 231 ; and in Johnson's "Typo- 
 graphia," Vol. II., pp. 519- 523. 
 
 Making-lip. — The operation of forming matter into pages. 
 in printing-offices where the clicking system is not acted upon, 
 each compositor makes up his own matter. The compositor 
 who has the first take on the work proceeds without delay to 
 make it up as Minn as he litis completed it. Having completed 
 as many pages as his matter will make, he passes the overplus, 
 if less than halt a page, with the correct head and folio, to the- 
 i o positor whose matter follows his, at the same time taking an 
 account of the number of lines loaned: if, on the contrary, the 
 overplus makes more Ihan half a page, he borrows a sufficient 
 number of lines to complete hi page; each compositor keeping 
 an account of the number of lines borrowed and loaned. The 
 - icond compositor, following the same course, passes the make- 
 in succession; each man passing the make-up in 
 like manner without unnecessary delay. But on newspapers 
 and periodicals, the " printer " undertakes this duty; as also do 
 clickers in companionships. 
 
 Making-up Furniture.— Tin- sing a chase with suitable 
 furniture, side and footsticks, so that a proper margin will be 
 given to the work when printed. This duty falls to the lot ol 
 the Quoin-drawer Overseer during the first portion of the work ; 
 hut if the same furniture is used over again for the same or a 
 similar work, the compositor transfers it from one set of pa 
 to another without extra charge. SeeMAXJNG Matkux. 
 
 Making-up Letter. — When a work is given out to a com- 
 
 i onship, tin- clicker applies i,, the store-keeper for a sufficient 
 
 quantity of letter to keep a certain number of men employed, 
 or tn get up a given number of pagi s. If any part of the matter 
 for distribution, whether in chase or in paper, be desirable or 
 otherwise on account of (he sorts it may contain, it should be 
 divided equally, or the choice of il thrown for. When a new 
 
 Companion i pu! on the work after the respective shares of letfel 
 are made up, and if there he not a sufficiency to carry on all the 
 companionship without making up more, he must bring on an 
 additional quantity before he can be allowed to partake of any 
 of that who i
 
 The Printers* Register 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY, 
 
 49 
 
 Mallet. — A wooden hammer, wherewith by the aid of the 
 shooter or shooting-stick the quoins are wedged in or driven up, 
 and the forme is made secure. In the early days of printing', 
 the head of the mallet was round, but now it is almost square, 
 the lower side, or that into which the handle is fitted, being 
 made smallest. A useful size for a news mallet is five inches in 
 breadth at the top, and four inches in breadth at the bottom, and 
 about three inches thick. The handle, which is best made of 
 beech or ash, should be a little more than an inch in diameter 
 and seven or eight inches long. The hole in the head to receivo 
 the handle should be bevelled each way from the centre on two 
 sides, so that the handle is tightly wedged in at the upper end 
 and there is no danger of the head falling off. Mallets for 
 locking-up jobbing matter are made somewhat smaller and 
 lighter. In conjunction with the planer, the mallet is used to 
 plane down formes. Although this and the operation of locking- 
 up formes appear to be exceedingly simple operations, it may 
 be truly said that not one compositor in a hundred knows how 
 to perform them properly. Mr. J. B. Cursons has pointed out in 
 the Printers' Register that, " In the first place, they do not 
 trouble themselves to fit the quoins, which should be pushed up 
 tightly with the thumb in such a position that when locked-up 
 tight with the mallet, they should tall about four Picas from the 
 head and foot of the page ; instead of which they are frequently 
 rammed up to the top of the sidestick, which causes the pages 
 to go crooked and lift badly. Then in using the shooting-stick, 
 instead of holding it in almost a horizontal position, so as to 
 drive the quoins up easily, many compositors give it but a slight 
 decline from the perpendicular, the consequence being that the 
 shooting-stick (if box) splits, and the printer's joiner is blamed 
 for selling an inferior article, to say nothing of the injury to the 
 stone or bed of the press (if the shooting-stick is iron) by the 
 indentations it makes at every strike of the mallet. Lastly, in 
 planing the forme, instead of gently tapping it — in the centre — 
 with the handle of the mallet, it is customary to strike it heavily 
 with the head — not in the centre, but at one end. The matter, 
 therefore, cannot be fairly planed down, as the pressure of the 
 blow acts similarly to the screws of a platen being loose at one 
 end and tight at the other, giving all the impression on one side. 
 Ever)' printer must have observed a well-used planer, with two 
 indentations on each side of the centre." 
 
 Margin. — See Making Margin. 
 
 Marginal Notes. — Notes at the fore-edge of the page, stand- 
 ing opposite the matter to which they refer. They are usually 
 called ''side notes" by printers (q.v.). 
 
 Marks. — Certain symbols used by printers, such as the hyphen, 
 apostrophe, brace, crotchet or bracket, the ellipsis, &c. There are 
 marks of quotations, accentual marks, the index, leaders, and 
 dots, &c, which will be found duly described separately. In 
 the composing room and the closet the word is used to denote 
 certain alterations made in proofs by the reader, or others, such 
 as " readers' marks," " authors' marks." — See Proof-reading. 
 
 Mathematical Signs.— See Signs. 
 
 Matrices.— See Type Founding. 
 
 Matter. — Pages of type composed ibr any work ; columns 
 for newspapers; the type set for jobs. In well-arranged printing- 
 offices it is divided into matter for distribution, matter for 
 working off, doubtful matter, good matter, &c, according as it 
 is to be used or distributed, &c. 
 
 Measure. — The width in Pica ems of a line, page, or column 
 of type. 
 
 Medical Signs. — See Signs. 
 
 Medium. — A size of paper. — See Dimensions of Paper. 
 
 Metal. — The material of which type is composed. There are 
 at present three classes, viz., ordinary metal, hard metal, and 
 extra hard metal, the nature of which respectively will be found 
 under the title of Type Founding. What is called " Patent 
 Hard Metal," is the invention of Mr. J. E. Johnson, an analytical 
 chemist. In 1852, he patented a hard type alloy into which zinc 
 entered largely, but had to abandon it on account of the tendency 
 
 to rust or oxodise of alloys of that metal. In 1854 he patented 
 another alloy, in which, by substituting tin ibr lead, wholly or in 
 part, he obtained a series of alloys varying in hardness according 
 to the amount of tin substituted. When all the lead a thus 
 replaced, a metal nearly equalling brass in hardness results. The 
 type with which this Dictionary is printed will cut the best old 
 metal like a knife, and any letter of the fount may be driven 
 into a similar letter of the old typo with a hammer like a steel 
 punch into copper. A company, called the Patent Type Founding 
 Company, was established in 1H57, to supply the printing trade 
 with book and newspaper founts manufactured of this deseri)»- 
 tion of metal, by patent automatic machinery. Its foundry is 
 situated at No. 81, Red Lion-square, London, W.C. 
 
 Metal Furniture. — See French Furniture. 
 
 Metal Rules. — Fine lines cast on one, two, three, and four 
 em bodies, in the centre of the type. Sometimes there are en 
 metal rules cast ; they are used in dates, such as 1868-9 ; also in 
 tabular matter, where the columns require an end to make up 
 the width. They are also used in lengthening braces, thus: — 
 
 Milled Boards. — A description of thick, hard cardboard, 
 used to form the sides of books, and for mounting pictures upon, 
 making boxes, &c. The standard sizes are : — 
 
 Pott 
 
 Foolscap 
 
 Crown ... 
 
 Small Half Royal 
 
 Large Half Koyal 
 
 Short 
 
 Half Imperial ... 
 
 Small Half Ditto 
 
 Middle or Small Demy 
 
 17JX14J 
 18JXl4i 
 20Jxl6| 
 20JX13 
 21 X14 
 21 Xl7 
 23ixl6i 
 23 X15J 
 22ixl8i 
 
 Lar. Mdle. or Lar. Demy 23Jxl8§ 
 Large or Medium ... 24 X 19 
 Small Whole Royal... 25|xl9j 
 Large Whole Royal ... 28 X21 
 
 Whole Imperial 32x22* 
 
 Long thin 30x21" 
 
 Atlas 30x26 
 
 Long Royal 34x21 
 
 Colombier 36x24 
 
 Large Atlas 34x27 
 
 Gt. Eagle orDbl. Elepht. 40x23 
 
 Emperor 44x30 
 
 Double Royal 46x21 
 
 Long Colombier ... 49x24 
 Long Double Elephant ... 50x27i 
 
 Antiquarian 54x30 
 
 Extra Antiquarian ... 54x34 
 
 Minion. — A size of type one size smaller than Brevier and 
 one size larger than Nonpareil. The following are the number 
 of lines to the foot, according to the standards of the leading 
 foundries : — 
 
 Caslon, 122; Figgins, 122; Reed & Fox, 122; Patent Type Founding 
 Company, 120. 
 
 Missal Caps. — A style of fancy letter, used generally a3 
 initials to Old English or Black letter. The following is a 
 specimen : — 
 
 Mitreing Guard. — A small machine used for mitreing brass 
 rule. It is made of cast-iron, with the exception of the front, 
 which is of hardened steel. When a job requires a brass rule 
 border, the rule is cut to suit the four sides of the page ; but 
 instead of printing them thus, 
 
 the rule is fixed in the mitreing guard, by means of a screw, and 
 the ends filed till they join thus : — ■ 
 
 A neater appearance is thus obtained, and greater credit is re- 
 flected on the compositor. 
 
 Mitreing Machine. — A machine for mitreing wood rule, 
 brass rule, &c. It is similar to the Mitreing Guard, but on a 
 larger scale. 
 
 Mitred Rules. — See Mitreing Gtjabd. 
 
 Monk.- -A blotch of ink on the printed sheet, arising from 
 insufficient distribution of the ink over the rollers. 
 
 Moulds.— See Type FOUNDING.
 
 30 
 
 I)I( TlOXAUY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 Music Typos.- Moveable types used is producing cheap 
 music in large quantities. The Brsi good music types were those 
 cut about twenty-five years since byMr. Eughes. Air. E. Cowpei 
 invented a mode by which music could he printed in two formes 
 
 one being the lines, printed first ; the other the notes, &c., 
 
 printed on the lines. This plan did aot work well, and the late 
 Mr. Branston devised a meth.nl of striking the punches deeper 
 into the plate, and then taking a stereotype plate from it in type 
 metal. After the white parts were blocked out, the music was 
 sufficiently in relief to be capable of being printed at the 
 common printing press. A very improved method of casting 
 music type, i.s now adopted by the Patent Type Founding 
 Company. 
 
 Mutton Quads.— A slang term for em quad. The use of 
 this word appears to be that it is more distinct than the syllable 
 
 for which it is used, just as "nut" quad is used tor en quad — 
 the difference between the sound of em and en being so slight. 
 
 N. 
 
 Naked Forme. — A forme without furniture. 
 
 Nature Printing. — This beautiful art was first introduced 
 and practised in Vienna, whither the late Mr. Henry Bradbury 
 went, on purpose to acquire the knowledge he subsequently 
 carried out with so much skill and ability. The flowers, leaves, 
 or plant itself (as the case maybe) are first dried, by placing the 
 subject between thick blotting papers, and pressing in a screw 
 ] iress, frequently changing the papers, and repeating the process 
 until all moisture is extracted ; in some instances the services of 
 the sun, or even artificial heat, are additionally called into 
 requisition : when the subject is sufficiently dried, which may be 
 known by its brittleness, it is ready for manipulation. The plant 
 maybe said to engrave its own plate thus: — a thick piece of 
 pure, soft, sheet lead, rather larger than the paper on which the 
 subject is ultimately to be printed, must be planed as bright and 
 even as a looking-glass. On to this plate the subject is laid in 
 the required position, upon which again is placed a highly- 
 polished steel plate, face downwards. The whole is then placed 
 between powerful rollers, until the plant is imbedded in the lead, 
 the residt being a facsimile matrix. An electrotype of this 
 matrix is then taken, from which, again, another electrotype is 
 requisite, in order to give the original effect when printed from. 
 The great object of Nature Printing is to reproduce very rare 
 botanical specimens so truthfully as to enable the student of any 
 country to examine the print, and obtain the same result to his 
 investigation as though he actually had the plant itself. The 
 advantage attained may be easily estimated from the fact that 
 there are numerous instances where only one specimen is known 
 to be in the possession of individuals, and even if it were to be 
 sold, its price would deter many from attempting to obtain it. 
 
 News-hand. — A compositor employed solely on newspaper 
 worK. 
 
 News-house. — A printing-office in which newspapers only 
 are printed. This term is used to distinguish them from book 
 and job houses. 
 
 News-machine. — A machine specially adapted for printing 
 newspapers. 
 
 Newspapers (Laws relating to).— See Laws Relating 
 to Tin: PRESS, 
 
 Newspaper Stamp._ The Newspaper Stamp, abolished on 
 Friday, September 30, 1870, had an existence of one hundred 
 and fifty-eight years. In the year 1712, Que"en Anne sent a 
 message to the House of Commons complaining of the publica- 
 tion of seditious papers and factious rumours, by which designing 
 men bad been able to sink credit, and the innocent had suffered, 
 On the 12th of February in that year, a Committee of the whole 
 House was appointed, to consider the best means for stopping 
 the then existing abuse of the liberty of the press. The evil 
 referred to had existence in the political pamphlets of the period. 
 A tax on the press was suggested as the best means of remedying 
 the evil, and for the purpose of avoiding a storm of opposition 
 the impost was tacked on to a Bill for taxing soaps, parchment, 
 
 linens, silks, calicoes, .Ve. The result of tho tax was the discon- 
 tinuance of many of the favourite papers of the period, and the 
 amalgamation or others into one publication. The Act passed 
 in June, 1712, came into operation in the month of August 
 following, and continued for thirty-two years. The stamp was 
 red, and the design consisted of the rose, shamrock, and thistle, 
 surmounted with a crown. In the Spectator of .lime 10, 1712, 
 Addison makes reference to this subject, and predicts great 
 mortality among "our weekly historians." He also mentions 
 that a facetious friend had described the said mortality as "the 
 fall of the leaf." The witty Dean Swift, in his Journal to Stella, 
 under date of August 7, speaks of (irub-street as being dead and 
 gone. According to bis report, the new stamps had made sad 
 havoc with tho Observator, the Flying Pod, (he Examiner, and 
 the Medley. Twelve years afterwards — namely 1724 — the House 
 of Commons had under consideration the practices of certain 
 printers, who bait evaded the operations of the Stamp Act by 
 printing the news upon paper between the two sizes mentioned 
 by the law, and entering them as pamphlets, on which the duty 
 to be paid was •>.'. for each edition. lt.s deliberations culminated 
 in a resolution to charge Id. for every sheet of paper "on which 
 any journal, mercury, or any other newspaper whatever shall be 
 printed, and tor every half-sheet thereof the sum of one half- 
 penny sterling." In 1761, the Stain]) Duty upon newspapers 
 was made Id., or i'4 Is. 8t/. for one thousand sheets. The next 
 change in the Stump Duty was effected on the 28th of May, 
 177(i, when Lord North advanced the price from Id. to lid. 
 Another alteration was effected on the 12th of August, 1789. On 
 this occasion the Stamp was increased from lid. to '2d. In 1794, 
 the Stamp was up to 2\d., and in May, 1797, to 'Aid, The highest 
 rate of the Stamp was obtained hi 1815, when the amount was 
 ■id. After this date a period of decline ensued. In the reign of 
 William IV. an Act was passed for the reduction of Stamp Duty 
 upon Newspapers from 4d. to Id., and hi. on any supplement. 
 This Act came into operation on the 15th of September, 183fi, 
 from which date the rise of the cheap paper era may be dated. 
 The next improvement occurred in 1855, when the compulsory 
 use of the stamp was abolished, save and except as a means of 
 passing the paper through the post. It was decided, in 1870, to 
 determine the operation of the old Act, and to inaugurate a new 
 order of things more in accordance with the liberal spirit of 
 the age. 
 
 News-work. — That branch of printing which is confined 
 exclusively to newspapers. Expedition is necessary in getting 
 out a newspaper, and the greatest order and punctuality must 
 be observed to ensure its publication at the proper time. Com- 
 positors ou a daily paper are expected to set-up a given number 
 of fines in every hour; otherwise the printer wouid not be able 
 to estimate the strength of his staff. On the morning papers 
 the news-hands generally commence work at three o'clock in 
 the afternoon, so as to get in their letter and be ready to take 
 copy at six or seven. The copy is served out in " takes " of 
 about a stickful, and each compositor, as he finishes his take, 
 applies for another one. As it frequently happens that towards 
 the close the copy comes in faster than the regular hands can set 
 it up, a number of supernumeraries, called "Grass-hands" (q.v.), 
 are taken on till the paper is up. These grass-hands are also 
 engaged to occupy the frames of regular hands wdio may have 
 fallen sick, or have asked leave to "self out" ((/■>•■) for a night. 
 In such cases they take copy and have the same share of work 
 as the regular hand whom he represents. An evening paper is 
 conducted on the same principle, with this difference, that the 
 work is done in the day-time instead of at night. The men 
 -la.: composition at 8 a.m., the paper being published at 2 p.m. 
 The distribution of the type for the next morning's issue is then 
 proceeded with, till the time for feaving off, about six or seven 
 o'clock in the evening. The system adopted on a weekly paper 
 greatly differs from that of a daily paper. Being a summary of 
 the week's news, the copy is chiefly culled from the daily ])apers 
 as they are published. The early part of the week is therefore 
 devoted to distributing the type, and a number of apprentices 
 or turnovers get up the police news, parliamentary reports, and 
 other general intelligence until about Wednesday or Thursday, 
 when a number of grass-hands are called in to get up the heavy
 
 The Printers* Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 51 
 
 portion of the late news. One long day (say from eight o'clock 
 in the morning till midnight) generally suffices for this, with a 
 few hours each day after for the various editions. On all news- 
 papers, a few hands are kept back ready to set-up or make 
 alterations for any important news that may call for a special 
 edition. In a general way a compositor who has been brought 
 up on news-work is incompetent for the purposes of a general 
 printing-office, — in fact, they don't care to apply for employment 
 in a book-house, as the work is not so well paid fur ; but they 
 forget that the extra pay for news-work is, at the best, but a 
 poor compensation for the night-work, and consequent depriva- 
 tion of domestic comfort and happiness, to say nothing of the 
 pernicious effects it has upon the man's constitution. 
 
 Nick. — A hollow, east crosswise in the shank of the types, to 
 enable the compositor when composing to perceive readily the 
 bottom of the letter as it lies in the case, as the nicks are always 
 cast on that side of the shank on which the bottom of the face 
 is placed. In ordinary news type, printers should be careful to 
 stipulate that the nick of each fount should be different, more 
 especially founts of the same body ; for a great deal of incon- 
 venience frequently arises, owing to the founders casting different 
 founts of type with a similar nick in each. Although this may, 
 at the first sight, appear of little moment, yet it is attended with 
 much trouble ; and works are frequently disfigured with it, not- 
 withstanding all the care of the compositor and the reader. For 
 instance, where the nicks are similar, a compositor, in distributing 
 head lines, lines of Italic, small capitals, or small jobs — in the 
 hurry of business — through inadvertency — or carelessness — fre- 
 quently distributes them into wrong cases, when it is almost 
 impossible for another compositor who has occasion to use these 
 cases next, to detect the error till he sees the proof; unless he is 
 in the habit of reading his lines in the stick, which many are not. 
 He has then a great deal of trouble to change the letters; and, 
 •with all the attention that the reader can bestow, a letter of the 
 wrong fount will frequently escape his eye, and disfigure the 
 page. Even in founts that are next in size to each other; for 
 instance, — Bourgeois and Long Primer, Long Primer and Small 
 Pica, Small Pica and Pica, and Pica and English, head lines, 
 &c, are not unirequently distributed into wrong cases, where 
 the nick is the same ; which always occasion loss of time in 
 correcting the mistakes, and sometimes pass undiscovered. By 
 going as far as three or four nicks, a sufficient variety may be 
 obtained to distinguish one fount from another without hesita- 
 tion. A single nick may be used in the centre or at the foot of 
 the shank ; but we decidedly object to the single nick, or, in 
 fact, any nick being at the top of the shank, and are glad that 
 it is not frequently adopted. Compositors have become so ac- 
 customed to the nick being at the lower part of the shank, that 
 in composing type with the nick at the top, they can scarcely 
 help (let them be ever so careful) having some of the letters 
 topsy-turvy. Where there are a great number of founts, it 
 would add to the distinguishing mark, if consisting of more 
 than one nick, that one of them should be cast shallow; but 
 where there is only one nick, it ought always to be cast dee)'. 
 In Russia, Poland, and in some parts of Germany, the nick is 
 placed on the reverse side of the letter, viz., the back of the 
 type, it being considered by the printers of those countries an 
 advantage to them in composing. 
 
 Nonpareil. — A size of type less than Minion and larger than 
 Baby, and exactly half that of Pica. The standard number of 
 lines to the foot, according to all the founders, is 144. 
 
 Notes. — These are of three descriptions, viz., footnotes which 
 stand at the bottom of the page, marginal notes which are placed 
 at the sides, and in-cut notes which are let into the matter. 
 They are invariably set in type two sizes smaller than the text. 
 
 Numerals. — Numbers expressed by Roman letters, as Vol. II.. 
 chap. xxiv. Numeral letters were used by the Romans, to ac- 
 count by ; and are seven in number, viz. : I V X L C D M. 
 The reason for choosing these letters seems to be this, viz.: M 
 being the first letter of Milk, stands for 1000; which M was 
 formerly printed CIq. Half of that, viz.: I3, or D, is 500. C, 
 the first letter of Centum, stands for 100; which C was anciently 
 printed E, and so hah' of it will be printed oO, L. X denotes 10, | 
 
 which is twice 5, made of two V's, one at top, and the other at 
 the bottom. V stands for 5, because their measure of Jit-eon. ■ 
 was of that shape; and 1 stands for 1, because it is made of one 
 stroke of the pen. If a less number stands before a greater, il 
 is a rule, that the less is taken from the greater; thus, 1 taken 
 from 5 remains 4, IV. 1 from' In remains '■>. IX. 10 from imp, 
 remains 90, XC. If a less number follows a greater, it is a rule 
 that the less is added to the greater; a- S and 1 make 6, V I. 10 
 and 1 make 11, XI. ."i0 and Ki make 60, I.X.. &c. Sometimes 
 Small Capitals are used for Numerate, in the same manner as the 
 seven sorts of Capitals; and look as well, if not neater, than 
 these last; but we observe that, in the dates of years, some 
 choose to put the first letter a Capital; as, MJDi CCX, \i'„ for 
 which they may have their reasons; nevertheless, we join with 
 those who disapprove of mixtures in figures, or to make them 
 appear like nouns substantives, with capitals at the head of 
 small ones. To express numbers by Letters was not the inven- 
 tion of the Romans originally, because several nations, anterior 
 to them, did use that method in counting : and the former 
 Romans were particular only in this, that tli.y employed to 
 numerate by. But when printing was discovered, and 'before 
 Capitals were invented, small letters served for Numerals; which 
 they have done ever since ; not only when the Gothic characters 
 were in their perfection, but even after they ceased, and Roman 
 was become the prevailing letter. 
 
 Numbering Machine.— Nee Paging Machine. 
 
 Numerical Printing.— Ibid. 
 
 O. — An abbreviation of Overseer. A common phrase in speaking 
 of the overseer is, " the cap. O." 
 
 Obelisk (t). — A reference mark to the second note on a page, 
 otherwise called the dagger (</.<). 
 
 Octavo. — A sheet of paper folded into eight. Publishers and 
 printers generally style an octavo work as "8vo." 
 
 Odd Page.— The first, third, and all uneven numbered pages. 
 
 Odd Polio. — A folio consisting of an uneven number. 
 
 Off.— When a job is said to be off, it is meant that it is duly 
 printed ami finished. 
 
 Off-cut.— Any part of a sheet which is cut off before folding. 
 
 Off its Feet.— When the letters do not stand upright 
 
 Oil. — The best oil for presses is neat's oil, which does not 
 candy nor become glutinous, as almost all other oils do. On this 
 account it is used in machinery employed in cotton manufactories, 
 where it is necessary to have as little friction as possible. 
 
 Old English. — A style of letter used in the early days of 
 printing; it is commonly called " Black" (y.r.), on account of 
 its darker and heavier appearance than Roman. 
 
 Old-style Letter.— Roman and Italic letter of the design 
 used previous to the present century, but which has been re- 
 adopted to a great extent during the last few years. The fol- 
 lowing is a specimen: — 
 
 Regent Circus. Antique 
 
 On its Feet. — When letter stands perfectly upright, it is 
 said to be " on its feet." 
 
 Opening. — The space on the galley between two ■•takes" of 
 
 matter. 
 
 Open Matter.— Widely leaded matter: matter that contains 
 a number of quadrats, such as poetry, &C. 
 
 Ornaments. — Designs intended for illustrating or orna- 
 menting trade catalogues, hand-hill-, bags, &&, are called 
 ornaments by the typefounders. 
 
 Orthography. — It would be quite impossible within our 
 limits to give anything like a treatise on this subject, but the
 
 >)Z 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' RORisler. 
 Supplement. 
 
 following short and simple rules, if duly followed, will avoid 
 many mistakes, and prevent many doubts: — 
 
 Ri : m iB i h /. i, or •, preceded by a Jingle 
 
 vowel, don i lal con mant; as staff, mill, pass, kc. The only 
 
 exceptions are, of, is, has, was, yes, his, this, u . and It] 
 
 Kii.i: II Monosyllable ending with any consonant but /. /. or .«, 
 and |- i ingle vowel, never double the final consonant; 
 
 excepting only, add, ebb, butt, egg, odd, err, inn, bunn, purr, and 
 buzz. 
 
 Kii.k III. — Words ending wit ded bj ■> consonant, form 
 
 the plural ol noun ,the persons 01 v.-i-l... \.-rbal inniiis, past parti- 
 ciples, comparatives, and superlatives, t>j changing y inl 1 i; as spy, 
 spies; [carry, thou earnest; he carried) ; carrier, carried ; 
 
 happj , happier, happie: 
 
 The present participle in ing, retains the y, that i may not be 
 ; as, cam . carrying; bury, burying, .v.-. 
 
 : : >. a vow. -i, in such instances as the above, 1 no1 
 changed; as,boy,hoys; l cloy,he cloys, cloyed, &c.; except inlay, 
 pay, in' I say; from which are formed laid, paid, said; and their com- 
 pounds, unlaid, unpaid, unsaid, kc. 
 
 Ui i.k CV.— Words ending with «, preceded by a consonant, upon 
 assuming an add it i inal syllable beginning with a consonant, commonly 
 changej tnl -/; as happy, happily, happiness. But when y is preceded 
 by a vowel, it is verj rarelj changed in the additional syllable; as, roy, 
 c. lyly ; I" ly, I k 13 ish, boyhood ; annoy, annoyed, annoyance; joy, joyless, 
 joyful. 
 
 V. — Monosyllabic-, and words accented on the last syllable, 
 ending with a single consonant preceded by a single vowel,. double 
 that consonant, when they take another syllable beginning with a 
 vowel; as wit, witty; thin, thinni-h ; to abet, an abettor; to begin; 
 .1 beginner. 
 
 But if a dipthong precedes, or the accent is on the preceding syl- 
 lable, the consonant remains -ingle; as, to toil, toiling; to offer, an 
 offering; maid, maiden, ,vc. 
 
 Rule VI. — Words ending with any double letter but I, and taking 
 
 !i u, ly, or fill, after them, preserve the letter double; as harm- 
 
 lessness, carelessness, carelessly, stiffly, successful, distressful, kc. 
 
 Hut those words which end with double I, and take ness, less, ly, 
 
 '. alter them, generally omit one I, as, fulness, skille.-s, fully, 
 
 skilful. 
 
 RriK VII. — Ness, Ics*, /;/, and fid, added to words ending with 
 silent c, do not cut it off; as, paleness, guileless, closely, peaceful : 
 : in a few words; as, duly, truly, awfid. 
 
 Kci.h VIII. — Ment, added to words ending with silent e, generally 
 preserves the r from elision; as, abatement, chastisement, incitement, 
 kc. The words judgment, abridgment, acknowledgment, are devia- 
 tion- from the rule. 
 
 Like other terminations it changes y into z, when preceded by a 
 consonant ; a-, accompany, accompaniment; merry, merriment. 
 
 Rvi.K IX. — Able and Hie, when incorporated into words ending 
 with silent e. almost always cut it off; as, blame, blamable: cure, 
 curable; sense, sensible, ,ve, ; but if c or ij soft comes before e in the 
 original word, the ,■ is then preservedin words compounded with able; 
 as change, changeable; peace, peaceable, &c 
 
 Rit.k X. — When ing or ish is added to words ending with silent e. 
 the t i- almost universally omitted; as place, placing; lodge lodging; 
 slave, slavish ; prude, prudish. 
 
 Utile XI. — Words taken into composition, often drop those letters 
 which are superfluous in their simples ; as handful, dungliil, withal ; 
 also, chilblain, forte! 
 
 Out. — Anything omitted, and marked for insertion in the 
 proof by the reader is said to be an "out." 
 
 Outer Forme.— The forme containing the first page of a 
 boi <k ox newspaper. 
 
 Out of his time.— A youth is said to be "out of his time" 
 when he has completed his apprenticeship. Hansard gives the 
 following account of the old custom in the printing trade of 
 "washing" young men who have just completed their appren- 
 ticeship, before admitting them into the ranks as jonrneymen. 
 The custom still exists: and lor an hour previous to the clock 
 striking twelve, great preparations are made, and brains set to 
 work to discover oy which mean- the greatest noise can be made. 
 He says: — "An old custom peculiar to printing-offices is termed 
 Washing, and during the keeping up of which ceremony, if 
 persons happen to reside in the neighbourhood of the office, 
 
 whose nerves- are not made of si ern stuff ind 1, they will hardly 
 
 fail of getting them shivered. Washing is had recourse to upon 
 two occasions, either for rousing a sense of shame in a fellow- 
 workman who had been idling when he might have been at work, 
 .a- t.. congratulate an apprentice upon the hour having arrived 
 thai brings hi- emancipation from the shackles of his subordinate 
 
 station, and advances him to manhood. Upon the former occasion, 
 
 tiie affair generally ends with a wash of one act ; hut upon the 
 latter, the act- are c.uniuonly repeated with a degree of violence 
 proportioned to the expectancies of a liberal treat at night. 
 Perhaps the following description may afford some slight idea of 
 the nature and effects of the performance. Every man and boy 
 attached to the department of the office to which the person to- 
 be washed ' hound in honour, upon a given signal, to 
 make in the room as much noise as he possibly can with any 
 article upon which he can lay his hands. A rattling of poker, 
 . shovel, and other irons, is harmoniously accompanied with 
 running reglet across the bars of the cases, shaking up of tlio 
 quoin draws, rolling of mallets on the stone, playing the musical 
 quadrangle by chases ami crosses; anil in the press-room, slap- 
 ping the brayers upon the ink-blocks, a knocking together of 
 ball-stocks, hammering the cheeks of the press with sheep's feet, 
 \'c. ; in short, everyone uses the utmost means ho can devise to 
 raise the concert of din and clatter to the highest possible pitch 
 of hideous discordancy, by means of the implements aforesaid; 
 and then the whole is wound up with a finale of three monstrous- 
 huzzas." We may also mention that the apprentice is expected 
 to treat the men in the office, either to a substantial luncheon; 
 or, as is frequently the case, to a supper in the evening, to which 
 each man subscribes an additional amount, in which case a glass 
 nf ale only is partaken at noon, just to wash the dust out of 
 their throats, caused by shaking up the quoin drawers, &c. 
 
 Out of Copy. — When a compositor has finished his "take," 
 he is said to be " out of copy." 
 
 Out of Register.— When the pages do not exactly back 
 each other. 
 
 Olltsides. — The outer sheets of a ream, which are disfigured 
 by the cords. Reams are often made up of soiled and damaged 
 sheets, and sold at a reduced price as " outsides." An outside 
 quire consists of only twenty sheets. 
 
 Overseer. — The superintendent or manager of a printing- 
 office. " The duties of an overseer," says Savage, " vary ac- 
 cording to the size of the establishment, and the part that the 
 principal takes in its management; but, generally speaking, he 
 has the sole conducting of the practical department, receiving 
 his general directions from the principal, and seeing that they 
 are carried into execution in a proper manner. It is requisite, 
 as a matter of course, that he should be intimately and prac- 
 tically acquainted with the business in all its details. It is of 
 importance to the concern where he has the management, that 
 he should blend urbanity with firmness; and show judgment 
 and impartiality in giving out work, so that the business should 
 proceed with regularity, and with satisfaction to all parties." 
 
 Overlay. — A piece of paper fastened on the tympan-sheet by- 
 means of paste, to give more impression to a low part of a forme. 
 For overlaying a machine, nee Making-Ready. 
 
 Overrunning. — Carrying words backwards or forwards in 
 correcting. 
 
 Over Sheets. — The extra sheets which are given out beyond 
 what are actually required for the job, to provide against 
 damages, bad impressions, &C. 
 
 Pack. — Fifty-two cards made up into a bundle are called by 
 printers and stationers a "pack." 
 
 Page.— One side of a leaf of a hook, derived from the Latin 
 pai/iiui, the thing fastened, because originally leaves were fattened 
 together, and the modern system of imposing the matter of leaves 
 together was not invented. 
 
 Page Cord. — A description of strong thin twine used by 
 printers for tying-up pages of matter.
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 53 
 
 Page Gauge. — A gauge used by compositors for measuring 
 the length of pages during the operation of niaking-up. \\ hen 
 a new work has been commenced, the compositor who has set 
 the first take of copy marks oft' a certain number of lines, ac- 
 cording to the size of the page, adding the folio and while 
 lines; he then places a piece of reglet down the side of the 
 page, close up to the head of the galley, and cuts a notch into it 
 at the point where the page terminates. 
 
 Page (tying-up a).— This is a very simple operation, but 
 one that requires a certain amount of knowledge and experience 
 
 to perform it properly. The proper way to tie up a page for im- 
 posing, is to begin at the left top corner of the page, as it lies on 
 the galley, wrap the cord round from left to right, and tighten 
 each successive round at the right top corner. Passing it round 
 about three times, and taking care to make the first end ad- 
 ditionally secure each turn, draw the cord tight through that 
 which is wrapped on the page so as to form a noose, the end of 
 which is left two or three inches out for the convenience of un- 
 tying when imposed. A page thus tied, with the cord round 
 the middle of the shank, will always stand firm and be in no 
 danger of being squabbled while lying on the stone or letter- 
 boards. Many compositors often pass the cord five or six times 
 round the page before fastening it, and it is not secure then, for 
 the very reason that they do not adopt any system, but carelessly 
 overlap the cord at each turn ; but if pains are taken to place 
 each round of the cord immediately above the previous one, as 
 neatly as cotton is wound round a real, it will be found that 
 three times round will be sufficient to bind the type securely ; 
 whereas, if one of the half-dozen overlapping rounds should 
 slip — which is frequently the case —the others naturally become 
 loose, and many a page is squabbled in consequence. An ad- 
 vantage is also thus gained in imposing a forme; for instead of 
 there being such a bulk of cord between the type and furniture, 
 a single thickness only appears. 
 
 Pagination. — The series of numerals denoting the folios of 
 a work. The pagination is consecutive, generally, throughout 
 the volume; but occasionally, when books are issued in parts, 
 each of them has its own separate pagination. 
 
 Paging Iron. — A small brass instrument, about the thick- 
 ness of brass rule, and twenty-five ems long: but made in the 
 shape of a slip galley, with a crooked ear or handle. It is used 
 in a type-foundry for the purpose of placing the types in lines 
 on the galleys previous to being tied up in pages for the printer. 
 — See Type-Founding. 
 
 Paging Machine. — A machine for printing consecutive 
 numbers with great rapidity on sheets of paper, cheque-books, 
 cards, &c. The numbers are usually fixed on the circumference 
 of a revolving cylinder, which is brought down to the paper by 
 some mechanical appliance, by hand or treadle motion; and 
 after the impression has been effected, the cylinder takes a turn 
 and another number is ready to lie printed. Paging machines 
 usually ink themselves, and are made to print double, treble, &c, 
 Numerical printing is now quite a business in itself, although 
 most bookbinders, paper-rulers, as well as printers, possess ma- 
 chines of their own. 
 
 Paging-up. — A phrase used in type-foundries for making 
 letter into pages, and papering them up in the manner in which 
 they are received by the printer. — .Sec Type-Founding. 
 
 Pale Colour. — When the impression is of a lighter colour 
 than it ought properly to be, it is said to be " pale." The fault 
 arises either from the negligence of the person who rolls, or 
 the mechanical deficiencies of the inking apparatus. 
 
 Palette Knife. — A long flexible knife, without sharpened 
 edges, used by pressmen for taking ink out of the can, and 
 braying it out upon the stone or ink table; also for scraping 
 rollers, &c. 
 
 Pamphlet. — A work consisting of not mere than five sheets 
 is so called. It is paid something extra tiir at case, as a com- 
 pensation to the compositor for making up the letter and furni- 
 ture without having any return of either, the whole being 
 generally put in chase. 
 
 Paper. — A substance composed more or less of rags or 
 vegetable fibre, used tor printing, writing, &c. The various kind- 
 "i paper may be distinguished thus: 
 
 According to size; as Ivmv, t'eul-eiip, Crown, &c. 
 According to use ; as printing, writing, wrapping, &c., papers. 
 According to composition; as rag paper, straw paper, wood 
 
 paper ■ 
 According to mode of manufacture; as hand-made, machine- 
 
 r, &C. 
 
 According to the water-mark; as water-lined, wove, laid, kc. 
 
 The varieties of paper are, in fact, innumerable, just a- 
 the materials from which it can be made and the uses to which 
 it. may he applied. It i- nee — ary, there!. ire. in a comparatively 
 small work like the present, tu restrict OUT remarks to these 
 
 suris of paper with which the printer has most to do. As regards 
 the minus of different sizes of papers, it may be remarked that 
 in ancient times, when comparatively tew people could read, 
 pictures ot every kind were much in use where writing would 
 now lie employed. Every shop, for instance, had its sign as well 
 as e\ ery public house, and thoso signs were net then, as they arc 
 Often new, only painted upon a beard, I ml were in\ ariahly actual 
 models of the thing which the sign expressed— as we still nc- 
 nally see some such sign as a bee-hive, a tea-canister, a 
 doll, or a lamb, and the like. For the same reason printers em- 
 ployed some device, which they put upon the title-pages and 
 at the end of theh' books. And paper-makers also introduced 
 marks by way of distinguishing the paper of their manufact 
 from that of others; which marks, becoming common, natur- 
 ally gave their names to different sorts of paper. A favourite 
 paper-mark between 1540 and 1560 was the jug or pot, and 
 would appear to have originated the term, pal paper. The 
 foolscap was a later device, and does not appear to nave been 
 nearly of such long continuance as the former. It has given 
 place to the figure of Britannia, or that of a lion rampant sup- 
 porting the cap of liberty on a pole. The name, however, ha- 
 continued, and we still denominate paper of a particular size by 
 tho name of "foolscap.'' Post paper seems to have di rived its 
 name from the post horn, which was atone time its distinguishing 
 mark. It does not appear to have been used prior to the estab- 
 lishment of the General Post-office ( H',70), when it became a 
 custom to blow a horn: to which circumstance, no doubt, we 
 may attribute its introduction. Bath post is BO named alter that 
 fashionable city. The sizes of the sheets of the different classes 
 of paper will be found under the head Dimensions op Paper, 
 The quality of paper is of the utmost importance in printing, for 
 
 it is impossible to produce g 1 press work on bad paper. 
 
 Nothing but experience, however, will teach what is the I 
 suitable kind for any (.articular job ; while the price at which it 
 is to be executed too frequently precludes a judicious selection. 
 Some useful considerations on this subject will he found u 
 the head of PRESS WORK. 
 
 Paper Board.— Otherwise called wetting board (y.c). 
 
 Paper Duty. — An impost formerly levied on certain descri) - 
 tions of paper, but recently repealed, .Sir Laws Relating to 
 
 \ l w SPAPKBS. 
 
 Paper Knife. — A long broad knife, used by the warehouse - 
 man, to cut up the paper for printing. These knives are not 
 much used now, as the cutting machine has superseded then. 
 by cutting the paper in larger quantities, thus saving much tame, 
 and gn ing a cleaner cut to the edf 
 
 Paper Stool. — A strong wooden stool on which the piles i 
 paper are deposited while the warehouseman is hanging th< 
 sheets on the poles. 
 
 Papering the Cases.— Atlixing pieces of paper to tin 
 bottom of the boxes, in order that the types may not he damaged 
 by coining into direct contact with the wood during the process 
 
 of distribution. It is done by the printers' joiner. 
 
 Papering-up Letter.— Wrapping up the pages of matter 
 in paper to be place. i aside tor future use. The type should be 
 carefully tied up, and perfectly dry before it is papered, and itt 
 
 destination or description legibly written on tho outside.
 
 54 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 ThG Printers' Register 
 Supplement. 
 
 Par. An abbreviation of the word "paragraph" (</.»■.), gene- 
 rally usi d bj c impositora. 
 
 Paragon. A. type one size lai Great Primer and 
 
 ; than Double Pica. The proportions to the foot of the 
 Para m of 1 hi leading type-foundries are as folio? 
 
 , ,>!'..!' Founding I i; Fi [gin , MJ. 
 
 Paragraph. This sign (1 I, which is used for marking off 
 
 s clause or portion of reading matter which is intended to be 
 
 diatini at has gone before it, is now eldom used, except 
 
 ence mark, or in the Bible to divide chapters. In 
 
 1 is paw a edto denote the rubrical 
 
 direction, The word is most frequently now applied to the 
 matter itself, and not to the Bign which denotes it. Newsp 
 
 are usually shot I and i ointed I a peculiar arl i 
 
 frequently displayed in their wording. M is usual to commence 
 a paragraph with an indention of one or more ems, according to 
 
 iridthof tl a ure and the openni 38 oi the matter, as in 
 
 a long line the indention of oni arcelj sufficiently 
 
 noticeable. This, however, is i< ft to the discretion of the author 
 or printer. Man i iters have a somewhat dishonest habit 
 
 of driving out a word or two at the close ot a paragraph t Ice 
 
 a ■■ fat " One. This should always be discountenanced, especially 
 if regard is had to the appearance oi the work subsequently. 
 
 Part ot e ■•■ I or i ne or two short words should never form a 
 
 break-line of themselves ; and a careful compositor will rather 
 overrun backwards than disfigure bis work in this way. The 
 hould never pass this irregularity. The Last line of a 
 paragraph should on no account commence a page, neither 
 .id the first line end one. if possible. The length oi the page 
 should be altered in preference to doing so. Authors and editors 
 are frequently censurably careless in marking the commence- 
 ment "i a paragraph in their copy, and the expense of printing 
 i- materially increased by overruns having to l"- made on this 
 int. The commencement of a paragraph is best marked by 
 a crotchet thus [ being placed before the first word. 
 
 Parallel ( || ).— A reference mark which follows the section 
 ami precedes the paragraph. 
 
 Parallel Matter. — In some works, the arguments for and 
 against are printed in parallel columns. When this is the case, 
 each paragraph commences exactly level with the one to which 
 it refers in the opposite column, and the shortest paragraphs are 
 continued with as many white lines, as to bring them to the 
 same length as their opponent. 
 
 Parchment. — A thin skin used for covering tympans, both 
 
 inner and outer, by reas f its toughness and durability. Old 
 
 dei ds, leases, &c, are frequently used for economy sake. A good 
 skin is free from imperfections or cuts, and is of uniform thick- 
 ness throughout. The outer tj mpan may be a little thicker than 
 the inner one. — .See Ty.miwns. 
 
 Parenthesis ( ). — A sign used to inclose interpolated words 
 or sentences, which serve to strengthen the arguments, though 
 the sane' sentence would read correct ly were the enclosed matter 
 taken away. Parentheses are not now so frequently used as 
 formerly, as commas serve the same purpose and are neater in 
 appearance. — See I'i ncti ition. 
 
 Partner. In working at press, two men are generally em- 
 ployed; they style each oilier their partner, and share the pro- 
 of all work executed by them on the piece. 
 
 Pass Book.— -A book used for denoting the number of lines 
 taken or loaned in making-up. The following is a sample of 
 how the making-up is passed: — 
 
 Robinson to Bbown. 
 Lines to Good. 
 
 Robinson 
 
 Smith 
 
 Jones ... 
 
 10 
 4 
 
 22 
 
 03,— 13th page in Sig. 
 
 t;. 
 
 
 / to Bad. 
 
 
 
 Brown 
 
 
 16 
 
 linen 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 22 
 
 Since the Clicking system has become so much in vogue, pass 
 
 books are -'Mom required. As we have explained before, great 
 loss oi time is occasioned in passing the making-up. 
 
 Paste. A thick semi-fluid compound used for the purpose 
 oi causing paper, &c, to adhere together. To make paste that 
 will keep a year, dissolve a teaspoonful of alum in a quart of 
 warm water. Wiien cool, stir in Hour to give it the consistency 
 of thick cream, being particular to beat up all the lumps; stir 
 
 in : nil powderea resin as will lay on a sixpence, and throw 
 
 iii half-a-dozen cloves, to give it a pleasant odour. Have on the 
 
 fire a tea-cup oi boiling water: pour the Hour mixture into it, 
 
 stirring well all the time. In a few minutes it will be of the con- 
 
 ,s oi treacle. Pour it into an earthen or china vessel ; let 
 
 it cool ; lay a cover on, and put il ill a cool place. Whmi needed 
 for use, take out a portion and soften it with warm water. 
 
 Paste Points.- Small brass points, pasted on tho tympan 
 for obtaining good register for cards, circulars, &c. 
 
 Paste Pot. — A bowl or box used for holding the paste in a 
 printing-office. 
 
 Pearl. A t\ pe one size larger than Diamond and one smaller 
 than Ruby. The number of lines to the foot are as follows: — 
 
 Caslon,178; Figgins.lSO; Reed & Fox, 184; Patent Type Founding 
 I lompany, I s ". 
 
 Peel.— An instrument shaped somewhat like tho letter f 
 used for hanging up sheets on the lines. The length of the 
 handle is determined by the height of the lines, and the size of 
 the head by the sheets to be hung up. 
 
 Pelts.- Sheep skins with the wool taken off, dressed with 
 lime and dried. When required tor use they are steeped in urine, 
 and manipulated until they are soft. They were used for inking 
 the type before composition balls and rollers were invented. 
 
 Penultimate. — The last syllable but one in a word. 
 
 Perfecting. — Printing the second forme of a sheet ; also 
 called working tho reiteration, or backing it. 
 
 Perfect Paper. — The full quantity of paper required for 
 any job, together with some sheets extra to provide tor waste, 
 damages, &c. 
 
 Perfect Ream. — A ream consisting of 21i quires or 516 
 sheets, and in which there are no outside or imperfect quires. 
 
 Period, or Pull-point ( . ). — There are three uses for this 
 mark of punctuation. 1. To indicate the end of a sentence. 2. To 
 
 show the end of an abbrevian as Prof, for professor. 3. To 
 
 serve instead of a leader in tables of contents, figure work, or to 
 till up a spine which the leader does not entirely occupy. — iS'ee 
 Punctuation. 
 
 Pica. — A type one size larger than Small Tica and smaller 
 than English. The proportion to the foot, according to the 
 standards of the founders, are: — 
 
 Caslon,72; Reed & Fox, 72; Patent Type Founding Company, 72; 
 Figgins, 72§. 
 
 Pica is the unit of measurement in the pirinting business ; leads 
 are made up to it, also rules and furniture. Thus, lines are said 
 to be so many Picas in breadth, and the page so many Picas in 
 depth ; the width of furniture is from two to eight or ten Picas. 
 Large 1\ pe and wood letter are made to so many lines of Pica, 
 termed thus : — 8-line Pica Roman, 14-line Pica Antique, &c. 
 
 Pica-Small-Pica. — When Small Pica type is cast on a Pica 
 body, il gives the appearance in print of thin leaded matter, and 
 is named as above. In casting up the page, the number of 
 Small Pica ens are taken for the width, and the number of Pica 
 ems for the length, which, being multiplied, give the quantity of 
 letters in the page. 
 
 Pick. — A small quantity of dirt which adheres to the face of 
 the type and causes a smut on impression. It requires to be 
 picked out with the bodkin or, what is better, removed by the 
 pick brush. 
 
 Pick Brush. — A hard brush used to take picks or dust out 
 of a forme.
 
 The Printers* Register 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYFOGRAPIIY. 
 
 55 
 
 Picker. — A kind of spike or bodkin, used by type-founders 
 for picking out iinperlect letters. 
 
 Picker. — In Stereotyping, a man who makes corrections in 
 stereotype plates. When a plate becomes battered, In- bores a 
 hole where the battered letter appears, and solders the head of 
 a good type into the plate in its place. 
 
 Pieking-up Type. — A common phrase used instead of com- 
 posing; a "picker-up" of type is used in a derogatory sens* 1 to 
 denote that a man is only capable of the mere mechanical 
 operation of lifting the type, but is 1 1 < ■ t accustomed to the more 
 intellectual work of making good divisions, judicious spacing, &c. 
 
 Pie. — A mass of letters disarranged and in confusion. The 
 style of management of a printing-office may always lie known 
 by the quantity of pie it contains, proportionate to its siz. . for 
 every qualified overseer takes can ■ to have the leas; amount of it 
 he possibly can. No receptacle for pie should be accessible to 
 the workman, and every bit that is made should be rigorously 
 cleared away. In America it is spelt "Pi." 
 
 Pig. — A pressman was formerly frequently so called by com- 
 positors. The use of this class of words is, happily, growing 
 less every day, proportionate to the increasing education, inde- 
 pendence, and refinement of the workmen. 
 
 Pigeon Holes. — Unusually wide spaces between words, 
 caused by the carelessness or want of taste of the workman. 
 The word is used disrespectfully in this sense, but in cases oi 
 extreme hurry, such as on newspaper work, where short "takes" 
 have to be quickly justified to make even, pigeon holes are 
 unavoidable. 
 
 Pile. — A heap of paper in the warehouse or in the pressroom. 
 
 Placing Matter. — When an editor or author of a classified 
 work (such as this Dictionary) sends in his copy irregularly, and 
 the compositor has to place the paragraphs in alphabetical order, 
 an extra charge is usually made by him on that account in the 
 cast-up. Also, where three or more types are used in a work 
 or magazine, a similar charge is made for placing. 
 
 Planing Down. — The process of making perfectly even the 
 face of the letters on the imposing surface or on the press table. 
 Although a simple operation, it is seldom properly performed, 
 and the directions given under the head "Mallet" in this 
 Dictionary should be impressed on the workman. Types that 
 stand up rather high should never lie planed after the tonne is 
 locked up. To do so would be to subject them to the utmost 
 danger of being battered. 
 
 Planer. — A block of beech or other hard wood, perfectly 
 smooth and even on the face, used for planing down (q.v.) the ty] le 
 in a forme. A useful size for general purposes is nine inches long, 
 four and a-half inches broad, and two inches deep. For news- 
 paper work larger sizes are occasionally employed. A groove 
 usually runs along the two longer edges, to enable the workman 
 to handle it more readily. 
 
 Platen. — That part of the press or machine which descends 
 on the forme (protected by the blanket, tympan-, &c), and 
 effects the impression. The word is frequently, but incorrectly, 
 spelt " platten." 
 
 Platen Machine. — A machine in which the impression is 
 effected by a platen, as distinguished from one which contains a 
 cylindrical or other impressing surface. Platen machine- are 
 sometimes used for very fine printing, but they are necessarily 
 so much slower in working, and cylinder machines have been so 
 much improved, that they are fast dropping out of use, and few, 
 indeed, are manufactured at the present day. They are also 
 more dangerous; for one or more boys have to turn down the 
 tympan, and are in danger of having their arms crushed in the 
 machinery. 
 
 Plate Paper.— A thick paper, used for printing page wood- 
 engravings, to be inserted in a volume by the binder. 
 
 Planting Sorts. — When certain sorts run short upon a 
 particular work, and one compositor, having a good quantity, 
 hides them from his companions, he is said to "plant" them. 
 
 This is a reprehensible custom, and in well-regulated printing- 
 offices is punished by a fine; tor no! onlyis it a hindrance to 
 the progress of the work, but oftentimes involves an unnecessary 
 expense, by causing an order on tie ty] i rounder tor sorts that 
 might be done without, did more unanimity of feeling exist in 
 the companionship. 
 
 Point Holes.— Fine holes made by the points, by which the 
 second and succei ding impressions are n 
 
 Points. — Two thin pieces of iron, each having point- pro- 
 jecting from one end. They are fixed to the tympan to secure 
 good register i y.r.). 
 
 Points (Punctuational).— The characters ,;:.-?!()' 
 
 and the marks oi r ■ence are all so called by printers. For the 
 
 use of the former see Punctuation ; and tor the latter see the 
 different characters in their alphabetical order. 
 
 Point Screws. — Two small bolts with screws at tl nd 
 
 which go through holes in the tympan. They are square headed, 
 with a nut on the upper side, and serve to fix the points securely 
 to the tympan. 
 
 Poles.— The lengths of wood fixed across the room, on which 
 printed paper is hung to dry. They should always be kept in a 
 condition of scrupulous cleanliness. 
 
 Poll.— A term used by compositors and pressmen, indicating 
 the amount of their weekly earnings. It is a common expression 
 with them to say that they have made a " good poll " or a 
 
 "had poll." 
 
 Polling.— A vulgarism among printers. When a man happens 
 to be the first to finish his job, or arrives at hi- work earliee 
 says he has " polled" the others. Very often there is a race 
 between two workmen, which is called Polling. 
 
 Preface.— The introductory remark- made by the author or 
 editor of a volume. In printing, the preface is usually reserved 
 till the last, so as to be worked with the title and other odd- 
 ments, forming sig. A. 
 
 Press.— This word has three meanings, according to its use, 
 among printers. It is applied to the general body of journalism, 
 which, for the sake of brevity, is called the Press : it is applied 
 to the machine which produces the impression— the press: it is 
 also applied, in a confined sense, to the operation of working 
 the latter machine, which is called "press' 1 in contradi.-tmctioii 
 to "case," which includes the various processes connected with 
 the art of composition. With the first of the- .- we 
 
 have little to do in this "Dictionary of Typography." The ex- 
 isting laws relating to the press, with a sketch of the rise and 
 progress oi the press will be found in previous pages. We shall 
 simply refer to the press as a machine, and to press as the art of 
 using' that machine, under the heads respectively of Pm:ssi - 
 and Pkesswohk. 
 
 Press Bar.— The arm of the press to which the handle is 
 attached. 
 
 Press Boards.— See Pressing. 
 
 Press Book.— A book kept by the foreman of the press or 
 machine-room in a large printing-office, in which entries are 
 made of the amount of paper given out by the warehouseman 
 for the various works, the number printed, 4c,, as well as the 
 name of the pressman. The following is the form usually 
 adopted: — 
 
 When 
 
 given out 
 to wet. 
 
 Names of Works. 
 
 No. 
 
 Signa- 
 ture-. 
 
 Date 
 
 when laid 
 
 on. 
 
 Names of 
 
 1-71. 
 Feb. 27 
 
 Mar. 2 
 
 History of Printing 
 /Usop's Fables 
 
 500 
 7000 
 
 B. 
 M. 
 
 March 1 
 March 4 
 
 Wilson. 
 
 Smith k 
 Perkins. 
 
 Presses.— In England, as we have already explained (ride 
 Machines, ante), this word has a limited meaning, being applied
 
 56 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TVPOC KATUY. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 SuppkniLiit. 
 
 exclusively to mo >ma1 ic in their opera- 
 
 :,.,.,. in \ ;i , rio i and other c m i i iea what we call " m ic \ 
 
 I presses, and with much reason. Tl ly classes of 
 
 i! time arc the Stanhope pre - . which 
 
 obsolete, the Albion pre . and the Columl • 
 
 Bach of these w ill be found de icribi d in il - alphabetical pi 
 Various manufacturers have made alterations more or less im- 
 instruction of thi 1 principle of 
 
 tlieir mechanism remains the same. 
 
 Press Goes.— When the press is properly at work ii i aid 
 
 ;o." 
 Press Goes Easy.— When the nm of the press is light, or 
 when the pull is i 
 
 Press Goes Hard. When the reverse to the aboveisthe 
 case. Paraffin oil has b len found to possess good easy running 
 qualities for oiling the ribs of presses. 
 
 Pressing. -Removing the inequalities on the surface of a 
 caused by the impression of the types, and rendering it as 
 smooth asit was before being printed on. The sheets ha 
 
 : taken down from the drying poles, are carried to the 
 warehouse. The warehouse boys then place them between cx- 
 
 i'i h. polished pasteboards, called glazed-boards. 
 
 Tins operal which i- performed with great dexterity, is thus 
 
 mil nviv described in ••The American Printer:" " We will sup- 
 
 ■ the pasteboards to have sheets between them, which will be 
 
 the case after they ha\ ice been used. The warehouse being 
 
 provided with long tables or benches, secured to the wall, and a 
 sufficient number of moveable tables about the size of the largest 
 
 paper, the warehouseman places • of the small tallies endwise 
 
 against the long one, forming a right angle, upon which to lay 
 
 >l Bl ts as they com it Of the hoards; the boy then 
 
 takes his stand at the right side of the table, with the dry un- 
 pre u I a1 his right hand and the pasteboards at his left, 
 
 somewhat eli vated, Waving sufficient space before him to fill in 
 
 the sheets, lie then pro< Is as follows: He first moistens the 
 
 thumb of his righl hand I reaches across to the pasteboard 
 
 at his left, drawing one off with his thumb and placing it before 
 him. He then catches a .sheet of the dry paper also with his 
 right hand and places if as near the centre of the pasteboard as 
 
 i if. then twisting the body nimbly round to the left, he 
 slides the pres led sheet from the pile of pasteboards to the table 
 at his left side, and in resuming his former position, again draws 
 off a pasteboard with his thumb; and so on, till the gross or 
 bundle is filled. It is then laid aside, and another bundle filled 
 and laid across the former, taking care always to keep the 
 bund] d until they are put in press, when they are 
 
 separated by smooth boards made ol cherry or other bard wood. 
 
 The bundles being all filled in. the warehouseman proe Is to fill 
 
 up the standing press, putting in one bundle at a time and placing 
 a pressing-board between them; there should also be a stout 
 plank introduced between the top board and the platen. In 
 case the press should not hold quite as much as desired, more 
 may be got in by unscrewing the press after it has once been 
 screwed down. The press is finally screwed down as tight as 
 possible. It should remain so for at least twelve hours, when it 
 hould be entirely emptied before the sheets are taken out of 
 the boards. Care should be taken to keep the sides of the piles 
 or heaps perfectly even.'' 
 
 Pressman. — The workman who does the presswork. Printers 
 are divided into two classes compositors and pressmen— and in 
 London b >ys are usuallj apprenticed to one or the other of these 
 branches of the business ; but in the Provinces, it is customary 
 for an apprentice to be taughl both, [t consequently usually 
 happen-, es] ecially in I onion and oilier large towns, that work- 
 men understand onlj of the business, and are actually 
 
 unable to do anything in il ther. In small jobbing offices 
 
 this is objectionable, as a compositor is expected to be able to do 
 a plain job at press, pull a proof, &c., even although he is unac- 
 quainted with the more intricate departments of the art of 
 press work. Pre -men have distinct trade societies of their own; 
 that in London being called "The London Union of Pressmen." 
 They have also several establishments termed "Gifts." These 
 
 Gifts are formed among a limited number of pressmen, for the 
 purpo e of Introducing one another to a job, in preference to 
 members of other gifts or pressmen generally, Each member of 
 
 a (lift urn I be a Union man: and his subscription to the Gift 
 includes the demand of the L'nion, which is handed over to tho 
 
 Secretary of the Union by the Secretary of the Gift. The London 
 Union of Pressmen has communication with the various pro- 
 
 i 1 1 societies ol pressmen, and acknowledge I ramps from the 
 
 country, on production of their trade card. A move nt is on 
 
 foot for amalgamating the Vfach Managers' and Pressmen's 
 
 Societies with the London Societj of Compositors, for trade pur- 
 poses only, in be called the " London Amalgamated Letter-press 
 Printers Defence Fund Association." A very unsatisfactory 
 method of charging for their work is adopted by pressmen. They 
 have no settled seal.- ; but get what they can, according to the 
 liberality or closeness of the establishment at which they are 
 employed. Scarcely two houses in London pay the same prices; 
 i lequently there are freipienl disputes at the end of the week. 
 
 A plan, however, is adopted by s managers, of drawing up a 
 
 list of prices to be paid for ordinary work, and shown to the 
 pressman when engaged : this sales a deal of time and argument 
 at the end. Of the week, when the pressmen presents ids bill. 
 
 Some work, however, is of so intricate a nature, that it is ad- 
 visable to be done by time-work. The rapid introduction of 
 machinery of late years has caused a great diminution in the 
 number of pressmen; but as a rule, good pressmen can always 
 obtain plenty of work, and many of them find il advantageous 
 io adopt Hi- machine as a profession, on attaining the close of 
 their apprenticeship. 
 
 Press Stands Still. — When (he press remains unused from 
 any cause, such as want of work, absence of pressmen, &c, it is 
 
 I aid In stand still. 
 
 Presswork. — This term includes the various operations con- 
 nected with the actual impression of the sheet, and includes 
 making-ready i he forme as well as pulling, together with various 
 minutiae which it would be impossible to detail. The following 
 remarks, adapted from Savage's work, which is now becoming 
 exceedingly rare, cannot be improved upon, and we commend 
 the n to the aspiring printer. Presswork is the art of producing 
 perfect impressions from the surface of type or engravings in 
 rebel; that is, the subject transferred to paper should be an 
 impression fi-om the surface, and the surface only, of the types 
 or engraved lines, of such a tone as to produce all the effect 
 of winch the subject is capable, without either superfluity or 
 deficiency of colour. The press ought to be in the best condition, 
 otherwise it will hi! impossible to get an equal impression without 
 much trouble and loss of time. The joints of the tytnpan should 
 not have any play, or the correctness of the register will be 
 affected, and slurs and doubles be caused. The face of the platen 
 one ht to be a true plane, and parallel to the press stone or table. 
 The advantage of having a good press is unavailing for the pro- 
 duction of fine work it the types are much worn; for it is im- 
 possible to produce a sharp, clear impression when the type is 
 worn and the line lines rounded by much use. In consequence 
 ol this roundness of the letter it is necessary to use a thick 
 blanket in the tyinpan to bring up the type: thus producing a 
 gross irregular impression of more than the surface. A pressman 
 should, as a matter of course, be well acquainted with the entire 
 routine of presswork; in addition to which, to form his judg- 
 ment, he should examine the most splendid productions of the 
 press, and study them as patterns of workmanship. In making- 
 ready n must be evident that, when a clear, sharp impression is 
 wanted, the pressure should be on the surface only. Of course 
 the tympan ought not be very soft, neither should a woollen 
 blanket be used; the most perfect impression will be obtained 
 when fine thick paper alone is used : and even of this article but 
 few thicknesses should be employed. After an impression is 
 printed, the pressman examines if it is uniform throughout; if it 
 be — which is very rarely the case — he goes on with the work ; if 
 not, ho proceeds to overlay, in order to produce regularity of 
 pressure and of colour over the whole forme. To produce press- 
 work of a highly superior character, great expense and much 
 time are required, and it is requisite to have a good press in
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 m 
 
 good condition ; to have new types or types whose faces are not 
 rounded by wear; to have good rollers in good condition; that the 
 ink should he strong, of a full black colour that will not fade nor 
 stain the paper, and ground so fine as to be impalpable; the paper 
 should be of the best quality, made of linen rags and not bleached 
 by acids or bleaching powders, which have a tendency to de- 
 compose the ink; the rolling should be well and carefuliy done; 
 the face of the type should be completely covered with ink, 
 without any superfluity, so as to produce a full colour; and tho 
 pull should be so regulated as to have a slow and great pressure, 
 and to pause at its maximum in order to fix the ink firmly upon 
 the paper. These particulars observed, with nothing but paper 
 on the tympan, perfect impression of the face alone of the type 
 will be obtained, and a splendid book will be produced in tho 
 best style of printing. Presswork includes making-ready the 
 forme, rolling, pulling, arranging the tympana and frisket, over- 
 laying, &c., all of which processes will be found described under 
 their respective headings. 
 
 Proof. — A proof is a single impression of type matter, pro- 
 duced for the purpose of being submitted to the reader or 
 author for examination and correction, so that all errors and 
 imperfections in the composition may be ascertained before the 
 work is sent to press. There are various kinds of proofs, viz. : 
 the first proof, which, as its name indicates, is the first im- 
 pression taken from the composed matter; the revise, which is 
 the second proof and is compared with the first proof in order 
 to see that all the corrections therein marked have been properly 
 made ; the re-revise, which is pulled for a similar reason ; the 
 press proof, which is the last proof but one, and is read with the 
 most minute care to detect every error and fault ; and, finally, 
 the press rexise, which is compared with the press proof, after 
 which the work goes to press. The foul proof is the first proof 
 with its imperfections marked on it"; the author's proof is that 
 which contains the author's corrections or alterations. A clean 
 proof is one taken from matter that is quite correct as far as 
 workmanship is concerned. 
 
 Proof Reading. — The art of correcting proofs (See Re adkh). 
 The following description of the modus operandi is adapted from 
 the " Encyclopaedia Britanniea : " — The Reader, having folded 
 the proof* in the necessary manner, first looks over the sig- 
 natures, next ascertains whether the sheet commences with the 
 right signature and folio, and then sees that the folios follow in 
 order. He now looks over the running heads, inspects the proof 
 to see that it has been imposed in the proper furniture, that the 
 chapters are numbered rightly, and that the directions given 
 have been correctly attended to, marking whatever he finds 
 wrong. Having carefully done this, he places the proof before 
 him, with the copy at his left hand, and proceeds to read the 
 proof over with the greatest care, referring occasionally to the 
 copy when necessary, correcting the capitals or Italics, or any 
 other peculiarities, noting continually whether every portion of 
 the composition has been executed in a workmanlike manner. 
 Having fully satisfied himself upon these and all technical points, 
 he calls his reading boy, who, taking the copy, reads in a clear 
 voice, but with great rapidity, and often without the least atten- 
 tion to sound, sense, pauses, or cadence, the precise words of the 
 most crabbed or intricate copy, inserting without pause or 
 embarrassment every interlineation, note, or side-note. The 
 gabble of these boys'in the reading room, where there are three 
 or four reading, is most amusing, a stranger hearing the utmost 
 confusion of tongues, unconnected sentences, and most mono- 
 tonous tones. The Readers, plodding at their several tasks with 
 the most iron composure, are not in the least disturbed by the 
 Babel around them, but follow carefully every word, marking 
 every errror, or pausing to assist in deciphering every unknown 
 or foreign word. This first reading is strictly confined to making 
 the proof an exact copy of the manuscript, and ascertaining the 
 accuracy of the composition : consequently, first readers are 
 generally intelligent and well educated compositors, whose 
 practical knowledge enables them to detect the most trivial 
 technical errors. Having thus a second time perused the proof, 
 and carefully marked upon the copy the commencement, sig- 
 nature, and folio of the succeeding sheet, he sends it by his 
 reading boy to the composing-room, to be corrected by the 
 
 workmen who have taken share in the composition. These 
 immediately divide the proof amongst them, and each corrects 
 that portion of it which contains tin- matter he has com). 
 When every compositor has corrected his matter, that one whose 
 matter is last on the sheet locks it up, and another pr 
 pulled, which, willi the original proof, is taken to tie' same first 
 reader, who i the "in- with tie- other, and ascertains that 
 
 his marks have been carefully attended to, in default of which 
 he again sends it up tu In c i ed; but should he find his 
 
 revision satisfactory, he sends the second proof with the copy to 
 the second Reader, by whom it undergoes the same careful in- 
 spection : but this time, most technical inaccuracies having been 
 rectified, the reader observes whether the author's language be 
 good and intelligible ; it' not, he makes such queries on the 
 margin as his experience may suggest : lie- sends it up to the 
 compositor, when it again undergoes correction, and, a proof 
 being very carefully pulled, it is sent down to the same reader, 
 who revises his marks and transfers the queries. The proof is 
 then sent, generally with tho copy, to the author for his perusal, 
 who, having made such alterations as he thinks necessary, sends 
 it back to the printing-office for correction. With the proper 
 attention to these marks, the printer's responsibility as to cor- 
 rectness ceases, and the sheet is now ready for press. Such, at 
 least, is the process of proof reading which ought to be adopted; 
 but now. from the speed with which works are hurried through 
 the press, the proofs are frequently sent out with but one reading, 
 the carefid press reading being reserved until the author's revise 
 is returned. "Hansard'- Typographis " 1 1825), p. 748, gives some 
 useful remarks on this subject. It is always desirable that a 
 Reader should have been previously brought up to the business 
 as a compositor. By his practical acquaintance with the me- 
 chanical departments of the business he will be better able to 
 detect those manifold errata, which, when suffered to pass, give 
 an air of carelessness and inattention to his labours, that must 
 always offend the just taste and professional discernment of 
 all true lovers of correct and beautiful typography. Some of 
 the principal imperfections which are most easily observed by 
 the man of practical knowledge in the art of printing are the 
 following, viz. : imperfect and wrong founted letters; inverted 
 letters, particularly the lower-case s, the n u, and the t< n : 
 awkward and irregular spacing : uneven pages or columns ; a 
 false disposition of the reference mark; crookedness in words 
 and lines; bad making-up of matter: erroneous indenting, <ic. 
 These minutife, which are rather imperfections of workmanship 
 than literal errors, are apt to be overlooked and neglected by 
 those Readers who have no idea of the great liability there is, 
 even with the most careful compositor, to fall into them — nay, 
 the almost absolute impossibility of wholly avoiding them. A 
 Reader ought not to be of a captious or pedantic turn of mind, 
 the one will render his situation and employment extremely 
 unpleasant, and the other will tempt him to habit, destruotr. 
 that consistency of character in his profession which he ought 
 ever scrupulously to maintain. We are here alluding to a strict 
 uniformity in the use of capitals, in orthography, and punctua- 
 tion. Nothing, indeed, can he more provoking to an author than 
 to see — for instance — the words honour, favour, &c., spell with 
 the u in one page, and, perhaps, in the next modernised, and 
 spelt without that vowel. This is a discrepancy which cor- 
 rectors of the press should always carefully avoid. The like 
 observations will apply to the using of capital letters to noun 
 substantives. &c, in one place, and the omission of them in 
 another. Whatever may be the different opinions or practices of 
 authors in these respects, the system of spelling. \c. must not 
 he changed in the same work. The reading-boy should be able 
 to read with ease and distinctness any copy put into his hands, 
 and he should be instructed not to read too fast, but to pay as 
 much attention to what he is engaged on as if ho were rending 
 for his own amusement or instruction. The eye of the Header 
 should not follow, but rather go before, the voice of the reading- 
 boy; for, by a habit of this nature, a Reader will, as it were, 
 anticipate everj single word in his copy; and when any word or 
 sentence happens to have been omitted in the proof, his attention 
 will the more sensibly be arrested by it. when he hears it pro- 
 nounced by his reading-boy. Great care, however, ought to be 
 paid, least" the eye of the Reader should go too far before the
 
 58 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY-. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement- 
 
 words of his reading-boy. For as he will be apt to be attending 
 
 ■ • meaning of his author, he will read words in the proof 
 
 which actually '1" not appear there, and the \ acj of 
 
 tli.' reading-boy will but tend to confirm him in the mistake. In 
 
 . particular care must b ia1 none of 
 
 ■esh errors •>■•' 1M ,l "' 
 
 cours cting the original ; avoid this, the Header 
 
 - only to pay attention to the particular word which 
 
 ilways to read over with car.' the wh 
 
 ■' that word is to ' This is particularly 
 
 ssary in cases where it has been requisite for thi c positor 
 
 ter irregular or slovenly spacing; for in raising the line in 
 the metal for thai purposi , there i er of Borne 
 
 ! out, or son i | ai e I : put into :i vt 
 
 ie. In offices v, hi i i Ri adet thi in an ployed it 
 
 is always adi isable thai a proi nld be read over ! 
 
 two oi the Readers. The eye in going over the Bame track 
 is lis led into the Bame mistake or ovi csight. The 
 
 interest excited by the first or second reading I 
 degree of listli I i will steal upon the mind, extremely 
 
 detrimental to i in 1 proof. It ays to be 
 
 remembered thai the pari of the copy which contains the con- 
 ing matter of the ensuing sheet must either be retained, or 
 ally transcribed, or read off, a proof of that matter having 
 be pulled for thai purpose. Authors arc very apt to i 
 ations, and to correct and amend the style or arguments ot 
 
 their works whi n they first them in print. This is certainly 
 
 the worst time for this labour, as it is necessarily attended with 
 an expense which, in large works, will impi rceptibly swell to a 
 large sum ; when, however, this method of alteration is ado 
 by an author, the Header must always be careful to read the 
 
 whole sheet a\ re with very great attention before it 
 
 is Bnallypul to press. A proof-sheel having duly undergone 
 purgation, may be supposed as free from errata 
 as the nature ol thi thing will admit, and the word "Press" may 
 be written at the top of the first pageofit. This is an important 
 word to every Reader if he have suffered his attention to be 
 dra :, mi the nature of his proper business, and errors 
 
 should 1 iscovered when it is too late to have them corrected. 
 
 This word "Press" is as the signature of the death-warrant of 
 his reputation; and it he is desirous of attaining excellence in 
 ion will occasion an uneasiness oi mind which will 
 but ill qualify him for reading other proof-sheets with more care 
 an>l correctness, a Reader should, therefore, be a man of one 
 
 always u] the alert,all eye. all attention. Possessing 
 
 a becoming reliance upon bis own powers, he should never be 
 too confident of success. Imperfection clings to him on every 
 , errors and mi-takes assail him from every quarter. His 
 bu-: 'i may render him obnoxious to hlame, 
 
 but can hardly be said to bring him in any very large stock of 
 praise. If em i e him he is justly to be censured, for 
 is his duty. If his labours are wholly free from 
 mistake, which i-. alas, a very rare case, he has done no more 
 than he ought, and consequently can merit only a comparative 
 dee: .'Herniation, in tie had the good fortune to 
 
 be more successful in his labours after perfection than some of 
 his brethren in the ame employment. No Reader should suffer 
 his proofs to go to press, where there have been any mati rial 
 a a, without their receivi a last revi ion by himself. If he 
 is doubtful of himself and diffident of his own powers of atten- 
 tion, how much more ought he to be on hi pecting the 
 care and attention of others! I it a rule never to 
 trust a compositor in any matter of the slightest importance — 
 they are the most erring set of men in the universe. In the final 
 ation of n ■■ i iress, the eye must bi 
 
 the -ides and heads of the respective pages least any letter 
 
 should happen to have' fallen out, any crookedness have 
 occasioned in the locking-up of the forme, or any battered 
 letters have been inserted. These are the qualification 
 R< ader; thi- the business of one employed as a Corrector of the 
 Press. It is an arduous employment, an employment of no 
 small responsibility, and which ought never to ho entrusted to 
 the intemperate, tiie thoughtless, the illiterate or the inex- 
 perienced. "Chambers's Encyclopaedia," Vol. III.. ]>. 255, has 
 an article on Correction of the Press. In printing regular 
 
 volumes, one sleet is usually corrected at a time; but where 
 extensive alterations, omissions, or additions are likely to he 
 made by writer or editor, it is more convenient to take tho 
 proof, ,in long slips, before division into pages. The thankless 
 and monotonous business of a Corrector or Reader is more 
 difficult than the uninitiated would believe. It requires extensive 
 and varied knowledge, an accurate acquaintance with the art of 
 i\ po 'I'aphy, and, above all. a peculiar sharpness of eye, which, 
 without losing the sense and correction of the wholo, takes in at 
 tin- same time each separate word and letter. 
 
 Printing. — For the leading events in tho history of the art, 
 see Annai.s of Printing : for an account of tho different de- 
 scriptions of printing, sec Impression. 
 
 Printing Ink.— See Ink. 
 
 Proof Paper. — Any description of paper used for pulling 
 proofs on. When a proof is required on the paper which is to 
 
 be used for a work, the direction is given to "pull it on its own 
 paper." A certain quantity of proof paper should ho kept 
 wetted down, so that it may always he ready for use. The b( st 
 pa] ei for pulling proofs on is a thin hut hard paper; it should 
 be stout enough to hear writing on, so that tho proofreader's 
 and author's corrections may he made on it. 
 
 Proof Press. — A press set apart for pulling proofs. An old 
 pre: is generally used for this purpose; one that has seen good 
 service in it- day, but nol thoroughly worn out. In many offices 
 an old Stanhope (now out of date) answers the purpose ad- 
 mirably. Slip proofs are pulled on a galley press (y. v.). 
 
 Pull. — The act of printing an impression of the press. Press- 
 men technically term the amount of force on the impression 
 "the pull," i. e., if a forme has too light an impression, he puts 
 "more pull" on; if too heavy an impression, he takes some of 
 the "pull" off. 
 
 Pull a Proof.— To print an impression intended as a proof. 
 On newspapers the compositors pull their own proofs in slips 
 on galleys, taking it by turns to do so. It is usual for the com- 
 panionship to have a piece of wood — sometimes a piece of 
 furniture — with the word "pull" printed on a piece of paper 
 and stuck on. This is passed on from frame to frame as often 
 as a proof is pulled, and is called the " Pull-stick; it denotes 
 thai the party holding it is to pull the next proof. In large 
 book-houses a pressman is employed on the 'stab to pull all 
 proofs. — See Proof. 
 
 Punctuation. — XCe condense from Murray's Grammar the 
 following rules connected with this subject, as they will he 
 found more concise than any other. Those who wish to pursue 
 the subject would do well* to possess themselves of Beadnell's 
 "Guide to Typography," or Wilson's " Treatise on Punctuation," 
 which are the fullest and most comprehensive handbooks on 
 punctuation which has yet appeared. 
 
 Punctuation is the art of dividing a written composition into sen- 
 tem i - by points or stops, for the purpose of marking the different 
 which the sense and an accurate pronunciation require. 
 
 The ci innia represents flu' shortest pause; the semicolon a pause 
 double that of the comma; the colon double that of the semicolon; 
 and the period double that of the colon. 
 
 The Comma. — The comma usually separates those parts of a sen- 
 i em which, though very closely connected in sense and construction, 
 require a pause between them. 
 
 Rule 1st.— With respect to a simple sentence, the several words of 
 which it consists have so near a relation to each other that in general 
 □o points are requisite, except a full stop at the end of it, as, "The 
 fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom." 
 
 Ruli 2nd. — When the connection of the different parts of a simple 
 
 sentence is interrupted by an imperfect phrase, a comma is usually 
 
 introduced before the beginning and at the end of the phrase, as, "I 
 
 nber, with gratitude, his goodness to me." "His work is, in 
 
 man; respects, very imperfect." 
 
 Rule 3rd. — When two or more nouns occur in the same construc- 
 tion, they are parted by the comma, as, "Reason, virtue, answer one 
 From this rule there is mostly an exception, with regard 
 
 to two nouns closel] c icted by a conjunction, as, "Virtue and 
 
 vice form a strong contrast to each other."
 
 The Printers' Register 
 Supplement. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 59 
 
 Rule 4th. — Two or more adjectives belonging to the same sub- 
 stantive are likewise separated by a comma, as, " Plain, honest truth, 
 wants no artilicial covering." But two adjectives, immediately con- 
 nected by a conjunction, are not separated by a comma, as, "True 
 worth is modest and retired." 
 
 Rule 5th. — Two or more verbs having the same nominative case, 
 and immediately following one another, are also separated bj 
 commas, as, " Virtue supports in adversity, moderates in prosperity." 
 Two verbs immediately connected by a conjunction, are an excep- 
 tion to the above rule, as," The study of natural history expands and 
 elevates the mind." Two or more participles are subject to a similar 
 rule and exception, as, "A man, fearing, serving, and loving his 
 Creator." 
 
 Rule 6th. — Two or more adverbs immediately succeeding one 
 another must be separated by commas, as, " We are fearfully, won- 
 derfully framed." But when two adverb? are joined by a conjunction, 
 they are not parted by a comma, as, " Some men sin deliberately and 
 presumptuously." 
 
 Rule ~th. — When participles are followed by something that depends 
 on them, they are generally separated from the rest of the sentence 
 by a comma, as, "The king approving of the plan, put it in exe- 
 cution." 
 
 Rule 8th. — When a conjunction is divided by a phrase or sentence 
 from the verb to which it belongs, such intervening phrase has 
 usually a comma at each extremity, as, " They set out early, and 
 before the close of the day, arrived at the destined place." 
 
 Rule 9th. — Expressions in a direct address are separated from the 
 rest of the sentence, as, " My son, give me thy heart." 
 
 Rule 10th. — The case absolute, and the infinitive mood absolute, are 
 separated by commas from the body of the sentence, as, " His father 
 dying, he succeeded to the estate." 
 
 Rule 11th. — Nouns in apposition, that is, nouns added to other 
 nouns in the same case by way of explication or illustration when 
 accompanied with adjuncts, are set of by commas, as, "Paul, the 
 Apostle of the Gentiles, was eminent for his zeal and knowledge." 
 But if such nouns are single, or only form a proper name, they are 
 not divided, as, " Paul the Apostle." 
 
 Rule 12th. — Simple members of sentences connected by compara- 
 tives, are for the most distinguished by a comma, as, •' As the hart 
 panteth after the water brooks, so doth my soul pant after thee." 
 If the members in comparative sentences are short, the comma is in 
 general better omitted, as, " How much better is it to get wisdom 
 than gold." 
 
 Rule 13th. — When words are placed in opposition to each other, or 
 with some marked variety, they require to be distinguished by a 
 comma, as, " Though deep, yet clear ; though gentle, yet not dull." 
 Sometimes when the word with which the last preposition agrees is 
 single, it is better to omit the comma before it, as, " Many states were 
 in alliance with, and under the protection of, Rome." The same rule 
 and restriction must be applied when two or more nouns refer to the 
 same proposition, as, " He was composed both under the threatening 
 and at the approach of a cruel and lingering death." 
 
 Rule lith. — A remarkable expression, or a short observation some- 
 what in the manner of a quotation, may be properly marked with a 
 comma, as, " It hurts a man's pride to say I do not know." 
 
 Rule 15th. — Relative pronouns are connective words, and generally 
 admit a comma before them, as, " He preaches sublimely, who lives a 
 sober, righteous, and pious life." But when two members, or phrases, 
 are closely connected by a relative, restraining the general notion of 
 the antecedent to a particular sense, the comma should be omitted, 
 as, "Selfdenial is the sacrifice which virtue must make." The fifteenth 
 rule applies equally to cases in which the relative is not expressed 
 but understood, as, " It was from piety, warm and unaffected, that 
 his morals derived strength." 
 
 Rule 16th. — A simple member of a sentence contained within 
 another, or following another, must be distinguished by the comma, 
 as, "To improve time whilst we have health, will smooth the bed 
 of sickness." If, however, the members succeeding each are very 
 closely connected, the comma is unnecessay, as, •• Revelation tells us 
 how we may attain happiness." When a verb in the infinitive mood 
 follows its governing verb with several words between them, those 
 words should generally have a comma at the end of them, as, " It ill 
 becomes good and wise men to oppose and degrade one another." 
 Several verbs in the infinitive mood having a common dependence 
 and succeeding one another, are also divided by commas, as, "To 
 relieve the indigent, to comfort the afflicted, to protect the innocent, 
 to reward the deserving, is a humane and noble employment." 
 
 Rule nth. — When the verb, to be, is followed by a verb in the 
 infinitive mood, which, by transposition might be made the nominative 
 ca-e to it, the former is generally separated from the latter verb by 
 a comma, as, " The most obvious remedy is, to withdraw from all 
 associations with bad men." 
 
 Rule WA— When adjuncts or circumstances are of importance, and 
 often when the natural order of them is inverted, the] may be set 
 off by commas, as, " Virtue must be formed and supported not by 
 [I by daily and repeated exertions." 
 
 Rule 19th. — When a verb is und mma may properly be 
 
 introduced. This is a general rule, which, besides comprising some 
 of the preceding rules, will apply to many cases not determined by 
 any of them, as, " From law arises security; from securitv, curiositv; 
 from security, knowledge." 
 
 Rule 20th. — The words, nay, so, hence, again, first, secondly, for- 
 merly, now, li-i I , above all, on the contrary, in the next 
 place, in short, and all other words and phrases of the same kind, 
 must generally be separated from the context by a comma, as, 
 " K. member thy best and first friend ; formerly, the supporter of thy 
 infancy and the guide of thy childhood; now the guardian of thy 
 youth, and the hope of th; ears." 
 
 The .Semicolon is used for dividing a compound sentence into two 
 or more parts, not so closely connected as those which are separated 
 by a comma, nor yet so littlo dependent on each other as those which 
 are distinguished by a colon. 
 
 The Colon is used to divide a sentence into two or more parts, 
 less connected than those which are I by a semicolon ; but 
 
 not so independent as separate distinct sentences. 
 
 The Period. — When tho sentence is complete and independent, 
 and not connected in construction with the following sentence, it is 
 marked with a period. 
 
 The Dash. — Though often used improperly by hasty and incoherent 
 writers, may be introduced with propriety, where the sentence 
 breaks off abruptly, where a significant pause is required, or where 
 there is an unexpected turn in the sentiment, as, "If thou art he, so 
 much respected once — but, oh ! how fallen ! how degraded ! " 
 
 The Interrogation. — A note of interrogation is used at the end of 
 an interrogative sentence, that is, when a question is asked, as, 
 " Who will accompany me?" 
 
 The Exclamation. — The note of exclamation is applied to expres- 
 sions of sudden emotion, suprise, joy, grief, io.. and also to invoca- 
 tions or addresses, as, " My friend ! this conduct amazes me!" 
 
 The Parenthesis. — A parenthesis is a clause containing some 
 necessary information or useful remark introduced into the body of 
 a sentence; obliquely, and which may be omitted without injuring 
 the construction, as, "Know then this truth (enough for man to 
 know); virtue alone is happiness below." 
 
 Q. 
 
 Quads. — An abbreviation of quadrats. 
 
 Quadrats. — Pieces of type metal, of the depth of the body 
 of the respective sizes to which they are cast, but lower than 
 types, so as to leave a blank space on the paper, when printed 
 while they are placed. An en quadrat is half as thick as its 
 depth; an cm quadrat is equal in thickness and depth, and 
 being square on its surface, is the true quadrat (from guadrattu, 
 squared); B two em quadrat is twice the thickness of its depth; 
 
 e em three linns, a four em four times, as their names 
 specify. Pour ems are the largest quadrats that are cast. They 
 are usfd In till out short lines to form white lines, and tojus 
 letters, figures, iVc, in any part of the line or page, pour-em 
 quadrat.- are rarely cast larger than Pica. English and Great 
 Primer do not exceed three ems, nor does Double Pica exceed 
 two ems. In casting em and en quadrats the ui tiess 
 
 is necessary; they also require particular care in dressing, as 
 the most trilling variation will instantly be discovered when 
 they are ranged in figure work; and unless true in their justifi- 
 o, the arrangement will be so irregular, that all the pains 
 and ingenuity of a compositor cannol rectify it. The first line 
 of a paragraph is usually indented an em quadrat, but some 
 printers prefer using an em and on. two, or oven three ems for 
 wide measures, An em quadrat is the proper space after a full 
 point when it terminates a sentence in a paragraph. En quadrats 
 
 norally used after a semicolon, colon, \i\. and sometimes 
 after overhanging letters. Circular or curved quadrats are made
 
 (50 
 
 DKTIOXAKY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement, 
 
 of various sizes so as to form circles from one to twenty-four 
 inches in diameter; each pi.ro is exactly one eighth of a full 
 circle, mi'l when combined with similar pieces, will form 
 quarter, half, three-quarter, and full circles. By reversing 
 the combination of some of the pieces, serpentine and eccen- 
 tric curves m&j be made of any length or depth. These 
 curvilinear quadrats are of two kind- inner quadrats with 
 convex surface, ami outer quadrats with concave surface. The 
 curved line is produced by placing the convex ami concave 
 surfaces parallel to each other, so thai when locked up firmly 
 
 they hold the type inserted between them. The other sides of 
 the quadrats are flat and right-angled, to allow a close intro- 
 duction of type, and an easy justification with ordinary type. 
 Select two outer quadrats (each marked with the same number), 
 
 join the smaller ends and justify the extremities carefully with 
 ordinary quadrat-, set the line of type in the hollow of the 
 Curve, but without justification, then insert two inner quadrats 
 
 (of the same number) of smaller size than the outer quadrats — 
 the size of the inner quadrats will depend upon the size of the 
 type. A line, a canon for instance, will require smaller inner 
 quadrats than will he needed for a line of Pica, and vice vend. 
 As the one increases the other diminishes. An ordinary clock 
 dial will afford a good illustration. The space between the 
 numeral X and I, is one fourth of a circle. The curved line 
 descrihed around the foot of these numerals, is much less than 
 the curve at tie- top; if the size of the numerals from X to I is 
 decreased, the inner curve will be greater ; if it is increased, it 
 will he less. This will explain why the inner quadrat should 
 be of less size than the outer, and why it, should diminish as the 
 size of the type increases.' The curve of the inner quadrat should 
 be perfectly parallel with the curve of outer quadrat. When 
 they are parallel they hind the type between firmly in every 
 part. Then justify the line of type. As the sizes of type vary 
 with different foundries, it will often be found that the inner 
 quadrat of the nearest suitable size will not meet the type in 
 every part. This difficulty may be obviated by introducing 
 slips of the same length as the line of type. This increases the 
 distance between the quadrats until the curved surfaces are 
 perfectly parallel with each other. The line of type cannot be 
 justified, unless they are parallel. When the inner and outer 
 quadrats are thus adapted to each other, they not only bind the 
 type firmly, but will also present a perfect surfaco on the 
 other side. Unless they are parallel on the inner sides, and flat 
 and square on the outer sides, the justification is not good; and 
 the remedy must be found in changing the size of the inner 
 circle, or in increasing the distance between the curved lines by 
 the use of large type, or by paper or card-board. When thus 
 composed the type will be perfectly tight and Secure, and the 
 curved white line strictly accurate. As the quadrats are perfect 
 segments of a large circle, they cannot be increased or diminished 
 without destroying the truth of the curve. If the thin ends are 
 pierced out with common quadrats, good justification will ho 
 rendered impossible. If they are shortened by cutting of them, 
 they are ruined bits of lead; or short pieces of card between 
 the curved surfaces are also wrong; they destroy that exact 
 parallelism which is necessary for the security of the type. Very 
 accurate justification of the outer extremities of the quadrats is 
 also indispensable. If the curved surfaces are kept parallel, and 
 the flat surfaces kept square, no difficulty will be found in using 
 them ; anil they will prove a valuable aid in ornamental printing. 
 
 Quarters. — Quartos, octavos, sixteens, and thirty-twos 
 formes, are imposed in quarters. They are called quarters, not 
 from their equal divisions, but because they are imposed and 
 locked up apart. 
 
 Quarto. — A sheet of paper folded in four leaves, or eight 
 pages, is styled a quarto. 
 
 Quire. — A quire of paper, for all usual purposes, consists of 
 twenty-four sheets; but for newspapers, a quire consists of 
 twenty-five sheets, and a ream of twenty quires contains five 
 hundred sheets. 
 
 Quoin a Forme.— The fitting of the quoins in a forme so 
 that when it, is locked-Up they shall, in the most efficacious 
 manner, wedge up and secure the types. — See Imposing. 
 
 Quoin-Drawer. — A drawer in the frame of the imposing- 
 stone in which quoins are kept. It is generally the right hand 
 top drawer when you stand at the front of the stone. 
 
 Quoin-Drawer Ovorsoor. — A compositor who takes 
 charge of the store-closet, and makes up the furnitures for the 
 first sheets of a work. 
 
 Quoins.— Short pieces of beech wood made of the same 
 height as furniture, and tapering in their width to wedge the 
 pages up with in the chase. They are made of a variety of 
 » Laths, from about two inches to less than a quarter of an inch, 
 for the convenience of having every gradation in quoining a 
 lor 
 
 Quotation. — (" "). Two inverted commas, generally placed 
 at the beginning of a phrase or a passage which is quoted or 
 transcribed from the speaker or author in his own words; and 
 two apostrophes in then-direct position are placed at tho conclu- 
 sion, as, " The proper study of mankind, is man." 
 
 R. 
 
 Racks.— >SVe Board-Rack and Case-Rack. 
 
 Ranks. — From the frames in a composing-room being placed 
 in a row, the compositors are said to be in the ranks; thus, if a 
 compositor has been selected for a reader or overseer, and he 
 afterwards works at the case as a compositor, it is said he is 
 come to the ranks again. 
 
 Rat.— Savage defines this opprobrious epithet, thus : — " A 
 compositor or pressman who executes work at less than the 
 regular prices, or for less than the generality of the trade think 
 it deserves, or for less than the Chapel decides it ought to be 
 paid, or for less than others are paid for it, becomes what is 
 termed a rat. The most miserable situation, perhaps, that a 
 workmen can be placed in. He is hooted at and despised by 
 the rest of the workman in every house where he may obtain 
 employment ; and this feeling towards him does not subside, for 
 the opprobrious epithet accompanies him for life." Unfair 
 workman are also styled " Gentlemen of the Long-tail Order;" 
 anil dead rats, kittens, &c, are sometimes laid about their frames 
 to annoy them. 
 
 Rat-house. — A printing-office where unfair workmen are 
 employed. 
 
 Reader. — See Proof Reader. 
 
 References. — There are various references used for notes, 
 according to the fancy of the author, or the master printer, 
 where they are not numerous in a page. The common references 
 generally used in this order: — *, t, }, §, ||, % and where there 
 are more than six notes in a page, two of each reference are put 
 to a note ; hut this is looked ii]. on as having an unsightly appear- 
 ance. Italic lower-case letters are sometimes used, enclosed 
 between parentheses (a), and sometimes figures (1). The letters, 
 when they are used, are often continued through the alphabet, 
 and then commence again with («). The most usual references, 
 and which are esteemed the neatest, are superiors, both letters 
 and figures. Where the notes are at the foot of the page, letters 
 are most frequently used, sometimes going through the alphabet, 
 and sometimes commencing with a in each page in which notes 
 occur. When the notes are placed at the end of the volume, 
 figures ' are nearly always adopted in regular succession. 
 
 Register. — This term implies such an arrangement of the 
 marginal furniture in both forms of a sheet as that, when printed 
 ofi", the pages shall fall precisely at the back of each other, so 
 thai the sides and heads of the pages of one forme shall not 
 project beyond those of the other. In fine work the principle 
 is carried still further, and the whites in the pages are so arranged 
 that line shall fall upon line when the reiteration is worked. 
 
 Reglet. — A sort of furniture of an equal substance all its 
 length. It is quailrat high of several thicknesses, viz., Pearl, 
 Nonpareil, Brevier, Long Primer, Pica, Great Primer, Double 
 Pica, Two-line English, and Two-line Great Primer. Reglet and 
 furniture as well as side-sticks,* are made in lengths of three 
 
 » Side and footstlcks are also made to certain sizes to suit various formes.
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement, June 6, 1871. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 61 
 
 feet each, and are always styled lengths of re-let, lengths of 
 furniture, &c. Reglet is used principally for making margin in 
 imposing a forme ; also for spacing out the lines of a broadside 
 or other large page; it also is often used to branch out title , 
 jobs, and other matter, in order to economise the u>>- of quadrats, 
 in the absence of metal clumps, it is preferable to quadrats for 
 this purpose, as it keeps the lines more even, especially if a 
 wrong fount space or quad happens to get in. 
 
 Revise. — The impression of each forme, printed on proof 
 paper the first thing after it is laid on, and taken by the press- 
 man to the reader or overseer for him to examine that all the 
 corrections in the press-proof are made, prei iouslj in the forme 
 being worked off The compositor frequently takes a revise 
 for waste paper; but this should never be done with that of the 
 first forme; the pressman should put it into his heap so that it 
 can be readily found. It is thus kept damp, and the revise of 
 the second forme ought always to lie pulled on it. The reader 
 in revising the second forme then sees the sheet perfect, which 
 is necessary to enable him to ascertain that the matter follows, 
 and that the furniture is right. — See Proofs. 
 
 Rider. — When an author adds a paragraph or sentence to his 
 proof or manuscript, it is called Rider A, Eider B, &c. 
 
 Rides. — Leads are said to ride when one end projects over 
 another. This will occasionally take place when two or more 
 leads are used in the same measure. It ought to be guarded 
 against, as when it happens it prevents the page lifting; or if, by 
 tightenmg the quoins, the forme is made to rise, it causes the 
 lines to be crooked. 
 
 Rimmed Letters. — A series of fancy types, of Roman and 
 Old English characters, designed originally in America. Their 
 peculiarity consists in their having a thin line or rim around the 
 ordinary face. They present a very light and graceful ap- 
 pearance, and are at the same time exceedingly distinct. The 
 following is a specimen : — 
 
 3?r intini 
 
 r i 
 
 Ilaf evtali 
 
 Rinse the Forme.- -Laying-up the forme and washing the 
 ley and ink away to make the letter clean. This should always 
 be done by the pressman as soon as a forme is off, by taking it 
 to the ley trough and brushing the ink from off the face of the 
 letter, the furniture, and chase, with the ley brush and ley. He 
 should lift it out of the trough and place it standing on its 
 edge in the sink or trough and resting against some support, 
 anil rinse it well with water to wash away the ley and tin' ink it 
 has dissolved; the face of the letter, the furniture, and the chase 
 are thus made clean ready for the compositor to lay up, pre- 
 paratory to distributing. — See Laying-up. 
 
 Rinsing Trough. — The trough in which formes are rinsed in 
 is a combination of two troughs. The smallest and deepest 
 contains the water, and in some offices has an iron ladle chained 
 to the near upper corner to prevent its being displaced ; the 
 shallow part being used to lay up the forme in. They arc both 
 lined -with lead, and the shallow one has a loose deal bottom to 
 preserve the lead, and in general is bound with iron, particularly 
 at the front, to prevent the edge of a chase when being lilted 
 upon the letter-board from cutting the lead. They both have an 
 opening with a short pipe at the bottom to convey away the 
 water, that in the water trough having a brass plug in it for 
 the convenience of letting the water off to clean it out. They 
 stand on a frame which is usually placed on a platform raised at 
 the edge a few inches lined with lead styled the sink, with a 
 loose bottom of boards which leads into a pipe for drainage. 
 
 Roller. — A hollow wooden cylinder covered with composition 
 which, set in an iron frame, revolves upon a rod and is used 
 for inking type. The test of a good roller is: It should be 
 moderateiy soft to the touch, yet perfectly elastic and strung in 
 texture. It should shrink but little, and yel Last b considerable 
 time. To know when a roller that has been recently made or 
 washed is in order, grasp it gently with the hand, or pass the 
 ends of the fingers along its surface lengthwise. It it is in a 
 raw, sticky condition, it is yet "green," and must not be used. 
 If it appears only moderately adhesive and pliant, but uniformly 
 
 so, escaping from the fingers without showing a mark from them, 
 and with a smooth rebound, the rollei if is iii'.n.and 
 
 is best if mounted and charged with ink at once. A f 
 or newspaper forme, or any large forme with old type, wiS require 
 a soft roller with much suction. Book- work, w i tine 
 
 job-work will require a harder roller, with a very smooth, els 
 and clinging gurlace. Coloured inks are best printed with a still 
 harder roller and with much less suction. All rollers should be 
 perfectly clean and free from all cracks and boles. The suitable- 
 ness nt these rollers cannol be explained by words; such a 
 knowledge will be best acquired by observation and ex p. rii 
 It may, however, be necessary to state that one roller will not 
 do for all s. nt.- of pressw.irk ; the quality of the work, the SIM 
 
 andconditi fthe type, and the speed of the press musl guide 
 
 the pressman in his choice. During (he past few years various 
 substitutes for the ordinary composition have been introduced. 
 The most MireessI ul of these is that invent id by Mi sen v . M ulton 
 and Co.. of Bradford-on-Avon. It is called the "Moss" Ru 
 
 Inking Roller, and is composed of a new and "OU3 
 
 material of the consistency of imi-<, and hermetically sealed in 
 a Smooth skin of specially-prepared india rubber. The advan- 
 tages Claimed for these rollers, as compared with the ordinary 
 
 >• position rollers, are: Their great durability, on account of 
 
 the unci geable nature of the material; they are wholly un- 
 
 afleeted b\ any temperature; they are not dams ie on 
 
 brass rule; they are permanently BOfl and elastic; and they can 
 
 be used immediately after being washed. — To make composil ion 
 rollers, put the glue in a bucket or pan and cover ii with water; 
 let it stand until more than half penetrated with the water, 
 taking care that it shall not soak too long, and then four it off 
 and let it remain until it becomes soft, when it will be ready for 
 the melting kettle. This is 8 double vessel like a glue kettle. 
 Put the soaked glue into the inner vessel, and as much water in 
 the outer boiler as it will contain when the inner \ essi I is placed 
 in it. When the glue is all melted (if too thick add a little 
 water), the molasses may be slowly poured into it and well 
 mixed with the glue by frequent stirring. When properly pre- 
 pared, the composition does not require boiling more than an 
 hour. Too much boiling candies the molasses, and the roller 
 consequently will be found to lose its suction much sooner. In 
 proportioning the material much depends upon the wi ather and 
 temperature of the place in which the rollers are to be used. 
 Eight pounds of glue to one gallon of sugar-house molasses or 
 syrup is a very good proportion for summer, and tour | oui 
 glue to one gallon of molasses for winter use. Foi hand-press 
 rollers more molasses should be used, as they are not subject to 
 SO much hard usage as cylinder-press rollers, and do not require 
 to be as strong, for the more molasses that can be used the better 
 the roller. Before casting a roller the mould should be perfectly 
 clean and well oiled with a swab, but not to excess, as too much 
 oil makes the face of the roller seamy and ragged. The end 
 pieces should then be oiled, and together with the cylinder 
 placed in the mould, the upper end piece being \ cry open to 
 allow the composition to pass down between the interior of the 
 mould and the cylinder. The cylinder must be well secured 
 from rising before the composition is poured in, by placing a 
 stick upon the end of it sufficiently long to reach above the end 
 of the mould, and be tied down with twine. The composition 
 should he poured very slowly and in such a manner as to cause 
 it only to run down one side of the cylinder, allowing the air to 
 ■ ie lively up the Other. If the mould be filled a: night the 
 roller may be draw n the next morning, but it should not be used 
 tin' at least twenty-four hours after, except in very cold weather. 
 To determine when a roller is in order tor working, press the 
 hand gently to it : if the fingers can be drawn lightly and 
 mi tbly over its surface, il may be said to be in order; but 
 
 should ii be so adhesive thai the fingers will nol glide smoothly 
 
 over its surface, it is not sufficiently dry and should la 
 
 to the air. Rollers should not be washed immediately after use. 
 
 but should be put away with the ink on them, as it protects the 
 
 surface from the action of the air. When washed and exposed 
 
 to the atmosphere tor any length of time they become dry and 
 skinny. They should he washed about half-an-hour before using 
 them. In cleaning a new roller, a little oil rubbed over it will 
 loosen the ink, and it should be scraped clean with the back of
 
 G2 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement, June 6, 1871. 
 
 i aned in this way for about one 
 
 , when ley may be L Ki « rollers are often spoiled by 
 
 bag them too soon with ley. Camphun ubstituted 
 
 ikbutowii mbustible nature it is nli.j.-i-ii.ni:il>l©,as 
 
 might arise from its u e, Mr. Hansard, an emi 
 
 : "Take glue made from the cuttings of 
 parchment or vellum, fine green molasses, pure as from the 
 ad a small quantity oi I be sub tanc i called Paris 
 White, and you will haw every ingredient requisite for good 
 compost ion. 1 ton as follows : Glue,2fts.j molasses, 
 
 6 fbs.j Paris White \ lb. Pui the glue in a little water for a few 
 1, : pour off the liquid, put the glue over the Ere, and 
 when it is dissolved add the molasses, ami let them bo well 
 incorporated together forat least an hour; then with a very fine 
 sieve mis the P ■ :, frequently stirring the composition. 
 In an or or less it will be tit to pour into the mould. 
 
 Various pa d com ions for rollers may now be had from 
 
 Roller Stock.— The wooden cylinder upon which the com- 
 position is fixed. 
 
 Rotary Printing Machines.— Machines in which the 
 forme of type is placed on the surface of a horizontal revolving 
 cylinder. : ion cylinders being situated around it. Of 
 
 this description are the Bullock .Machine, the Hoe Machine, and 
 the Marinoni Machine, already described, as well as the Walter 
 Press ($&■)■ The latest invention in this class of machine is that 
 
 of Mi i' Wilson, of Liverpool, who have just brought 
 
 out the " Victory " Machine. A description of this says: — 
 
 As America had the honour of introducing, or at least popularising 1 
 the r itarj | rinciple, France more recently bore off the palm of me- 
 chanical ingenuity. The Hoe machine prints only one side of the 
 
 paper al 01 ; the Marinoni pre-- prints both sides at one operation; 
 
 thus by the Marinoni process as many perfect papers are produced 
 per hour as there are half newspapers printed by the Hoe system, or, 
 in other word-, there is double speed in the newer method. Though 
 thebe-t yet invented, it must be confessed, however, that the Marinoni 
 press still Qomise as largely as journalists desire. What was 
 
 wanted was a me that would feed itself without 
 
 the intervention of manual labour, and deliver the printed newspaper 
 by the same inexpensive agency. For if one of the present machines 
 is, say, ;i six-cylinder press, it employs ?ix men to keep up a constant 
 supply of clean paper to be printed. In these days of penny jour- 
 nalism the great desideratum is rapid and cheap production. The 
 first condition to the realisation of this hope seems to be the avoidance 
 of the prevailing necessity of printing the newspaper in separate 
 sheets. What was wanted was a plan whereby the type, or rather the 
 stereot] pe plates, should be placed on revolving cylinders over which 
 should be passed an endless band or paper, much on the same principle 
 as in ealie i printing. The great difficulty, however, has been the 
 iverj of some satisfactory process of dividing the paper when 
 printed into the required lengths, so that each piece should form one 
 newspaper. Messrs. Duncan & Wilson, of Liverpool, have been 
 making patient experiments in the hope of contriving a pre-- to print 
 from a continuous band of paper, and after many failures they now 
 appear I i have hit upon a method that promises to revolutionise the 
 printii It combines two distinct processes, that of printing 
 
 and folding. A great roll of paper, even a mile in length, is placed 
 over the machine, and is gradually unwound as it passes over the 
 type; it is then divided by a revolving knife into separate pieces, 
 each being a complete newspaper, and these are finally carried into 
 a series of rollers, which fold them ready for delivery to the sub- 
 scribers. In other words, a t and oi paper in the same -tate as when 
 itleai i] r mill passes through the "Victory" press, and comes 
 
 out folded newspapers without a human hand having touched it. 
 
 Rounee. — The handle for running in and out the carraige of 
 a press. 
 
 Ruby.— The name of a type next in size larger than Pearl 
 and smaller than Nonpareil in body. It is the half of Small Pica. 
 Mr. Hansard, in bis "Typographia," gives the following account 
 of its origin and name:—" It was, Ul fact, originally a Nonpareil 
 
 with c riders and descenders cast on a smaller body, or 
 
 sometimes a I 'earl on a larger, to look open; but now, some 
 founders have a distinct specimen for this size. This name has 
 hut very I i adopted in the typefounders' specimens; 
 
 hut some year's ago it was found by the writer of this absolutely 
 
 necessary to give some distinguishing appellation to this size, as 
 the letter-founders had given him one nick Pearls of two bodies. 
 
 viz.. one fount half Small Pica another half Long Primer. The 
 
 mistake- arising from this circumstance, in a house much in the 
 
 habit of using small type, occasioned tl xpedienl of inventing 
 
 a new na ; and as the neighbouring sizes were called Pearl 
 
 and Diamond, it seemed not uty inapplicable to take the name 
 of Ruby." 
 
 Rules.— See Brass Rim i 
 
 Ruling. — The process of staining paper with lines to guide 
 the hand in \\ riting, or for classification, as in columns of monej . 
 weights, -Vc. "Feint Killing" consists of making horizontal 
 parallel lines in a pale bine; "feinl and common " includes the 
 feint ruling and the red, for head lines, money columns, &c. 
 
 Ruling Machine. — A machine for mechanically performing 
 the operation of ruling. The sheets to be ruled are fed into the 
 machine as in thi a cylinder press. They are received on 
 
 a long revolving web of linen, which carries them to the pens 
 which are fixed on a narrow board. When the paper reaches 
 them they are let down, and the paper moving underneath 
 
 receives the ink and the lines are formed, The pens are supplied 
 with ink from a wetted woollen or Bannel substance above them. 
 The ink used is something like writing ink. Formerly ruling 
 machines were made exclu ively of wood, but now they are 
 frequently composed of iron. 
 
 Runs on Sorts. — A phrase used when a job requires an 
 inordinate proportion of particular letters or 
 
 Running Title. — The title of the book or subject placed at 
 the top of the page. 
 
 Sand Bag. — A flat leather bag filled with sand, used by 
 engravers to form a pad to rest the block up in and to enable 
 them to turn the block easily. This facility of turning the block 
 round is most valuable, and the more the pad has been used the 
 more readily does it work. 
 
 Sanseriff. — Jobbing type without seriffs, as seen in the ac- 
 companying specimen : — 
 
 BOOKBINDER & STATIONER 
 
 Sanspareil. — A peculiar system of manufacturing large metal 
 jobbing types, invented by the late Mr. .1. II. Crutchfield, and 
 still carried on by his son and a few others. The superiority of 
 producing metal types by this process is evidenced by the 
 smooth and beautiful face it shows, and the length of time a 
 matrix will last, whereas sand-cast types require every type to 
 be finished after casting. 
 
 Saw. — An instrument used for cutting reglet, furniture, &c. 
 
 Saw Block. — A block of wood notched in certain directions 
 to guide the saw in cutting up and mitreing furniture, &c. 
 
 Scale. — The prices agreed upon to be paid by master printers 
 and accepted by the men. has been drawn up to a certain scale, 
 and in caating-up matter the compositors do so according to the 
 scale, which is published by the London Society of Compositors, 
 and may be obtained at their offices, Racquet-court, London, 
 price sixpence. 
 
 Scaleboard. — Thin strips of wood similar to reglet, but of 
 the thickness of leads — 4-tu-piea, (i-to-pica, 8-to-pien, &c. It is 
 ii- d in making register, and is preferable to leads, which are 
 apt to get battered or broken. 
 
 Scale of Typefounders' Measurement.— The following 
 is written by Mr. P. M. Shanks, of the Patent Type Founding 
 Company : — 
 
 It is much to be regretted, that in consequence of the want of 
 combined action on the part of the English printers no definite scale 
 for the sizes of tl i. pes exists. Founders agree (with one 
 
 exception) that the Pica shall lie one-sixth of an inch; that two 
 Noii] ,areils shall be equal to one Pica ; two Pearls to one Long Primer ; 
 two Diamonds to a Bourgeois; but beyond this there is no relation
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement, June 6, 1871. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 63 
 
 between one body and another, and each founder seems to make it a 
 matter of principle that the dimensions of Long Primer, Bourgeois, 
 &c, shall differ materially from the nominally similar bodies of every 
 other house. In France this state of things does not exist. Many years 
 ago, by common consent of the printers, through their Trade Council, 
 the Chatubordes Imprimeurs, a definite standard was adopted, ami 
 the founders are obliged to conform to the rules laid down, so that 
 from whatever source obtained, the type of a given body is of uniform 
 dimensions. The evils of the want of such a system was recognised 
 and remedied even as early as 1730. Fournier, in establishing his 
 foundry, determined to put an end to the confusion that then pre- 
 vailed among the French founders, as in our own. The plan lie 
 adopted is the basis of that which now universally prevails, lie took 
 two inches as his standard measure which he called his Prototype, 
 and divided these into twelve parts, which he called lines, and each 
 of these again into twelve parts, which he named Points, thus forming 
 one hundred and forty-four divisions. To apply this in practice, he 
 assigned to each body a definite number of Points. Thus the body 
 Cicero, corresponding to our Pica, was twelve points, and it was 
 rendered exactly of these dimensions by laying twelve Cicero types 
 on the two inch standard, and dressing them until they exactly fitted 
 the required space. Nonpareil, half a Cicero, was six points, so that 
 in dressing this body twenty-four had to be made to fill the Prototype. 
 Leads were made to a certain number of points, and thus any body 
 worked with another without justification. Fournier's standard is 
 still that used in the Imprimerie Imperials, but it was modified by 
 Didot, who adopted as his Prototype, or Typometre, as it has since 
 been called, a definite portion of the metre, and thus brought type- 
 founders under the French decimal system of measurement. An 
 attempt was made some years ago by Messrs. Bowers, of Sheffield, to 
 introduce in England a similar system ; the chief objection to its 
 introduction arose from its discrepancy between the new bodies and 
 those of the other founders. The Patent Type Founding Company, 
 in introducing their Patent Hard Metal in 1854, laid down a system 
 of measurement which appeal's to us deserving of the attention of 
 printers. Without deviating from the usual sizes of bodies more than 
 the other founders differ from each other, a' scheme of bodies has 
 been formed which possesses all the advantages of the French system. 
 The standard taken by the Company is the Pica Type, which is 
 divided into twenty points, and to each body is arranged a certain 
 number of these points, thus : — 
 
 BODY. PICAS. 
 
 POINTS. 
 
 BODY. PICAS. 
 
 POINTS. 
 
 Saui-N'onp. 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 Minion .. 
 
 12 
 
 Brilliant .. 
 
 
 
 t> 
 
 Brevier .. 
 
 i ; 
 
 Oein . . . . 
 
 
 
 6j 
 
 Bourgeois .. 
 
 14 
 
 Diamond .. 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 Long Primer o 
 
 ia 
 
 Pl.-Diamond 
 
 (1 
 
 75 
 
 Small I'ica .. 
 
 18 
 
 Pearl . . . . 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 Pica .. .. 1 
 
 
 
 Buoy .. .. 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 English .. 1 
 
 2 
 
 Konpareu .. 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 Primer.. .. 1 
 
 4 
 
 Emerald 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 Great Primer 1 
 
 8 
 
 BODY. 
 
 Pamgon 
 
 PICAS. POINTS' 
 
 1 
 
 Double Pica 1 
 
 2-line Pica . 2 
 
 _■ [ine tin: ii- h 2 
 
 Di.i. Primi i 2 
 
 Dlil. G. Primer a 
 8-line Pica 
 
 4-line Pica .. 4 
 
 1^ 
 16 
 
 4 
 8 
 16 
 
 
 
 i >n this system any body with Pica spaces and quadrats, or with leads 
 cast to the Pica body, will work with any other body in table work 
 without justification, and with most of them the relations are of a 
 very simple character. Pica quads may be used in any emergency 
 for the blanks and margins of any body without justification, using 
 leads only. To take an illustration . — 
 
 4 Picas equal 4 Small Picas and 8 points, which ma}' be made by 8 brass 
 space rules, or 4 ,)„ leads, or 2 J leads. 
 
 4 Picas equal 5 Long Primers without leads. 
 
 4 Picas equal (1 Breviers and 2 points, which may be either ^ brass space 
 rules or ,Y leads. 
 
 4 Picas equal 8 Nonpareils without leads. 
 
 4 Picas equal 10 Pearls without leads. 
 
 4 Picas equal 10 Diamonds and 8 Points, which may be either a | lead, or 
 2 5 leads, or 4 jj leads, or 10 'a brass space lines. 
 
 It may be shown that the same simple relation is true of any number 
 of lines with any other body. The following is the proportionate 
 scale for Leads, Brass Rules, &c. : — 
 
 10-tO-Pica . . Picas, 2 Points or 20th parts of a Pico. 
 
 B-to-Plca 
 . -,, pica 
 5-to-Pica 
 4-to-Pica 
 2-to-Pica 
 L-to-Pica 
 
 24 
 
 4 
 
 Schedule. — A blank table for the purpose of entering in- 
 ventories, &C, in. For a specimen of a small schedule, <Sce 
 Stationers' Hall (Registration at). 
 
 Scoopers. — Instruments used by engravers to clear away the 
 larger portions of the wood not drawn on. They are employed 
 in very rough w T ork. 
 
 Scratched Figures. — Figures used in arithmetical matt>-r 
 when tin- di\ ided and di\ iding figures require to be crossed over 
 
 in an operation; or in la:, work, &c., when a /■ of a 
 
 document is desired, to iv pr.- -out cancelled f. g an in tin oi iginal. 
 
 Script. — Aii' neat style of fancy tj i'ing 
 
 like ordinary Italian handwriting; it is used chiefly for cir- 
 culars. The following is a sj 
 
 e//it4 neat <S/fiecmun c/ QJ< 
 
 Secretary. — A stylo of fancy type. It is modifl 1 from 
 
 Script and Commercial. 
 
 Section ( § ). — A mark of reference. It stands fourth in order, 
 and immediately after the double dagger. Sometimes it is 
 to mark the division of a chapter into parts or sections, whence 
 
 ii> name. 
 
 Semicolon (;). — A symbol used in punctuation to indicate 
 thai the two affirmations between which it is placed are not 
 immediately connected by a conjunction, or that the latter < 
 not directly How from or depend upon the former affirmation, 
 although there is a more remote connection or dependence 
 between them. Specimens of its use will be found under the 
 head of Punctuation. 
 
 Semi-Nonpareil.— Half a Nonpareil, or the thickness of a 
 4-to-Pica lead. Music type and split fractions only are cast to 
 this body. 
 
 Sent to Coventry. —When a compositor or pressman acts 
 unfairly, or refuses to comply with the recognised rules of the 
 chapel, he is sent to Coventry, <'.<•., every member of the chapel 
 treats him with scorn, and will not speak to him unless matters 
 relating to business compel them. 
 
 SerilT.— The light strokes across the top ami bottom of letters. 
 It is sometimes spelt, Seriph, Seryph, and Ceriph. 
 
 Set Close. — When matter is required to lie got into a given 
 space smaller than usual, the compi isitor is told to set close. 
 
 Set-off. — Sheets which, by reason of the ink on them not 
 being dry, soil other sheets with which they come in 
 are said to "set-off." Tympan sheets which nave been used for 
 long or very black jobs, usually sot off, BO another Shi 
 placed over them called the "Set-off Sheet," which can be re- 
 newed when required. 
 
 Sets Clean. — A compositor who makes few errors in his 
 work is said to set clean; and when the reverse is the case, to 
 set dirty. — See Composing. 
 
 Setting. — See Composing. 
 
 Setting Rule.— A piece of rule, cut to the measure of the 
 page, with a projecting ear at the top right-hand comer. It is 
 used during the composition of a line, to facilitate the adjust- 
 ment of the types, and when the line is finished, it is lifted out 
 by means of tho projecting ear. and placed in front of the line 
 just set; another line is then proc led with. — &e Composing. 
 
 Setting Stick. — See Composing Stii e. 
 
 Setting Tapes. — To set the tapes on a cylinder printing 
 machine, pass the tape round and close to the cylinder. Lap it 
 over one of the tape pulleys, and then pass it around the small 
 guide pulley on the shafl above. To increase its tight] 
 throw up the guide pulley from the shaft, and set the binding 
 .en w more tightly. All these pulleys are moveable on their 
 . ami tlio distance between them may be altered at pleasure. 
 
 Let the tapes rest upon the outer margin of the sheet, and see 
 
 Unit the overlays on the tympan ch the tapes pass 
 
 of equal thickness; if not of equal thickness, the sheet will 
 wrinkle. 
 
 Setting the Fly.— The manner of setting the fly on a 
 printing machine is as follows: Run through . the 
 
 paper to hi' printed, anil let it run down the fly so that 
 barely held by the tly pulleys. Then set the cam that works the 
 By, SO that it- point just clears the small friction roller on the 
 shaft, and it will throw down the sheet correctly. Tighten the
 
 61 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOOltArilY. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement, June 6, 1871. 
 
 spring according to the • '. and set the spring 
 
 cranl i1 will prevent the fly from striking too hard on 
 
 tho table. 
 
 Setting up a Press. The art of erecting a press out of 
 ill,. ( onvenience 
 
 of being removed. I ions "ill be u 
 
 icially to provincial and colonial printers. The Columbian 
 press is pul up as follows : When you have the staple on the spol 
 where you intend it to stand, put the feet on their respi 
 places as marked, and raise it upon them; then pul Ufa 
 handle in with tl e b Iced; then put the principle lever 
 
 !. . piai e, and pul thi boll in which connects il to the staple ; 
 thru put the angular or crooked part, w iree round 
 
 - and one square hole, thri the mortice, which is 
 
 in the proji i ting part of the long side of the staple, and put in 
 tlii' bolt that attaches it to the staple. In the extremity ol the 
 edges of the heads of those two b d bolts you will 
 
 irve marks, and corresponding marks over the holes thi 
 which they pass; put the bolts in so as the said marks meel 
 together and correspond, a until you have all the re- 
 
 maining parts in tlieu n pective places. Put on the ribs, 
 and having mad" them perfectly straight, screw them tight to 
 the staple. This done, lifl the press-table into its place, and 
 attach it to the rounce with the girths; the press being now 
 read} for the plat. mi. put the four screws which have brads cm 
 
 side, intended to attach the platen to the piston, and screw 
 on the nut • to each. The press-table being properly 
 
 adjusted with a spirit level, fix a bearer at each comer and one 
 in the centre, and lift the platen on them. The platen being 
 raise the screws in the piston, and roll in the 
 platen as it is fixed on the bearers on the table, until it is exai 
 under the piston, when the screws, already in the piston, are 
 fixed with their beads from you, into their proper places in 
 the platen, and si cured by the tour small blocks of iron which 
 rj them. After putting the nece >ary number of tin or 
 iron plates under the piston, bring the bar-handle over till the 
 pi st.. n and platen come in contact, and hold it there till each nut 
 i- screwed tight with the hand. This done, give each nut one 
 turn or so with a screw-key. It being these plates of tin or 
 sheet-iron which increases the impression, care in ascertaining 
 the proper number required will obviate the necessity and save 
 the trouble of either adding to or decreasing the number after 
 the plates is screwed up and adjusted. In adjusting the platen, 
 make a gauge that will exactly come between and touch the 
 platen and the table, with the bar-handle at rest. With this 
 gauge, which may be made of two four-line quotations, and 
 instilled to the proper height with paper, card, or leads, try 
 actly parallel with the table, by rolling 
 it in and inserting the gauge under each corner of the platen. If 
 any part of it be thus found lower than the rest, it must be 
 raised, by turning a little the platen screw next the part to be 
 raised. Again try the gauge, and if no' ye1 exactly true, again 
 .screw the nut a little next the pan affected; half or quarter of 
 a turn will make a great difference. I!.\ thus gauging and 
 tightening the nuts, the platen may be adjusted to a mathemat teal 
 
 ■ y. It is necessary always to keep the proper side of the 
 
 r rod up, when you have occasion to take the bolt out 
 
 of the elbow of the bar, either to increase or diminish the power; 
 
 increasing the power is effected by turning the rod so as to 
 
 rten it. and decreasing it by turning it the contrary way. 
 By the nut on the iron screw, which connects the main and top 
 counterpoise levers, you are to regulate the ascent and descent 
 of the platen, SO as to clear the bead-bands of the tyn 
 
 which is d i\\ crewing the iron nut up as tar as is necessary. 
 
 The small holes which communicate with the iv-p. vine bolts 
 require a small portion of pure sweet oil occasionally, and the 
 a-.- ..i the purest Florence tla.-k oil is recommended as the 
 cheapest in the end, which has been experimentally proved. Von 
 may easily judge whether every thing is put in its proper place, 
 by the perfect easi with which the bar-handle moveswhen put 
 up. In your commencement of working, let your impri ssion be 
 rather light, and ini i re-mentioned i 
 
 until yon have obtained such an impression as is desired. The 
 pressmen should take all the cylindrical bolts out of their 
 
 pective places once a week, taking out one at a time, cleaning 
 and oiling it, and putting it into its place again. The manner of 
 setting up an Imperial press is somewhat different: First, put on 
 the legs to their corresponding marks on the staple. After you 
 
 ilai Bd the ribs to I heir marks, and before you have made 
 
 them fast, see that the table runs true between the cheeks of the 
 : then screw them fast. Jiang the platen by its screws to 
 
 listen j observing, by the marks, that the screws and cotters 
 
 are each in their proper holes. The attachment and adjustment 
 
 of the platen are the same as in the case of the Columbian press. 
 The bar-handle, the rounce, I he rib stay. &C, as they can only be 
 put in their respect i\e place-, n.-ed no directions. The small 
 round bar of iron sent with the press is called the oiling-bar. 
 When the press requires oiling, bring the bar-handle home to the 
 
 cheek, then place the oiling bar between the head of the press 
 and the flange of the piston ; which, taking oft' the power of tho 
 springs, sets the working parts of the press at liberty; you can 
 then with ease take out the main bolt, chill, &c„ and after oiling 
 the bearings, replace them in the same manner as before (the 
 parts marked '•front" must be kept to the front of the press), 
 and removing the bar, the press is again in working order. The 
 screw hi trout of the piston is connected with a wedge, by which 
 you may with perfect ease at all times regulate the pull to your 
 wi irk ; observing that the pull is correct when the screw is about 
 half way out. If the impri ssion is then too light, place between 
 the two wedges at the back of the piston a strip or two of tin, 
 or as many as will give you the power required. After the platen 
 is by this means once properly adjusted, it will not at any time 
 need (as some presses do I to be unscrewed, iron or cards to he 
 introduced between the pi-ton and the platen, and a re-adjusting 
 of the platen. The wedge will then act properly, and by screwing 
 it in or out, the impression will be light or heavy, as the work 
 requires; taking care, whenever you use the screw, to fix the 
 oiling-bar as directed to be done when oiling the press. The 
 press is always working to its full power when you bring the 
 bar-handle home to the cheek of the staple ; and, whether the 
 work requires a light or heavy impression, should always be so 
 worked. The same observations respecting oiling and keeping 
 the Columbian press clean, are applicable to the Imperial press. 
 
 Setting-up Stick. — A long narrow piece of wood, with 
 sides somewhat similar to a slip galley, used by boys in type- 
 foundries to set-up types ready for the dresser. 
 
 Set Wide. — In printing, matter with wide spacing between 
 the words. In typefounding, when the face of the letter is set 
 on the body so as to give it the apipearance, when printed in a 
 line with other letters, of having a space on each side. 
 
 Shank. — The square body upon which the face of a letter 
 stands. 
 
 Shears. — A large and exc lingly strong pair of scissors, 
 
 used tor culling brass rules, lead-, \c. 
 
 Sheet. — Any piece of paper may be called a sheet ; but for 
 the purposes of the printer, paper is cut up into certain sizes, 
 distinguished by separate names. See Dimensions of Papkb. 
 To form leaves, sheets are folded up into sections, which also 
 have their proper names, thus : Folio denotes a sheet of paper 
 folded into two leaves, making four pages ; quarto, or, as ab- 
 breviated, dto is a sheet divided into four leaves, or eight pages; 
 ... £ai>o,8vo, a sheet into eight leaves, or sixteen pages; duodecimo, 
 ll'mo, a sheet into twelve leaves, or twenty-four pages. So, also, 
 sivteens. li'uuo; eighteens, 18mo; twenty-four, 24mo; thirty- 
 twos, 32mo ; forty-eights, 4Smo ; sixty-fours, 64mo, are the 
 several designations of sheets when folded into sixteen, eigh- 
 teen, twenty-tour, thirty-two, forty-eight, and sixty-four leaves; 
 making each twice the number of pages. In presswork, a sheet 
 consists of two formes backing each other. Compositors, in 
 casting-up their matter, charge at so much per sheet. 
 
 Sheet the Roller. — After a pressman has scraped the ink 
 off bis roller, he lays a sheet of paper on the ink table and 
 pa es the roller several times across it, in order to remove all 
 the superfluous ink off it previously to distributing it on the 
 table.
 
 The Printers* Register. 
 Supplement, July 6, 1871. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 65 
 
 Seventy-twos. — A sheet folded into thirty- six leaves, making 
 seventy-two pages. 
 
 Shades of Ink. — See Dry Colours. 
 
 Sheep's Foot. — An iron hammer with a claw end, used by 
 pressmen. 
 
 Sherwin and Cope's Press.— This press, otherwise called 
 the Imperial Press, has been greatly modified and improved since 
 its invention, but at the time of its introduction it was a vast 
 improvement upon the press of Earl Stanhope. The works are 
 almost entirely concealed within the head of the press, and are 
 extremely few and simple, being the same as those of the Albion 
 Press (q.v.J. 
 
 Shoe. — An old slipper, with the back part of the " upper " cut 
 away; it is nailed through the heel, and hung at the end of the 
 frame, so that the compositor, when he comes across a battered 
 or broken letter, may put it in there. When the shoe becomes 
 full it is emptied into a large box, called the "batter-box," in 
 which the old metal is kept till returned to the founder to be 
 remelted and made into new type. 
 
 Shooting Stick. — A wedge-shaped instrument, used for 
 driving up the quoins in locking-up (q.v.). It is usually made 
 of hard wood, metal, or horn. 
 
 Short Accent. — See Accents. 
 
 Short Cross. — See Cross. 
 
 Short Letters. — Letters which have the face cast on the 
 middle or shank of the body, asacemnorsuvwxz, all 
 of which have beards above and below the face, both in Roman 
 and Italic. 
 
 Short Pages. — Pages which are not of the same length as 
 those which they back or face, such as the ending of a chapter 
 or volume. 
 
 Shoulder of a Letter. — So called by typefounders, is that 
 part of a letter which is commonly termed by printers the 
 "beard." 
 
 Showbills.— Otherwise called placards, from a French word, 
 are denned as public papers posted in a public place. They 
 constitute a large and important branch of the jobbing work of 
 a printing office, and by the variety of designs, sizes, and colours 
 that may be effected in them present a wide and most interesting 
 field for the exercise of the tact, taste, and skill of the com- 
 positor. There is far more of art in setting-up a showbill than 
 many persons imagine, and art of a kind that is not less derived 
 from constant practice, observation, and study, but due to 
 natural aptitude and ingenuity. While cards and circulars are 
 generally composed according to certain settled modes, according 
 to the class of work to which they belong, placards vary in 
 almost every single instance. Great attention has been paid to 
 this description of work in England during the last few years, 
 and vast improvement has taken place in the manner of its 
 execution, as a glance at any well-posted hoarding will show. 
 Formerly a dense dullness and a melancholy kind of monotony 
 pervaded all of these products of our English press. An ordinary 
 black letter on a white or blue or orange ground was thought 
 quite sufficient to attract the public attention. It was quite an 
 exhibition of enterprise to print in two, and more conspicuously 
 so, in three colours, and even these were the ordinary red and 
 blue inks. An advance in the public taste and a vast extension 
 of the advertising system in time demanded something more 
 artistic and more striking, and printers were compelled to take 
 into consideration the demands of their customers. They have 
 been enabled to meet those demands by several advantages 
 comparatively recently brought within their reach. The price 
 of ink has been much reduced, and workmen have commenced 
 to learn the system of blending and contrasting colours to the 
 best advantage. Wood engraving has been brought more into 
 use, not only for pictorial ornaments, but in the rougher way of 
 introducing more tasteful letters with greater variety of form. 
 The size, too, of placards has been increased of late years, for 
 where a mere double-demy, or even double-crown bill would 
 suffice, a four or six-sheet bill is now considered necessary. In 
 
 no branch of printing, in fact, has more progress been made 
 within the last generation than in this. Extensive establish- 
 ments are now found all over the country — notably in Birming- 
 ham, Glasgow, London, Nottingham, and Carlisle — for the chief 
 purpose of doing this kind of work, and the beauty and cheap- 
 ness of their productions are marvellous. America and France 
 have till within lately completely surpassed England in this 
 respect, but many of the placards now to be seen in London and 
 the large towns could hardly be excelled in any part of the 
 world, In designing a placard it ought first of all to be remem- 
 bered that the object of the bill in to catch the public eye. 
 Hence the attractiveness oi a placard is its chief recommendation, 
 and the measure of its value. This attractiveness may be 
 secured either by the excellence of the printing or the originality 
 of the design. It is true that mere size will catch the attention 
 of the passer by; but to print a bill of inordinate dimensions 
 with this sole object is very inartistic, and indicates a want of 
 ingenuity and skill on the part of its designer. The smaller the 
 bill in proportion to its showiness the better, both for the sake 
 of appearance and of economy. For some sorts of showbills, 
 indeed, even singularity may bo aimed at, but whether this 
 should be attempted or avoided depends upon the nature of the 
 particular work in hand. It may be laid down as a general rule, 
 that the fewer words in a bill the more effective it is likely to be. 
 An expert at placard composition displays his ability by the 
 accomplishment of his design with the use of the least amount 
 of explanation. The reason of this is obvious. The fewer the 
 words on a sheet of paper the larger may be the characters in 
 which they are set; and, besides, an undue quantity of small 
 type on a posted bill rather repels than excites public attention. 
 It should be left to the advertisement, the prospectus, the 
 circular, to explain and to demonstrate; the province of the 
 placard is to indicate, and assert. The wording of the latter 
 should be terse, incisive; not liable to misunderstanding, not 
 apt to be forgotten. A newspaper paragraph might commence, 
 " Theatre Royal, Buckintown. During the past week this theatre 
 has been, we are exceedingly glad to learn, completely filled 
 in every part of the house." But in a placard the same fact 
 should be announced in the two words, " Crowded Houses ! " 
 And while it is permissible to say in the former that " the actor 
 who will sustain the part of An English Gfentleman will be 
 Mr. Sothern, but he will not repeat it during it engage- 
 
 ment;" the latter will simply state, "An English Oentleman, 
 Mr. Sothern, for this night only." Simplo as this rule may 
 appear, it is constantly broken, to the detriment of the general 
 effect of the bill, and the wasteful increase of expense in printing 
 it. In writing out a bill, anyone who strives after perfection will 
 frequently lament the proportion in the English language of 
 particles — of conjunctions, prepositions, &c, and even grumble 
 at having to use so many adverbs and adjectives, valuable as is 
 their assistance. Verbs, nouns, and pronouns unfortunately, 
 cannot compose every sentence without becoming dull and 
 wearisome. So that auxiliary words have to be used ; but they 
 should be used as sparingly as possible. The bill having been 
 written out, is placed in the hands of the printer, some hints 
 being given to him of its general intention and the comparative 
 prominence to be given to the different displayed lines respec- 
 tively. He should then underline the chief or primary lines, 
 and it is advisable to make a kind of mental scale of the let' 
 and mark at the end of the words a if they are to be largest, 
 h next smaller, e, and so on. Having marked all the primary 
 lines, regard the rest merely as secondary or subordinate lines 
 — catch lines, in the phraseology of the trade. These accessory 
 lines should bo as few as possible, and as small as is convenient 
 — regard being had to legibility. The more spin 1 to 
 
 the chief lines the better. Some printers set the small lines 
 first, and then give all the remaining room to the big ones. This 
 is a sort of rough-and-ready way, but one which seldom i 
 duces a good bill, as it rather reverses the order of things. The 
 largest lines should be got up first, then those of a size smaller, 
 and so on, diminishing to the smallest catch line. By this means 
 only can a really good bill be arranged. Placards, indeed, should 
 be intelligible when only their chief lines are read, and the small 
 lines passed over. By this means a double effect is gained, for 
 the passer by on the opposite side of the street, who can from
 
 no 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Reeiater. 
 Supplement, July 6, 1871. 
 
 \ read the primary lines, and the passer by who 
 
 1 off and can read the whole, are equally suited. Bui 
 
 when read in this way the exael information which is intended 
 
 y conveyed, for it is possible by brin 
 
 mdary word it prominence to give the bill a totally 
 
 oppo ite i in what it n ally is a plan --hum - 
 
 pted to excite public curiositj as what appears bj the 
 
 lii i i be a royal proclamation may be in realitj 8 
 
 ley sweep's notii ing to the lines that are "thrown 
 
 up." A certain balance must be prea rved; over-display should 
 
 be avoid clumsiness guarded against. As far as 
 
 possible, the chiei effects should be made about the middle of 
 
 .. it ;i - in a wort ot art the chief figut into 
 
 the middle. Wi artistswho have attained the highest 
 
 eminence incessantly taking notes of every minute i Beet that 
 
 they discovered in the works of the great masters, and jealously 
 
 boarding them up till they could be brought into use. So ought 
 
 inter to observe and record for his future advan- 
 
 il idea, any ingenious or beautiful combination, 
 
 sn thai his mind may be stored with expedients for attaining all 
 
 kinds of effects. A dead wall decorated by the bill-poster 
 
 affords more subjects for study than one person in a thousand 
 
 et er imagines. 
 
 Shuffling. — A. term used in warehouse work. — See Knock-up. 
 
 Side-Heads.— Words that stand in the opening lines of 
 
 chapt d . and paragraphs for the purpose of indicating 
 
 their contents. 
 
 Side Notes.— Botes placed in the outer margin of a page, 
 
 law work, appeal cases, Parliamentary Bills, &c. 
 
 Sidestick. — Furniture which is thicker at one end than the 
 other, placed at the outside of the matter, between which and 
 the chase the quoins are wedged up to tighten the forme. Side- 
 sticks arc frequently made of iron, especially for newspapers and 
 magazines requiring very tight lockmg-up. — See Footstick. 
 
 Signatures.— The letters of the alphabet used by English 
 printers in the fool margin of certain pages as a guide to direct 
 the bookbinder in arranging and folding the sheets. The letter 
 B is put at the bottom of the first sheet or half sheet which 
 comes immediately after the title-page, preface, and contents; 
 C, at thai of the second: and so on throughout the alphabet, 
 with the exception of J, V, and W. If the number oi pages 
 requires more signatures than the alphabet will indicate, the 
 d n ; Hi ii. bled, or a numeral is prefixed to them ; 
 as, A \. Ii B : 2 A. 2 B ; "• A, &c. Figures, or numeral characters 
 (1.1"; 2, -'. &c), being thought more convenient than letters, 
 are used for the same purpose in America. But in catalogues, 
 and other publications in which figures often occur, capitals or 
 small capitals are. for the Bake of distinction, preferable. The 
 reason that J, V, and W are not used as signatures is, that at the 
 invention of printing there were no such letters in the alphabet. 
 £ expressed both I and J; W both U and V ; and UU the double 
 letter W. 
 
 Signs.— Types cast to represent certain quantities, processes, 
 objects. &c, which it would not be convenient to describe in 
 words. A large number of signs are in use iu the present day, 
 and new one, are frequently introduced. — See AxGEBEAlC, 
 Matbcematii \l, &c, Signs. 
 
 Sixteens.— A sheet of paper folded into eight leaves, forming 
 sixteen pages. It is written 16mo. 
 
 Sixty-fours. — A sheet folded into thirty-two leaves, making 
 sixty-four pages. 
 
 Skalgography.— The name given to a new etching process 
 for producing blocks for letter-press printing, which was in- 
 vented by Mr. I. ('. Nielsen, of 93, Chancery-lane. It has been made 
 available for the illustration of several periodicals. A polished 
 zinc plate is coated with a thin white preparation, through 
 which the drawing is executed with a horn or bone point. The 
 zinc, thus discovered, will show the draughtsman the full effect 
 of his work, and he works with the same facility on the plate as 
 on a sleet of paper. The plate is then covered over with a 
 varnish which adheres to all the drawn lines, but can be removed 
 
 iii. preparation is below. The plate is now ready for 
 etching, which the inventor does by a system of his own. It is 
 claimed that the process ot Skalgography has many advantages, 
 one of which ai least the artisl will appreciate, namely, that his 
 
 drawing is produced with the Utmost fidelity. Six to twenty- 
 tour hours' treatment, according to the dimensions of the plate, 
 tits the drawing for the press. This process is said to be fit for 
 illustrations of every description, as well as key-blocks tor 
 colour-printing. Inn ing three advantages: strict fac-timile, quick- 
 ness and cheapness, without the disadvantages so generally 
 
 shown by other similar inventions, namely, rottenness and un- 
 evenness iu line. Cheapness, combined with rapidity and good 
 work, seems, as far as illustrations are concerned, to have been 
 the object of the inventor of Skalgography. 
 
 Slice Galley. — A galley constructed with a thin false bottom, 
 in order that matter may lie moro conveniently transferred to the 
 stone (q.v.). 
 
 Slip Galley.— See Galleys. 
 
 Slug.— An American name for what we call clumps (q.v.). 
 
 Small Caps. — Capital letters of a small size, used for the 
 purpose of giving greater emphasis to a word than can be con- 
 veyed by Italic; and for displaying lines, the running heads of 
 pages, heads of chapters, side-heads, &c. In manuscript, small 
 i.ij itals are indicated by two lines drawn under the words. In 
 . . H. i.d they are cut to Roman founts only, but. sometimes to 
 Italic founts. The letters c o s v iv I z are so like lower-case 
 letters that care must be taken that they are not used with them. 
 Typefounders should give these letters a nick on the back. 
 
 Smothering a Roller.— See Inking-uf. 
 
 Solid Matter. — Matter which contains no leads, and but 
 few breaks or wdiites ; the reverse of Leaded Matter, or Fat 
 matter (f/.v.). 
 
 Solid Pick. — A letter in a stereotype plato filled up with 
 metal, resulting from an imperfect mould. 
 
 Sorts. — The letters in the different boxes in the case. — See 
 Buns on Sorts; Out of Soets. 
 
 Space Out. — To space matter to any requisite dimension.— 
 See Composing. 
 
 Space Lines.— See Brass Space Lines. 
 
 Space Rules. — Metal rules, cast to the thickness of a four- 
 to-I J ica lead, and used in close tabular matter, to save the trouble 
 and inconvenience of cutting small pieces of brass rule to two, 
 three, and four em measures. 
 
 Spaces. — Pieces of metal, less in heighth than letters, cast to 
 the various bodies of types to form the whites or spaces between 
 words and at the ends of lines for justification. They are cast 
 to various thicknesses, and are called by various names. Those 
 which run five to the em are called thin spaces; four to an em, 
 middle spaces ; three to an em, thick spaces ; two to an em, en 
 quadrats. The hair spaces average eight to the em, but. range 
 between seven and ten, according to the size of the body. — See 
 Justifying, Haie Spaces, Thin Spaces, &c. 
 
 Spacing. — The art of placing the proper spaces between 
 words. &c, with a view to securing the best and most sym- 
 metrical appearance. — See Composing. 
 
 Spring Rule.— See Bhass Kule. 
 
 Squabble. — Lines of matter twisted out of their proper 
 positions, with letters running into wrong lines, &c. 
 
 Square Cross ( S> ).— Otherwise, Maltese cross. 
 
 'Stab.— An abbreviation of establishment. A man who is"on 
 'stah " receives establishment wages, i.e., regular fixed weekly 
 wages, irrespective of the nature or amount of his work, and is, 
 therefore, iu exactly an opposite position to one who is "on 
 piece," who is paid only by the job and according to what he 
 performs. 
 
 Stand. — Otherwise frame {q.v.). 
 
 Standing Matter. — Matter which is reserved from one
 
 The Printers' Res-ister. 
 Supplement, July 6. 1871. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 
 edition of a work to be used partly or wholly in another. Many 
 advertisements, for instance, ordered for a certain number of 
 insertions in a periodical or newspaper, are not distributed, bat 
 are used over and over again, till the order is exhausted, and are 
 called " Standing Advertisements." 
 
 Standing Press.— A screw press used for removing the 
 impression or indentation on the paper after it has been printed, 
 and restoring it to a perfectly smooth surface. The sheets are 
 placed between glazed boards, and the pressure obtained by 
 means of applying a lever to the screw. 
 
 Stanhope Press. — A description of iron press invented by 
 the late Earl Stanhope about 1800. It is not much in use at the 
 present day, having been superseded by the Albion and Columbian 
 presses. A description and engravings of the Stanhope press 
 will be found in Johnson's "Typographia," Vol. I!., p. 636; 
 Savage's " Dictionary," p. 779: and Stower's "Printers' Grammar," 
 p. 499. 
 
 Star. — See Asterisk. 
 
 Stationers' Hall (Registration at).— The Copyright 
 
 Amendment Act (5 & 6 Vic, cap. 45) enacts that, to secun 
 copyright in literary productions, the proprietor shall make 
 entry " in the Registry Book of the Stationers' Company, of tin- 
 Title of such Book, the Time of the first Publication thereof, the 
 Name and Place of abode of the Publisher thereof, and the Name 
 and Place of abode of the Proprietor of the Copyright of the 
 said Book, or of any portion of such Copyright, in the Form in 
 that Behalf given in the Schedule to this Act annexed, upon 
 Payment of the Sum of Five Shillings to the Officer of the said 
 Company ; and that it shall be lawful for every such registered 
 Proprietor to assign his Interest, or any Portion of his Interest 
 therein, by making Entry in the said Book of Registry of such 
 Assignment, and of the Name and Place of Abode of the As- 
 signee thereof, in the Form given in that Behalf in the said 
 Schedule, on Payment of the like Sum ; and such Assignment so 
 entered shall be effectual in Law to all Intents and Purposes 
 whatsoever, without being subject to any Stamp or Duty, and 
 shall be of the same Force and Effect as if such Assignment had 
 been made by Deed." The following is the form of requiring 
 entry of proprietorship. 
 
 I A.B. of do hereby certify, That I am the Proprietor 
 
 of the Copyright of a Hook, intituled Y.Z., and I hereby require you 
 to make Entry in the Register Book of the Stationers' Company of 
 my Proprietorship *of such Copyright according to the Particulars 
 underwritten. 
 
 Title of 
 Book. 
 
 r.z. 
 
 Name of Publisher 
 and Place of 
 Publication 
 
 Name and Place of 
 
 Abode of the 
 
 Proprietor of the 
 
 Copyright. 
 
 Date of 
 First Publication. 
 
 A.B. 
 
 Dated this 
 
 Witness, CD. 
 
 Day of 
 
 18 
 (Signed) A.B. 
 
 Stem.— The straight flat strokes of a straight letter. 
 
 Stereo.— The usual abbreviation for Stereotype, 
 
 Stereotype.— Types cast in one piece, forming plates, about 
 one-eighth of an inch in thickness. 
 
 Stereotype Printing.— Printing from metal plates instead 
 of separate letters.— See Stereotyping. 
 
 Stereotyper.— A man who manufactures stereotype plates. 
 
 Stereo Blocks.— Metal blocks upon which stereotype plates 
 are mounted, in order to be printed from. They are cast in 
 various sizes, the largest being 17 ems by 8 ems ; the smaller 
 
 sizes are fractional parts of the large block, so as to enable 
 workman to make them up to suit the dimensions of certain 
 plates. The plates are fastened to the blocks by mean 
 catches. — See MOUNTING Bie 
 
 Stereotyping. — The art of taking casts or stereotype i 
 from types, woodcuts, &c. The two principal met 
 
 typing, as now practised, are 
 v the •• Plaster 
 --"and the- Papii r M 
 Pro© is." Hi ■ at ' princi] al 
 newspapers are now printed 
 from stereotype plate-. For an 
 account of the invention, 
 "Johnson's 
 ^- — phia," Vol. II.. 
 gH •• Abridgement of Spe- 
 cifications Relating to 
 Printing," VoL I., pp. 
 ft uplift VH SB 93-95. The annexe. . 
 
 rl i . J w?^=. VI ill ? n \efift3L<rraving is a view of an 
 
 agly economical 
 
 ul stereotyping 
 
 apparatus manufa. 
 
 by Mr. Temple, of Hull. 
 
 This machine is adapted 
 
 for plates of small jobs and pages of 1 ks; for I 
 
 columns a different shaped apparatus is requir that 
 
 illustrated below, which is sup). lied by .Mr. I Hull, and 
 
 is highly recommended to newspaper proprietors, 
 stereotyping should be set with stereotype space irats 
 
 (which are much 
 higher than 
 used in ordinary 
 founts), and the 
 formes should be 
 . with type- 
 bigh clumps at 
 id bottom, 
 for protecting the 
 ends of the i 
 from injurywhile 
 
 through tl • 
 chine during the 
 s!.u\ me I : 
 
 The formes should be Licked up tight and square, evenly planed 
 down, and free from all dirt or ink on the tace. 
 
 Stet.— A word written in copy or in a proof to show that 
 some matter erroneously cancelled must remain ; the literal 
 meaning is. let it stand. 
 
 Stone.— See Imposing Surface. 
 
 Stoneman.— A compositor who assists the printer of a news- 
 paper in imposition, correcting editors' proofs. (fee. 
 
 Storekeeper.— A compositor who has to look after the 
 various founts of type, furniture, leads, &C 1 1 i ~- duty i- to keep 
 an account of all the material in stock, and when a new work i- 
 given out to supply the companionship with the necessary ap- 
 pliances for executing it. In like manner, when a work i> 
 finished, and the companionship have cleared it away, the ; 
 furniture, chases, leads. &c., are brought to him to be stored 
 au.;\ ready for any emergency. The office of Storekeeper is 
 frequently combined with that of Quoin-drawer Overseer ty.r.). 
 
 Sub-head.— When an article or chapter i- divided into 
 several part.-, the headings to those parts are set in smaller type 
 than the bill head, and are called Sub-heads. 
 
 Superior Letters.- Letters cast unusually high on the 
 shank BO that a large beard is left below. — See Inkkihor 
 Letti i 3. 
 
 Super Royal.— A size of paper— Set Dmbnsionb of Pun:. 
 
 Syllabication.— The art of dividing words into syllables.— 
 •See Division of Words.
 
 68 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement, July 6, 1871. 
 
 Syllable— A letter or combination of letters uttered by 0110 
 impulse of the voice. 
 
 Symbols.— See Signs. 
 
 T. 
 
 Tablo of a Press.— The flat surface on which the type lays, 
 otherwise called the lied {q.v.). 
 
 Tablo Work. — Matter set up in four or more columns de- 
 pending Oil each other, and reading across the page. Compositors 
 are paid double the price of common matter for tallies of four 
 columns with headings, or live or more columns without headings. 
 
 Tabular Matter.— Matter set up in three or four columns 
 depending on each other, and reading across the page. The 
 price paid for this class of work — according to the London 
 Compositors' Scale - is, three columns, without headings, one- 
 fourth extra; three columns with headings, or four columns 
 without, one-half extra. 
 
 Tail Piece. — An ornamental device placed at the end of a 
 chapter, or at the end of a book, immediately over the imprint. 
 Great ta-te was displayed by the ancient printers in the selection 
 and execution of these ornaments, which are again in fashion 
 since the revival of the " old style" of type. 
 
 Take. — A portion of copy given out at one time, whether 
 large or small.— See Companionship. 
 
 Taker-off.— The person who takes the sheets out of a ma- 
 chine after they have been printed. This work is usually per- 
 formed by young persons ; but the invention of Flyers ( q.v.) is 
 gradually superseding this kind of labour. 
 
 Take up. — When a compositor is unable, through press of 
 business, illness, or otherwise, to finish his copy in time for the 
 making-up, and the job is urgent, another compositor is re- 
 quested to " take up " that portion of the copy left unset. 
 
 Taking Copy. — The act of receiving a " take " of copy from 
 the Clicker or overseer, after distribution. 
 
 Taking-off at Press. — Removing the sheet from the tym- 
 pan and placing it on the heap. This is nearly always done by 
 the pressman, but before the introduction of machines, when ex- 
 pedition was required, it became the duty of another person who 
 was called the " fly " (q.v.) 
 
 Tapes.— The Viands on which the sheets are conveyed through 
 a certain class of machines, which are so distinguished from 
 gripper machines, in which the sheets are held by grippers or 
 claws. — See Chipper Machines. 
 
 Text. — The text is the chief body of a work ; the type is 
 uniform throughout the text, although the notes, extracts, &c, 
 may be set in smaller letter. 
 
 Text Letter. — A style of type somewhat similar to "Black " 
 letter ; it is sometimes called German Text. 
 
 Thick Spaces. — Spaces, three of which go to the em. They 
 are the most used of all spaces, and are generally placed between 
 the words on the first setting of a line previously to spacing it 
 out to the measure. 
 
 Thin Spaces. — Spaces, five of which go to the em. 
 
 Thirty-sixes. — A sheet of paper folded into thirty-six leaves, 
 making seventy-two pages. 
 
 Thirty -twos. — A sheet of paper folded into thirty-two leaves, 
 making sixty-four pages. 
 
 Throwing with Quads.— See Jeffotg. 
 
 Thumb-piece.— See Eab of the Fbisket. 
 
 Tightening the Quoins. — This is a far more important 
 part of a compositor's work than many imagine. A compositor, 
 in quoining up a forme, usually places any sort of quoin that 
 apparently fits, and when he comes to lock up the forme he is 
 necessitated to change many of them ; whereas the proper way 
 is to push up the quoins as tightly as possible with the thumb, so 
 much so that the forme can be partially raised, before locking 
 
 up, to see if the matter is properly justified. Some compositors 
 have a habit of pushing up the quoins this way so tight that 
 they cannot loosen them again without the aid of the mallet 
 and shooting-stick. Before finally locking up, the quoins should 
 be gently tightened by tapping them up with the mallet and 
 shooting-stick, and any loose ones replaced. 
 
 Tilde ("*■). — A mark used in some Spanish words, as Espana. 
 It adds the sound of e to the letter over which it stands. 
 
 Tinted Inks.— See Dry Colours. 
 
 Title Page. — The page containing the title ; sometimes 
 called the full title, to distinguish it from the bastard title, 
 winch is a condensation of the title, and printed on the preced- 
 ing leaf. 
 
 Title Sheet.— The sheet which contains the title page, dedi- 
 cations, preface, or other preliminary matter. 
 
 Token. — A perfect half ream of paper, or two hundred and 
 fifty-eight sheets. Paper is given out to be wetted, and press- 
 men's bills are made up by, the token. 
 
 Token Sheet. — When paper is wet in quantity, the last 
 sheet of each token is allowed to project slightly at one corner, 
 so as to mark the division of the pile into tokens. 
 
 Transparent Ink. — A description of ink which is used to 
 imitate the waterlines of paper, and for various other useful and 
 ornamental purposes. It is manufactured for Mr. Jos. M. Powell, 
 3, Bouverie-street, London, E.C. 
 
 Transposing. — Changing the place of letter, either in lines, 
 paragraphs, or pages, that has got into a wrong position. In 
 correcting a proof, if a letter is transposed, as ten, the Reader 
 draws a small horizontal line under the letter, and in the margin 
 opposite writes, trs. (ital rom). 
 
 Treadle Machines. — Machines in which the motive power 
 is supplied by the action of the foot on a treadle. Small jobbing 
 machines are usually supplied with an arrangement of this 
 kind. An engraving of a treadle machine illustrates the article 
 Degener's Press. 
 
 Tumbling Cylinder. — The impression cylinder of a print- 
 ing machine, commonly known as a " Tumbler." The peculiarity 
 of this cylinder is, that instead of continuously revolving, it 
 returns to its original position after each impression. 
 
 Turned Letter. — A letter which is turned upside down ; 
 that is, the nick is at the top instead of the foot. The mark 
 used by press correctors to show the error is — (F$ 
 
 Turn for a Letter. — When a letter of any sort is short, the 
 direction is sometimes given to "turn" for it ; that is, to insert 
 any letter of an equal size, but with the feet uppermost — the 
 black mark resulting in the proof not being liable to be over- 
 looked. To avoid the friction of the face on the imposing 
 surface, some printers merely use a turned letter {q.v.). 
 
 Turning a Heap. — Reversing the position of the pile of 
 sheets before working the reiteration, so that the white side is 
 uppermost. 
 
 Turn-over. — An apprentice who has not completed his full 
 time of service with one master, and is transferred to another to 
 finish his apprenticeship. The proper and lawful manner of 
 turning over an apprentice is accompanied by a transfer of the 
 indentures also, which are attested by the new master, and 
 become as binding as when originally signed ; but of late years 
 an injurious system has prevailed of accepting boys without 
 asking any questions as to whether they have been apprenticed 
 or not, and placing them " at case " on half their earnings. 
 These boys are taken on and discharged according to the 
 fluctuating nature of the business, just the same as casual 
 journeymen. They are principally engaged on cheap news- 
 papers" and periodicals, where little care is taken whether their 
 orthography is good or the spacing regular. The evil result of 
 this practice is, that the trade is inundated by a large number of 
 incompetent workmen. 
 
 Turns Over.— When an article exceeds a column, page, 
 &c, it is said to " turn over " the column, page, and so on.
 
 The Printers* Register. 
 Supplement, Aug. 7, 1871. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 <;u 
 
 Turpentine. — Spirits of turpentine are used in the printing- 
 office for cleaning ink off rollers, inking tables, &c. No other 
 
 solvent should be used for cleaning woodcuts. 
 
 Turps. — A colloquial abbreviation of turpentine. 
 
 Twelves. — A sheet of paper folded into twelve leaves, making 
 twenty-four pages. 
 
 Twenties. — A sheet of paper folded into twenty leaves, 
 making forty pages. 
 
 Twenty-fours. — A sheet of paper folded into twenty-four 
 leaves, making forty-eight pages. 
 
 Two-Colour Machines. — Machines which print in two 
 colours — red and black, for instance — at one operation. They 
 were introduced by Mr. G. Duncan, of Liverpool. Str Hi m' vn's 
 Machines. 
 
 Two-Feeder Machines. — Machines into which the paper 
 is fed at two places, thereby producing twice as many im- 
 pressions in a given time as a single-feeder machine. 
 
 Two-line. — Types double in depth of any body are called 
 two-line of that body. Thus two-line Pica is equal in depth to 
 two Picas one above the other. 
 
 Two-line Letter. — Letter the face of which fully charges 
 the body of the type. For instance, Great Primer Roman is two 
 lines of Bourgeois in body, but the face of the type is not so, a 
 "beard" being left for the ascending and descending letters of 
 the lower-case : on the other hand, Titling Caps, cast to the full 
 depth of a Great Primer body, are called Two-line Bourgeois. 
 
 Tying-up Pages. — Securing them with string preparatory 
 to then' being laid in order on the imposing surface. — See I'm; i. 
 (TVOTG-TTP A). 
 
 Tynipan. — A frame over which is stretched parchment, cloth, 
 or paper, on which the sheet to be printed is placed before being 
 turned down upon the forme. An inner tynipan fits into it, and 
 between the two the blankets and paper are placed which act as 
 a sort of pad between the platen of the press and the forme 
 when the table is rim in. 
 
 Tympan Hooks.— The hooks on the sides of tho inner 
 tyiupan frame, which attach it to the outer. 
 
 Tympan Sheet. — A sheet of paper pasted upon the tympan, 
 at the bottom and off-side of which pins are inserted, as a guide 
 to the pressman in laying the sheet, also for affixing overlays 
 upon. 
 
 Type Scale. — A rule or measure, made of ivory or wood 
 upon which is marked the depths, in ems, of the various sizes of 
 type, somewhat similar to the inches and fractional parts of 
 inches on a foot-rule used by Carpenters, &c. A type scale is 
 very handy for casting-off matter ; for ascertaining the length 
 and breadth of a page ; or for determining what size of type a 
 reprint is composed of. 
 
 Type.— The stamps or dies which impress the letters on the 
 paper in printing. Type includes not only the letters which 
 form the words of any language, but also the punctuational 
 symbols, spaces, quadrats, &<•". A complete assortment of these 
 is called a Fount (q.v.), which may be large or small, but as 
 certain of the types are used more frequently than others there 
 is a regular scale of the proportion of the different characters, 
 which Ts called a Bill of Type, of which a specimen is annexed. 
 Owing to the varying styles of authors and the diverse subjects 
 of books, there will generally be found a number of particular 
 sorts deficient in a fount, whatever the proportions may have 
 been at first. A new fount of letter may run evenly on a work 
 in general literature written in the third person, while a novel 
 filled with dialogues in the first person will rapidly exhaust 
 certain letters, and require sorts to render the fount serviceable 
 to its full general capacity. So with scientific and other books. 
 Even in the case of two 'authors writing on the same subject, 
 there is no certainty that the fount will run alike. The master- 
 printer, therefore, to keep the entire letter in use. is compelled 
 to order sorts, and his fount is thus constantly growing larger. 
 — See Letters. 
 
 The following is a bill of typo (referred to in the previ 
 paragraph), and shows the ] oi Pica: — 
 
 a 
 
 b 1 
 
 c 
 
 d 1400 
 
 e 12 00 
 
 f 2500 
 
 g 1700 
 
 8400 
 8000 
 
 
 
 N || I 
 4IHII) 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 1700 
 
 •' 
 
 6200 
 8000 
 
 illMII) 
 
 3400 
 
 1200 
 2000 
 
 l 
 2 
 
 200 
 400 
 SI 'i i 
 200 
 100 
 ISO 
 100 
 60 
 
 mo 
 
 90 
 60 
 
 4500 
 
 I 
 
 1 51 ' 
 
 Too 
 
 3 l 
 150 
 100 
 100 
 100 
 100 
 100 
 60 
 
 1300 
 
 1 2i ll i 
 non 
 
 I 
 
 t 
 
 ! 
 
 1000 
 
 1 
 
 b 
 
 bioo 
 
 200 
 
 200 
 200 
 
 All other ac- 
 cents 100 each. 
 
 r„ V lb, 50 ea. 
 t@- 30 
 
 A 
 B 
 C 
 
 n 
 
 i; 
 
 F 
 
 (i 
 
 It 
 
 I 
 
 .1 
 
 K 
 
 L 
 
 M 
 
 N 
 
 O 
 
 P 
 
 Q 
 
 K 
 S 
 T 
 
 r 
 
 V 
 w 
 X 
 
 V 
 
 / 
 
 .K 
 
 (i: 
 
 i 
 
 * 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 D 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 400 
 
 1 
 
 400 
 
 O 
 
 400 
 
 H 
 
 
 I 
 
 300 
 
 J- 
 
 8 1 
 
 K 
 
 51 » ' 
 
 L 
 
 400 
 
 M 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 400 
 
 P 
 
 180 
 
 Q 
 
 l 
 
 11 
 
 500 
 
 S 
 
 650 
 
 T 
 
 300 
 
 D 
 
 300 
 
 V 
 
 
 w 
 
 ISO 
 
 z 
 
 300 
 
 Y 
 
 80 
 
 z 
 
 10 
 
 
 30 
 
 CE 
 
 200 
 
 200 
 
 21 
 •li.i 
 150 
 150 
 
 200 
 
 200 
 
 90 
 
 200 
 250 
 
 1 51 1 
 150 
 
 ISO 
 
 •to 
 20 
 IS 
 
 150 
 150 
 150 
 50 
 50 
 50 
 50 
 50 
 50 
 
 Spacfs. 
 Thick 
 Middle 1 
 Thin ... 
 Hair . 
 Km Qu 
 EnQud 
 Large l 
 about 80 lbs. 
 
 Italic, one-tenth of Unman. 
 
 Type Pounding.- The art of casting the 
 
 characters on 
 moveable types used in printing. The whole art of printing was 
 carefully kept a mystery by the initiated until about half a cen- 
 tury after the probable date oi the invention, The i ariy printers 
 generally combined all the various processes of the ] rofessionin 
 their own offices, but as the art spread over Europe, and secrecy 
 became less and less necessary, the most enterprisinfi 
 began to furnish their distant brethren with types from their 
 
 respective foundries. For a long period it seems that type- 
 founding, printing, and bindingwenl under the general ten 
 prinlinji, and that printers cast the types used by them, and 
 printed and bound the works executed m their establishments. 
 Type-founding became a distinct calling early in the seventeenth 
 century. The first record ot the separation of the art of type- 
 founding from the art of printing, would appear to be a de- 
 cree of the Star Chamber (temp. Chas. 1.1. made July 11. 1637, 
 which ordained the following regulations concerning English 
 founders : — 
 
 That there shall be four founders of letters for printing, and no 
 more. 
 
 That the Archbishop of Canterbury, or the Bishop of London, with 
 six other high commissioners, shall supply the places of those four a> 
 they shall become void. 
 
 That no master-founder shall keep above two apprentices at one 
 
 time. 
 
 That all journeymen-founders he employed by the master? of the 
 trade, and thai idle journeymen be compelled to work, upon pain of 
 imprisonment and such other punishment as the court shall think fit 
 
 That no master-founder of letters shall employ any ether p 
 in any work belonging to the casting or founding of letters than 
 Freemen or apprentices to the trade, save only in pulling off the knots 
 oi metal hanging at the ends ol the letters when they are tir>; . 
 in which work every master-founder may employ one boy < nly, 
 
 bound to the trade.
 
 70 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Register. 
 Supplement, Aug. 7, 1871. 
 
 Byadecra El ibeth), the master-printers in England were 
 limited to twenty. The decree was revised 1 1 Chas. II.; renewed 
 16 Chas. II. ; and again ir seven years 1st James II., when it 
 expired and was never renewed. The "polyglot founders," as 
 
 they have been called, were succ led by Joseph Moxon ami 
 
 others, But the English were unable to compete with tin' 
 superior productions "i the Dutch founders, until the advent of 
 William Caslon, who, bj the beautj and excellence of hi- type, 
 surpassed his Batavian competitors, when the importation "1' 
 
 ;ii type ceased, ami his founts were, in turn, exported to thu 
 
 Continent. \a usually practised, the work of producing a type 
 
 or moveable letter lor printing is sub-divided among various 
 
 hands. These are: — 
 
 1st.— The Punch Cult,,-, who •■cuts" the punch; that is, en- 
 graves upon the end of a slip of soft steel a facsimile of 
 the lace of the letter to I"- produced. This, when com- 
 plete, is hardened and struck into a piece of copper to 
 form tlie mataix, which is then handed to 
 
 2nd.— The Justifier, who flies the matrix so that when placed in 
 the mould the latter becomes adjusted in such a manner 
 thai Hi.- height, thickness, line, &c, of the resulting letter 
 are correct. 
 
 3rd. fie 1 Coder, who pours in the metal and casts the type in 
 the mould. 'I'he type is then handed to 
 
 4th. — The Breaker, a hoy, who breaks off the jet, or runner. 
 
 5th.- Tie Rubber, who smooths on a stone the sides of the type 
 so that they lie side by side in such a way as to form 
 solid lilies. 
 
 6th. — The Setter-up, who places the rubbed type in lines upon a 
 composing -tick, so that they may be submitted to the 
 next operator, 
 
 7th. — The Dresser, who "ploughs" or planes out the notch 
 in the toot to remove the remains of the broken jet, 
 and to allow the types to stand freely on their feet; and 
 next scrapes in succession the dressed edges of the type, 
 so that they may lie in their right position, and be true to 
 line and body. This completes the "dressing" of the 
 type, which is then taken from the composing sticks and 
 el up in pages. 
 
 In by far the greater number of type foundries the third opera- 
 tion, that of casting, is now effected by a machine, the workman 
 merely turning a handle to give motion to cams and levers, 
 which open and shut the mould, inject the metal, &c, so as to 
 produce type with great rapidity. For a long time the English 
 master founders rejected these machines as imperfect, and in- 
 competent to produce perfect types. The objection was a sound 
 one, for the operation of the caster is not purely mechanical. 
 The workman not only uses his muscles, but avails himself of 
 the sense ol touch to know whether the two halves of his mould 
 are home, that is, in metallic contact. If not, the mould is 
 opened and brushed, or picked with the hook to remove the dust 
 or adhering particle of metal which, by preventing contact, 
 increased the aperture of the mould beyond the space defined 
 by the justified matrix, and if used in that state made a "big 
 body." The machines having no such sense of touch, and giving 
 no indication of the want of contact of the two halves of the 
 mould, made " big bodies" constantly, ami hence the objection to 
 their use. Up to the year 1853, although these machines were in 
 full work in America, and even well known to the English 
 founders, each successive French and American patent having 
 been bought up by the English master founders, yet it is believed 
 that not one of these machines was in actual use in this country, 
 then the beautiful polymatype apparatus, invented by one of 
 the Didots, and worked for many years successfully in Paris by 
 Marcellin Legrand, and which M. Pouchee purchased and worked 
 for some tine in this country, hud fallen into the hands of the 
 master founders through the agency of Mr. Reed, printer, of 
 King-street, Covent-garden, and had been destroyed on the 
 premises. This act ot barbarism and of mistaken self-interest is 
 recorded in the Jury lb-ports of the Exhibition of 1851, p. 409. In 
 the year 1853, Mr. J. B. Johnson patented (Patent No. 1351) a ma- 
 chine in which the fault of casting big bodies was eliminated. By 
 
 departing entirely from the ordinary form of mould, and making 
 the opening a fixed one, not defined or determined by the matrix, 
 it is obvious that no enlargement from dust or particles of metal 
 could occur. This also met the hostility of the founders, and an 
 attempt was made to suppress it under the pretence of its 
 pirating some of the patents held by them; but Air. Johnson 
 modified his machine so as to avoid the one alleged point- of 
 Similarity, and he persevered in its use. This machine, largely 
 used both in this country and abroad, undoubtedly led to the 
 cniyloyiiieiit of machines by the other founders, the fault of big 
 
 boiiies of their machines being tolerated iii face of the active 
 
 opposition, and diminished cost of type resulting from their 
 use. In the year 1862. .Mr. J. It. Johnson, in association with 
 the late .Mr. .1. S. Atkinson, patented a supplementary ma- 
 chine by which all the operations succeeeding the casting, 
 (•numerated above, are performed purely automatically. St\ 
 of lhe.se machines may he seen at work mi the premises of the 
 
 Patent Type founding Company, 31, Bed Lion-square, Holborn, 
 W.C., and are well worth the inspection of all interested in 
 typography. The metal may be seen melted at one end of 
 tin- combined machines by a jet of gas, and at the other a 
 line of type emerging ready for the use of the printer, without 
 having been touched by the workman, who watches the steam- 
 driven machines, with crossed arms, until his composing stick 
 is filled, when he removes it, fixes another, and withdraws the 
 driving pin to place it behind another line of cast type. There 
 can be no more doubt of the mathematical accuracy of type thus 
 formed, than there is of the extraordinary economy of labour 
 which results from its use. When the patent has expired, it 
 is evident that this will become the mode of type manufacture 
 of the future. It is not only on the economy of labour and 
 accuracy of production of type that we are indebted to Mr. 
 Johnson. In the year 1854 he patented (Patent No. 817) the 
 alloy, or series of alloys, which is now in. general use. Mr. 
 Johnson failed to substantiate his claim to be the. first and 
 sole inventor of this compound, but that he was the original 
 introducer of it into public use is very generally admitted. By 
 referring to the Founders' price lists, it will be seen, in that 
 year, that only one description of type is alluded to ; and a 
 vast number of analyses of type sold about that period by 
 an eminent firm of founders, who claim to have been first in 
 all improvements in the quality of their metal, show not more 
 than two or three per cent, of tin was employed. But in 1856 
 their lists show that two kinds of type alloy are used, and an 
 analysis of the type supplied to the Times newspaper in 1853, 
 contained twenty-five per cent, of tin, which, by a strange 
 coincidence, is exactly the proportions defined in Mr. Johnson's 
 patent. A contemporary recently said, concerning typefounding 
 in London : — 
 
 The Metropolis, having been long recognised as the great literary 
 centre of the kingdom, we naturally find those minor trades and 
 occupations which are dependent upon letter-press printing well 
 represented within its bounds. This is especially the case witli type 
 founding, and the chief rivals indeed of the London firms engaged in 
 this business, although they may have their works elsewhere, are 
 constrained to maintain an establishment in Town, and to keep heavy 
 stocks on hand, in order that they may retain a hold on the trade. In 
 all printing-offices, and more especially jobbing printing-offices, a 
 sudden demand for a few pounds of type of a particular size, or of a 
 special fount, is constantly arising, and the founder who is on the 
 spot, and who can supply these at once, commands an advantage 
 over his competitors who may not be so favourably situated. 
 
 Type founding, like most, other branches of manufacturing industry, 
 has undergone important changes in later years from the introduction 
 of automatic machinery. The Master Type Founders' Association 
 is essentially a conservative body, however, and these changes have 
 been made so gradually and so imperceptibly that we question very- 
 much if a good workman could be found who could honestly say that 
 he had lost a day's employment from the introduction of machinery. 
 Even now, in every large establishment, it is found necessary to 
 return, to a partial extent, to the old-fashioned style of casting by hand ; 
 and the curious may thus see in actual operation the most modern 
 and improved modes of moulding type as well as those that may have 
 been in use since the time of Schceffer, the first of type founders, who 
 flourished in the fifteenth century. This does not arise from the fact 
 that the productive power of the machine is deficient, but because
 
 The Printers* Register. 
 Supplement, Aug. 7, 1871. 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 71 
 
 small quantities of odd sorts of types are being regularly called for, 
 which are more conveniently produced by hand. The ordinary type- 
 casting machine in use will enable a workman to produce tour or live 
 times as many types as he could cast by hand with the "lever mould," 
 and the "lever mould" in turn enables him to throw out al least 
 a-third more than when working with the old-fashioned "ring-tailed 
 mould." The most advanced type-casting machine now working is a 
 most ingenious piece of mechanism, and effects a great, saving of 
 labour, for not only does it cast the type, but it also " breaks off," 
 " rubs," and " grooves " it before it leaves the machine. "Subbing" 
 makes each side of the type perfectly flat and true, and is usual!] 
 performed by youths, who receive 2^d. per thousand. After being 
 "rubbed," the type is "set up" by another set of children, who also 
 receive a halfpenny per thousand. In the machine we have spoken 
 of, all these processes are performed automatically, and in an ordinary 
 working day of ten hours it will turn out 30,000 types of that fount 
 known as "Long Primer," in which type leading articles arc cm 
 monly set. This is considerably more than a type founder produces 
 bv the lever mould on an average in a week. 
 
 Tvpe founders are either paid by "number" or by "the pound;" 
 that is to say, if they are employed on small types they are paid so 
 much per thousand, if on large "jobbing" types by the weigh: 
 may produce. As every "fount" and pattern of type is paid al 
 different rates, the list of prices by which a type founder's wages are 
 calculated is so elaborate and complicated that it would puzzle many 
 a good accountant. The ordinary earnings of a type founder when 
 well employed will range from 30s. to 35s. per week. The " dresser," 
 who examines the type and gives it the finishing touches before it is 
 passed into the warehouse, is paid a fixed wage, which will average 
 about 33s. weekly. So far as we can make out, the men and boys 
 employed in this occupation enjoy average health. The heat from the 
 furnaces and from the molten metal is not agreeable, and necessitates 
 much attention to ventilation. The trade is in a great measure in the 
 hands of a few large firms, however, and we are glad to say that the 
 comfort and convenience of the workpeople in most of the estab- 
 lishments are fairly consulted. "Lead colic " is not unknown 
 among the men; but if intemperance is avoided, and a due regard 
 paid to cleanliness, type founding need not be feared as an unhealthy 
 business. 
 
 Type Metal.— See Metal. 
 
 Typographic Errors. — See Proof Reading. 
 
 U. 
 
 Underlay. — Pieces of paper or cardboard placed under lines 
 or parts of formes which do not " come up,'' in order to increase 
 the impression upon them. 
 
 Unlocking Formes.— Loosening a forme by driving back 
 the quoins! When a compositor unlocks a forme, he should be 
 careful not to leave the unlocked quoins too slack, as the force 
 necessary to loosen the others may " squabble " the matter, or 
 occasion it to "hang." 
 
 Upper-ease Sorts.— The sorts that are kept in the upper- 
 case boxes. 
 
 Vignette.— A small ornamental engraving cut on the wood 
 with great delicacy, and with a large proportion of exceedingly 
 fine lines. Engravings in vignette form require, in working, 
 great attention to keep the edges light and clear, and in general 
 it is necessary to scrape away one or two thicknesses oi paper 
 in order to lighten the impression and keen it clean ; the edges 
 being irregular and straggling, they are likely to come off too 
 hard? Bearers type-high placed be'side the block will be fdund 
 advantageous; if they cannot be used, pieces of reglet. pasted 
 on the frisket in the usual way, and taking a bearing on the 
 furniture, must be substituted; but the high bearer is to be pre- 
 ferred where it can be adopted. The bearers equalize the pres- 
 sure on the surface of the engraving, and protect the edges 
 from the severity of the pull, which is always injurious to the 
 delicacy of the 'external lines. They also render the subject 
 more manageable, by enabling the pressman to add to or di- 
 minish the pressure on particular parts, so as to produce the 
 desired effect. When great delicacy of impression is required in 
 a vignette, it will be found beneficial, after the engraving is inked, 
 
 to roll the extremities with a small roller without ink ; this will 
 not only take away any superfluity oi ink. bat will prevent 
 
 pick-, and give lightness and softness to tl dges, particularly 
 
 where the effect of distance i- required. It the • ictremities are 
 
 engraved much lighter than the central part-, underla 
 
 be pa-ted on the middle of the block, which will give a firmer 
 
 ssion to the central parts of the subject. It would 
 trouble and aid in gi I ! impression if the block where 
 
 engraved a little rounded on the 
 
 W. 
 Walter Press. — See Macho 
 Warehouse Book. — A book, with ] tnexed, on the 
 
 following plan, and about the size Oi a foolscap quarto. 
 
 Dictionary of Typography. (No. Printed, 3,000.) 
 
 Date. 
 
 Receipt .of Paper, , ' 
 and of whom. l fi enA 
 
 To whom delivered, 
 with hi.- signature. 
 
 For whom. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 When the paper is brought, the warehouseman should at once 
 compare it with the bill of delivery, and. if right, enter 
 quantity immediately into the warehouse book. The number of 
 printed copies delivered to the hinder or publisher should also 
 
 lie entered, and his signature he taken at the time oi delivery. 
 This plan will prevent disputes with the bookseller or author 
 relative to the receipt of paper or the delivery of shi 
 Having entered the receipt oi the paper, I ie warehouseman 
 should then write on each bundle, with red chalk, the titl 
 the book it is to be used for, and remove it into a convenient 
 part of the warehouse, or into a store-room provided for that 
 purpose. 
 
 Warehouseman. — A workman whose duty it is to receive 
 paper into the warehouse, attend to its proper storing, give out 
 paper to wet, superintend the banging up of the paper to dry. 
 
 and the taking them down again, the filling in and pressing of 
 sheets, and the counting out and putting a\va\ ol sheets, I 
 operation- arc described in their alphabetical order. 
 
 Warping of a Cut.— A shrinking iii the w 1. caused by 
 
 being carelessly laid by. When a woodcut left on the press all 
 night has become warped, lay it on its face upon the imposing- 
 Btone, with a tew thicknesses ol damp paper underneath it. and 
 place over it the fiat side of a planer, with sufficient Wl 
 upon it ; in the course of a tew hour- the block will be restored 
 
 to its original flatness. This method is preferable to steeping the 
 
 block in water, as the stooping swells the lines of the engraving, 
 and, consequently, affects the impression. 
 
 Washing Formes. — (leaning .ill' the ink from the face ot 
 
 the type, the chase, \c. Tie tonne being worked off.it is the 
 
 duty to wash it clean from every particle of ink, not 
 
 only for the cleanly working and well standing of the letter in 
 
 the subsequent C imposing, but to save ill making ready when 
 
 the same letter gets to press again. - s " I.1Y Trough, 1.1 V. 
 
 am' l.i.y BiusH. 
 
 WayzgOOSC — The meaning, as given in various dictionaries, 
 is a '•stubble goose." A- to the origin, we have not beet: 
 to find any account to bo depended on, other than what is now 
 given, which is nearly two hundred years old. and is taken from 
 '•• Moxon's Mechamek Exercises," printed in 1683, the first prac- 
 tical work published on the art of printing: " It t- customary 
 tor all the journeymen to make every year new paper windows. 
 
 w heiher tl M ones will do or no ; because that day they make 
 
 them, the master printer gives them a Wl - I is,
 
 72 
 
 DICTIONARY OF TYPOGRAPHY. 
 
 The Printers' Hepister. 
 Supplement, Aug. 7, 1871. 
 
 them :i good feast, and not only entertains them at his 
 own house, but besides, gives them money to spend at the ale- 
 e or tavern at night: and to this feast thej invite the Cor- 
 rector, Founder, Smith, Joyner, and Tnck^maker, who all of them 
 severally (except the Corrector in his own civility) open their 
 
 purse-strings 1 add their benevolence (which workmen ac- 
 
 theii' duly, because they generally chose these workmen) 
 to the master printer's: but from the Corrector they expect 
 
 nothing, because the master printer chusing him, the work a 
 
 can do him no kindness. These way-gooses are always kept 
 aboul Bartholomew-tide. And till the master printer have given 
 this way-goose the journeymen do not use to work by candle- 
 light." ' 
 
 Wotting Paper.— Damping the sheets in order that they 
 may he rendered more pliant and receive the impression more 
 thoroughly. Saving received a certain amounl of paper from 
 the ".i-ii iman, the pressman lays one heap on the shelf 
 attached to the wetting (rough, laying the first token across the 
 heap with the back oi the quires towards his right hand, that he 
 may know when to turn the token sheet, and thai he may more 
 readily catch ai the back of each quire with that hand, for the 
 purpose of dipping it. lie then places the paper-board with its 
 
 breadth before I on his right, on a table, laying a wrapper or 
 
 a waste sheet of paper on the board, to prevent Boiling the first 
 sheet of the heap, lie then takes a quire by the centre of the 
 back with his right hand, and the edge of it in his left, and, 
 closing his hands a little, that the quire may bend downward 
 between his hands, he dips the back of the quire into the left- 
 side of the trough, and, relinquishing his hold with the 
 left hand, draws the paper briskly through the water with his 
 right. As the quire comes out, he quickly catches the edge of 
 it again in his lett hand, and bring.- it to the heap, and, by lifting 
 hi- !. md, bears the underside of the quire off the paper pre- 
 viously laid down, till he has placed the quire in an even 
 ion, he lays the back of it exactly upon the open crease 
 of the former, anil then lets the side of the quire in his left hand 
 fall flat down upon the heap, and, discharging his right hand, 
 brings it to the edge of the quire, and, with the assistance of 
 his left thumb, still in its first position, opens or divides either 
 a third or a halt of the quire, according to the quality of the 
 paper; then, spreading the fingers of his right hand as much as 
 he can through the length of the quire, turns over his opened 
 division of it upon his right-hand side of the heap. Having 
 wet his first token, he doubles down a corner of the upper sheet 
 of it on In- right hand, so that the farther corner may be a little 
 toward the left of the crease in the middle of the heap, and the 
 other corner may hang out on the near side of the heap, about 
 an inch and a half. This sheet is called the token sheet, being a 
 mark for the pies-man, when he is at work, to show how many 
 tokens of thai heap are worked off. Havingwet the whole heap, 
 he lays a wrapper, or waste sheet of paper, upon it; then, three 
 or tour times, take, up as much water as he can in the hollow 
 of his hand, and throws it over the waste sheet, to moisten and 
 soak downward into the wet part of the last division of the 
 quire: after which, he places in the heap the label which the 
 
 warehouseman must always furnish for each heap, and u] 
 
 which are written the title of the work and the date of wetting, 
 one-hall hanging out so as to be easily read. 
 
 White. — The blank spiace between lines in titles, or between 
 paragraphs, &c. — See Blames. 
 
 White Page. — See Blake Page. 
 
 White Paper. — Until the second side of a sheet is printed, 
 pressmen call the leap white paper. 
 
 Wilkinson's Cylindrical Rotary Printing Press.— 
 A machine invented by Mr. Wilkinson, which works as follows: 
 
 The paper, being made of the proper width for the sheet 
 
 intended to be printed, is wound upon a shaft in one continuous 
 
 piece, in the same form as an ordinary roll of carpeting, and at 
 the same time is damped so as to enable it to take a perfect 
 impression. The type, which is slightly conical in form, is 
 placed upon the surface of two cylinders, the circumference of 
 each of which is exactly equal to the length of the newspaper 
 to be printed. Kadi type is made in the precise line of the 
 radius oi the cylinder on which it is placed, and a small projec- 
 tion on one side of the type, with a corresponding indentation 
 on the other, furnishes a means of locking the type together on 
 the surface of the cylinder, so that it is impossible to displace 
 them by the most rapid rotary motion. The machine, being set 
 in motion by an ordinary power, the paper is unwound from its 
 shaft by the action ot an endless apron, by which it is carried 
 forward and introduced between the first type cylinder and 
 corresponding press roller, where the impression on one side of 
 the paper is made. After the first impression, the paper is still 
 carried forward, in a direct line, and immediately passes between 
 the second type cylinder and press roller, by which the im- 
 pression is made on the reverse side. The sheet being now 
 printed on both sides, is still carried forward into the apparatus 
 by which it is folded, and at the precise point when the folding 
 process is completed, a heavy standing shears, by a single blow , 
 -.palates it from its original roll, and it drops upon the floor 
 a printed newspaper ready tor immediate distribution. 
 
 Woodcuts. — -See Engravings ox Wood, and Illustrated 
 Booes. In printing from woodcuts, the workman should, before 
 pulling the first impression, see that the surface of the cut is 
 perfectly clear from particles of dirt, and that no pin or lump of 
 paste is on the tympan. He ought then to pull very gently, or 
 he may injure some of the fine lines of the engraving. Neither 
 the pressure nor the impression of an engraving on wood should 
 be uniformly equal ; if it be, the effect intended to be produced 
 by the artist will fail; and, instead of light, middle tint, and 
 shade, an impression will be produced that possesses none of 
 them in perfection ; some parts will be too hard and black, 
 while other parts will have neither pressure nor colour enough, 
 nor any of the mildness of the middle tint, which ought to 
 pervade a large part of an engraving, and on which the eye 
 repose- after viewing the strong lights and the deep shades. 
 
 Wood Type. — Type cut on wood, for large placards, &c. To 
 prevent warping, all very large wood type should be set up on 
 the edge when put away, so that both sides may be equally ex- 
 posed to the air. In cleaning it, neither ley nor water should be 
 employed under any circumstances. Turpentine, camphene, 
 benzine, or kerosene oil may be used; but turpentine and 
 camphene are the best. Procure a small, shallow pan ; lay the 
 forme flat on a board ; pour out six tablespoonfuls of turpentine 
 into the pan: touch the face of the brush to the turpentine, and 
 pass it quickly over the forme before it evaporates. Six to eight 
 spoonfuls of fluid will be found sufficient to clean a large forme, 
 if thus used. 
 
 Working in Pocket.— See Companionship. 
 
 Xylography. — The art of engraving on wood. — See En- 
 graving and Illustrated Books.. 
 
 THE E N I).
 
 SPECIAL SUPPLEMENT TO THE PRINTERS' REGISTER 
 
 QUARCENTENARY OF ENGLISH PRINTING. 
 
 • WW\^WWK' 
 
 EKiHTKKX HUNDKED AM> SEVENTY-ONE, remarkable in it- very Lnfkncy as the date of the restoration 
 of the German Empire, and the surrender of the finest <iiy in Europe to a German imperial army-^and which, 
 as we write, is already full of presages of memorable transactions— will likewise be commemorative of the Four 
 Hundredth Anniversary of an event which, ferillianl as those maj appear, in its moral and material aspects transcends 
 the must renowned of martial deeds or dynastic achievements. In nothing bo much as in this event ha- there ever 
 been so powerful a confirmation of the sentiment, that " Peace hath her victories nol Less renowned than War." It 
 has been well and truly said, that the Art of Printing is the most important invention that was ever introduci 
 the world, in its effects on the human mind, and, consequently, on all civilized society. It preserves and disseminates 
 all discoveries and improvements in the arts and sciences. It commemorates all other inventions. It hands down 
 
 in posterity every important event. It immortalises the actions of the great and g 1: and. above all. it extends 
 
 and diffuses the Word of Truth to all mankind. The art had no small share in the glorious Reformation: and all 
 
 the eulogiums that might be uttered in praise of Printing would fall shun, i nsely short, of it- sublime mi 
 
 The first printed book upon record is the Book of Psalms, Germany having the honour of being the birth-place 
 of the Art in 1471 : John Gutenburg, of Mentz. being the inventor. 
 
 Although the point has been disputed, the generality of English chroniclers tell us that Printing in England was 
 first practised by William Caxton, in 1171. within the precincts of Westminster Abbey. What may have been the 
 particular spot hallowed by the presence of the first printing press is difficult to determine whether St. Catherine's 
 Chapel or the Almonry is uncertain: all traces of the one, and almost all traces of the other, have disappeared. It 
 is, however, a fact that the name by which printers call their trade meetings a "Chapel" is derived from the 
 consecrated place where the founders of the profession fust met : in a chapel ..f the Abbey. And the Patriarch of 
 English printing is interred, if not within the walls of the Abbey, yet immediately underneath it- shadow probably 
 within St. Margaret's Church. Into the incidents of Caxton's personal history we do not propose to enter, though 
 
 the omission may subject US to the imputation of presenting " Hamlet" to our readers with the character of Hamlet 
 himself eliminated. Suffice it to say, that, horn in Cent in 1412, he was apprenticed to an opulent merchant in 
 London, he went to the Low" Countries (at the age of thirty) in 1442, and remained abroad nearly thirty 
 during which time he made himself master of the art of printing. Another version is that he was sent to the 
 
 Low Countries in L464, by Edward the Fourth, to negoeiate a treaty with the Duke of Burgundy, and -some time 
 after" that period returned to England with the invaluable art. In either case he would 1..- a sexagenarian when 
 lie began printing at Westminster. He died about the year L491 ; hut during his comparatively short typographical 
 
 career he printed in all sixty-four different works, though in a literary point id' view his work- indicate hut a low- 
 state of knowledge in England. 
 
 For the following account of some of Caxton's immediate BUCCCSSOrS, eminent men among the numher. we are 
 
 indebted mainly to a learned and ingenious writer in the eighteenth century— Dr. Conyers Middleton, Principal 
 Librarian of Cambridge, who, in 1735, printed a curious ■• Dissertation concerning the Origin of Printing in England." 
 
 Contemporaneously will! Caxton's operations at Westminster, However obscure may lie the evidence a- to who taught 
 
 two printers had established themselves m London in list'. English prototypographer the art and mystery of printing, there 
 
 Thej are the tirsi metropolitan typographers of whom mention i- quite a- much obscurity in the enquiry, To whom did I 
 
 .- made. Prom their names John l.i.rnu and William impart a knowledge of the art ? Associated with him, ind 1. 
 
 Machlinia they arc surmised to have been foreigners. Their was Himon di Wonm Jan whether as Devil or Father of the 
 
 nationality, however, i- uncertain. The vicinity of allhallows Chapel doi - not appear. He was a native of the sniihi c 
 
 Church was their place of business. Una work was their chief rince of Lorraine at tl.i- moment more than ever :. 
 
 production; and, whether owing to the tact that Londoners were of the great battle-fields in the Franco-German war just ended, 
 
 less litigious in the fifteenth centurythan in time- more modern, am! which has passed from the hands of the conquered it 
 
 or from some other cause, they appear to have "dried up" (to gripe of the conqueror. Whatever maj have I n the relation m 
 
 use -i technical expression) in 1483. The description of type which he stood towards Caxton, with lumdeWorde remained till 
 
 used by this firm was a Gothic, very curse, and more rude than the death of the former in 1481. Succ ling to the bust 
 
 Caxton's Westminster, he continued to prosecute it in Caxton's own house, 

 
 2 
 
 where he remained for a period of six years, and simull ilsy 
 
 ■l on a branch concern a1 a house in Fleet-street, distin- 
 guished by the sign of the Sun, In the seventh year oi the 
 reign of Henry the Seventh ] 191 I, he appears to have been the 
 *nised Parliamentary printer, Acta printed in thai day, sur- 
 ited with the King's Arms, having the cypher, bj wa3 of 
 imprint, which Caxton himself used, and which de Worde 
 adopted .-i- his own. His connection with Caxton brought him 
 in c intacl wiih the learned and noble, and in cours i of time he 
 styled himself 1'rinter to Margaret, the King's grandame. His 
 skill in the arl lias been highli i ided. His firsl greal 
 
 undertaking, as soon as he became M.I'., was t" cul a ne^ set 
 of punches, which he Mink into matrices, and cast several founts 
 of type for his own use. One circumstance especially conduces 
 i- in i thai In- wa- In- own founder: the letter used in his 
 
 first-printed I ks was of the description used by all the London 
 
 printers of the period. It was truly cast, ranging perfectly; 
 and for many years afterwards no inn- excelled him, ami he hail 
 lew equals, in the variety ami size of his types. Excellence was 
 also a characteristic of his professional skill; while he was a 
 person of meal literarj accomplishments and of unblemished 
 
 reputation. The 1! m letter now in general use was by him 
 
 introduced into England. To him also we owe the commence- 
 ment of the Year-Book. Being a man of great genius ami con- 
 siderable scope nt fancy, he was something more than a mere 
 printer, every department connected with book-making and 
 publishing being combined under In- direction. He died some- 
 where ah. nt lie' year 1534, being then nearly eighty years old. 
 In his will, dated the 5th June, 1534, he wrote himself citizen 
 and stationer of London, lie commended his soul to God and 
 to the blessed St. Mary, and d (reeled his body to he buried ill the 
 parochial church oi St. Bride's, in Fleet-street, before the high 
 altar of St. Katharine. His bequests consisted of the following: 
 — For t\ tins forgotten, 6s. 8d. j to Hie fraternity of our Lady, of 
 which he was a brother, LOs., to pray tor his soul; to his maid- 
 servant, £3 in books; to Agnes Tidder, widow, 40s. in books ; to 
 
 Uniier! Darby, £'."> in printed I ks; to John Barbanson, 60s. in 
 
 1 ks ami ten mark- ; to Hector, hi- servant, live marks sterling 
 
 in I ks; to VVistin, 20s. in printed books; to .Vowel, a book- 
 binder in Shoe-lane. 'ju-. in hook-; to Simon, another servant, 
 
 i'ii-. in printed I ks; to every one of his apprentices I tin' 
 
 number of whom i- not stated), £3 in printed hook.-; to John 
 Butler, a former servant. £6 in hook-; to a third servant, John 
 Ganer, printed hook- to the amount of twenty marks: to Henry 
 Pepwell, stationer, i'l in printed hooks: to John Gouge, in ad- 
 dition to releasing him from a certain debt, £4; to Robert 
 Copland, ten marks; to one Uard, bookbinder, the fourth indi- 
 vidual described as In- servant, and which is a relative term 
 tor workman, £6 l">s. Id.: "and forgive John Bedel, stationer, 
 all the money he owes me. \e., for executing this my will, with 
 Jane- Ganer; and that they, with the consent of the wardens of 
 the parish of St. Bride's, purchase at least 20s. a year in or near 
 the City, to pray tor my soul." Thus we see de Word,' was liberal 
 as well as rich ; for the legacies above-mentioned, looking at the 
 value of money in the fifteenth century, n presents a consider- 
 able fortune. It is pleasing to reflect o i usideration which 
 he bestowed on his workpeople, all of whom appear to liave 
 
 been provided for more or less in the g 1 man's last will and 
 
 testament. l'r the tenour of this document, de Worde seems 
 
 to have 1 n childless and spouseless : but, seeing that there was 
 
 "a widow in the ca.-e," ii is just possible that he was not so 
 entirely absorbed in commercial enterprise as to have remained 
 all his lifetime untouched by gentler influences. 
 
 Next to this famous lieutenant of our Premier Printer conies 
 Bo n mm. i'v sso\. or Pinson. of Norman lineage, he operated 
 with de Worde in Caxton's establishment. Having become an 
 expert workman, ambition prompted him to venture into busi- 
 ness mi hi- own account during Caxton's lifetime. At Court he 
 
 was held in much esteem, and. besides being honoured with the 
 
 commands of the lady Margaret, mother of Henri the Seventh, 
 from His Maje.-ty himself he received a patent as King's Printer. 
 With Wynkyn de Worde, who survived him about six years, he 
 maintained the friendship of earlier years, thus showing an 
 ■ < ption to the adage that two of a trade can never agree. 
 
 M ; 1 1 1 > 1 ks, we are told, were printed by this great artist, and 
 
 "lie cau-eil many pretty device.- to lie stamped upon them." 
 The year 1529 is mentioned as the period of his death. His first 
 hook, bearing date L493, i.- entitled, " A Compendious Treatise 
 Dialogue of Dives and Pauper," and contains the following 
 remarkable passage relating to the Fair Rosamond, which we 
 
 render in modern orthi igraphj : 
 
 We read that in England was a King that had a concubine, whose 
 name was Rose, and for her great beauty he called her Etose-a Monde 
 
 — thai i- to -a> . 8 i-e of the World; hu- he thought that she surpassed 
 
 all Women in beauty. It befel that -he died and wa- buried w hile the 
 
 King wa- absent ; and w hen he came home, for great love that he had 
 to her, he would see the body in the grave, and. when the grave was 
 opened, there sat an horrible toad upon her bosom, between her 
 
 breaStS, ami a foul adder bit her hidv ah all the middle, and -he 
 
 -iioik -o i ha i the King, nor any other, could stand 1 i ei the horrible 
 .-ieju. linn the King did shut again the "rave, and did write these 
 two ver ion the grave: — 
 
 Hie jacel in tumba rose mundi non rosamunda. 
 
 Nen redolet sed olei quod redolere, sole, >Vc, 
 
 JULIAN Xhtaiiv nourished at Westminster in 1500. lie had 
 previously, however, practised the art in France. In lot):; he had 
 removed to St. Clement's parish, and near to Teniple-har; and 
 being, possibly, one of those rolling stones which are said to 
 gather no moss, in 1515 he bad shifted his quarters to St. Paul's 
 Churchyard. " near the west door, by my Lord of London's 
 palace," a! the --i- ii of the Three Kings. 
 
 William Faques, reputed to be an excellent workman, and 
 resident at St. Helen's, wa- King's Printer in 1503; his name 
 being united with that of Richard I'ynson in the royal letters 
 patent. Their joint imprint, describing themselves as Kino's 
 Printers, is attached to a certain Act of Parliament passed in the 
 nineteenth year of the reign of Henry the Seventh i 1503), 
 
 Briefly recording the name of John Shot, or Scon, win. is 
 Supposed to have been instructed by de Worde or Pynson, and 
 who operated first in the neighbourhood of Newgate, and sub- 
 sequently in Bishopsgate Without,— ami also that of Thomas 
 Iduu'iiKV, of Temple-bar, we are introduced to 
 
 John Rastell, a gentleman educated at Oxford University, 
 
 where he chiefly devoted himself to the study of law. Printing 
 being at that lime deemed a profession worthy of the scholar or 
 
 man of genius, Rastell, on quitting I ixford in loiv, embarked in 
 the business. Remarkable for piety and learning, he became 
 intimate with the eminent Sir Thomas More, who,-,' sister Eliza- 
 beth he espoused in marriage. He wa- zealous for the Catholic 
 cause, and a great hater of the policy of Henry the Eighth. This 
 
 John Rastell died in 1536, leaving as issue two sons John 
 I' , II. a justice of the peace, who had a daughter married to 
 Hr. Laugher, Chancellor of the diocese of Exeter; an 1 William 
 Rastell, author of a book of law-terms, and a verj noted printer 
 of law books. 'I'he first "Abridgement of the English statute-" 
 was by him printed, and the preface urges the following rca-oiis 
 for its publication ;
 
 3 
 
 Because that the laws of this realm, as well the statute-; and other 
 
 judgments and decrees, be made and written most i imonly in the 
 
 French tongue, divers men thereof muse, and have oftimes communi 
 cation and argument considering, I hat m reason every law whereto any 
 people should be bounden ought and should be written in such manner, 
 and so openly published and declared, that the people might soon, 
 without great difficulty, have the knowledge of the said laws, lint 
 the very cause why the -aid law- of England were written in the 
 French tongue should seem to be this: First, it is not unknown that 
 when William, Ouko of Normandy, came into this land, and slew 
 King Harold and conquered the whole realm, there was a great num- 
 ber of people, as well gentlemen as other, that came with him, which 
 
 Understood not the vulvar tongue that was at that time used in this 
 
 realm, but only the French tongue; and also because the -aid Kin:;, 
 and other great wise men of hi- council, perceived and supposed t hat 
 the vulgar tongue which was then used in tin- realm was, in a manner, 
 but homely and rude, nor had not so great copy and abundance >i 
 words as the French tongue then had, nor that vulgar tongue wa 
 not of itself sufficient to expound and declare the matter of such 
 
 laws and ordinal - a- they had determined to be made for the g I 
 
 government of the people so effectually, and so substantially, as they 
 could indite them in the French tongue; therefore they ordered, 
 wrote, and endited the said laws, that they made, in the French tongue. 
 And furthermore, Long after the coming of King William the Con 
 queror, because that the use of the French tongue in this realm began 
 to minish, and because that divers people that inhabited within this 
 realm could neither speak the vulgar tongue of tin- realm ma- the 
 French tongue, therefore the wise men of this realm caused to tie 
 ordered that the matter- of tie' law and actions between partio- -le oil. I 
 be pleaded, answered, debated, and judged in the English vulgar 
 tongue, and moreover that written and entered of record in the rolls 
 in the Latin tongue, because that every man generally and in differ 
 entlv, might have the knowledge thereof, a- appeareth by a statute 
 made in the thirty-sixth year of Edward the Third [1362] ; wherefore, 
 as I suppose, for these causes before rehearsed, which was intended 
 for a right good purpose, hut yet, besides thi-. now of late days the 
 most noble Prince, our late sovereign lord. Kmg Henry the Seventh- 
 worthy to be called the Second s.lomon, which excelled in politic 
 wisdom all other princes that reigned in thi- realm before thi- time — 
 considering and perceiving that our vulgar English tongue wa- mar- 
 vellously amended and augmented, by reason that diver- famous 
 clerks and learned men had translated and made many noble works 
 into our English tongue, whereby there wa- much more plenty oil 
 abundance of English used than there wa- in time- past; and by 
 reason thereof our vulgar tongue, so amplified and sufficient of itself 
 to expound any laws or ordinances which wa- need in I to be made for 
 the order of this realm; and also the same wi-e Prince considering 
 
 that the universal i pie of this realm had great pleasure an. 1 gave 
 
 themselves greatlv to the reading of the vulgar English tongue. 
 ordered and caused that all the statutes ami ordinances which were 
 made for the commonwealth of this realm in his days should lie 
 endited and written in the vulgar English tongue, and to lie pub 
 lished, declared, and imprinted, so that then universally the people of 
 the realm might soon have the knowledge of the -aid statutes and 
 ordinances, which they were bound to observe, and so to reas m of 
 that knowledge to avoid the danger and penalties of the same statutes, 
 and also the better to live in tranquility and peace; which discreet, 
 charitable, and reasonable order, our most dread sovereign fed that 
 now is, King Henry the Eighth, hath continued and followed, ami 
 caused all the statutes that hath been made in his days lo be J 
 endited and written in our English tongue, to the inti n1 that all his 
 
 liege people might have the knowledge thereof. All winch - Uy 
 
 purposes and interests, in my mind oftimi - revolved, hath caused me 
 to take this little pain- to translate out of French into English the 
 abbreviation of the statutes, which contain I md penalties, 
 
 made before the first year of the reign of our sovereign lord Kin" 
 Henry the Seventh. And also, though tin- statutes made a- well 
 in the time of the said King Ibniw the Seventh as in the lime of our 
 Sovereign lord that now o be sufficiently endited and written in our 
 
 English tongue, yet, to them that bedesirous shortly to know il ffect 
 
 of them, they be more tedious to read than though the matter and effect 
 of them were compendiously abbreviate; wherefore now, a- far as 
 my simple wit ami -mall learning will extend, 1 have here taken 
 upon me to abridge the effect of them more shortly in thi 
 
 I k beseeching all them to whom the sight hereof -lull cine to 
 
 accept h i'< gree; and though thev shall fortune tn find anything 
 ini-reported, or omitted by my negligence, else by negligence oi the 
 printer, that it would like them to pardon me. and to consider mi 
 
 idwill, which have intended ii tor a commonwealth, In- the 
 
 and considerations before rehearsed ; and also that it fortune them to 
 be in doubt in any point thereof, yet. if it please them, they may 
 
 refer to the whole statute whereof thi- book i- but a bridgement,and 
 
 m in. i m than 
 
 equitable, would d e of this appeal to the For- 
 
 mce of critics of the -iv Ind furthermore I will 
 
 r in ure to 
 
 resort to - ime man thai i- learned in the law- of this realm, to 
 
 hi- e. ion.,.] in SUCh pant- which he thillketh doubt 
 
 thi e '. the knowledge whereof, and by the di 
 
 observing of the -a he ma-, thi better do id- duty I i hi- I 
 
 and sovereign, and al i live in trail |uilil and peace with hi- neigh* 
 b.iur, are irding to the pi Almighty l 
 
 to whom be eternal laud and glory. Amen. 
 
 Parting company from this limb of the law. whose legal 
 
 training ia in-taiie.-d by nothing BO lunch a- hi- verbosity, we 
 
 next make the acquaintance of Roberi and William Cop- 
 land the lir-l of wleiin worked either with or for Wynkyn 
 
 dc Worde, in whose poti mortem Gm •- he shared a- a leg 
 
 Besides being a printer. R it wa- ; and I k-eller. 
 
 as well a- translator ami author. A house in Fleet-street, dis- 
 playing the sign of the Rose Garland, was his principal place 
 of business. William is described a- the son of Robert, v. 
 first production i" I from the pre-, in 1515. A ng other 
 
 works he printed the ••Introduction of Knowledge," by Andrew 
 
 Horde, physician, treating of the natural disposition of an En- 
 glishman, and of the money then used. A w lent repn - 
 
 an Englishman apparently the count I the 
 
 Bluff King Hal in a -late of nudity, holding over one arm a 
 
 piece of broadcloth, while hi- dexter hand grasps a pair of 
 shears: and. in illustration of the (ickle-mindedness tor which 
 Anglo-Saxons have an ancient reputation, he i- thus made to 
 soliloquise : — 
 
 I am an Englishman, and naked I -land here, 
 Mn ingin mj mynde what rayment I shall were; 
 For now l were this, and now I wil were that, 
 
 \..w I wil were, I eaiuiot t,-ll w hat. 
 
 Contemporai u-ly with these laymen, who continued in 
 
 business nil 1561, we have as a fellow -cratt-inan one of the 
 
 Judges of the Court of Common Pleas John Hi n.r.tt. or 
 Hoi i.nat. who had a printing-house at tie- sign ol tie- St John 
 the Evangelist, in Fleet-street; but, apparently devoting him- 
 self wiih greater assiduity to jurisprudence than to typography, 
 he is represented to have done little business in the latter. It 
 would scarcely puzzle an English judge, much less a Philadel- 
 phia!] lawyer, to determine which of the two profess 
 
 rule, brings the greater amount of grist to the mill: and his 
 limited practice in t li ■ nice may have been the result 
 
 of augmented duties in the other. 
 
 Four years later (1534) ROBERT \\ \ I K. whose 1 ks. like 
 
 those of many other early printers, contained no dale, practised 
 
 near Charing-cross. 
 
 In 1525, coincident with He Worde. Pinsen, and Rastell, Ro- 
 bert KriiM v\ was known a- a law printer, and. after IV - 
 death, occupied his premises, preserving tie sign oi I 
 
 Richard Banes, in 1540, having then been several years in 
 business, was granted letters patent by Henry the Eighth tor 
 printing the Epistles and Gospels. 
 
 Laurence Andrew, who. before he became a printer, had 
 
 be, 11 a translator, and was a native ot Calais, practised the art 
 
 in Fleet-street, at" the -i - m oi the Goldi a t ross, near Fleet 
 Bridge. 
 
 John Ki vms wh se place ot business in 1527 was in St. 
 Paul's Churchyard, at the sign ot St. George, and who coml 
 
 bookselling and bookbinding with the typ. graphic branch, was 
 noted lor the pretty devices on his book-covers, such as the
 
 <4> 
 
 arms and supporters of Jesus Christ, \\ ith die motto, " Redemp- 
 toris niundi lU'iua." 
 
 Thomas Bkrthei.i r, Esq., who, on the death of Pinson, 
 
 King's Printer, about this time occupied premises in 
 
 Fleet-street, with the sign of Lucretia Romana. In 1546, by 
 Royal command, he printed .1 proclamation directing the sup- 
 pression of books containing "pernicious errors and heresies," 
 and wherein it was enjoined thai "none shall receive, take, 
 have, or keep in his or her possession, the text of the New 
 Testament of Tyndal's or Coverdale's translation in English, nor 
 any other than is permitted by the Act of Parliament." 
 
 Richard Fawki s, presumably a foreigner, and possibly an 
 ancestor of the renowned Guido, printed an "indulgence" 
 in 1520. 
 
 John II iwkins, iii 1533, printed " Merlin's Prophecies," from 
 which the following is an extract, and which a Huh' ingenious 
 rendering might be made applicable to current events: 
 
 Si 1 en and ten addyed to nine* 
 
 Of Fraunce her woe this is the sygne. 
 
 Tamys river twys v frozen, 
 
 Walk sans wetyng shoes ne hozen. 
 
 Th. mi eomyth foorthe, tch understonde, 
 
 From town of Stoffe to fattyn Londe, 
 
 An herdie chyftan ' woe the morne 
 
 To France thai ev er In- was borne. 
 
 Then -hall the sythe bewayle hi- bosse; 
 
 Nor -hall LTi-i fi » berrys make up the losse. 
 
 S 1;' Symnele -hall again miscarrye : 
 
 And Norway's pryd again -hall marrey. 
 And from 1 he 1 ree blossums feele, 
 
 Ripe Unit -hall run,', anil all i- well. 
 
 KrainiM'-* -hall donee honde in honde, 
 Ami ii -hall be merrye in old Inglonde. 
 Tlien old tngl mde shall he no mnre,§ 
 And no man -hall be sorrie 1 herefore. 
 Geryon -hall have three hedes agayne, 
 Till Hapsburgl makyth them but twayne." 
 
 Another noted printer at this time was William Rasteli., 
 a nephew of sir Thomas More, already referred to. lie was an 
 hut classical scholar, having matriculated at Oxford, and 
 subsequently studied in Lincoln's-inn. In 1554, when in his 
 forty-sixth year, he was made a sergeant-at-law, and. a little 
 before the demise of Queen Mary, was appointed one of the 
 Justices of the Court of Common Pleas. The chief productions 
 of hi- 1 .re— were law works and religious publications, his own 
 creed being that nt a Roman Catholic, in the maintenance of 
 which he was conspicuous for his zeal. On the accession of 
 Queen Elizabeth, lie retired t.. Louvain, and in 1565 died there. 
 
 Thomas Gibson, being a studious man as well as a printer, 
 
 ( ipiled the first Concordance to the English Xew Testament 
 
 (1534). 
 
 William Marsh \i,i.. described as a gentleman or merchant, 
 having interest at Court, was licensed to print the first Re- 
 formed or Protestant Primer abrogating Papal Supremacy in 
 1534, tin- year nt' the Reformation, and which had the sanction 
 of tin- Queen, Anne Boleyn. 
 
 With the name of the subject of our succeeding biogra2>hical 
 notice is associated one of the most momentous events in the 
 
 • T. 10, 9= 126. nil tin' 2(Hh -1 1 ebruary, iii the present year, the preli i ii - 
 
 . .: pr jr.- between Krance ami 1 termany were sig I at Verities. 
 
 t Who might be Von Moltke. 
 
 X Tin- in in potentati - have latelj been dancing hand in hand with the King- 
 - turn, has been .tin. Ing a met »itii his beloved nephew, 
 
 § No more a monitor in " Dan I i -. t I." 
 
 Germany, Msace, and I .rain,.. 
 
 ^| When \n-tri 1 takes vengeance on Prussia foi her own discomfit tire al Sad ■ i, 
 
 and aids France In recover!] .a provinces. 
 
 history of Christendom the printing of the first English Bible, 
 This was Richard Grafton, Esq. Born in London, at the 
 
 latter end of the reign of Henry the Seventh, his career as a 
 
 printer extended through the reign of four sovereigns Henry 
 the Eighth, Edward the sixth. Mary, and Elizabeth. II'- was 
 endowed with a liberal education, appears to have been a 
 linguist, and was on term- nt intimacy with the Upper Ten 
 Thousand of In- own day. although in letters addressed to 
 Archbishop Cranmer and Oliver Cromvi ell respectively, he refers 
 
 to himself a- a grocer. The year 1537 i- menti id aa the 
 
 period of his manipulations in tin- metropolis; hut previouslj 
 to this date he was a resident of Antwerp, in which city he 
 printed Tindall's New Testament, and afterwards his Bible, cor- 
 rected and revised by Mile- Coverdale. Copies of the former 
 having obtained circulation in England, they were bought up 
 by the Bishop of London. Cuthbert Tunstal, and publicly burnt 
 at St. Paul's Cross. He moreover issued a prohibitive pastoral, 
 in th.- terms following: — 
 
 Cuthbert, by tin- permission of 0.1.1, Bishop of London, unto our 
 well-beloved in Christ, the Archdeacon of London, or to hi- official: 
 health, grace, and heiie.lirti .11. By the duty "1 our pastoral office, 
 we are bound diligently with all our power t<. foresee, provide for, 
 
 root i. lit, and put away all tllOSe thine- which -rem I., tend hi the 
 
 peril and danger ..t our subjects, and especially t.. the destruction 
 .a th.ar - ail-. Wherefore we, having understanding by the report 
 nt divers creditable persons, and al-.. by the evident appearance .'I' 
 the matter, that many children of iniquity, maintainers of Luther's 
 -e.-t. blinded through extreme wickedness, wandering from the way 
 nt' Truth and the Catholic faith, craftily have translated the Nov 
 Testament int.- our English tongue, intermeddling therewith many 
 heretical articles and erroneous opinions, pernicious and offensive, 
 seducing the simple people, attempting l.v their wicked and perverse 
 interpretations t.. prophanate the majesty ».t the scripture, which 
 
 hitherto hath remai I undefiled, and craftily to abuse the most 
 
 holy Word of God and the true sense "I the same, of the which 
 translation there are many books imprinted, -nine with gloses ami 
 -..me wit In mi, containing in the English tongue t hat most pestiferous 
 and mosl pernicious poison, dispersed throughout all our diocese -.1 
 London in great number; which truly, without it be speedily fore- 
 si en, with.. ut doubt will contaminate ami infect the flock committed 
 to ii-. with most deadly poison and heresy, to the grievous peril and 
 
 danger nt' the -mils nmitted to our charge, and the offence ol 
 
 God's divine Majesty. Wherefore we, Cuthbert, the bishop afore- 
 sai I. grievously sorrowing tor the premisses, wilting to withstand the 
 craft and subtlety of the ancient enemy ami his ministers, which 
 seek the destruction of my flock, and with a diligent care in take 
 heed iintn the il.,k committed to my charge, desiring t.> provide 
 speedy remedy for the premisses; we charge you jointly ami seve- 
 rally .ami by virtue .,1 your obedience straightly enjoin and command 
 v.ui, that by our authority you warn, or cause to be warned, all and 
 singular, as well exempt a- not exempt, dwelling within your arch- 
 deaconries, that within thirty days' space, whereof ten days shall 
 I... for the first, leu for the second, and ten for the third peremptory 
 terms, under pain of excommunication and incurring the suspicion 
 of heretic, they do bring in, and really deliver unto our vicar-general 
 
 all and singular such I k- containing the translation of the New 
 
 Testament in the English tongue; and that you do certify to us, or 
 our -aid commissary, within two months after the day of the date 
 
 nt ill presents, duly, personally or by your letters, together with 
 
 these presents, under your seal, what you have done in the premisses, 
 under pain nt' contempt. Given under .air seal the 22nd October, 
 in the fifth year of our consecration, 1">2G. 
 
 This pastoral, which was likewise addressed to the Arch- 
 deacons of Middlesex, Essex, and Colchester, failed of its in- 
 tended effect. Oivai complaints on the ] art of the bishops and 
 clergy were made t.. the King in reference to this translation, 
 whereupon Mi- Majesty resolved to take the matter into his own 
 consideration. In 1533 the Convocation, among other things, 
 decreed that the Scriptures should he translated into the vulgar 
 tongue; hut its execution was delayed. 
 
 i To be concluded '» a Special Supplement *- our next Nut 
 
 LL 
 
 PRIXTED AT THE OFFICE OF THE PRIXTJ RS' REGISTER, LOXD03
 
 SPECIAL SUPPLEMENT TO THE PRINTERS' REGISTER. 
 
 At this time Grafton occupied in part the I se of the Grej 
 
 Friars (this order having been dissolved), which was after- 
 wards granted by Edward the Sixtb for a hospital for the 
 
 maintenani f the Christchurch Boys. IIk earliest work was 
 
 tln> first edition of the English Bible, by Miles Coverdale, printed 
 abroad in 1535 -either at Paris or Marsburgh, in the province ol 
 
 Hesse. It was a folio volume, and c tained the following 
 
 dedication (altered to the present orthography): — 
 
 Unto tiic in i-t victorious Prince and our most gracious sovereign 
 lord. King Henry the Eighth, King nf England and ol Franci 
 nf Ireland, i.\. Defender of the Faith, and under God the 
 supreme head of the Church ol England. The right and jusl ad 
 
 stration of t he laws that God gave unto M - and unto Josuah ; the 
 
 testimony of faithfulness thai God gave ol David; the plenti >u 
 abundance of wisdom thai God gave unto Solomon; the luck; 
 
 prosperous age with the multiplication of - 1 which God gave unto 
 
 Abraham and .Sarah his wife, be given unto you, mosl graciou 
 Prince, with your dearest just wife and most virtuous Princess, Queen 
 Jane. Amen. 
 
 To this dedication is the signature 
 
 Your Grace's humble subject and daily orator, Miles Covi bdale. 
 
 Soon after the completion of this Bible, certain " Injunctions 
 to the Clergy, by the authority of the King's Highness" were 
 promulgated by Cromwell, in his capacity as Keeper of the Privy 
 Seal. One enjoined, -That every person or proprietary ol any 
 parish church within this realm shall, on ihis side the Feast of 
 St. Peter ml vinculo (1st August I uexl coming, provide e booh of 
 the whole Bible, both in Latin and also in English, and lay the 
 same in the choir for every man thai will to look and read 
 thereon; and shall discourage no man from the reading any parts 
 
 of the Bible in Latin or English, but rather i tfort, exhort, and 
 
 admonish every man to read the same as the very Word of God 
 and the spiritual food of man's soul, whereby they maj better 
 know their duties to God, to their sovereign lord the King, and 
 their neighbours; ever gently and charitably exhorting them, 
 that, using a sober and modest behaviour in the reading and 
 inquisition of the true Bense of the same, they do in no wise 
 stiffly or eagerly contend to strive one with another about the 
 same, but refer the declaration of those places thai be in contro- 
 versy to the judgment of them that be better learned." 
 
 In the year following a folio edition of the Bible made its 
 appearance, having the title, "The Bible, which is all the Holy 
 Scripture, in which are contayned tlieOlde and Newe Testament, 
 truely and purelye translated into Englyshe. By Thomas Mat- 
 thews." At the beginning of the books of Prophecy the initials 
 R. G. are printed at the head of the page. E. W. at the foot, 
 representing the names respectively of Richard Grafton and 
 Edward Whitchurch, who were associated in partnership, and tit 
 whose charge and expense the publication was undertaken. At 
 the end of the Old Testament are the initial letters W. T„ indi- 
 cating that William Tyndall was the translator. Archbishop 
 
 t'raniner. who had in the interval 1 n raised to the See of 
 
 Canterbury, patronised this edition, and, using his interest with 
 Cromwell, procured the royal licence for it. Moreover the clergj 
 were directed to pro\ ide « ithin a certain time " one hook of the 
 
 whole Bihle of the largest volume in English, and the S e sel 
 
 up in some convenient place within their churches thai they 
 
 have cure of, whereas their parishonera might most comiiio- 
 diously resort to the same and read it ; and that the charges 
 Of this hook should he raleably home between them and the 
 
 parishioners aforesaid; that is to say, one-half by the parson and 
 the other half by them." 
 
 At this early stage of the art literary pirae\ was not unknown, 
 and in a letter to Cranmer, dated With August, 1537, Grafton 
 complained of a design on the part of Dutch printers to issue 
 
 dition of the Bible. He also reiterated this complaint 
 '"in B iend, thi I. ird I'm y Seal (Cr unwell . urging 
 greal loss to himself and pai • II a- injury and wrong to 
 
 public, would result from this contemplated infringera 
 To His Lordship he represented that they had incurred a 
 outlaj not less a sum than £500 in completing this edition, 
 
 ' porti f which sum would be losl to them it the Dutch 
 
 ra fulfilled their design to print the Bame in a -mailer tyi>e 
 and lesser volume, and thus be enabled to undersell them 
 (Grafton and Whitchurch). And not only themselves, but the 
 
 public too. would suffer by the threatened piracy: for, the Dutch 
 printers being unable to speak or write English, their edition 
 
 would probablj be "exc lingh and incorrect," they 
 
 being generally so covetous as nol to L r i\e sufficient e u 
 
 meni t iv learned man to o . and 
 
 its defects would culminate in had paper and print, 
 
 therefore besought < Sromwell to procure from isB 
 three-years' exclusive copyright, adding the further requi 
 having a keen eye to business iroughout 
 
 the realm should be requested to possess one copy of the Bible, 
 while every abbey should be supplied with six copies; thu 
 inference herefrom deduced hem-- thai he contemplated another 
 edition, the number acta. illy prime. 1 (fifteen hundred copies) 
 being insuffii ienl to supply a demand so large as would tl as 
 created. Ultimately it was resolved thai a revised edition of 
 Matthews' version should be printed. Grafton and Whitchurch 
 were accordingly seieet.il. and. there being better printers in 
 France than in England at that time, and better paper also 
 obtainable in that country, the printing was bj Royal authority 
 transferred to Paris. Here, however, an untoward event happened. 
 On the 17th December, 1538, the Inquisition inhibited the pri 
 from prosecuting their work, threatening them with canonical 
 
 pains and penalties in case of disobedience. Some were pro- 
 duced before the dread tribunal, and charged with heresy: - 
 
 the English pi f-readers Bed from Paris. The entire ii 
 
 2,500 si ts, was seized and confiscated; but, on the intercession 
 
 ol < omwell, some of the English workmen returned to Paris, 
 and brought away the presses, tj pe, and c imp< siti rs; by which 
 means the work was resumed in London, and completed in the 
 course of the year following. In November, 1539, Loyal letl 
 patent directed that no printers other than thos Crom- 
 
 well might appoint should within five years from that date 
 be allowed to print the Bible in the English tongue. An 
 those to whom the privilege was extended were John Biddel, 
 
 Thomas Barthelet, &c. In this year Cra r's, or the Great 
 
 Bible (as if was denominated i, mad.- its first appearance. II 
 entitled, " The Bible in Englyshe; that is to say, the conten 
 all the Holy Scripture, both of the Olde and Newe Testament, 
 truely translated alter the veryte of the Hebrue and Gi 
 by the dylygenf studye of dyverse excellent learning men, ex- 
 pert In the forsayde tonges. Prynted by Richard Grafton and 
 Edward Whitchurch. Cum prit imprimendum solum, 
 
 1539." 
 
 Grafton was so much a Man of Mark at Court that to him and 
 Whitchurch alone was granted the Royal privilege of printing 
 "the masse-book, the graille, the antiphone'r, the himptuall, the 
 portans, and the prymer, both in Latyn and in Englyshe ><t 
 Sarum use, for tl of Canterbury." In 1545, in virtu 
 
 the said patent, he printed Henry the Eighth's Latin a 
 Primer, which was worked in two <• .lours Mack and red. In 
 the flrsf year of the reign of Edward the sixth (1547 . G 
 was favoured with a special patent whereby he ha 
 printing of all the statute hooks then extant. A later ]
 
 (>> 
 
 . i i- authorised Grafton and Whitchuri 
 ke up and i print compositors, &c, 
 
 lier with paper, ink. presses, A c, at ■ mabli rati and 
 
 prices." In 1549 he printed :i Royal proclamal which was 
 
 afterwards embodied in an let ot Parliament, abolishing and 
 repressing certain religious books and images; and in 1553, on 
 the death of Edward the Sixth, he was employed to prinl the 
 lamation wl I ■ lat Grey was declared to be suc- 
 
 cessor i" the crown. On the acce sion of Marv, however, he 
 d to bi a Courl favourite. He was deprived of his patent 
 Printer ; his " little bill " against l he Crown, amounting 
 to £300 tored; and he was incarcerated during >i\ wei ks 
 
 in the Fleet prison. His overt act of high treason, in printing 
 Hi.- .i a in' Grey proclamation as his act of official duty was then 
 regarded is alleged a- the reason lur the pains and penalties 
 thus inflicted. It i-. however, thought that his Evangelical 
 principles, and especially hi- connection with the printing of 
 tlif English Bible, was at the bottom of hi- persecution. During 
 In- incarceration, ami while mil of business, hi' devoted himself 
 tn literary pursuits, an abridged Historj of England being the 
 fruit hi In- labours. It was not printed till 1562. In tin- interval 
 between 1553 57, one Richard Grafton, believed to be our famous 
 printer, represented London in the House of Commons; and in 
 ■ ■ ' in »as member tin- Coventry. On the accession of Queen 
 Elizabeth, Grafton published a book describing " The Passage of 
 niir most drad Sovereigne Lady Queen Elizabeth through the 
 City "i London to Westminster, the Daye before her Coronation, 
 
 ami". 1558." 
 
 Ki'w \ i : i • Win ii in in n. Esq., associated with Grafton in the 
 Patent as King's Printer, was originally a merchant, his place of 
 domicile being the "Well with two Buckets,"— typifying the 
 source whence thej drew auriferous supplies. According to a 
 statement of Fox, in his •• Acts ami Monuments," Whitchurch 
 was associated with Grafton in political troubles as well as in 
 successful trade, ami. in 1541, being suspected of not having 
 confessed, was rendered i liable tin' a breach of the Six Ar- 
 ticles. In tin' year 1551, a general amnesty was proclaimed 
 throughout the Abbey mi the occasion of the Coronation of 
 Queen Mary, all prisoners at the Tower ami at the Fleet prison, 
 with fifty-two others, including Grafton ami Whitchurch, I" ing 
 excepted. Fur many years tin-.-.' two continued in friendship 
 as wll as in partnership. Whitchurch married the widow of 
 Archbishop Cranmer, ami continued in business till 1554. Graf- 
 ton's and \\ hit eh nrch V names were sometimes printed separately 
 in the same books, particularly those which they printed with the 
 royal privilege " ad imprimendum solum" as the Bible, the New 
 Testament, ami the Primers. After a c 'l'lain number of copies 
 
 with the imprint of Grafton had I n wrought off, the name was 
 
 lifted out el' the forme, ami that of Whitchurch substituted. 
 
 Thou vs I'm i r, a presumed relative of a famous Paris printer 
 of the same Surname, was in business as a law printer, at the 
 sign et i in- Maiden's Head, in St. Paul's Churchyard, in 1538. 
 
 In the year [541 we are introduced tn John Waylakd, 
 citizen ami scrivener of Ijondon, describing himself as "Allowed 
 
 Printer," ti his obtaining from Queen Mary letters-patent tin- 
 
 printing Prayer Books. The "Blue Garland," in Fleet-street, 
 
 wa- a I ■ I mi.' hi- place of occupation ; at another, the •■Sun," 
 
 1 onduit. In L555 he printed an account of the arrival 
 ami landing of Philip of Spain, ami his marriage with Queen 
 Mary at Winchester, together with their triumphal entry into 
 I, union. 
 
 Kichajid .iioi.i:. bred a scholar, ami elected from Eton to 
 
 King's College in 1531, i- described as having been "most 
 curious in his editions ot the Old and New Testaments, bestowing 
 
 not only a g 1 letter, but manj elegant initial letters ami tine 
 
 w l-cuts." lie conti 1 in business about thirty years, and 
 
 WHS MICC lei] by 111- u i|,. .1,,, |||_ 
 
 Robert Crowley, a native of Gloucestershire, wa- educated 
 ai Oxford. In 1542, when he took the degree of Bachelor of 
 
 Art.-, he was a probationary fellow of Magdalen College. When 
 Edward the Sixth began to reign, Crowley lived in Ely-rents, 
 
 Holborn, printing ami vending I ks, ami at the same i 
 
 preaching in the city: but upon the accession of Mary, In- went, 
 as many other English Protestants went, to Frankfort. After 
 Mary's decease lie returne I to London, and had several benefices 
 he i owed upon him among the number, St. Giles's, Cripplegate, 
 of which at the time of his own demise he was \ iear. 
 
 John Cawood, Esq., descendant of an old Yorkshire family. 
 became Queen's Printer to Mary, mi the deposition of Richard 
 
 Grafton. In L555, Philip and Mary then occupying the throne, 
 
 he printed the proclamation whereby the printing, sale, or 
 possession of heretical (that is. Protestant I hooks was declared a 
 penal offence, punishable by immediate death. Another pro- 
 clamation, issued from his pre-, in the same year, was directed 
 against the papers, works, or writings of Martin Luther, John 
 Calvin, Philip Melancthon, Hugh Latimer. Miles Coverdale, 
 
 Timlall, Cranmer, and other Protestant Reformers; and everj 
 
 printing, uttering, selling, reading, or keeping any of the same 
 were warned thai they would incur tlie danger ami penalties 
 contained in the statute, with their Majesties' high indignation 
 and displeasure, ami further answer at their uttermost peril. 
 
 In St. Paul's Churchyard, which appears to have been the 
 chief typographical centre, Michael Lobley operated from 
 1539 to 1560. ■•St. Michael" was his sign. During the reign of 
 
 il ighth Henry he was adjudged guilty of heretical privity, 
 
 or perversion, and required to abjure and to hear faggots byway 
 of penance, lie was Upper Warden of the Stationers' Company 
 in the first year of the Elizabethian reign, when Her Majesty 
 renewed the < '01 ii j hi i iv 's charter. 
 
 John Maylert — or, as lie was severally called, Maylart, 
 \la\ ler, Maler represented as "a Grocer by Company," practised 
 the art at the " White Bear," in Botolph-lane, near Billingsgate. 
 A scholar and zealous Protestant Reformer, he, like Whitchurch, 
 involved himself in difficulties mi account of the Six Articles, in 
 1541, "Being a sacramentary, a rayler against the masse; for 
 calling the sacrament of the aulter the baken God; and for 
 saying Unit the masse was called beyond the sea. lnisse, for that 
 all is aniisse in it." 
 
 Anthony Malert, or Marler, is supposed to have been a 
 relative ot the preceding John Maylert. In the library of the 
 British Museum is a very fine illuminated folio Bible, printed on 
 vellum, and containing the following dedication : — "This book is 
 presented unto your most excellent Highness, by your loving, 
 faithful, and obedient servant ami daily orator, Anthony Marler, 
 of London, haberdasher." Ii hear- date L540. 
 
 John Hertford, after having failed to revive the art at 
 
 St. Albans, where it was dormant between the years I486 and 
 
 1536, removed to London finding his "occupation gone" among 
 the monks, owing to the Reformation— and was in business in 
 Aldersgate-street from 1538 to 1548. 
 
 Thou \s Rai nai.hi:. another of the craft plying his trade in 
 St. Paul's Churchyard, in 1540 printed "The Birth of .Mankind," 
 — the tirst English hook embellished with rolling-press cuts, and
 
 ut' wliirli lie is believed to have been also the author, He eon- 
 tinned in business till 1555. 
 
 Richard Wolfe, Esq., was a i I considerable i minence, 
 
 in great favour with Henry the Eighth, Cromwell, Archbishop 
 Cranmer, &c. The " Brazen Serpent," a device common among 
 foreign printers, was the sign of his office, which was in St. 
 
 Paul's Churchyard. The premises he built from the gr id, on 
 
 the site of an old Chapel which, on the suppression of the 
 monasteries, In- bought from Henry VIII., and where he had 
 several other tenements, subsequently purchasin 
 from the Dean and Chapter of St. Paul's. Stowi ol him, 
 
 that in the year L549 the bones of the dead in the chamel-house 
 of St. Paul's, amounting to more than a thousand cartloads, were 
 at his expense removed to Finsbury-fielda for interment. Hi 
 believed to lie a native of Switzerland. He was the first who 
 had a Royal patent as printer in Latin, Greek, and Hebrew, 
 whereby he was appointed King's Bookseller and Stationer. In 
 virtue of this patent he enjoyed an annuity of £1 8s. 6d . 
 besides all other profits and advantages belonging to bis office, 
 
 for the term of his life; and all I ksellers and printers were 
 
 forbidden to print or sell any books printed at his own charge or 
 in liis name, under pain of forfeiting such bi oks, &c. During 
 the reign of Queen Mary, he desisted from printing, spending 
 his time in the collection of materials for a history which he 
 published. Alter his death, which occurred subsequently to the 
 year 1574, he was succeeded in business by his \\ idow. 
 
 John Day was no mean character among typographers, 
 having practised for forty years (1544 83), excepting in the in- 
 terval of Queen Mary's reign, which time lie devoted to making 
 improvements in the art. He was the first in England who 
 employed the Saxon letter, ami brought Greet to great perfec- 
 tion, as well as Italic and other characters, of which he had 
 a large variety. Among the literary curiosities at Gilbert's book- 
 store, Southampton, is an old Bible known as tl Bug Bible," 
 
 with prologue by Tindall, which Day printed in I.V.I. It derives 
 its name from the peculiar rendering of the fifth verse in the 
 ninety-first Psalm, which reads thus: "So that thou shall not 
 need to be afraid for any hugs by night." This edition is very 
 scarce, and rarely finds its way into the book-market. In 1553 
 he obtained a patent for the sole right of printing a Catechism 
 in English; in 1559, for printing " Cunyngham's Cosmographical 
 Glass;" in 1597, for printing the Psalms in metre. Himself a 
 lover of learning, he promoted it by handsome gifts of books. 
 The Harleian Manuscripts record that he gave several benefactions 
 to King's College in l">71 : and in 1583 he assigned to the Sta- 
 tioners' Company his own copyright in certain books for the 
 benefit of the poor of the Company. In 158 1 he was buried in 
 the parish church of Bradley-Parva, in the County of Suffolk. A 
 tablet erected to hi< memory relati s that 
 
 Two wives he had, partakers ol his pa; ne, 
 
 Each wife twelve bab l< ich ol them one more. 
 
 One of his twenty-live offspring, JOHN hn. was associated 
 with him in business, the two names being conjoined in the 
 
 patent relating to the trical Psalms. Educated at Eton, he 
 
 received his M.A. degree at Cambridge, being a Fellow of Bang's 
 College. He succeeded John Fox in the curacy of Highgate ; 
 wrote a poem commi ndatory of Foxe's " Book of Martyrs," in 
 
 which work he was concerned: also the preface and conclusion 
 
 to the "Testaments of the Twelve Patriarchs," of which he was 
 esteemed the translator, as well as several oilier works. 
 William Seres was also in partnership with the aforesaid 
 
 John Day. In the latter part of his life, he assigned his patent 
 
 rights, with his working plant, to lleury Denham, whereupon 
 
 I >— 
 
 iiipany. by petiti 
 Privy Council, i oy the monopoly conferred 
 
 bj patent, urging thai the printing of special l kg, now re- 
 
 or Queen's i printers, should be open to all. 
 At length the dispufc impromised by the privileged 
 
 printers granting certain allowances to the 5 I 
 
 for tl. iiding the petition and lor the fa 
 
 maintenance of their \ 
 
 Hi Nii'iim \ I' Holborn Conduit, removed in 1551 
 
 to [n there firs! introduced by him. 
 
 Thomas Marshe, near to St. Dunstan's Church, had 
 
 mon,, poly ot printing Latin school-! h-. ol which the 
 
 tioners' Company complained to the Lord Treasurer. 
 
 lil en mm. WaLKDTS and J AMES ROBBRI -ido. had 
 
 a patent for printing Almanacks. Walkins, while Harden of the 
 
 I Sompany, gave up his right in the Almanack tor the 
 
 benefit of the i oor of the said < ' pany. 
 
 ■i..ii\ t harlewood was noted for the many specimei 
 type he used, the charm of variety being appreciated even in 
 
 his da\ . 
 
 No viirs Yi;twi:uit. law printer, was Clerk of the Privj - 
 and French Si cretary to Queen Elizabeth. 
 
 Charles Vetweirt, Esq., son and successor to the 
 
 named, was likewise French Secretary 1 i lerk to the signet 
 
 at the Court oi Elizabeth, and had a thirty-years' paten- 
 printing all bo,,k~ concerning the laws. He sun ived his father 
 but one year, and « a- succeeded by his h idow . w h — monopoly 
 
 met with strong opposition fr thi - -' I impany, a 
 
 part of it^ cued apparently being, "Greed before Gallantry." 
 
 Robert Wax rave, who began practising the art in 1578, 
 
 subsequently, through priming Puritanical works, involved 
 elf in troubles which compelled him to ty in 
 
 flight. In Wales he found refuge, and. bei 
 and moreover befriended by persons of influence, be outlived 
 his trouble-, and was eventually made printer to James the 
 Sixth of Scotland. 
 
 George Bishop, deputy-printer to Elizabeth, became an 
 Alderman of London. Being one of the large-hearted, among 
 other legacies he left £6 per annum to bis Company, £6 per 
 
 annum to Christ's Hospital, and £10 per annum, for ever, 
 
 towards maintaining preachers at St. Paul's I 
 
 John Wolfe was City printer in 1581; had a contest with 
 the Stationers' Com pany in reference to the privilege- grant! 
 certain printers under letters patent. Wolfe claiming the right to 
 print any lawful book, the Royal prerogative notwithstanding: 
 ••and to that end." says Stowe, •■had incensed the popular:' 
 
 London, as in a common cause, somewl n-ly." 
 
 Roger Ward, like-minded with Wolfe, took the bull of 
 monopoly by the horn- and earthed it. Both the Crown and the 
 stationers' Company were by him set at open defiance. All 
 kinds of hook- he printed at his own c\ il w ill and pleasure. The 
 
 and Wardens of the Station r-' Company, ■ 
 
 rested in them, attempted to search bis printing-office, 
 but was resisted by his wife and workmen. Commission! i- were 
 appointed by the Royal Council to arrange with him; but he 
 persisted in bis contumacy, and even withheld fulfilment of two 
 
 bonds into which he hail entered with the Crown. 
 
 William Carter was another daring printer, and put into 
 ty] many publications of a treasonable kind. On the lMth of 
 January, 1584, he was placed in the dock at the Old 1'..
 
 8 
 
 convicted of high treason, and (those being the days ol 
 ropes and short shrifts) he was uexl day liungal Tyburn. 
 
 Hugh Singleton was more fortunate. Hi had printed a 
 
 seditious 1 k, entitled "A Gaping Gulph, to Swallow up England 
 
 by ii French Marriage," for which the writer, John Stubbs, and 
 the publisher, William Page, as well as himself, were called to 
 account. Having bei I, bj a law >1 P ilip and Mary, 
 
 they were sentenced to lose their right hands a summary and 
 efficacious means of making wri i and printing a work of 
 difficult} on the part ot the convicts. The sentence was fulfilled 
 in the case of author and publisher, who were severallj deprived 
 ■ ■ dexter hand at the wrist i>.\ a butcher's knife and a 
 mallet : Singleton, however, through the intercession of friends, 
 obtained remission of the sentence. 
 
 IIi.mi'i Bynni man, an eminent printer, was, in 1580, ad- 
 monished at the bar of the House of Commons for breach of 
 privilege in having print.''! a certain book, in which a member 
 of the House, Mr. Hall, of Grantham, reflected upon and re- 
 proached the Speaker (Sir Robert Bell) and other members. Hall 
 himself \\ : i - c immitted to the Tower for -i\ months, ami. until 
 In- made a "retaliation" in the satisfaction of tin' House, to paj 
 five hundred marks, ami 1'.' excluded from Parliament. 
 
 Thomas Tallis and William Bird, Gent, the last-named 
 belonging in tin' Chapel Royal were granted letters-patent by 
 Elizabeth to print music for twenty-one years. 
 
 So common at this time had become letters-patent, that the 
 subject formed a topic of debate in the House of Commons. 
 
 When th" in pnly.it' making cards was menti id, we are 
 
 told sir Walter Raleigh blushed. A li-t of patents having been 
 read, one member stood up and asked, "Is not bread there?'' 
 "B iad!" says "in-. '"Bread!" says another. "This request 
 seenis strange," says a third. " Not in the least," rejoined 
 another, "for, if not speedily prevented, a patent for bread will 
 be pn cured before the next session of Parliament." 
 
 Christopher Barker and Robert Barker, father and son, 
 were descendants oi Sir Richard Barker, Kiii^-at-Arins, and 
 enjoyed Royal favours in an eminent degree, letters-patent 
 having been granted bj Elizabeth in consideration of the father's 
 improvements in the art of printing. To Robert a special 
 ce was granted for printing till the statutes during his 
 lifetime. For amending or correcting the translation of the 
 Bible he paid the large sum of £3.500, and the right of printing 
 it was reserved to him and hi- heirs. This great family, how- 
 ever, experienced vicissitudes of fortune, this same Rol t Hark it 
 
 having been a prisoner tor ten years in custody of the .Marshal 
 of the King's Bench, ami died tin 
 
 John Norton, Esq., Queen's Printer in 1593, gave £1,000 to 
 
 Our noble An. in its infancy, was encouraged ami fostered by 
 those - i.i n-al institutions of which Westminster 
 
 Vbbej i- the representative. Here Printing had its cradle, hi 
 several cities and towns within the Kingd im where any extensive 
 religious house existed, printing-offices soon arose. Tin- Abbey 
 of St. Uban's, a- we have seen, had its printers among the 
 Be lictine monks in I 180. 
 
 S ■ had Oxford. For a span' of nearly sixty years, however 
 (1527 85), there was an unexplained interregnum, which was 
 terminated b\ the Earl oi Leii iter, Chancellor of the University, 
 ling a plant at his own I I i ersity Print, r in 
 
 1585 was Joseph Barnes. In 1658 Samuel Clark, a Mastei 
 of Art.-, was elected Arehitypographus. 
 
 'I'h.' sister University was in this instance, as it has been upon 
 
 occasions re recently, astern of Oxford. John Sibebch, 
 
 win. claimed to be th.- first Greek printer in England, settled at 
 Cambridge in 1521. But, a- at Oxford, there appear- to have 
 been a suspension of printing tor sixty-two years from 1522 to 
 1..S4. It was then revive* I oj'Thom is Thom vs. M.A., previously 
 ..1 King's College, and who, besides being printer to the Uni- 
 versity, »as author of a Dictionary bearing his name. 
 
 Canterbury had a printing-house in the sixteenth century, hut 
 1 1..- exact date is not recorded. 
 
 \t Fork one was introduced in 1509 by lliou Goes, sup- 
 posed to I.,- ill.- sou of an ingenious Hutch printer, and "ho 
 subsequently removed to Beverley, eventually migrating to 
 
 i im. His first publication at Fork was th.' Pica, or Pic, an 
 
 old Liturgy used in the Cathedral. 
 
 Tavistock received the art in 1525 through to >m \- |j\ ch um>, 
 an inmate of the monastery, where, among other productions, 
 w a- printed the stannary Laws. 
 
 Ipswich had its press in Cardinal Wolsey's time (1538), the 
 premier printer being John Oswen. 
 
 Tin- gentleman, or another of his name, had a special licence 
 tor printing at Worcester about the -aim- period; and in loo." he 
 were appointed printer to the principality oi Wales. 
 
 in. tii w I. 1 1 had a printer in 1554. 
 
 Norwich had an influx of foreigners from th.' how Countries in 
 1565. By -.in.' of these printing wasintroduced ; and Anthony 
 
 deSolmpne, oi f the number, was rewarded with the Freedom 
 
 of the City in acknowledgment of his -hare in the event. 
 
 Moulsey, near Kingston, in Surrey, was early in the sixteenth 
 centurj uneuviably distinguished for the scurrilous pamphlets 
 issuing from its press. Their contents, we are told, related to 
 "ecclesiastical discipline, ami never-ending cavils and disputes 
 ah. nit rites and ceremonies, in a snarling ami ridiculous maimer; 
 
 th.- Stationers' Company, to purchase lands to the value of £'50 an d the public printing-presses being -hut against the Puritans 
 p.-r annum, and part t.. P.- lent to poor young men of the sorae t them purchased a private press." Driven eventually 
 
 from Moitlsev.it found for a while a halting place at Fairsley,in 
 
 Company. He also gave £150 to the parish of si. Faith, under 
 St. Paul's church, to purchase i'7 10s. yearly lor ever, c> be 
 given to the poor. In 1610 he introduced printing into Eton 
 College. 
 
 John Wind] m. a good printer, succeeded John Wolfe as 
 printer to th.' Hon. City of London. He is -aid to have con- 
 tinued in business sixty-six years 1585 to L651. 
 
 T .■ above nam.'- comprise only the most notable : tig the 
 
 pioneers of typography in London. Many ..tier- might be 
 added, but if.' Provinces claim the little space remaining to 
 chronol igical descriptions. 
 
 Northamptonshire. Persecution drove it thence to N rton, and 
 afterwards to Coi entry; from i loventry to Woolston, in Warwick- 
 shire; and from thence to Manchester. 
 
 Priests from the Low Countries, self-exiled by reason <■( per- 
 secution at In. im-. are -aid to have introduced printing into 
 ..ml. Wal ii'.h Ch ipman, having letters patent from James 
 tii. fourth, in 1507 print.'. I his first book m Edinburgh. It was 
 entitled "'I'h.' Porteus of Nobleness." In lot 1 '- 1 tin' the Breviary 
 of the Church of Aberdeen was printed there, and a second part 
 in the year follow ing. 
 
 Having thus recorded the several periods at which printing was introduced inf. the principal towns mid cities 
 
 ..f tic United Kingdom, and narrated some of the chief incidents i nected with the biography of certain patriarchs 
 
 of English printing, our purpose is accomplished. Thai object was to .-oil., t within a narrow compass a fund of 
 
 information hitherto accessible to comparatively lew at ig the members of our craft : ami as there is not a town 
 
 ..I' any importance in Greal Britain or [reland without a Printing Press, it cannol fail to happen that there will 
 be craftsmen to whom such information will he at once new and edifying. Conscious that the task might have 
 been undertaken bj abler hands, for our having attempted its performance the only excuse that need he offered 
 is the apprehension we had felt that the Quarcentenary of English Printing might otherwise have passed unnoticed. 
 Those win. wish f. become more intimately acquainted with England's First Printer, should provide themselves with 
 the -Life and Typography of William Caxton," compiled from original sources by William Blades, ami published 
 by Joseph Lilly, C len, loin. 1801. It is a valuable contribution to the literature of our ennobling art. 
 
 PRISTKD AT . I Ji I :
 
 c
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 Los Angeles 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 U>UW. 
 
 
 IB TO 
 
 4UN11 
 
 
 
 
 0E& 
 
 \^ c 
 
 Form L9-75m-7,'61 (C1437s4)444 
 
 ■